Engine Control System: Section

ENGINE
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM

SECTION EC EC
E
CONTENTS
QR25DE INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL ................ 45 F
Description ...............................................................45
BASIC INSPECTION ................................... 14
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM .... 46 G
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW ........14 Introduction ..............................................................46
Trouble Diagnosis Introduction ............................... 14 Two Trip Detection Logic .........................................46
Emission-related Diagnostic Information .................47
INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT ....................19 Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) ............................60 H
Basic Inspection ...................................................... 19 OBD System Operation Chart .................................63
Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Check .................... 23 CONSULT-III Function (ENGINE) ...........................68
Procedure After Replacing ECM ............................. 23 Generic Scan Tool (GST) Function .........................77 I
VIN Registration ...................................................... 24
Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning ....... 24 COMPONENT DIAGNOSIS ......................... 80
Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning ................. 24
Idle Air Volume Learning ......................................... 24 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION J
VALUE ............................................................... 80
FUNCTION DIAGNOSIS .............................. 27 Description ...............................................................80
Testing Condition .....................................................80 K
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM ............................27 Inspection Procedure ...............................................80
System Diagram ...................................................... 27 Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................80
Engine Control Component Parts Location ............. 28
L
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT .... 88
MULTIPORT FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM .........34 Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................88
System Description ................................................. 34 Ground Inspection ...................................................91
M
ELECTRIC IGNITION SYSTEM .........................37 U0101 CAN COMM CIRCUIT ........................... 92
System Description ................................................. 37 Description ...............................................................92
AIR CONDITIONING CUT CONTROL ...............38 On Board Diagnosis Logic .......................................92 N
Input/Output Signal Chart ........................................ 38 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................92
System Description ................................................. 38 Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................92
AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE U0140 CAN COMM CIRCUIT ........................... 93 O

(ASCD) ...............................................................39 Description ...............................................................93
On Board Diagnosis Logic .......................................93
System Description ................................................. 39
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................93 P
Component Description ........................................... 40
Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................93
CAN COMMUNICATION ....................................41
System Description ................................................. 41
U1001 CAN COMM CIRCUIT ........................... 94
Description ...............................................................94
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM ................42 On Board Diagnosis Logic .......................................94
Description .............................................................. 42 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................94
Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................94
Revision: October 2008 EC-1 2009 Frontier

P0011 IVT CONTROL ........................................ 95 Component Inspection .......................................... 126
On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................... 95
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................. 95 P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR .............................. 127
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 96 Component Description ........................................ 127
Component Inspection ............................................ 97 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 127
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 127
P0031, P0032 A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER ........... 98 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 127
Description .............................................................. 98 Component Inspection .......................................... 130
On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................... 98
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................. 98 P0125 ECT SENSOR ....................................... 131
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 98 Component Description ........................................ 131
Component Inspection ...........................................100 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 131
P0037, P0038 HO2S2 HEATER ...................... 101 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 132
Description .............................................................101 Component Inspection .......................................... 132
On Board Diagnosis Logic .....................................101
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................101 P0127 IAT SENSOR ......................................... 134
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................102 Component Description ........................................ 134
P0075 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE ..... 104 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 135
Component Description .........................................104 Component Inspection .......................................... 135
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................104 P0128 THERMOSTAT FUNCTION .................. 137
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................104 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 137
Component Inspection ...........................................105 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 137
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 137
P0101 MAF SENSOR ...................................... 107 Component Inspection .......................................... 138
Component Description .........................................107
On Board Diagnosis Logic .....................................107 P0130 A/F SENSOR 1 ...................................... 139
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................107 Component Description ........................................ 139
Overall Function Check .........................................108 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 139
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................109 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 139
Component Inspection ...........................................111 Overall Function Check ......................................... 140
P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR .......................... 113
Component Description .........................................113 P0131 A/F SENSOR 1 ...................................... 143
On Board Diagnosis Logic .....................................113 Component Description ........................................ 143
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................113 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 143
Component Inspection ...........................................115 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 144
P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR ............................ 118 P0132 A/F SENSOR 1 ...................................... 146
Component Description .........................................118 Component Description ........................................ 146
On Board Diagnosis Logic .....................................118 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 146
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................118 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 146
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................118 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 147
Component Inspection ...........................................120 P0133 A/F SENSOR 1 ...................................... 149
P0116 ECT SENSOR ....................................... 121 Component Description ........................................ 149
Component Description .........................................121 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 149
On Board Diagnosis Logic .....................................121 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 149
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................121 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 150
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................122 P0137 HO2S2 ................................................... 154
Component Inspection ...........................................122
Component Description ........................................ 154
P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR .......................... 124 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 154
Component Description .........................................124 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 154
On Board Diagnosis Logic .....................................124 Overall Function Check ......................................... 155
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................125 Component Inspection .......................................... 157

P0138 HO2S2 ................................................... 159 Component Inspection ........................................... 199
Component Description ......................................... 159 A
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 159 P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS) ........................... 200
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 160 Component Description ......................................... 200
Overall Function Check ......................................... 160 On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................... 200
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 200 EC
Component Inspection .......................................... 164 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 201
Component Inspection ........................................... 202
P0139 HO2S2 ................................................... 166 C
Component Description ......................................... 166 P0340 CMP SENSOR (PHASE) ..................... 204
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 166 Component Description ......................................... 204
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 166 On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................... 204
D
Overall Function Check ......................................... 167 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 204
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 167 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 205
Component Inspection .......................................... 169 Component Inspection ........................................... 207
E
P0171 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNC- P0420 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION . 208
TION ................................................................. 171 On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................... 208
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 208 F
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 171
Overall Function Check ......................................... 209
P0172 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNC- P0441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM ................. 212 G
System Description ................................................ 212
TION ................................................................. 176
On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................... 212
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 212 H
P0181 FTT SENSOR ........................................ 181 I
P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM ................. 217
Component Description ......................................... 181
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 218 J
Component Inspection .......................................... 183
P0443 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME
P0182, P0183 FTT SENSOR ........................... 184 K
CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE ...................... 224
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 184 Description ............................................................. 224
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 224 L
P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR ............................. 187 M
P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 187 VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE ...... 229
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 187 Description ............................................................. 229
On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................... 229 N
Component Inspection .......................................... 190 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 230
P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304 MIS- Component Inspection ........................................... 231 O
FIRE .................................................................. 191
P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 191 VALVE ............................................................. 232
P
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 192 Component Description ......................................... 232
P0327, P0328 KS ............................................. 197 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 232
Component Description ......................................... 197 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 232
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 197 Component Inspection ........................................... 234
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 197 P0448 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL
VALVE ............................................................. 236
Component Description .........................................236 P0500 VSS ........................................................ 273
On Board Diagnosis Logic .....................................236 Description ............................................................ 273
P0451 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRES-
SURE SENSOR ............................................... 240 P0506 ISC SYSTEM ......................................... 275
Component Description .........................................240 Description ............................................................ 275
P0507 ISC SYSTEM ......................................... 277
P0452 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRES- Description ............................................................ 277
SURE SENSOR ............................................... 243 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 277
On Board Diagnosis Logic .....................................243 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 277
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................243
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................244 P0550 PSP SENSOR ....................................... 279
Component Inspection ...........................................246 Component Description ........................................ 279
P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRES- DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 279
SURE SENSOR ............................................... 247 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 279
P0603 ECM POWER SUPPLY ......................... 282
P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM .................. 252 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 282
P0605 ECM ....................................................... 284
P0607 ECM ....................................................... 286
Description ............................................................ 286
Overall Function Check .........................................260
P0460 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR ........................ 267
P0643 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY .................. 288
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................267
P0461 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR ........................ 269 P0850 PNP SWITCH ........................................ 291
P0462, P0463 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR ........... 271
P1148 CLOSED LOOP CONTROL .................. 295
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................271 P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE ......... 296

Overall Function Check ......................................... 296 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 325
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 297 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 326 A
Main 12 Causes of Overheating ............................ 298 Component Inspection ........................................... 332
P1225 TP SENSOR .......................................... 299 P1574 ASCD VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR ..... 334
Component Description ......................................... 299 Component Description ......................................... 334 EC
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 299 On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................... 334
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 299 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 334
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 299 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 334 C
P1226 TP SENSOR .......................................... 301 P1715 INPUT SPEED SENSOR (TURBINE

Component Description ......................................... 301 REVOLUTION SENSOR) ................................ 336 D
E
P1421 COLD START CONTROL ..................... 303 P1805 BRAKE SWITCH ................................. 337
Description ............................................................ 303 Description ............................................................. 337
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 303 On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................... 337 F
P1550 BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR ........... 305 G
Component Description ......................................... 305 P2100, P2103 THROTTLE CONTROL MO-
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 305 TOR RELAY .................................................... 340
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 305 Component Description ......................................... 340 H
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 305 On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................... 340
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 341 I
P1551, P1552 BATTERY CURRENT SEN-
SOR .................................................................. 309 P2101 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL
Component Description ......................................... 309 FUNCTION ...................................................... 343
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 309 Description ............................................................. 343 J
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 309 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 343
Component Inspection .......................................... 311 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 343 K
P1553 BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR ........... 313
Component Description ......................................... 313 P2118 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR ......... 347
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 313 Component Description ......................................... 347 L
Component Inspection .......................................... 315 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 347 M
Component Description ......................................... 317 P2119 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 317 N
ACTUATOR ..................................................... 349
Overall Function Check ......................................... 317 Component Description ......................................... 349
Component Inspection .......................................... 319 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 349 O
P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH .................. 321
Component Description ......................................... 321 P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR ......................... 351
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 321 P
P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH ....................... 325
On Board Diagnosis Logic .....................................354 Component Inspection .......................................... 395
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................355 REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR ........... 397
P2135 TP SENSOR ......................................... 358
Component Description .........................................358 ECU DIAGNOSIS ...................................... 400
ECM .................................................................. 400
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ..................................................................... 400
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout ........... 402
P2138 APP SENSOR ...................................... 362 ECM Terminal and Reference Value .................... 403
Component Description .........................................362 Wiring Diagram - ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM -. 409
On Board Diagnosis Logic .....................................362 Fail-safe Chart ...................................................... 425
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................362 DTC Inspection Priority Chart ............................... 427
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................363 DTC Index ............................................................. 427
Component Inspection ...........................................365 Emission-related Diagnostic Information .............. 431
P2A00 A/F SENSOR 1 .................................... 366 SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ........................... 445

On Board Diagnosis Logic .....................................366 ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM SYMPTOMS .... 445
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................366 Symptom Matrix Chart .......................................... 445
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................367 NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION ............... 449
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH .................................. 371 Fuel Cut Control (at No Load and High Engine
Component Description .........................................371 Speed) .................................................................. 449
PRECAUTION ........................................... 450
PRECAUTIONS ................................................ 450
ASCD INDICATOR .......................................... 376
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN-
SIONER" ............................................................... 450
ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL ......................... 377 On Board Diagnosis (OBD) System of Engine and
Description .............................................................377 A/T ........................................................................ 450
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................377 Precaution ............................................................. 450
FUEL INJECTOR ............................................. 378 PREPARATION ......................................... 454

PREPARATION ................................................ 454
Component Inspection ...........................................380 Special Service Tool ............................................. 454
Commercial Service Tool ...................................... 454
FUEL PUMP ..................................................... 381
Description .............................................................381 ON-VEHICLE MAINTENANCE ................. 456
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................381 FUEL PRESSURE ............................................ 456
Fuel Pressure Check ............................................ 456
IGNITION SIGNAL ........................................... 385 EVAP LEAK CHECK ........................................ 459
How to Detect Fuel Vapor Leakage ...................... 459
Component Inspection ...........................................388 ON-VEHICLE REPAIR .............................. 461
ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOV- EVAP CANISTER ............................................. 461
ERY (ORVR) .................................................... 390 Component Inspection .......................................... 461
System Description ................................................390 Removal and Installation ....................................... 461
Component Inspection ...........................................392 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
(SDS) ......................................................... 462
POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION ........ 395
Description .............................................................395

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL .............. 498
(SDS) ................................................................ 462 Description ............................................................. 498 A
Fuel Pressure ........................................................ 462
Idle Speed and Ignition Timing .............................. 462 VARIABLE INDUCTION AIR SYSTEM .......... 499
Calculated Load Value .......................................... 462 Description ............................................................. 499
EC
Mass Air Flow Sensor ........................................... 462 Vacuum Hose Drawing .......................................... 501
Intake Air Temperature Sensor ............................. 462 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM .. 502
Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor .................... 462 Introduction ............................................................ 502 C
Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor 1 Heater .................... 463 Two Trip Detection Logic ....................................... 502
Heated Oxygen sensor 2 Heater ........................... 463
Emission-related Diagnostic Information ............... 503
Crankshaft Position Sensor (POS) ........................ 463
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) .......................... 515 D
Camshaft Position Sensor (PHASE) ..................... 463
OBD System Operation Chart ............................... 518
Throttle Control Motor ........................................... 463
CONSULT-III Function (ENGINE) ......................... 523
Fuel Injector .......................................................... 463
Generic Scan Tool (GST) Function ....................... 532
Fuel Pump ............................................................. 463 E
VQ40DE COMPONENT DIAGNOSIS ....................... 534
BASIC INSPECTION ................................. 464 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION
F
VALUE ............................................................. 534
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW ....... 464 Description ............................................................. 534
Trouble Diagnosis Introduction ............................. 464 Testing Condition ................................................... 534
Inspection Procedure ............................................. 534 G
INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT .................. 470
Basic Inspection .................................................... 470
Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Check .................. 474 POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT .. 542 H
Procedure After Replacing ECM ........................... 474 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 542
VIN Registration .................................................... 475 Ground Inspection ................................................. 545
Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning ..... 475
Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning ............... 475 U0101 CAN COMM CIRCUIT ......................... 546 I
Idle Air Volume Learning ....................................... 475 Description ............................................................. 546
FUNCTION DIAGNOSIS ............................ 478 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 546 J
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM .......................... 478
System Diagram .................................................... 478 U1001 CAN COMM CIRCUIT ......................... 547
Engine Control Component Parts Location ........... 479 Description ............................................................. 547 K
MULTIPORT FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM ....... 486
System Description ............................................... 486
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 547 L
ELECTRIC IGNITION SYSTEM ....................... 489
P0011, P0021 IVT CONTROL ......................... 548
System Description ............................................... 489
M
AIR CONDITIONING CUT CONTROL ............. 490 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 548
Input/Output Signal Chart ...................................... 490 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 549
System Description ............................................... 490 Component Inspection ........................................... 550
N
AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE P0031, P0032, P0051, P0052 A/F SENSOR 1
(ASCD) ............................................................. 491 HEATER .......................................................... 551
System Description ............................................... 491 Description ............................................................. 551 O
Component Description ......................................... 492 On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................... 551
CAN COMMUNICATION .................................. 493 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 551
System Description ............................................... 493 Component Inspection ........................................... 553 P
COOLING FAN CONTROL .............................. 494 P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEAT-
Description ............................................................ 494 ER .................................................................... 554
Description ............................................................. 554
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM .............. 495 On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................... 554
Description ............................................................ 495 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 554

P0075, P0081 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 589
VALVE ............................................................. 558 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 590
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................558 P0128 THERMOSTAT FUNCTION .................. 592
Component Inspection ...........................................559 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 592
P0101 MAF SENSOR ...................................... 561 Component Inspection .......................................... 593
On Board Diagnosis Logic .....................................561 P0130, P0150 A/F SENSOR 1 ......................... 594
Overall Function Check .........................................562 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 594
P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR .......................... 567
Component Description .........................................567 P0131, P0151 A/F SENSOR 1 ......................... 598
On Board Diagnosis Logic .....................................567 Component Description ........................................ 598
P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR ............................ 572 P0132, P0152 A/F SENSOR 1 ......................... 602
P0133, P0153 A/F SENSOR 1 ......................... 606
P0116 ECT SENSOR ....................................... 575 Component Description ........................................ 606
Component Inspection ...........................................576 P0137, P0157 HO2S2 ....................................... 611
P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR .......................... 578 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 611
On Board Diagnosis Logic .....................................578 Overall Function Check ......................................... 612
P0138, P0158 HO2S2 ....................................... 617
P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR ............................. 582 Component Description ........................................ 617
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................582 Overall Function Check ......................................... 619
Component Inspection ...........................................585 Component Inspection .......................................... 623
P0125 ECT SENSOR ....................................... 586 P0139, P0159 HO2S2 ....................................... 625
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................587 Overall Function Check ......................................... 626
P0127 IAT SENSOR ........................................ 589
P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM P0420, P0430 THREE WAY CATALYST
FUNCTION ....................................................... 631 FUNCTION ...................................................... 671 A
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 632 Overall Function Check ......................................... 672 EC
P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM
FUNCTION ....................................................... 637 P0441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM ................. 676
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 637 System Description ................................................ 676 C
Overall Function Check ......................................... 677 D
P0181 FTT SENSOR ........................................ 643 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 678
Component Description ......................................... 643 Component Inspection ........................................... 680
P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM ................. 681 E
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 682 F
P0182, P0183 FTT SENSOR ........................... 646 Component Inspection ........................................... 687
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 646 P0443 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME
G
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 646 CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE ...................... 688
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 646 Description ............................................................. 688
Component Inspection .......................................... 648 On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................... 688
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 689 H
P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR ............................. 649 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 689
Component Description ......................................... 649 Component Inspection ........................................... 692
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 649 I
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 649 P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 649 VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE ...... 693
Component Inspection .......................................... 652 Description ............................................................. 693
J
P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304, P0305, DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 694
P0306, P0307, P0308 MISFIRE ....................... 653 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 694
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 653 Component Inspection ........................................... 695 K
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 654 P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL
VALVE ............................................................. 696 L
P0327, P0328, P0332, P0333 KS .................... 660 Component Description ......................................... 696
Component Description ......................................... 660 On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................... 696
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 660 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 696
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 660 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 696 M
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 660 Component Inspection ........................................... 698
P0448 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL N
P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS) ............................ 663 VALVE ............................................................. 700
On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................... 700 O
P
P0340, P0345 CMP SENSOR (PHASE) .......... 667 P0451 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRES-
SURE SENSOR ............................................... 705

P0452 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRES- Description ............................................................ 742
SURE SENSOR ............................................... 708 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 742
P0550 PSP SENSOR ....................................... 744
P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRES- DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 744
SURE SENSOR ............................................... 712 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 744
P0603 ECM POWER SUPPLY ......................... 747
P0605 ECM ....................................................... 749
P0607 ECM ....................................................... 751
Description ............................................................ 751
P0643 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY .................. 752
P0850 PNP SWITCH ........................................ 755
P0462, P0463 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR ........... 736
P1148, P1168 CLOSED LOOP CONTROL ..... 759
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................736 P1211 TCS CONTROL UNIT ........................... 760
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................736 Description ............................................................ 760
P0500 VSS ....................................................... 738
Description .............................................................738
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................738 P1212 TCS COMMUNICATION LINE .............. 761
Overall Function Check .........................................739 Description ............................................................ 761
P0506 ISC SYSTEM ........................................ 740
Description .............................................................740
On Board Diagnosis Logic .....................................740 P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE ......... 762
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................740 Overall Function Check ......................................... 762
P0507 ISC SYSTEM ........................................ 742
Main 12 Causes of Overheating ............................ 764 Component Inspection ........................................... 799
A
P1225 TP SENSOR .......................................... 766 P1574 ASCD VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR ..... 801
Component Description ......................................... 766 Component Description ......................................... 801
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 766 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 801 EC
P1226 TP SENSOR .......................................... 768 P1715 INPUT SPEED SENSOR (TURBINE C

Component Description ......................................... 768 REVOLUTION SENSOR) ................................ 803
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 768 On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................... 803 D
P1421 COLD START CONTROL ..................... 770 P1800 VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE 1. 804
Description ............................................................ 770 Component Description ......................................... 804 E
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 770 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 804 F
Component Description ......................................... 772 P1805 BRAKE SWITCH ................................. 807
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 772 Description ............................................................. 807 G
Component Inspection .......................................... 774 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 807 H
P1551, P1552 BATTERY CURRENT SEN-
SOR .................................................................. 776 P2100, P2103 THROTTLE CONTROL MO-
Component Description ......................................... 776 TOR RELAY .................................................... 810 I
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 776 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 810 J
P1553 BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR ........... 780 P2101 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL
K
Component Description ......................................... 780 FUNCTION ...................................................... 813
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 780 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 813 L
P1554 BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR ........... 784 M
Component Description ......................................... 784 P2118 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR ......... 817
Overall Function Check ......................................... 784 On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................... 817
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 785 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 817 N
P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH .................. 788 O
Component Description ......................................... 788 P2119 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 788 ACTUATOR ..................................................... 819
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 788 Component Description ......................................... 819
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 788 P
P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH ....................... 792
ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOV-
P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR .......................... 824 ERY (ORVR) ..................................................... 867
Component Description .........................................824 System Description ............................................... 867
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................824 Component Inspection .......................................... 870
Component Inspection ...........................................827 POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION ......... 872
Description ............................................................ 872
P2135 TP SENSOR ......................................... 828 Component Inspection .......................................... 872
On Board Diagnosis Logic .....................................828 REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR ........... 874
VIAS .................................................................. 877
P2138 APP SENSOR ...................................... 832 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 877
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................832 ECU DIAGNOSIS ...................................... 881
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................833 ECM .................................................................. 881
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor
P2A00, P2A03 A/F SENSOR 1 ....................... 836 Mode ..................................................................... 881
Component Description .........................................836 ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout ........... 884
On Board Diagnosis Logic .....................................836 ECM Terminal and Reference Value .................... 884
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................836 Wiring Diagram - ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM -. 893
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................837 Fail-Safe Chart ...................................................... 912
DTC Inspection Priority Chart ............................... 914
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH .................................. 841 DTC Index ............................................................. 915
Component Description .........................................841 Emission-related Diagnostic Information .............. 918
Component Inspection ...........................................847 SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ........................... 932
ASCD INDICATOR .......................................... 849 ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM SYMPTOMS .... 932
Component Description .........................................849 Symptom Matrix Chart .......................................... 932
NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION ............... 936
COOLING FAN ................................................ 850 Fuel Cut Control (at No Load and High Engine
Description .............................................................850 Speed) .................................................................. 936
PRECAUTION ........................................... 937
ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL ......................... 852 PRECAUTIONS ................................................ 937

Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
Description .............................................................852
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN-
SIONER" ............................................................... 937
FUEL INJECTOR ............................................. 854 Precaution for Procedure without Cowl Top Cover. 937
Component Description .........................................854 On Board Diagnosis (OBD) System of Engine and
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................854 A/T ........................................................................ 937
Component Inspection ...........................................857 Precaution ............................................................. 938
FUEL PUMP ..................................................... 858 PREPARATION ......................................... 941

Description .............................................................858
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................858 PREPARATION ................................................ 941
Component Inspection ...........................................861 Special Service Tool ............................................. 941
Commercial Service Tool ...................................... 942
IGNITION SIGNAL ........................................... 862
Component Description .........................................862 ON-VEHICLE MAINTENANCE ................. 943
FUEL PRESSURE ............................................ 943

Fuel Pressure Check ............................................. 943 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
(SDS) ............................................................... 947 A
EVAP LEAK CHECK ........................................ 945 Fuel Pressure ........................................................ 947
How to Detect Fuel Vapor Leakage ...................... 945
Idle Speed and Ignition Timing .............................. 947
ON-VEHICLE REPAIR ............................... 946 Calculated Load Value .......................................... 947 EC
Mass Air Flow Sensor ............................................ 947
EVAP CANISTER ............................................. 946 Intake Air Temperature Sensor ............................. 947
Component Inspection .......................................... 946 Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor .................... 947
C
Removal and Installation ....................................... 946 Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor 1 Heater ..................... 947
Heated Oxygen sensor 2 Heater ........................... 948
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS Crankshaft Position Sensor (POS) ........................ 948
(SDS) .......................................................... 947 Camshaft Position Sensor (PHASE) ..................... 948 D
Throttle Control Motor ............................................ 948
Fuel Injector ........................................................... 948
Fuel Pump ............................................................. 948 E

DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION > [QR25DE]
BASIC INSPECTION
Trouble Diagnosis Introduction INFOID:0000000004053265
INTRODUCTION
The engine has an ECM to control major systems such as fuel con-
trol, ignition control, idle air control system, etc. The ECM accepts
input signals from sensors and instantly drives actuators. It is essen-
tial that both input and output signals are proper and stable. At the
same time, it is important that there are no malfunctions such as vac-
uum leaks, fouled spark plugs, or other malfunctions with the engine.
MEF036D
It is much more difficult to diagnose an incident that occurs intermit-

tently rather than continuously. Most intermittent incidents are
caused by poor electric connections or improper wiring. In this case,
careful checking of suspected circuits may help prevent the replace-
ment of good parts.
SEF233G
A visual check only may not find the cause of the incidents. A road
test with CONSULT-III (or GST) or a circuit tester connected should
be performed. Follow the WORK FLOW on "WORK FLOW".
Before undertaking actual checks, take a few minutes to talk with a
customer who approaches with a driveability complaint. The cus-
tomer can supply good information about such incidents, especially
intermittent ones. Find out what symptoms are present and under
what conditions they occur. A DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET like the
example on "Worksheet Sample" should be used.
Start your diagnosis by looking for conventional malfunctions first.
This will help troubleshoot driveability malfunctions on an electroni-
SEF234G
cally controlled engine vehicle.
WORK FLOW
Overall Sequence

EC
JMBIA1416GB
P
Detailed Flow
1.GET INFORMATION FOR SYMPTOM
Get the detailed information from the customer about the symptom (the condition and the environment when
the incident/malfunction occurred) using the "DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET".
>> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK DTC*1
1. Check DTC*1.
2. Perform the following procedure if DTC*1 is displayed.
- Record DTC*1 and freeze frame data*2. (Print them out with CONSULT-III or GST.)
- Erase DTC*1. (Refer to EC-427, "DTC Index".)
- Study the relationship between the cause detected by DTC*1 and the symptom described by the cus-
tomer. (Symptom Matrix Chart is useful. Refer to EC-445, "Symptom Matrix Chart".)
3. Check related service bulletins for information.
Are any symptoms described and any DTCs detected?
Symptom is described, DTC*1 is displayed>>GO TO 3.
Symptom is described, DTC*1 is not displayed>>GO TO 4.
Symptom is not described, DTC*1 is displayed>>GO TO 5.
3.CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM
Try to confirm the symptom described by the customer (except MIL ON).
Diagnosis Work Sheet is useful to verify the incident.
Connect CONSULT-III to the vehicle in “DATA MONITOR (AUTO TRIG)” mode and check real time diagnosis
results.
Verify relation between the symptom and the condition when the symptom is detected.
>> GO TO 5.
Try to confirm the symptom described by the customer.
DIAGNOSIS WORK SHEET is useful to verify the incident.
Connect CONSULT-III to the vehicle in “DATA MONITOR (AUTO TRIG)” mode and check real time diagnosis
results.
>> GO TO 6.
5.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
Perform DTC Confirmation Procedure for the displayed DTC*1, and then make sure that DTC*1 is detected
again.
At this time, always connect CONSULT-III to the vehicle, and check diagnostic results in real time on “DATA
MONITOR (AUTO TRIG)”.
If two or more DTCs*1 are detected, refer to EC-427, "DTC Inspection Priority Chart" and determine trouble
diagnosis order.
NOTE:
• Freeze frame data*2 is useful if the DTC*1 is not detected.
• Perform Overall Function Check if DTC Confirmation Procedure is not included on Service Manual. This
simplified check procedure is an effective alternative though DTC*1 cannot be detected during this check.
If the result of Overall Function Check is NG, it is the same as the detection of DTC*1 by DTC Confirmation
Procedure.
Is DTC*1 detected?
Yes >> GO TO 10.
No >> Check according toGI-49, "Intermittent Incident" .
6.PERFORM BASIC INSPECTION
Perform EC-19, "Basic Inspection".
With CONSULT-III>>GO TO 7.
Without CONSULT-III>>GO TO 9.

7.PERFORM DATA MONITOR (SPEC) MODE A

With CONSULT-III
Make sure that “MAS A/F SE-B1”, “B/FUEL SCHDL”, and “A/F ALPHA-B1” are within the SP value using
CONSULT-III “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode. Refer to EC-80. EC
Are they within the SP value?
Yes >> GO TO 9.
No >> GO TO 8. C
8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART BY TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE
Detect malfunctioning part according to EC-80, "Diagnosis Procedure".
D
Is a malfunctioning part detected?
Yes >> GO TO 11.
No >> GO TO 9.
E
9.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING SYSTEM BY SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART
Detect malfunctioning system according to EC-445, "Symptom Matrix Chart" based on the confirmed symptom
in step 4, and determine the trouble diagnosis order based on possible causes and symptoms. F
>> GO TO 10.
10.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART BY DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE G
Inspect according to Diagnostic Procedure of the system.

NOTE:
The Diagnostic Procedure in EC section described based on open circuit inspection. A short circuit inspection H
is also required for the circuit check in the Diagnostic Procedure. For details, refer to Circuit Inspection in GI-
46, "How to Check Terminal".
Is a malfunctioning part detected? I
Yes >> GO TO 11.
No >> Monitor input data from related sensors or check voltage of related ECM terminals using CON-
SULT-III. Refer to EC-400, "CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode" , EC-403, J
"ECM Terminal and Reference Value".
11.REPAIR OR REPLACE THE MALFUNCTIONING PART
K
1. Repair or replace the malfunctioning part.
2. Reconnect parts or connectors disconnected during Diagnostic Procedure again after repair and replace-
ment.
3. Check DTC. If DTC is displayed, erase it, refer to EC-427, "DTC Index". L
>> GO TO 12.
M
12.FINAL CHECK
When DTC was detected in step 2, perform DTC Confirmation Procedure or Overall Function Check again,
and then make sure that the malfunction have been completely repaired. N
When symptom was described from the customer, refer to confirmed symptom in step 3 or 4, and make sure
that the symptom is not detected.
OK or NG
O
NG (DTC*1 is detected)>>GO TO 10.
NG (Symptom remains)>>GO TO 6.
OK >> 1. Before returning the vehicle to the customer, make sure to always erase unnecessary DTC*1
P
in ECM and TCM (Transmission Control Module). (Refer to EC-427, "DTC Index" .)
2. If the completion of SRT is needed, drive vehicle under the specific driving pattern. Refer to
EC-427, "DTC Index".
3. INSPECTION END
*1: Include 1st trip DTC.
*2: Include 1st trip freeze frame data.
DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET

Description
There are many operating conditions that lead to the malfunction of
engine components. A good grasp of such conditions can make trou-
bleshooting faster and more accurate.
In general, each customer feels differently about an incident. It is
important to fully understand the symptoms or conditions for a cus-
tomer complaint.
Utilize a diagnostic worksheet like the one on the next page in order
to organize all the information for troubleshooting.
Some conditions may cause the MIL to come on steady or blink, and
DTC to be detected. Examples:
• Vehicle ran out of fuel, which caused the engine to misfire.
SEF907L
• Fuel filler cap was left off or incorrectly screwed on, allowing fuel to
evaporate into the atmosphere.
Worksheet Sample
MTBL0017

INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT
A
Basic Inspection INFOID:0000000004053266
1.INSPECTION START EC
1. Check service records for any recent repairs that may indicate a related malfunction, or a current need for
scheduled maintenance.
2. Open engine hood and check the following: C
- Harness connectors for improper connections
- Wiring harness for improper connections, pinches and cut
- Vacuum hoses for splits, kinks and improper connections
D
- Hoses and ducts for leakage
- Air cleaner clogging
- Gasket
3. Check that electrical or mechanical loads are not applied. E
- Headlamp switch is OFF.
- Air conditioner switch is OFF.
- Steering wheel is in the straight-ahead position, etc. F
SEF983U
4. Start engine and warm it up until engine coolant temperature
indicator points to the middle of gauge.
Ensure engine stays below 1,000 rpm.
G
I
SEF976U
5. Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no J

load.
6. Make sure that no DTC is displayed with CONSULT-III or GST.
OK or NG K
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 2.
L
SEF977U M
2.REPAIR OR REPLACE
Repair or replace components as necessary according to corresponding Diagnostic Procedure. N
>> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED O
With CONSULT-III
1. Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no load.
P

2. Rev engine (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) two or three times under no
load, then run engine at idle speed for about 1 minute.
PBIA8513J
3. Read idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III. Refer to EC-23, "Idle Speed and Ignition
Timing Check".
M/T: 625 ± 50 rpm (in Neutral position)

A/T: 700 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position)
Without CONSULT-III
2. Rev engine (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) two or three times under no load, then run engine at idle speed for about
1 minute.
3. Check idle speed. Refer to EC-23, "Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Check".

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 4.
4.PERFORM ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION LEARNING
1. Stop engine.
2. Perform EC-24, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning".
>> GO TO 5.
5.PERFORM THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING
Perform EC-24, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning".
>> GO TO 6.
6.PERFORM IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING
Refer to EC-24, "Idle Air Volume Learning".
Is Idle Air Volume Learning carried out successfully?
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 7.
No >> 1. Follow the instruction of Idle Air Volume Learning.
2. GO TO 4.
7.CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED AGAIN
With CONSULT-III
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Timing Check".

M/T: 625 ± 50 rpm (in Neutral position) A

Without CONSULT-III
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. EC
M/T: 625 ± 50 rpm (in Neutral position) C

OK or NG
D
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 8.
8.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART E
Check the following.
• Check camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and circuit. Refer to EC-204, "Component Description".
• Check crankshaft position sensor (POS) and circuit. Refer to EC-200, "Component Description". F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> 1. Repair or replace. G
2. GO TO 4.
9.CHECK ECM FUNCTION
H
1. Substitute with a non-malfunctioning ECM to check ECM function. (ECM may be the cause of the incident,
although this is rare.)
2. Perform initialization of NVIS (NATS) system and registration of all NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to
EC-23, "Procedure After Replacing ECM". I
>> GO TO 4.
J
10.CHECK IGNITION TIMING
1. Run engine at idle.
2. Check ignition timing with a timing light. Refer to EC-23, "Idle K
Speed and Ignition Timing Check".
M/T: 15 ± 5° BTDC (in Neutral position)

L
A/T: 15 ± 5° BTDC (in P or N position)
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 19. M
NG >> GO TO 11.
BBIA0633E
N
1. Stop engine.
2. Perform EC-24, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". O
>> GO TO 12.
P
>> GO TO 13.
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 14.
2. GO TO 4.
14.CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED AGAIN
With CONSULT-III
Timing Check".

Without CONSULT-III

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 15.
NG >> GO TO 17.
15.CHECK IGNITION TIMING AGAIN
2. Check ignition timing with a timing light. Refer to EC-23, "Idle
Speed and Ignition Timing Check".

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 19.
NG >> GO TO 16.
BBIA0633E
16.CHECK TIMING CHAIN INSTALLATION

Check timing chain installation. Refer to EM-44, "Removal and Installation".
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 17.
NG >> 1. Repair the timing chain installation.
2. GO TO 4.
17.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
• Check camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and circuit. Refer to EC-204, "Component Description".
• Check crankshaft position sensor (POS) and circuit. Refer to EC-200, "Component Description".
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 18.
NG >> 1. Repair or replace.
2. GO TO 4.
1. Substitute another known-good ECM to check ECM function. (ECM may be the cause of the incident,
although this is rare)
EC-23, "Procedure After Replacing ECM". A
>> GO TO 4.
19.INSPECTION END EC
Did you replace ECM, referring this Basic Inspection procedure?

Yes or No C
Yes >> 1. Perform EC-24, "VIN Registration".
2. INSPECTION END
No >> INSPECTION END D
Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Check INFOID:0000000004053267
IDLE SPEED E
With CONSULT-III
Check idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III.
F
With GST
Check idle speed in Service $01 with GST.
IGNITION TIMING G
Any of following two methods may be used.
1. Attach timing light to loop wire as shown.
H
BBIA0644E
K
2. Check ignition timing.
N
BBIA0633E
Procedure After Replacing ECM INFOID:0000000004053268
O
When replacing ECM, the following procedure must be performed.
SEC-6, "ECM RE-COMMUNICATING FUNCTION : Special Repair Requirement". P
2. Perform EC-24, "VIN Registration".
4. Perform EC-24, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning".
5. Perform EC-24, "Idle Air Volume Learning".

VIN Registration INFOID:0000000004053269
DESCRIPTION
VIN Registration is an operation to registering VIN in ECM. It must be performed each time ECM is replaced.
NOTE:
Accurate VIN which is registered in ECM may be required for Inspection & Maintenance (I/M).
OPERATION PROCEDURE
With CONSULT-III
1. Check the VIN of the vehicle and note it. Refer toEC-24, "VIN Registration" .
2. Turn ignition switch ON and engine stopped.
3. Select “VIN REGISTRATION” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode.
4. Follow the instruction of CONSULT-III display.
Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning INFOID:0000000004053270
DESCRIPTION
Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning is an operation to learn the fully released position of the accel-
erator pedal by monitoring the accelerator pedal position sensor output signal. It must be performed each time
the harness connector of the accelerator pedal position sensor or ECM is disconnected.
OPERATION PROCEDURE
1. Make sure that accelerator pedal is fully released.
2. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2 seconds.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning INFOID:0000000004053271
DESCRIPTION
Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning is an operation to learn the fully closed position of the throttle valve by
monitoring the throttle position sensor output signal. It must be performed each time harness connector of
electric throttle control actuator or ECM is disconnected.
OPERATION PROCEDURE
1. Make sure that accelerator pedal is fully released.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
Make sure that throttle valve moves during above 10 seconds by confirming the operating sound.
Idle Air Volume Learning INFOID:0000000004053272
DESCRIPTION
Idle Air Volume Learning is an operation to learn the idle air volume that keeps each engine within the specific
range. It must be performed under of the following conditions:
• Each time electric throttle control actuator or ECM is replaced.
• Idle speed or ignition timing is out of specification.
PREPARATION
Before performing Idle Air Volume Learning, make sure that all of the following conditions are satisfied.
Learning will be cancelled if any of the following conditions are missed for even a moment.
• Battery voltage: More than 12.9V (At idle)
• Engine coolant temperature: 70 - 95°C (158 - 212°F)
• Selector lever position: P or N (A/T), Neutral (M/T)
• Electric load switch: OFF
(Air conditioner, headlamp)

On vehicles equipped with daytime light systems, if the parking brake is applied before the engine is
started the headlamp will not be illuminated. A
• Steering wheel: Neutral (Straight-ahead position)
• Vehicle speed: Stopped
• Transmission: Warmed-up
EC
- A/T models
• With CONSULT-III: Drive vehicle until “ATF TEMP SE 1” in “DATA MONITOR” mode of “A/T” system indi-
cates less than 0.9V.
• Without CONSULT-III: Drive vehicle for 10 minutes. C
- M/T models: Drive vehicle for 10 minutes.
OPERATION PROCEDURE
D
With CONSULT-III
2. Perform EC-24, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". E
4. Check that all items listed under the topic PREPARATION (previously mentioned) are in good order.
5. Select “IDLE AIR VOL LEARN” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode. F
6. Touch “START” and wait 20 seconds.
7. Make sure that “CMPLT” is displayed on CONSULT-III screen. If “CMPLT” is not displayed, Idle Air Vol-
ume Learning will not be carried out successfully. In this case, find the cause of the incident by referring to G
the DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE below.
8. Rev up the engine two or three times and make sure that idle speed and ignition timing are within the
specifications. Refer to EC-23, "Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Check". H
ITEM SPECIFICATION
I
Idle speed M/T: 625 ± 50 rpm (in Neutral position)
Ignition timing M/T: 15 ± 5° BTDC (in Neutral position)
A/T: 15 ± 5° BTDC (in P or N position) J
Without CONSULT-III
NOTE: K
• It is better to count the time accurately with a clock.
• It is impossible to switch the diagnostic mode when an accelerator pedal position sensor circuit has
a malfunction. L
3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. M
N
6. Confirm that accelerator pedal is fully released, turn ignition switch ON and wait 3 seconds.
7. Repeat the following procedure quickly 5 times within 5 seconds.
a. Fully depress the accelerator pedal.
O
b. Fully release the accelerator pedal.
8. Wait 7 seconds, fully depress the accelerator pedal for approx. 20 seconds until the MIL stops blinking
and turns ON.
P
9. Fully release the accelerator pedal within 3 seconds after the MIL turns ON.
10. Start engine and let it idle.

11. Wait 20 seconds.
SEC897C
12. Rev up the engine two or three times and make sure that idle speed and ignition timing are within the
specifications. Refer to EC-23, "Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Check".
ITEM SPECIFICATION
13. If idle speed and ignition timing are not within the specification, Idle Air Volume Learning will not be carried
out successfully. In this case, find the cause of the incident by referring to the DIAGNOSTIC PROCE-
DURE below.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
If idle air volume learning cannot be performed successfully, proceed as follows:
1. Check that throttle valve is fully closed.
2. Check PCV valve operation.
3. Check that downstream of throttle valve is free from air leakage.
4. When the above three items check out OK, engine component parts and their installation condi-
tion are questionable. Check and eliminate the cause of the incident.
It is useful to perform EC-80.
5. If any of the following conditions occur after the engine has started, eliminate the cause of the
incident and perform Idle Air Volume Learning all over again:
• Engine stalls.
• Erroneous idle.

< FUNCTION DIAGNOSIS > [QR25DE]
FUNCTION DIAGNOSIS A
System Diagram INFOID:0000000004053273
EC
JMBIA1943GB

Engine Control Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000004053274
BBIA0608E

EC
BBIA0609E

BBIA0638E
BBIA0610E

EC
BBIA0611E

ALBIA0515ZZ
EVAP canister vent control valve EVAP control system pressure

1. 2. 3. Drain filter
(view with bed removed) sensor
Intake manifold collector
4. EVAP canister 5. 6. Power steering pressure sensor
(view with air cleaner case removed)
ASCD brake switch (view with lower
7. 8. Stop lamp switch 9. Brake pedal
instrument panel LH removed)
Electric throttle control actuator
10. 11. Throttle valve 12. ASCD steering switch
(view with intake air duct removed)
13. CANCEL switch 14. ON OFF (main) switch 15. SET/COAST switch
16. ACCEL/RES switch 17. ASCD clutch switch 18. Clutch pedal
Front

EC
BBIA0640E

MULTIPORT FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM
System Description INFOID:0000000004053275
INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART
Sensor Input Signal to ECM ECM function Actuator

Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Engine speed*3
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Piston position
Mass air flow sensor Amount of intake air
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature
Throttle position sensor Throttle position
Accelerator pedal position sensor Accelerator pedal position
Park/neutral position (PNP) switch Gear position
Fuel injection & mixture
Fuel injector
Knock sensor Engine knocking condition ratio control
Power steering pressure sensor Power steering operation
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 Density of oxygen in exhaust gas
Heated oxygen sensor 2*1 Density of oxygen in exhaust gas
Combination meter Vehicle speed*2

Air conditioner switch Air conditioner operation*2
Battery Battery voltage*3
*1: This sensor is not used to control the engine system under normal conditions.
*2: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line.
*3: ECM determines the start signal status by the signal of engine speed and battery voltage.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The amount of fuel injected from the fuel injector is determined by the ECM. The ECM controls the length of
time the valve remains open (injection pulse duration). The amount of fuel injected is a program value in the
ECM memory. The program value is preset by engine operating conditions. These conditions are determined
by input signals (for engine speed and intake air) from both the crankshaft position sensor and the mass air
flow sensor.
VARIOUS FUEL INJECTION INCREASE/DECREASE COMPENSATION
In addition, the amount of fuel injected is compensated to improve engine performance under various operat-
ing conditions as listed below.
<Fuel increase>
• During warm-up
• When starting the engine
• During acceleration
• Hot-engine operation
• When selector lever is changed from N to D (A/T models)
• High-load, high-speed operation
<Fuel decrease>
• During deceleration
• During high engine speed operation

MIXTURE RATIO FEEDBACK CONTROL (CLOSED LOOP CONTROL)
A
EC
PBIB3020E
The mixture ratio feedback system provides the best air-fuel mixture ratio for driveability and emission control. D
The three way catalyst (manifold) can better reduce CO, HC and NOx emissions. This system uses air fuel
ratio (A/F) sensor 1 in the exhaust manifold to monitor whether the engine operation is rich or lean. The ECM
adjusts the injection pulse width according to the sensor voltage signal. For more information about air fuel
ratio (A/F) sensor 1, refer to EC-139, "Component Description". This maintains the mixture ratio within the E
range of stoichiometric (ideal air-fuel mixture).
This stage is referred to as the closed loop control condition.
Heated oxygen sensor 2 is located downstream of the three way catalyst (manifold). Even if the switching F
characteristics of air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 shift, the air-fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric by the signal
from heated oxygen sensor 2.
Open Loop Control G
The open loop system condition refers to when the ECM detects any of the following conditions. Feedback
control stops in order to maintain stabilized fuel combustion.
• Deceleration and acceleration H
• Malfunction of air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 or its circuit
• Insufficient activation of air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 at low engine coolant temperature
• High engine coolant temperature I
• During warm-up
• After shifting from N to D (A/T models)
• When starting the engine J
MIXTURE RATIO SELF-LEARNING CONTROL
The mixture ratio feedback control system monitors the mixture ratio signal transmitted from air fuel ratio (A/F)
sensor 1. This feedback signal is then sent to the ECM. The ECM controls the basic mixture ratio as close to K
the theoretical mixture ratio as possible. However, the basic mixture ratio is not necessarily controlled as orig-
inally designed. Both manufacturing differences (i.e., mass air flow sensor hot wire) and characteristic
changes during operation (i.e., fuel injector clogging) directly affect mixture ratio.
L
Accordingly, the difference between the basic and theoretical mixture ratios is monitored in this system. This is
then computed in terms of “injection pulse duration” to automatically compensate for the difference between
the two ratios.
“Fuel trim” refers to the feedback compensation value compared against the basic injection duration. Fuel trim M
includes short-term fuel trim and long-term fuel trim.
“Short-term fuel trim” is the short-term fuel compensation used to maintain the mixture ratio at its theoretical
value. The signal from air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 indicates whether the mixture ratio is RICH or LEAN com- N
pared to the theoretical value. The signal then triggers a reduction in fuel volume if the mixture ratio is rich, and
an increase in fuel volume if it is lean.
“Long-term fuel trim” is overall fuel compensation carried out over time to compensate for continual deviation
of the short-term fuel trim from the central value. Continual deviation will occur due to individual engine differ- O
ences, wear over time and changes in the usage environment.

FUEL INJECTION TIMING
SEF337W
Two types of systems are used.

Sequential Multiport Fuel Injection System
Fuel is injected into each cylinder during each engine cycle according to the firing order. This system is used
when the engine is running.
Simultaneous Multiport Fuel Injection System
Fuel is injected simultaneously into all four cylinders twice each engine cycle. In other words, pulse signals of
the same width are simultaneously transmitted from the ECM.
The four fuel injectors will then receive the signals two times for each engine cycle.
This system is used when the engine is being started and/or if the fail-safe system (CPU) is operating.
FUEL SHUT-OFF
Fuel to each cylinder is cut off during deceleration, operation of the engine at excessively high speeds or oper-
ation of the vehicle at excessively high speeds.

ELECTRIC IGNITION SYSTEM
A
INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART EC

Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Engine speed*2 C
D
Throttle position sensor Throttle position Ignition timing
Power transistor
Accelerator pedal position sensor Accelerator pedal position control E
Knock sensor Engine knocking
F
G
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION H
Ignition order: 1 - 3 - 4 - 2
The ignition timing is controlled by the ECM to maintain the best air-fuel ratio for every running condition of the
engine. The ignition timing data is stored in the ECM.
The ECM receives information such as the injection pulse width and camshaft position sensor (PHASE) sig- I
nal. Computing this information, ignition signals are transmitted to the power transistor.
During the following conditions, the ignition timing is revised by the ECM according to the other data stored in
the ECM. J
• At starting
• During warm-up
• At idle
K
• At low battery voltage
The knock sensor retard system is designed only for emergencies. The basic ignition timing is programmed
within the anti-knocking zone, if recommended fuel is used under dry conditions. The retard system does not L
operate under normal driving conditions. If engine knocking occurs, the knock sensor monitors the condition.
The signal is transmitted to the ECM. The ECM retards the ignition timing to eliminate the knocking condition.
M

AIR CONDITIONING CUT CONTROL
Input/Output Signal Chart INFOID:0000000004053277

Air conditioner switch 1
Air conditioner ON signal*
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Engine speed*2
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature Air conditioner

Air conditioner relay
cut control
Refrigerant pressure sensor Refrigerant pressure
This system improves engine operation when the air conditioner is used.
Under the following conditions, the air conditioner is turned OFF.
• When the accelerator pedal is fully depressed.
• When cranking the engine.
• At high engine speeds.
• When the engine coolant temperature becomes excessively high.
• When operating power steering during low engine speed or low vehicle speed.
• When engine speed is excessively low.
• When refrigerant pressure is excessively low or high.

AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)
A
Sensor Input signal to ECM ECM function Actuator

ASCD brake switch Brake pedal operation C
Stop lamp switch Brake pedal operation
ASCD clutch switch (M/T models) Clutch pedal operation
Electric throttle control D
ASCD steering switch ASCD steering switch operation ASCD vehicle speed control
actuator
Combination meter Vehicle speed* E
TCM (A/T models) Powertrain revolution*
*: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line.
F
BASIC ASCD SYSTEM
Refer to Owner's Manual for ASCD operating instructions.
Automatic Speed Control Device (ASCD) allows a driver to keep vehicle at predetermined constant speed
G
without depressing accelerator pedal. Driver can set vehicle speed in advance between approximately 35 km/
h (22 MPH) and 144 km/h (89 MPH).
ECM controls throttle angle of electric throttle control actuator to regulate engine speed.
Operation status of ASCD is indicated by CRUISE indicator and SET indicator in combination meter. If any H
malfunction occurs in the ASCD system, it automatically deactivates control.
NOTE:
Always drive vehicle in a safe manner according to traffic conditions and obey all traffic laws. I
SET OPERATION
Press ASCD MAIN switch. (The CRUISE indicator in combination meter illuminates.)
When vehicle speed reaches a desired speed between approximately 35 km/h (22 MPH) and 144 km/h (89 J
MPH), press SET/COAST switch. (Then SET indicator in combination meter illuminates.)
ACCELERATE OPERATION
If the RESUME/ACCELERATE switch is depressed during cruise control driving, increase the vehicle speed K
until the switch is released or vehicle speed reaches maximum speed controlled by the system.
And then ASCD will maintain the new set speed.
CANCEL OPERATION L
When any of following conditions exist, cruise operation will be canceled.
• CANCEL switch is depressed
• More than 2 switches on ASCD steering switch are pressed at the same time (Set speed will be cleared) M
• Brake pedal is depressed
• Clutch pedal is depressed or gear position is changed to the neutral position (M/T models)
• Selector lever is position is N, P or R position (A/T models)
N
• Vehicle speed decreased to 13 km/h (8 MPH) lower than the set speed
When the ECM detects any of the following conditions, the ECM will cancel the cruise operation and inform
the driver by blinking indicator lamp.
• Engine coolant temperature is slightly higher than the normal operating temperature, CRUISE lamp may O
blink slowly.
When the engine coolant temperature decreases to the normal operating temperature, CRUISE lamp will
stop blinking and the cruise operation will be able to work by depressing SET/COAST switch or RESUME/
P
ACCELERATE switch.
• Malfunction for some self-diagnoses regarding ASCD control: SET lamp will blink quickly.
If MAIN switch is turned to OFF while ASCD is activated, all of ASCD operations will be canceled and vehicle
speed memory will be erased.
COAST OPERATION
When the SET/COAST switch is pressed during cruise control driving, decrease vehicle set speed until the
switch is released. And then ASCD will maintain the new set speed.

RESUME OPERATION
When the RESUME/ACCELERATE switch is pressed after canceling operation other than depressing the
MAIN switch, vehicle speed will return to last set speed. To resume vehicle set speed, vehicle condition must
meet following conditions.
• Brake pedal is released
• Clutch pedal is released (M/T models)
• A/T selector lever is in position other than P and N positions (A/T models)
• Vehicle speed is greater than 35 km/h (22 MPH) and less than 144 km/h (89 MPH)
Component Description INFOID:0000000004053280
ASCD STEERING SWITCH

Refer to EC-321.
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
Refer to EC-325 and EC-371.
ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH
STOP LAMP SWITCH
Refer to EC-325, EC-337 and EC-371.
ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
Refer to EC-349.
ASCD INDICATOR
Refer to EC-376.

CAN COMMUNICATION
CAN COMMUNICATION
A
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle mul- EC
tiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many
electronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with
other control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected
with 2 communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less C
wiring. Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only.
Refer toLAN-55, "CAN System Specification Chart", about CAN communication for detail.
D

EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM
Description INFOID:0000000004053282
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
PBIB3639E
The evaporative emission system is used to reduce hydrocarbons emitted into the atmosphere from the fuel
system. This reduction of hydrocarbons is accomplished by activated charcoals in the EVAP canister.
The fuel vapor in the sealed fuel tank is led into the EVAP canister which contains activated carbon and the
vapor is stored there when the engine is not operating or when refueling to the fuel tank.
The vapor in the EVAP canister is purged by the air through the purge line to the intake manifold when the
engine is operating. EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is controlled by ECM. When the
engine operates, the flow rate of vapor controlled by EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is
proportionally regulated as the air flow increases.
EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve also shuts off the vapor purge line during decelerating.

EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING
A
EC
PBIB2654E
P

ALBIA0513ZZ
EVAP canister vent control valve EVAP control system pressure

1. EVAP vapor purge line 2. 3.
(view with bed removed) sensor
4. Drain filter 5. EVAP canister
Front Previous page

INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL
A
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION EC

Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Engine speed C
Intake valve Intake valve timing control
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature timing control solenoid valve
D
Combination meter Vehicle speed*
*: This signal is sent to ECM through CAN communication line.
E
J
PBIB3279E
This mechanism hydraulically controls cam phases continuously with the fixed operating angle of the intake
valve.
The ECM receives signals such as crankshaft position, camshaft position, engine speed, and engine coolant K
temperature. Then, the ECM sends ON/OFF pulse duty signals to the intake valve timing control solenoid
valve depending on driving status. This makes it possible to control the shut/open timing of the intake valve to
increase engine torque in low/mid speed range and output in high-speed range. L

ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
Introduction INFOID:0000000004053284
The ECM has an on board diagnostic system, which detects malfunctions related to engine sensors or actua-
tors. The ECM also records various emission-related diagnostic information including:
Emission-related diagnostic information Diagnostic service

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Service $03 of SAE J1979
Freeze Frame data Service $02 of SAE J1979
System Readiness Test (SRT) code Service $01 of SAE J1979
1st Trip Diagnostic Trouble Code (1st Trip DTC) Service $07 of SAE J1979
1st Trip Freeze Frame data
Test values and Test limits Service $06 of SAE J1979
Calibration ID Service $09 of SAE J1979
The above information can be checked using procedures listed in the table below.
×: Applicable —: Not applicable
Freeze Frame 1st trip Freeze
DTC 1st trip DTC SRT code SRT status Test value
data Frame data
CONSULT-III × × × × × × —
GST × × × — × × ×
ECM × ×* — — — × —
*: When DTC and 1st trip DTC simultaneously appear on the display, they cannot be clearly distinguished from each other.
The malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) on the instrument panel illuminate when the same malfunction is
detected in two consecutive trips (Two trip detection logic), or when the ECM enters fail-safe mode. (Refer to
EC-425, "Fail-safe Chart".)
Two Trip Detection Logic INFOID:0000000004053285
When a malfunction is detected for the first time, 1st trip DTC and 1st trip Freeze Frame data are stored in the
ECM memory. The MIL will not illuminate at this stage. <1st trip>
If the same malfunction is detected again during the next drive, the DTC and Freeze Frame data are stored in
the ECM memory, and the MIL illuminates. The MIL illuminates at the same time the DTC is stored. <2nd trip>
The “trip” in the “Two Trip Detection Logic” means a driving mode in which self-diagnosis is performed during
vehicle operation. Specific on board diagnostic items will cause the ECM to illuminate or blink the MIL, and
store DTC and Freeze Frame data, even in the 1st trip, as shown below.
MIL DTC 1st trip DTC
Items 1st trip 2nd trip 2nd trip

1st trip 2nd trip 1st trip
display-
Blinking Illuminated Blinking Illuminated displaying displaying displaying
ing
Misfire (Possible three way cata-
lyst damage) — DTC: P0300 - × — — — — — × —
P0304 is being detected
Misfire (Possible three way cata-
lyst damage) — DTC: P0300 - — — × — — × — —
P0304 is being detected
One trip detection diagnoses
— × — — × — — —
(Refer to EC-427.)
Except above — — — × — × × —
When there is an open circuit on MIL circuit, the ECM cannot warn the driver by Illuminated MIL when there is
malfunction on engine control system.
Therefore, when electrical controlled throttle and part of ECM related diagnoses are continuously detected as
NG for 5 trips, ECM warns the driver that engine control system malfunctions and MIL circuit is open by means
of operating fail-safe function.
The fail-safe function also operates when above diagnoses except MIL circuit are detected, and demands the
driver to repair the malfunction. A
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode Engine speed will not rise more than 2,500 rpm due to the fuel cut
Emission-related Diagnostic Information INFOID:0000000004053286

EC
DTC AND 1ST TRIP DTC

The 1st trip DTC (whose number is the same as the DTC number) is displayed for the latest self-diagnostic C
result obtained. If the ECM memory was cleared previously, and the 1st trip DTC did not reoccur, the 1st trip
DTC will not be displayed.
If a malfunction is detected during the 1st trip, the 1st trip DTC is saved in the ECM memory. The MIL will not D
light up (two trip detection logic). If the same malfunction is not detected in the 2nd trip (meeting the required
driving pattern), the 1st trip DTC is cleared from the ECM memory. If the same malfunction is detected in the
2nd trip, both the 1st trip DTC and DTC are stored in the ECM memory and the MIL lights up. In other words,
E
the DTC is stored in the ECM memory and the MIL lights up when the same malfunction occurs in two consec-
utive trips. If a 1st trip DTC is saved and a non-diagnostic operation is performed between the 1st and 2nd
trips, only the 1st trip DTC will continue to be stored. For malfunctions that blink or light up the MIL during the
1st trip, the DTC and 1st trip DTC are stored in the ECM memory. F
Procedures for clearing the DTC and the 1st trip DTC from the ECM memory are described in "HOW TO
ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION".
For malfunctions in which 1st trip DTCs are displayed, refer to "EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFOR-
G
MATION ITEMS". These items are required by legal regulations to continuously monitor the system/compo-
nent. In addition, the items monitored non-continuously are also displayed on CONSULT-III.
1st trip DTC is specified in Service $07 of SAE J1979. 1st trip DTC detection occurs without illuminating the
MIL and therefore does not warn the driver of a malfunction. However, 1st trip DTC detection will not prevent H
the vehicle from being tested, for example during Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) tests.
When a 1st trip DTC is detected, check, print out or write down and erase (1st trip) DTC and Freeze Frame
data as specified in Work Flow procedure Step 2, refer to EC-14, "Trouble Diagnosis Introduction". Then per- I
form DTC Confirmation Procedure or Overall Function Check to try to duplicate the malfunction. If the mal-
function is duplicated, the item requires repair.
How to Read DTC and 1st Trip DTC J
DTC and 1st trip DTC can be read by the following methods.
WITH CONSULT-III
WITH GST
K
CONSULT-III or GST (Generic Scan Tool) Examples: P0340, P0850, P1148, etc.
These DTCs are prescribed by SAE J2012.
(CONSULT-III also displays the malfunctioning component or system.)
NO TOOLS L
The number of blinks of the MIL in the Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-Diagnostic Results) indicates the DTC.
Example: 0340, 0850, 1148, etc.
These DTCs are controlled by NISSAN. M
• 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No.
• Output of a DTC indicates a malfunction. However, GST or the Diagnostic Test Mode II do not indi-
cate whether the malfunction is still occurring or has occurred in the past and has returned to nor-
mal. CONSULT-III can identify malfunction status as shown below. Therefore, using CONSULT-III (if N
available) is recommended.
DTC or 1st trip DTC of a malfunction is displayed in SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS mode of CONSULT-III.
Time data indicates how many times the vehicle was driven after the last detection of a DTC. O
If the DTC is being detected currently, the time data will be [0].
If a 1st trip DTC is stored in the ECM, the time data will be [1t].
FREEZE FRAME DATA AND 1ST TRIP FREEZE FRAME DATA P
The ECM records the driving conditions such as fuel system status, calculated load value, engine coolant tem-
perature, short term fuel trim, long term fuel trim, engine speed, vehicle speed, absolute throttle position, base
fuel schedule and intake air temperature at the moment a malfunction is detected.
Data which are stored in the ECM memory, along with the 1st trip DTC, are called 1st trip freeze frame data.
The data, stored together with the DTC data, are called freeze frame data and displayed on CONSULT-III or
GST. The 1st trip freeze frame data can only be displayed on the CONSULT-III screen, not on the GST. For
details, see "FREEZE FRAME DATA AND 1ST TRIP FREEZE FRAME DATA".

Only one set of freeze frame data (either 1st trip freeze frame data or freeze frame data) can be stored in the
ECM. 1st trip freeze frame data is stored in the ECM memory along with the 1st trip DTC. There is no priority
for 1st trip freeze frame data and it is updated each time a different 1st trip DTC is detected. However, once
freeze frame data (2nd trip detection/MIL on) is stored in the ECM memory, 1st trip freeze frame data is no
longer stored. Remember, only one set of freeze frame data can be stored in the ECM. The ECM has the fol-
lowing priorities to update the data.
Priority Items
Misfire — DTC: P0300 - P0304
1
Freeze frame data Fuel Injection System Function — DTC: P0171, P0172
2 Except the above items (Includes A/T related items)
3 1st trip freeze frame data
For example, the EGR malfunction (Priority: 2) was detected and the freeze frame data was saved in the 2nd
trip. After that when the misfire (Priority: 1) is detected in another trip, the freeze frame data will be updated
from the EGR malfunction to the misfire. The 1st trip freeze frame data is updated each time a different mal-
function is detected. There is no priority for 1st trip freeze frame data. However, once freeze frame data is
stored in the ECM memory, 1st trip freeze data is no longer stored (because only one freeze frame data or 1st
trip freeze frame data can be stored in the ECM). If freeze frame data is stored in the ECM memory and freeze
frame data with the same priority occurs later, the first (original) freeze frame data remains unchanged in the
ECM memory.
Both 1st trip freeze frame data and freeze frame data (along with the DTCs) are cleared when the ECM mem-
ory is erased. Procedures for clearing the ECM memory are described in "EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOS-
TIC INFORMATION ITEMS".
SYSTEM READINESS TEST (SRT) CODE
System Readiness Test (SRT) code is specified in Service $01 of SAE J1979.
As part of an enhanced emissions test for Inspection & Maintenance (I/M), certain states require the status of
SRT be used to indicate whether the ECM has completed self-diagnosis of major emission systems and com-
ponents. Completion must be verified in order for the emissions inspection to proceed.
If a vehicle is rejected for a State emissions inspection due to one or more SRT items indicating “INCMP”, use
the information in this Service Manual to set the SRT to “CMPLT”.
In most cases the ECM will automatically complete its self-diagnosis cycle during normal usage, and the SRT
status will indicate “CMPLT” for each application system. Once set as “CMPLT”, the SRT status remains
“CMPLT” until the self-diagnosis memory is erased.
Occasionally, certain portions of the self-diagnostic test may not be completed as a result of the customer's
normal driving pattern; the SRT will indicate “INCMP” for these items.
NOTE:
The SRT will also indicate “INCMP” if the self-diagnosis memory is erased for any reason or if the ECM mem-
ory power supply is interrupted for several hours.
If, during the state emissions inspection, the SRT indicates “CMPLT” for all test items, the inspector will con-
tinue with the emissions test. However, if the SRT indicates “INCMP” for one or more of the SRT items the
vehicle is returned to the customer untested.
NOTE:
If MIL is ON during the state emissions inspection, the vehicle is also returned to the customer untested even
though the SRT indicates “CMPLT” for all test items. Therefore, it is important to check SRT (“CMPLT”) and
DTC (No DTCs) before the inspection.
SRT Item
The table below shows required self-diagnostic items to set the SRT to “CMPLT”.
SRT item Perfor-

(CONSULT-III indica- mance Required self-diagnostic items to set the SRT to “CMPLT” Corresponding DTC No.
tion) Priority*
CATALYST 2 Three way catalyst function P0420
1 EVAP control system P0442
EVAP SYSTEM 2 EVAP control system P0456
2 EVAP control system purge flow monitoring P0441

SRT item Perfor-
(CONSULT-III indica- mance Required self-diagnostic items to set the SRT to “CMPLT” Corresponding DTC No. A
tion) Priority*
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 P0133
Heated oxygen sensor 2 P0137 EC
HO2S 1
Heated oxygen sensor 2 P0138
C
*: If completion of several SRTs is required, perform driving patterns (DTC confirmation procedure), one by one based on the priority for
models with CONSULT-III.
SRT Set Timing D

SRT is set as “CMPLT” after self-diagnosis has been performed one or more times. Completion of SRT is
done regardless of whether the result is OK or NG. The set timing is different between OK and NG results and
is shown in the table below. E
Example
Self-diagnosis result Ignition cycle
Diagnosis
← ON → OFF ← ON → OFF ← ON → OFF ← ON →
F
All OK Case 1 P0400 OK (1) — (1) OK (2) — (2)
P0402 OK (1) — (1) — (1) OK (2) G
P1402 OK (1) OK (2) — (2) — (2)
SRT of EGR “CMPLT” “CMPLT” “CMPLT” “CMPLT”
Case 2 P0400 OK (1) — (1) — (1) — (1) H
P0402 — (0) — (0) OK (1) — (1)
P1402 OK (1) OK (2) — (2) — (2)
I
SRT of EGR “INCMP” “INCMP” “CMPLT” “CMPLT”
NG exists Case 3 P0400 OK OK — —
P0402 — — — — J
NG
P1402 NG — NG (Consecutive
NG) K
(1st trip) DTC
1st trip DTC — 1st trip DTC
DTC (= MIL “ON”)
SRT of EGR “INCMP” “INCMP” “INCMP” “CMPLT” L
OK: Self-diagnosis is carried out and the result is OK.
NG: Self-diagnosis is carried out and the result is NG.
—: Self-diagnosis is not carried out. M
When all SRT related self-diagnoses show OK results in a single cycle (Ignition OFF-ON-OFF), the SRT will
indicate “CMPLT”. → Case 1 above
When all SRT related self-diagnoses show OK results through several different cycles, the SRT will indicate N
“CMPLT” at the time the respective self-diagnoses have at least one OK result. → Case 2 above
If one or more SRT related self-diagnoses show NG results in 2 consecutive cycles, the SRT will also indicate
“CMPLT”. → Case 3 above
The table above shows that the minimum number of cycles for setting SRT as “INCMP” is the number one (1) O
for each self-diagnosis (Case 1 & 2) or the number two (2) for one of self-diagnoses (Case 3). However, in
preparation for the state emissions inspection, it is unnecessary for each self-diagnosis to be executed twice
(Case 3) for the following reasons: P
• The SRT will indicate “CMPLT” at the time the respective self-diagnoses have one (1) OK result.
• The emissions inspection requires “CMPLT” of the SRT only with OK self-diagnosis results.
• During SRT driving pattern, the 1st trip DTC (NG) is detected prior to “CMPLT” of SRT and the self-diagno-
sis memory must be erased from the ECM after repair.
• If the 1st trip DTC is erased, all the SRT will indicate “INCMP”.
NOTE:
SRT can be set as “CMPLT” together with the DTC(s). Therefore, DTC check must always be carried out
prior to the state emission inspection even though the SRT indicates “CMPLT”.
SRT Service Procedure
If a vehicle has failed the state emissions inspection due to one or more SRT items indicating “INCMP”, review
the flowchart diagnostic sequence on the next page.
PBIB2320E
*1 "How to Read DTC and 1st Trip DTC" *2 "How to Display SRT Status" *3 "How to Set SRT Code"
How to Display SRT Status

WITH CONSULT-III
Selecting “SRT STATUS” in “DTC & SRT CONFIRMATION” mode with CONSULT-III.
For items whose SRT codes are set, “CMPLT” is displayed on the CONSULT-III screen; for items whose SRT
codes are not set, “INCMP” is displayed.
NOTE:
Though displayed on the CONSULT-III screen, “HO2S HTR” is not SRT item.
WITH GST
Selecting Service $01 with GST (Generic Scan Tool)
NO TOOLS
A SRT code itself cannot be displayed, however SRT status can be.
1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait 20 seconds.
2. SRT status is indicated as shown below.
• When all SRT codes are set, MIL lights up continuously.
• When any SRT codes are not set, MIL will flash periodically for 10 seconds. A
EC
F
JMBIA1515GB
How to Set SRT Code

To set all SRT codes, self-diagnosis for the items indicated above must be performed one or more times. Each G
diagnosis may require a long period of actual driving under various conditions.
WITH CONSULT-III
Perform corresponding DTC Confirmation Procedure one by one based on Performance Priority in the table H
on "SRT Item".
WITHOUT CONSULT-III
The most efficient driving pattern in which SRT codes can be properly set is explained on the next page. The
driving pattern should be performed one or more times to set all SRT codes. I

Driving Pattern
PBIB3622E
• The time required for each diagnosis varies with road surface conditions, weather, altitude, individual driving
habits, etc.
Zone A refers to the range where the time, required for the diagnosis under normal conditions*, is the short-
est.
Zone B refers to the range where the diagnosis can still be performed if the diagnosis is not completed within
zone A.
*: Normal conditions refer to the following:

• Sea level
• Flat road A
• Ambient air temperature: 20 - 30°C (68 - 86°F)
• Diagnosis is performed as quickly as possible under normal conditions.
Under different conditions [For example: ambient air temperature other than 20 - 30°C (68 - 86°F)], diagno-
EC
sis may also be performed.
Pattern 1:
• The engine is started at the engine coolant temperature of −10 to 35°C (14 to 95°F)
(where the voltage between the ECM terminal 73 and ground is 3.0 - 4.3V). C
• The engine must be operated at idle speed until the engine coolant temperature is greater than 70°C
(158°F) (where the voltage between the ECM terminal 73 and ground is lower than 1.4V).
• The engine is started at the fuel tank temperature of warmer than 0°C (32°F) (where the voltage D
between the ECM terminal 107 and ground is less than 4.1V).
Pattern 2:
• When steady-state driving is performed again even after it is interrupted, each diagnosis can be conducted.
In this case, the time required for diagnosis may be extended. E
Pattern 3:
• Operate vehicle following the driving pattern shown in the figure.
• Release the accelerator pedal during decelerating vehicle speed F
from 90 km/h (56 MPH) to 0 km/h (0 MPH).
Pattern 4:
• The accelerator pedal must be held very steady during steady-
state driving. G
• If the accelerator pedal is moved, the test must be conducted all
over again.
*1: Depress the accelerator pedal until vehicle speed is 90 km/h (56 H
MPH), then release the accelerator pedal and keep it released for
more than 10 seconds. Depress the accelerator pedal until vehicle
PBIB2244E
speed is 90 km/h (56 MPH) again.
*2: Checking the vehicle speed with GST is advised. I
Suggested Transmission Gear Position for A/T Models

Set the selector lever in the D position with the overdrive switch turned ON. J
Suggested upshift speeds for M/T models
Shown below are suggested vehicle speeds for shifting into a higher gear. These suggestions relate to fuel
economy and vehicle performance. Actual upshift speeds will vary according to road conditions, the weather K
and individual driving habits.
For quick acceleration in low altitude

For normal acceleration in low altitude areas
areas and high altitude areas
L
[less than 1,219 m (4,000 ft)]:
[over 1,219 m (4,000 ft)]:
Gear change CRUISE shift point km/h (MPH) ACCEL shift point km/h (MPH) km/h (MPH)
M
1st to 2nd 17 (11) 20 (12) 24 (15)
2nd to 3rd 25 (15) 37 (23) 40 (25)
3rd to 4th 38 (24) 54 (34) 64 (40) N
4th to 5th 55 (35) 71 (44) 75 (45)
O
Suggested Maximum Speed in Each Gear
Downshift to a lower gear if the engine is not running smoothly, or if you need to accelerate.
Do not exceed the maximum suggested speed (shown below) in any gear. For level road driving, use the high- P
est gear suggested for that speed. Always observe posted speed limits and drive according to the road condi-
tions to ensure safe operation. Do not over-rev the engine when shifting to a lower gear as it may cause
engine damage or loss of vehicle control.

Gear km/h (MPH)

1st 50 (30)
2nd 90 (55)
3rd —
4th —
5th —
TEST VALUE AND TEST LIMIT (GST ONLY — NOT APPLICABLE TO CONSULT-III)
The following is the information specified in Service $06 of SAE J1979.
The test value is a parameter used to determine whether a system/circuit diagnostic test is OK or NG while
being monitored by the ECM during self-diagnosis. The test limit is a reference value which is specified as the
maximum or minimum value and is compared with the test value being monitored.
These data (test value and test limit) are specified by On Board Monitor ID(OBDMID), Test ID (TID), Unit and
Scaling ID and can be displayed on the GST screen.
The items of the test value and test limit will be displayed with GST screen which items are provided by the
ECM. (eg., if bank 2 is not applied on this vehicle, only the items of bank 1 are displayed)
Test value and

Test limit
OBD- (GST display)
Item Self-diagnostic test item DTC Description
MID Unit and
TID Scaling
ID
Minimum sensor output voltage for test
P0131 83H 0BH
cycle
Maximum sensor output voltage for test
P0131 84H 0BH
cycle
P0130 85H 0BH
cycle
P0130 86H 0BH
cycle
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
01H Response rate: Response ratio (Lean to
(Bank 1) P0133 87H 04H
Rich)
Response rate: Response ratio (Rich to
P0133 88H 04H
Lean)
P2A00 89H 84H The amount of shift in air fuel ratio
P2A00 8AH 84H The amount of shift in air fuel ratio
HO2S P0130 8BH 0BH Difference in sensor output voltage
P0133 8CH 83H Response gain at the limited frequency
P0138 07H 0CH
cycle
Heated oxygen sensor 2 Maximum sensor output voltage for test

02H P0137 08H 0CH
(Bank 1) cycle
P0138 80H 0CH Sensor output voltage
P0139 81H 0CH Difference in sensor output voltage
P0143 07H 0CH
cycle

03H P0144 08H 0CH
(Bank 1) cycle

Test value and
Test limit A
OBD- (GST display)
MID Unit and
TID Scaling EC
ID
P0151 83H 0BH
cycle
C
P0151 84H 0BH
cycle
Minimum sensor output voltage for test D
P0150 85H 0BH
cycle
P0150 86H 0BH
cycle
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 E
(Bank 2) P0153 87H 04H
Rich)
P0153 88H 04H
Lean)
F
G
Minimum sensor output voltage for test H
P0158 07H 0CH
cycle

06H P0157 08H 0CH
(Bank 2) cycle I
J
P0163 07H 0CH
cycle

07H P0164 08H 0CH K
(Bank2) cycle
L
P0420 80H 01H O2 storage index
Switching time lag engine exhaust index
P0420 82H 01H
Three way catalyst function value M
21H
(Bank1) Difference in 3rd O2 sensor output volt-
P2423 83H 0CH
age
CATA- P2423 84H 84H O2 storage index in HC trap catalyst N

LYST P0430 80H 01H O2 storage index
P0430 82H 01H
Three way catalyst function value O
22H
P2424 83H 0CH
age
P2424 84H 84H O2 storage index in HC trap catalyst P

Test value and
Test limit
OBD- (GST display)
MID Unit and
TID Scaling
ID
Low Flow Faults: EGR temp change
P0400 80H 96H
rate (short term)
P0400 81H 96H
rate (long term)
EGR Low Flow Faults: Difference between
31H EGR function
SYSTEM P0400 82H 96H max EGR temp and EGR temp under
idling condition
P0400 83H 96H Low Flow Faults: Max EGR temp
High Flow Faults: EGR temp increase
P1402 84H 96H
rate
VTC intake function diagnosis (VTC
P0011 80H 9DH
alignment check diagnosis)
VTC exhaust function diagnosis (VTC
P0014 81H 9DH
35H VVT Monitor (Bank1)
P0011 82H 9DH
drive failure diagnosis)
P0014 83H 9DH
VVT drive failure diagnosis)
SYSTEM VTC intake function diagnosis (VTC
P0021 80H 9DH
P0024 81H 9DH
P0021 82H 9DH
P0024 83H 9DH
EVAP control system leak Difference in pressure sensor output
39H P0455 80H 0CH
(Cap Off) voltage before and after pull down
EVAP control system leak Leak area index (for more than 0.04
3BH P0442 80H 05H
(Small leak) inch)
Leak area index (for more than 0.02
EVAP P0456 80H 05H
EVAP control system leak inch)
SYSTEM 3CH
(Very small leak) Maximum internal pressure of EVAP
P0456 81H FDH
system during monitoring
Difference in pressure sensor output
3DH Purge flow system P0441 83H 0CH voltage before and after vent control
valve close
A/F sensor 1 heater Low Input:P0031 Converted value of Heater electric cur-
41H 81H 0BH
(Bank 1) High Input:P0032 rent to voltage
Heated oxygen sensor 2 heat- Low Input:P0037 Converted value of Heater electric cur-
42H 80H 0CH
er (Bank 1) High Input:P0038 rent to voltage
Heated oxygen sensor 3 heat- Converted value of Heater electric cur-
O2 SEN- 43H P0043 80H 0CH
er (Bank 1) rent to voltage
SOR
HEATER A/F sensor 1 heater Low Input:P0051 Converted value of Heater electric cur-
45H 81H 0BH
46H 80H 0CH
47H P0063 80H 0CH

Test value and
Test limit A
OBD- (GST display)
MID Unit and
TID Scaling EC
ID
Secondary Air Injection System Incor-
P0411 80H 01H
rect Flow Detected
C
Bank1: P0491 Secondary Air Injection System Insuffi-
81H 01H
Bank2: P0492 cient Flow
Secondary Air Injection System Pump D
P2445 82H 01H
Stuck Off
SEC-
Secondary Air Injection System High
OND- 71H Secondary Air system P2448 83H 01H
Airflow
ARY AIR E
Bank1: P2440 Secondary Air Injection System Switch-
84H 01H
Bank2: P2442 ing Valve Stuck Open
Secondary Air Injection System Switch-
P2440 85H 01H
ing Valve Stuck Open
F
Secondary Air Injection System Pump
P2444 86H 01H
Stuck On
G
Fuel injection system function P0171 or P0172 80H 2FH Long term fuel trim
81H
(Bank 1) P0171 or P0172 81H 24H The number of lambda control clamped
FUEL
SYSTEM P0174 or P0175 80H 2FH Long term fuel trim
Fuel injection system function H
82H

Test value and
Test limit
OBD- (GST display)
MID Unit and
TID Scaling
ID
Misfiring counter at 1000 revolution of
P0301 80H 24H
the first cylinder
P0302 81H 24H
the second cylinder
P0303 82H 24H
the third cylinder
P0304 83H 24H
the fourth cylinder
P0305 84H 24H
the fifth cylinder
P0306 85H 24H
the sixth cylinder
P0307 86H 24H
the seventh cylinder
P0308 87H 24H
the eighth cylinder
P0300 88H 24H
the multiple cylinders
Misfiring counter at 200 revolution of the
P0301 89H 24H
first cylinder
MISFIRE A1H Multiple Cylinder Misfires
P0302 8AH 24H
second cylinder
P0303 8BH 24H
third cylinder
P0304 8CH 24H
fourth cylinder
P0305 8DH 24H
fifth cylinder
P0306 8EH 24H
sixth cylinder
P0307 8FH 24H
seventh cylinder
P0308 90H 24H
eighth cylinder
P0300 91H 24H
the single cylinder
P0300 92H 24H
single cylinder
P0300 93H 24H
multiple cylinders

Test value and
Test limit A
OBD- (GST display)
MID Unit and
TID Scaling EC
ID
EWMA (Exponential Weighted Moving
P0301 0BH 24H Average) misfire counts for last 10 driv-
ing cycles
C
A2H No. 1 Cylinder Misfire
Misfire counts for last/current driving cy-
P0301 0CH 24H
cles
D
A3H No. 2 Cylinder Misfire ing cycles
Misfire counts for last/current driving cy- E
P0302 0CH 24H
cles
P0303 0BH 24H Average) misfire counts for last 10 driv- F
P0303 0CH 24H
cles G
H
P0304 0CH 24H
cles
MISFIRE
I
P0305 0CH 24H J
cles
A7H No. 6 Cylinder Misfire ing cycles K
P0306 0CH 24H
cles
EWMA (Exponential Weighted Moving L
Misfire counts for last/current driving cy- M
P0307 0CH 24H
cles
ing cycles
N
P0308 0CH 24H
cles
O
HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION
How to Erase DTC
With CONSULT-III P
NOTE:
• If the ignition switch stays ON after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch OFF once. Wait at
least 10 seconds and then turn it ON (engine stopped) again.
• If the DTC is not for A/T related items (see EC-427), skip step 1.
1. Erase DTC in TCM. Refer to TM-148, "OBD-II Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)".
2. Select “ENGINE” with CONSULT-III.
3. Select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”.

4. Touch “ERASE”. (DTC in ECM will be erased.)
With GST
NOTE:
• If the ignition switch stays ON after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch OFF.once.Wait at least
10 seconds and then turn it ON (engine stopped) again.
1. Select Service $04 with GST (Generic Scan Tool).
No Tools
NOTE:
• If the ignition switch stays ON after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch OFF once.Wait at
1. Erase DTC in ECM. Refer to How To ERASE DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE II (SELF-DIAGNOSTIC
RESULTS).
NOTE:
• If the battery is disconnected, the emission-related diagnostic information will be cleared within 24
hours.
• The following data are cleared when the ECM memory is erased.
- Diagnostic trouble codes
- 1st trip diagnostic trouble codes
- Freeze frame data
- 1st trip freeze frame data
- System readiness test (SRT) codes
- Test values
• Actual work procedures are explained using a DTC as an example. Be careful so that not only the DTC, but
all of the data listed above, are cleared from the ECM memory during work procedures.
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) INFOID:0000000004053287
DESCRIPTION
The MIL is located on the instrument panel.
1. The MIL will illuminate when the ignition switch is turned ON
without the engine running. This is a bulb check.
If the MIL does not light up, refer to MWI-40.
2. When the engine is started, the MIL should turn off.
If the MIL remains illuminated, the on board diagnostic system
has detected an engine system malfunction.
SEF217U
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM FUNCTION

The on board diagnostic system has the following 3 functions.

Diagnostic Test KEY and ENG. Function Explanation of Function A

Mode Status
Mode I Ignition switch in BULB CHECK This function checks the MIL bulb for damage (blown, open
ON position circuit, etc.).
EC
If the MIL does not illuminate, check MIL circuit.
Engine stopped C
D
Engine running MALFUNCTION When a malfunction is detected twice in two consecutive
WARNING driving cycles (two trip detection logic), the MIL will light up
to inform the driver that a malfunction has been detected.
The following malfunctions will illuminate or blink the MIL in
E
the 1st trip.
• Misfire (Possible three way catalyst damage)
• One trip detection diagnoses
F
Mode II Ignition switch in SELF-DIAGNOSTIC This function allows DTCs and 1st trip DTCs to be read.
ON position RESULTS
Engine stopped
H
When there is an open circuit on MIL circuit, the ECM cannot warn the driver by illuminating MIL when there is I
NG for 5 trips, ECM warns the driver that engine control system malfunctions and MIL circuit is open by means J
The fail-safe function also operates when above diagnoses except MIL circuit are detected, and demands the
driver to repair the malfunction.
K
MIL Flashing Without DTC

L
When any SRT codes are not set, MIL may flash without DTC. For the details, refer to EC-427, "DTC Index".
HOW TO SWITCH DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE
NOTE: M
a malfunction.
• Always ECM returns to Diagnostic Test Mode I after ignition switch is turned OFF. N
HOW TO SET DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE II (SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS)

1. Confirm that accelerator pedal is fully released, turn ignition switch ON and wait 3 seconds. O
2. Repeat the following procedure quickly 5 times within 5 seconds.
b. Fully release the accelerator pedal. P
3. Wait 7 seconds, fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it for approx. 10 seconds until the MIL starts
blinking.
NOTE:
Do not release the accelerator pedal for 10 seconds if MIL may start blinking on the halfway of this
10 seconds. This blinking is displaying SRT status and is continued for another 10 seconds. For
the details, refer to EC-427, "DTC Index".
4. Fully release the accelerator pedal.
ECM has entered to Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results).
NOTE:
Wait until the same DTC (or 1st trip DTC) appears to completely confirm all DTCs.
PBIB0092E
How to Erase Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results)

1. Set ECM in Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results). Refer to "HOW TO SET DIAGNOSTIC
TEST MODE II (SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS)".
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it depressed for more than 10 seconds.
The emission-related diagnostic information has been erased from the backup memory in the ECM.
3. Fully release the accelerator pedal, and confirm the DTC 0000 is displayed.
DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE I — BULB CHECK
In this mode, the MIL on the instrument panel should stay ON. If it remains OFF, check the bulb. Refer to
MWI-40.
DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE I — MALFUNCTION WARNING
MIL Condition
ON When the malfunction is detected.
OFF No malfunction
This DTC number is clarified in Diagnostic Test Mode II (SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS)
DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE II — SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS

In this mode, the DTC and 1st trip DTC are indicated by the number of blinks of the MIL as shown below.
The DTC and 1st trip DTC are displayed at the same time. If the MIL does not illuminate in diagnostic test
mode I (Malfunction warning), all displayed items are 1st trip DTCs. If only one code is displayed when the MIL
illuminates in diagnostic test mode II (SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS), it is a DTC; if two or more codes are
displayed, they may be either DTCs or 1st trip DTCs. DTC No. is same as that of 1st trip DTC. These uniden-
tified codes can be identified by using the CONSULT-III or GST. A DTC will be used as an example for how to
read a code.

EC
JMBIA1140GB I
A particular trouble code can be identified by the number of four-digit numeral flashes. The “zero” is indicated
by the number of ten flashes. The “A” id indicated by the number of eleven flash. The length of time the
1,000th-digit numeral flashes on and off is 1.2 seconds consisting of an ON (0.6-second) - OFF (0.6-second) J
cycle.
The 100th-digit numeral and lower digit numerals consist of a 0.3-seconds ON and 0.3-seconds OFF cycle.
A change from one digit numeral to another occurs at an interval of 1.0-seconds OFF. In other words, the later
numeral appears on the display 1.3 seconds after the former numeral has disappeared. K
A change from one trouble code to another occurs at an interval of 1.8-second OFF.
In this way, all the detected malfunctions are classified by their DTC numbers. The DTC 0000 refers to no mal-
function. (See EC-427) L
The DTC can be erased from the back-up memory in the ECM by depressing accelerator pedal. Refer to "How
to Erase Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results)". M
• If the battery is disconnected, the DTC will be lost from the backup memory within 24 hours.
• Be careful not to erase the stored memory before starting trouble diagnoses.
OBD System Operation Chart INFOID:0000000004053288 N
RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MIL, 1ST TRIP DTC, DTC, AND DETECTABLE ITEMS
• When a malfunction is detected for the first time, the 1st trip DTC and the 1st trip freeze frame data are O
stored in the ECM memory.
• When the same malfunction is detected in two consecutive trips, the DTC and the freeze frame data are
stored in the ECM memory, and the MIL will come on. For details, refer to EC-46, "Two Trip Detection
P
Logic".
• The MIL will go off after the vehicle is driven 3 times (driving pattern B) with no malfunction. A drive is
counted only when the recorded driving pattern is met (as stored in the ECM). If another malfunction occurs
while counting, the counter will reset.
• The DTC and the freeze frame data will be stored until the vehicle is driven 40 times (driving pattern A) with-
out the same malfunction recurring (except for Misfire and Fuel Injection System). For Misfire and Fuel Injec-
tion System, the DTC and freeze frame data will be stored until the vehicle is driven 80 times (driving pattern

C) without the same malfunction recurring. The “TIME” in “SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS” mode of CON-
SULT-III will count the number of times the vehicle is driven.
• The 1st trip DTC is not displayed when the self-diagnosis results in OK for the 2nd trip.
SUMMARY CHART
Items Fuel Injection System Misfire Other

MIL (turns off) 3 (pattern B) 3 (pattern B) 3 (pattern B)
DTC, Freeze Frame Data (no
80 (pattern C) 80 (pattern C) 40 (pattern A)
display)
1st Trip DTC (clear) 1 (pattern C), *1 1 (pattern C), *1 1 (pattern B)
1st Trip Freeze Frame Data
*1, *2 *1, *2 1 (pattern B)
(clear)
For details about patterns B and C under “Fuel Injection System” and “Misfire”, see "EXPLANATION FOR DRIVING PATTERNS FOR
“MISFIRE <EXHAUST QUALITY DETERIORATION>”, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM”".
For details about patterns A and B under “Other”, see "EXPLANATION FOR DRIVING PATTERNS FOR “MISFIRE <EXHAUST QUAL-
ITY DETERIORATION>”, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM”".
*1: Clear timing is at the moment OK is detected.
*2: Clear timing is when the same malfunction is detected in the 2nd trip.
RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MIL, DTC, 1ST TRIP DTC AND DRIVING PATTERNS FOR “MISFIRE
<EXHAUST QUALITY DETERIORATION>”, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM”

EC
L
JMBIA1417GB
*1: When the same malfunction is de- *2: MIL will turn off after vehicle is driven *3: When the same malfunction is de- M
tected in two consecutive trips, MIL 3 times (pattern B) without any mal- tected in two consecutive trips, the
will light up. functions. DTC and the freeze frame data will
be stored in ECM.
N
*4: The DTC and the freeze frame data *5: When a malfunction is detected for *6: The 1st trip DTC and the 1st trip
will not be displayed any longer after the first time, the 1st trip DTC and the freeze frame data will be cleared at
vehicle is driven 80 times (pattern C) 1st trip freeze frame data will be the moment OK is detected.
without the same malfunction. (The stored in ECM. O
DTC and the freeze frame data still
remain in ECM.)
*7: When the same malfunction is de- *8: 1st trip DTC will be cleared when ve-
tected in the 2nd trip, the 1st trip hicle is driven once (pattern C) with- P
freeze frame data will be cleared. out the same malfunction after DTC
is stored in ECM.
EXPLANATION FOR DRIVING PATTERNS FOR “MISFIRE <EXHAUST QUALITY DETERIORA-

TION>”, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM”
<Driving Pattern B>
Driving pattern B means the vehicle operation as per the following:
All components and systems should be monitored at least once by the OBD system.
• The B counter will be cleared when the malfunction is detected once regardless of the driving pattern.
• The B counter will be counted up when driving pattern B is satisfied without any malfunction.
• The MIL will turn off when the B counter reaches 3. (*2 in “OBD SYSTEM OPERATION CHART”)
<Driving Pattern C>
Driving pattern C means operating vehicle as per the following:
The following conditions should be satisfied at the same time:
Engine speed: (Engine speed in the freeze frame data) ±375 rpm
Calculated load value: (Calculated load value in the freeze frame data) x (1±0.1) [%]
Engine coolant temperature (T) condition:
• When the freeze frame data shows lower than 70°C (158°F), “T” should be lower than 70°C (158°F).
• When the freeze frame data shows higher than or equal to 70°C (158°F), “T” should be higher than or equal
to 70°C (158°F).
Example:
If the stored freeze frame data is as per the following:
Engine speed: 850 rpm, Calculated load value: 30%, Engine coolant temperature: 80°C (176°F)
To be satisfied with driving pattern C, the vehicle should run under the following conditions:
Engine speed: 475 - 1,225 rpm, Calculated load value: 27 - 33%, Engine coolant temperature: more than 70°C
(158°F)
• The C counter will be cleared when the malfunction is detected regardless of vehicle conditions above.
• The C counter will be counted up when vehicle conditions above are satisfied without the same malfunction.
• The DTC will not be displayed after C counter reaches 80.
• The 1st trip DTC will be cleared when C counter is counted once without the same malfunction after DTC is
stored in ECM.
RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MIL, DTC, 1ST TRIP DTC AND DRIVING PATTERNS EXCEPT FOR
“MISFIRE <EXHAUST QUALITY DETERIORATION>”, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM”

EC
L
JMBIA1418GB
*1: When the same malfunction is de- *2: MIL will turn off after vehicle is driven *3: When the same malfunction is de- M
will light up. functions. DTC and the freeze frame data will
be stored in ECM.
N
*4: The DTC and the freeze frame data *5: When a malfunction is detected for *6: 1st trip DTC will be cleared after vehi-
will not be displayed any longer after the first time, the 1st trip DTC and the cle is driven once (pattern B) without
vehicle is driven 40 times (pattern A) 1st trip freeze frame data will be the same malfunction.
without the same malfunction. stored in ECM. O
(The DTC and the freeze frame data
still remain in ECM.)
*7: When the same malfunction is de-
tected in the 2nd trip, the 1st trip P
freeze frame data will be cleared.
EXPLANATION FOR DRIVING PATTERNS EXCEPT FOR “MISFIRE <EXHAUST QUALITY DETE-
RIORATION>”, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM”

<Driving Pattern A>
AEC574
• The A counter will be cleared when the malfunction is detected regardless of (1) - (4).
• The A counter will be counted up when (1) - (4) are satisfied without the same malfunction.
• The DTC will not be displayed after the A counter reaches 40.
<Driving Pattern B>
Driving pattern B means operating vehicle as per the following:
• The B counter will be counted up when driving pattern B is satisfied without any malfunctions.
• The MIL will turn off when the B counter reaches 3 (*2 in “OBD SYSTEM OPERATION CHART”).
CONSULT-III Function (ENGINE) INFOID:0000000004053289
FUNCTION
Diagnostic test mode Function

This mode enables a technician to adjust some devices faster and more accurately by following the in-
Work support
dications on the CONSULT-III unit.
Self-diagnostic results such as 1st trip DTC, DTCs and 1st trip freeze frame data or freeze frame data
Self-diagnostic results
can be read and erased quickly.*
Data monitor Input/Output data in the ECM can be read.
Diagnostic Test Mode in which CONSULT-III drives some actuators apart from the ECMs and also
Active test
shifts some parameters in a specified range.
Function test This mode is used to inform customers when their vehicle requires periodic maintenance.
DTC & SRT confirmation The status of system monitoring tests and the self-diagnosis status/results can be confirmed.
ECU part number ECM part number can be read.
*: The following emission-related diagnostic information is cleared when the ECM memory is erased.
• Diagnostic trouble codes
• 1st trip diagnostic trouble codes
• Freeze frame data
• 1st trip freeze frame data
• System readiness test (SRT) codes
• Test values
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENT PARTS/CONTROL SYSTEMS APPLICATION

DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE A

SELF-DIAGNOSTIC DTC & SRT
RESULTS CONFIRMATION
Item DATA
WORK ACTIVE DTC EC
FREEZE MONI-
SUPPORT TEST SRT WORK
DTC*1 FRAME TOR
STATUS SUP-
DATA*2 PORT
C
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) × × ×
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) × ×
Mass air flow sensor × × D
Engine coolant temperature sensor × × × ×
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 × × × ×
E
Heated oxygen sensor 2 × × × ×
Wheel sensor × × ×
Accelerator pedal position sensor × × F
Throttle position sensor × × ×
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENT PARTS
Fuel tank temperature sensor × × ×

EVAP control system pressure sen- G
× ×
sor
Intake air temperature sensor × × ×
H
INPUT
Knock sensor ×
Refrigerant pressure sensor ×
Closed throttle position switch (accel- I
×
erator pedal position sensor signal)
Air conditioner switch ×
Park/neutral position (PNP) switch × × J
Stop lamp switch × ×
Power steering pressure sensor × ×
Battery voltage ×
K
Load signal ×
Fuel level sensor × × L
Battery current sensor × ×
ASCD steering switch × ×
ASCD brake switch × × M
ASCD clutch switch × ×

DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE
Item DATA
WORK ACTIVE DTC
FREEZE MONI-
DTC*1 FRAME TOR
STATUS SUP-
DATA*2 PORT
Fuel injector × ×
Power transistor (Ignition timing) × ×
Throttle control motor relay × ×

Throttle control motor ×
EVAP canister purge volume control
× × × ×
solenoid valve
Air conditioner relay ×
OUTPUT
Fuel pump relay × × ×

Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater × × ×*3
Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater × × ×*3
EVAP canister vent control valve × × × ×
Intake valve timing control solenoid
× × ×
valve
Alternator × ×
Calculated load value × ×
X: Applicable
*1: This item includes 1st trip DTCs.
*2: This mode includes 1st trip freeze frame data or freeze frame data. The items appear on CONSULT-III screen in freeze frame data
mode only if a 1st trip DTC or DTC is detected. For details, refer to "Freeze Frame Data and 1st Trip Freeze Frame Data".
*3: Always “CMPLT” is displayed.
WORK SUPPORT MODE

Work Item
WORK ITEM CONDITION USAGE

FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE • FUEL PUMP WILL STOP BY TOUCHING “START” DUR- When releasing fuel pressure from
ING IDLING. fuel line
CRANK A FEW TIMES AFTER ENGINE STALLS.
IDLE AIR VOL LEARN • THE IDLE AIR VOLUME THAT KEEPS THE ENGINE When learning the idle air volume
WITHIN THE SPECIFIED RANGE IS MEMORIZED IN
ECM.
SELF-LEARNING CONT • THE COEFFICIENT OF SELF-LEARNING CONTROL When clearing the coefficient of
MIXTURE RATIO RETURNS TO THE ORIGINAL COEF- self-learning control value
FICIENT.

A
EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE CLOSE THE EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE IN When detecting EVAP vapor leak
ORDER TO MAKE EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE UNDER THE in the EVAP system
FOLLOWING CONDITIONS.
• IGN SW ON EC
• ENGINE NOT RUNNING
• AMBIENT TEMPERATURE IS ABOVE 0°C (32°F).
• NO VACUUM AND NO HIGH PRESSURE IN EVAP SYS-
TEM C
• FUEL TANK TEMP. IS MORE THAN 0°C (32°F).
• WITHIN 10 MINUTES AFTER STARTING “EVAP SYS-
TEM CLOSE”
• WHEN TRYING TO EXECUTE “EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE” D
UNDER THE CONDITION EXCEPT ABOVE, CONSULT-
III WILL DISCONTINUE IT AND DISPLAY APPROPRI-
ATE INSTRUCTION.
NOTE:
E
WHEN STARTING ENGINE, CONSULT-III MAY DIS-
PLAY “BATTERY VOLTAGE IS LOW. CHARGE BAT-
TERY”, EVEN WHEN USING A CHARGED BATTERY.
F
VIN REGISTRATION • IN THIS MODE, VIN IS REGISTERED IN ECM When registering VIN in ECM
TARGET IDLE RPM ADJ* • IDLE CONDITION When setting target idle speed
TARGET IGN TIM ADJ* • IDLE CONDITION When adjusting target ignition tim- G
ing
*: This function is not necessary in the usual service procedure.
H
SELF-DIAG RESULTS MODE
Self Diagnostic Item
Regarding items of “DTC and 1st trip DTC”, refer to EC-427, "DTC Index". I
Freeze Frame Data and 1st Trip Freeze Frame Data
Freeze frame data J

Description
item*
DIAG TROUBLE
• The engine control component part/control system has a trouble code that is displayed as PXXXX. (Refer
CODE K
to EC-427, "DTC Index".)
[PXXXX]
FUEL SYS-B1 • “Fuel injection system status” at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
• One of the following made is displayed. L
Mode2: Open loop due to detected system malfunction
Mode3: Open loop due to driving conditions (power enrichment, deceleration enleanment)
FUEL SYS-B2 Mode4: Closed loop - using oxygen sensor(s) as feedback for fuel control
Mode5: Open loop - has not yet satisfied condition to go to closed loop M
CAL/LD VALUE [%] • The calculated load value at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
COOLANT TEMP
• The engine coolant temperature at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
N
[°C] or [°F]
L-FUEL TRM-B1 [%] • “Long-term fuel trim” at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
• The long-term fuel trim indicates much more gradual feedback compensation to the base fuel schedule than O
L-FUEL TRM-B2 [%] short-term fuel trim.
S-FUEL TRM-B1 [%] • “Short-term fuel trim” at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
• The short-term fuel trim indicates dynamic or instantaneous feedback compensation to the base fuel sched- P
S-FUEL TRM-B2 [%] ule.
ENGINE SPEED [rpm] • The engine speed at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
VEHICL SPEED
• The vehicle speed at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
[km/h] or [mph]

Freeze frame data
Description
item*
ABSOL TH-P/S
• The throttle valve opening at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
[%]
B/FUEL SCHDL
• The base fuel schedule at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
[msec]
INT/A TEMP SE
• The intake air temperature at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
[°C] or [°F]
IN MANI PRES [kPa]
COMBUST CONDI- • These items are displayed but are not applicable to this model.
TION
*: The items are the same as those of 1st trip freeze frame data.
DATA MONITOR MODE

Monitored Item
×: Applicable
ECM
MAIN
INPUT
Monitored item [Unit] SIG- Description Remarks
SIG-
NALS
NALS
• Accuracy becomes poor if engine speed
• Indicates the engine speed computed
drops below the idle rpm.
from the signals of the crankshaft position
ENG SPEED [rpm] × × • If the signal is interrupted while the en-
sensor (POS) and camshaft position sen-
gine is running, an abnormal value may
sor (PHASE).
be indicated.
• The signal voltage of the mass air flow • When the engine is stopped, a certain
MAS A/F SE-B1 [V] × ×
sensor is displayed. value is indicated.
• “Base fuel schedule” indicates the fuel in-
jection pulse width programmed into
B/FUEL SCHDL [ms] ×
ECM, prior to any learned on board cor-
rection.
• When the engine is stopped, a certain
• The mean value of the air-fuel ratio feed-
value is indicated.
A/F ALPHA-B1 [%] × back correction factor per cycle is indicat-
• This data also includes the data for the
ed.
air-fuel ratio learning control.
• When the engine coolant temperature
• The engine coolant temperature (deter- sensor is open or short-circulated, ECM
COOLAN TEMP/S [°C]
× × mined by the signal voltage of the engine enters fail-safe mode. The engine coolant
or [°F]
coolant temperature sensor) is displayed. temperature determined by the ECM is
displayed.
• The A/F signal computed from the input
A/F SEN1 (B1) [V] × ×
signal of the A/F sensor 1 is displayed.
• The signal voltage of the heated oxygen
HO2S2 (B1) [V] ×
sensor 2 is displayed.
• Display of heated oxygen sensor 2 signal:
RICH: Means the amount of oxygen after
HO2S2 MNTR (B1) • When the engine is stopped, a certain
× three way catalyst is relatively small.
[RICH/LEAN] value is indicated.
LEAN: Means the amount of oxygen after
three way catalyst is relatively large.
• The vehicle speed computed from the ve-
VHCL SPEED SE [km/
× × hicle speed signal sent from combination
h] or [mph]
meter is displayed.
• The power supply voltage of ECM is dis-
BATTERY VOLT [V] × ×
played.
ACCEL SEN 1 [V] × × • ACCEL SEN 2 signal is converted by
• The accelerator pedal position sensor
ECM internally. Thus, it differs from ECM
ACCEL SEN 2 [V] × signal voltage is displayed.
terminal voltage signal.

ECM
MAIN
INPUT A
SIG-
NALS
NALS
TP SEN 1-B1 [V] × × • TP SEN 2 signal is converted by ECM in- EC
• The throttle position sensor signal voltage
ternally. Thus, it differs from ECM termi-
TP SEN 2-B1 [V] × is displayed.
nal voltage signal.
• The fuel temperature (determined by the
FUEL T/TMP SE
× signal voltage of the fuel tank tempera-
C
[°C] or [°F]
ture sensor) is displayed.
• The intake air temperature (determined
INT/A TEMP SE D
× × by the signal voltage of the intake air tem-
[°C] or [°F]
perature sensor) is indicated.
• The signal voltage of EVAP control sys-
EVAP SYS PRES [V] ×
tem pressure sensor is displayed. E
• The signal voltage of the fuel level sensor
FUEL LEVEL SE [V] ×
is displayed.
• Indicates start signal status [ON/OFF] F
START SIGNAL computed by the ECM according to the • After starting the engine, [OFF] is dis-
× ×
[ON/OFF] signals of engine speed and battery volt- played regardless of the starter signal.
age.
G
• Indicates idle position [ON/OFF] comput-
CLSD THL POS
× × ed by ECM according to the accelerator
[ON/OFF]
pedal position sensor signal.
• Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of the air H
AIR COND SIG
× × conditioner switch as determined by the
[ON/OFF]
air conditioner signal.
P/N POSI SW • Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the I
× ×
[ON/OFF] park/neutral position (PNP) switch signal.
• [ON/OFF] condition of the power steering
PW/ST SIGNAL system (determined by the signal voltage J
× ×
[ON/OFF] of the power steering pressure sensor
signal) is indicated.
• Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the
LOAD SIGNAL electrical load signal.
K
× ×
[ON/OFF] ON: Lighting switch is in 2nd position.
OFF: Lighting switch is OFF.
IGNITION SW • Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from igni- L
×
[ON/OFF] tion switch.
HEATER FAN SW [ON/ • Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the
×
OFF] heater fan switch signal. M
BRAKE SW • Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the
×
[ON/OFF] stop lamp switch signal.
• Indicates the actual fuel injection pulse
N
INJ PULSE-B1 [msec] × width compensated by ECM according to
computed value is indicated.
the input signals.
• Indicates the ignition timing computed by • When the engine is stopped, a certain O
IGN TIMING [BTDC] ×
ECM according to the input signals. value is indicated.
• “Calculated load value” indicates the val-
CAL/LD VALUE [%] ue of the current airflow divided by peak
airflow. P
• Indicates the mass airflow computed by
MASS AIRFLOW [g·m/
ECM according to the signal voltage of
s]
the mass air flow sensor.

ECM
MAIN
INPUT
SIG-
NALS
NALS
• Indicates the EVAP canister purge vol-
ume control solenoid valve control value
computed by the ECM according to the
PURG VOL C/V [%]
input signals.
• The opening becomes larger as the value
increases.
• Indicates [°CA] of intake camshaft ad-
INT/V TIM (B1) [°CA]
vanced angle.
• The control value of the intake valve tim-
ing control solenoid valve (determined by
ECM according to the input signal) is indi-
INT/V SOL (B1) [%]
cated.
• The advance angle becomes larger as
the value increases.
• The air conditioner relay control condition
AIR COND RLY
× (determined by ECM according to the in-
[ON/OFF]
put signals) is indicated.
• Indicates the fuel pump relay control con-
FUEL PUMP RLY [ON/
× dition determined by ECM according to
OFF]
the input signals.
• The control condition of the EVAP canis-
ter vent control valve (determined by
VENT CONT/V ECM according to the input signals) is in-
[ON/OFF] dicated.
ON: Closed
OFF: Open
• Indicates the throttle control motor relay
THRTL RELAY
× control condition determined by the ECM
[ON/OFF]
according to the input signals.
• Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of heated
HO2S2 HTR (B1) [ON/
oxygen sensor 2 heater determined by
OFF]
ECM according to the input signals.
VEHICLE SPEED • Indicates the vehicle speed computed
×
[km/h] or [MPH] from the revolution sensor signal.
• Display the condition of idle air volume
learning
IDL A/V LEARN YET: Idle Air Volume Learning has not
[YET/CMPLT] been performed yet.
CMPLT: Idle Air Volume Learning has al-
ready been performed successfully.
TRVL AFTER MIL [km]
• Distance traveled while MIL is activated.
or [mile]
• Indicates A/F sensor 1 heater control val-
ue computed by ECM according to the in-
A/F S1 HTR (B1) [%] put signals.
• The current flow to the heater becomes
larger as the value increases.
• The signal voltage from the refrigerant
AC PRESS SEN [V] ×
pressure sensor is displayed.
• The vehicle speed computed from the ve-
VHCL SPEED SE
× hicle speed signal sent from TCM is dis-
[km/h] or [MPH]
played.
SET VHCL SPD
× • The preset vehicle speed is displayed.
[km/h] or [mph]

ECM
MAIN
INPUT A
SIG-
NALS
NALS
MAIN SW • Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from MAIN EC
×
[ON/OFF] switch signal.
CANCEL SW • Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from CAN-
×
[ON/OFF] CEL switch signal.
C
RESUME/ACC SW • Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from RE-
×
[ON/OFF] SUME/ACCELERATE switch signal.
SET SW • Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from SET/ D
×
[ON/OFF] COAST switch signal.
• Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from ASCD
BRAKE SW1
× brake switch signal, and ASCD clutch
[ON/OFF] E
switch signal.
BRAKE SW2 • Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of stop
×
[ON/OFF] lamp switch signal.
• Indicates the vehicle cruise condition.
F
NON: Vehicle speed is maintained at the
VHCL SPD CUT ASCD set speed.
[NON/CUT] CUT: Vehicle speed increased to exces- G
sively high compared with the ASCD set
speed, and ASCD operation is cut off.
NON: Vehicle speed is maintained at the H
LO SPEED CUT ASCD set speed.
[NON/CUT] CUT: Vehicle speed decreased to exces-
sively low compared with the ASCD set
I
speed, and ASCD operation is cut off.
• Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of A/T O/D
AT OD MONITOR • For M/T models always “OFF” is dis-
according to the input signal from the
[ON/OFF] played. J
TCM.
AT OD CANCEL • Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of A/T O/D • For M/T models always “OFF” is dis-
[ON/OFF] cancel signal sent from the TCM. played.
• Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of CRUISE
K
CRUISE LAMP
lamp determined by the ECM according
[ON/OFF]
to the input signals.
• Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of SET L
SET LAMP
lamp determined by the ECM according
[ON/OFF]
to the input signals.
• Indicates the duty ratio of the power gen- M
eration command value. The ratio is cal-
ALT DUTY [%]
culated by ECM based on the battery
current sensor signal.
N
• Indicates the correction factor stored in
ECM.
The factor is calculated from the differ-
A/F ADJ-B1
ence between the target air-fuel ratio O
stored in ECM and the air-fuel ratio calcu-
lated form A/F sensor 1 signal.
• The signal voltage of battery current sen-
BAT CUR SEN [mV] P
sor is displayed.

ECM
MAIN
INPUT
SIG-
NALS
NALS
• The control condition of the power gener-
ation voltage variable control (determined
by ECM according to the input signals) is
ALT DUTY SIG indicated.
[ON/OFF] ON: Power generation voltage variable
control is active
OFF: Power generation voltage variable
control is inactive.
• indicates the engine speed computed
I/P PULLY SPD
from the turbine revolution sensor signal.
ACTIVE TEST MODE

Test Item
TEST ITEM CONDITION JUDGEMENT CHECK ITEM (REMEDY)

• Engine: Return to the original
• Harness and connectors
FUEL INJEC- trouble condition If trouble symptom disappears, see
• Fuel injector
TION • Change the amount of fuel injec- CHECK ITEM.
• A/F sensor 1
tion using CONSULT-III.
trouble condition
IGNITION TIM- If trouble symptom disappears, see
• Timing light: Set • Perform Idle Air Volume Learning.
ING CHECK ITEM.
• Retard the ignition timing using
CONSULT-III.
• Engine: After warming up, idle the
engine.
• Compression
• A/C switch OFF
POWER BAL- • Fuel injector
• Shift lever: P or N (A/T), Neutral Engine runs rough or dies.
ANCE • Power transistor
(M/T)
• Spark plug
• Cut off each injector signal one at
• Ignition coil
a time using CONSULT-III.
• Engine: Return to the original • Harness and connectors
ENG COOLANT trouble condition If trouble symptom disappears, see • Engine coolant temperature sen-
TEMP • Change the engine coolant tem- CHECK ITEM. sor
perature using CONSULT-III. • Fuel injector
• Ignition switch: ON
(Engine stopped)
FUEL PUMP RE- Fuel pump relay makes the operat- • Harness and connectors
• Turn the fuel pump relay ON and
LAY ing sound. • Fuel pump relay
OFF using CONSULT-III and lis-
ten to operating sound.
• Engine: After warming up, run en-
gine at 1,500 rpm.
PURG VOL • Change the EVAP canister purge Engine speed changes according to • Harness and connectors
CONT/V volume control solenoid valve the opening percent. • Solenoid valve
opening percent using CON-
SULT-III.
FUEL/T TEMP
• Change the fuel tank temperature using CONSULT-III.
SEN
• Ignition switch: ON (Engine
stopped)
VENT CON- Solenoid valve makes an operating • Harness and connectors
• Turn solenoid valve ON and OFF
TROL/V sound. • Solenoid valve
with the CONSULT-III and listen
to operating sound.

A
V/T ASSIGN AN- trouble condition If trouble symptom disappears, see
• Intake valve timing control sole-
GLE • Change intake valve timing using CHECK ITEM.
noid valve
CONSULT-III. EC
• Engine: Idle • Harness and connectors
ALTERNATOR
• Change duty ratio using CON- Battery voltage changes. • IPDM E/R
DUTY
SULT-III. • Alternator
C
DTC & SRT CONFIRMATION MODE
SRT STATUS Mode
D
For details, refer to EC-427, "DTC Index".
SRT WORK SUPPORT Mode
This mode enables a technician to drive a vehicle to set the SRT while monitoring the SRT status. E
DTC WORK SUPPORT Mode
Test mode Test item Corresponding DTC No. Reference page F

PURG FLOW P0441 P0441 EC-212
P0442 EC-218
EVAPORATIVE SYS- EVP SML LEAK P0442/P1442* G
P0455 EC-252
TEM
EVP V/S LEAK P0456/P1456* P0456 EC-260
PURG VOL CN/V P1444 P0443 EC-224 H
A/F SEN1 (B1) P1276 P0130 EC-139
A/F SEN1
A/F SEN1 (B1) P1278/P1279 P0133 EC-149
HO2S2 (B1) P0139 P0139 EC-166 I
HO2S2 HO2S2 (B1) P1146 P0138 ]EC-160
HO2S2 (B1) P1147 P0137 ]EC-154
J
*: DTC P1442 and P1456 does not apply to D40 models but appears in DTC WORK SUPPORT MODE screens.
Generic Scan Tool (GST) Function INFOID:0000000004053290

K
DESCRIPTION
Generic Scan Tool (OBDII scan tool) complying with SAE J1978 has
several functions explained below. L
ISO9141 is used as the protocol.
The name “GST” or “Generic Scan Tool” is used in this service man-
ual. M
SEF139P
O
FUNCTION
Diagnostic service Function

P
This diagnostic service gains access to current emission-related data values, including an-
Service $01 READINESS TESTS
alog inputs and outputs, digital inputs and outputs, and system status information.
This diagnostic service gains access to emission-related data value which were stored by
Service $02 (FREEZE DATA)
ECM during the freeze frame. For details, refer to EC-427, "DTC Index" .
This diagnostic service gains access to emission-related power train trouble codes which
Service $03 DTCs
were stored by ECM.

Diagnostic service Function
This diagnostic service can clear all emission-related diagnostic information. This in-
cludes:
• Clear number of diagnostic trouble codes (Service $01)
• Clear diagnostic trouble codes (Service $03)
Service $04 CLEAR DIAG INFO
• Clear trouble code for freeze frame data (Service $01)
• Clear freeze frame data (Service $02)
• Reset status of system monitoring test (Service $01)
• Clear on board monitoring test results (Service $06 and $07)
This diagnostic service accesses the results of on board diagnostic monitoring tests of
Service $06 (ON BOARD TESTS)
specific components/systems that are not continuously monitored.
This diagnostic service enables the off board test drive to obtain test results for emission-
Service $07 (ON BOARD TESTS) related powertrain components/systems that are continuously monitored during normal
driving conditions.
This diagnostic service can close EVAP system in ignition switch ON position (Engine
stopped). When this diagnostic service is performed, EVAP canister vent control valve can
be closed.
In the following conditions, this diagnostic service cannot function.
• Low ambient temperature
Service $08 —
• Low battery voltage
• Engine running
• Ignition switch OFF
• Low fuel temperature
• Too much pressure is applied to EVAP system
This diagnostic service enables the off-board test device to request specific vehicle infor-
Service $09 (CALIBRATION ID)
mation such as Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) and Calibration IDs.
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Connect GST to data link connector, which is located under LH
dash panel near the fuse box cover.
BBIA0538E
4. Enter the program according to instruction on the screen or in

the operation manual.
(*: Regarding GST screens in this section, sample screens are
shown.)
SEF398S

5. Perform each diagnostic service according to each service pro-
cedure. A
For further information, see the GST Operation Manual of the
tool maker.
EC
SEF416S

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE
< COMPONENT DIAGNOSIS > [QR25DE]
COMPONENT DIAGNOSIS
The specification (SP) value indicates the tolerance of the value that is displayed in “DATA MONITOR
(SPEC)” mode of CONSULT-III during normal operation of the Engine Control System. When the value in
“DATAMONITOR (SPEC)” mode is within the SP value, the Engine Control System is confirmed OK. When
the value in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode is NOT within the SP value, the Engine Control System may
have one or more malfunctions.
The SP value is used to detect malfunctions that may affect the Engine Control System, but will not illuminate
the MIL.
The SP value will be displayed for the following three items:
• B/FUEL SCHDL (The fuel injection pulse width programmed into ECM prior to any learned on board correc-
tion)
• A/F ALPHA-B1 (The mean value of air-fuel ratio feedback correction factor per cycle)
• MAS A/F SE-B1 (The signal voltage of the mass air flow sensor)
Testing Condition INFOID:0000000004053292
• Vehicle driven distance: More than 5,000 km (3,107 miles)

• Barometric pressure: 98.3 - 104.3 kPa (1.003 - 1.064 kg/cm2, 14.25 - 15.12 psi)
• Atmospheric temperature: 20 - 30°C (68 - 86°F)
• Engine speed: Idle
- A/T models: After the engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature, drive vehicle until “ATF TEMP
SE 1” (A/T fluid temperature sensor signal) indicates more than 60°C (140°F).
- M/T models: After the engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature, drive vehicle for 5 minutes.
• Electrical load: Not applied
- Air conditioner switch, lighting switch are OFF. Steering wheel is straight ahead.
Inspection Procedure INFOID:0000000004053293
NOTE:
Perform “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode in maximum scale display.
1. Perform EC-19, "Basic Inspection".
2. Confirm that the testing conditions indicated above are met.
3. Select “B/FUEL SCHDL”, “A/F ALPHA-B1” and“MAS A/F SE-B1” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode with
CONSULT-III.
4. Make sure that monitor items are within the SP value.
5. If NG, go to EC-80, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004053294
OVERALL SEQUENCE

EC
PBIB2318E

PBIB3213E
DETAILED PROCEDURE
1.CHECK “A/F ALPHA-B1”
1. Start engine.
2. Confirm that the testing conditions are met. Refer to EC-80, "Testing Condition".
3. Select “A/F ALPHA-B1” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode, and make sure that each indication is within
the SP value.
NOTE:

Check “A/F ALPHA-B1” for approximately 1 minute because they may fluctuate. It is NG if the indication is
out of the SP value even a little. A
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 17.
NG (Less than the SP value)>>GO TO 2. EC
NG (More than the SP value)>>GO TO 3.
2.CHECK “B/FUEL SCHDL”
C
Select “B/FUEL SCHDL” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode, and make sure that indication is within the SP
value.
OK or NG
D
OK >> GO TO 4.
3.CHECK “B/FUEL SCHDL” E
value.
OK or NG F
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG (Less than the SP value)>>GO TO 25. G
1. Stop the engine.
2. Disconnect PCV hose, and then plug it. H
3. Start engine.
the SP value. I
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 6. J
5.CHANGE ENGINE OIL
1. Stop the engine.
2. Change engine oil. K
NOTE:
This symptom may occur when a large amount of gasoline is mixed with engine oil because of driving
conditions (such as when engine oil temperature does not rise enough since a journey distance is too L
short during winter). The symptom will not be detected after changing engine oil or changing driving con-
ditions.
M
>> INSPECTION END
6.CHECK FUEL PRESSURE
N
Check fuel pressure. (Refer to EC-456, "Fuel Pressure Check".)
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9. O
NG (Fuel pressure is too high)>>Replace fuel pressure regulator, refer to EC-456, "Fuel Pressure Check".
GO TO 8.
NG (Fuel pressure is too low)>>GO TO 7.
P
1. Check the following.
- Clogged and bent fuel hose and fuel tube
- Clogged fuel filter
- Fuel pump and its circuit (Refer to EC-381, "Description".)
2. If NG, repair or replace the malfunctioning part. (Refer to EC-456, "Fuel Pressure Check".)
If OK, replace fuel pressure regulator.

>> GO TO 8.
1. Start engine.
the SP value.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 9.
9.PERFORM POWER BALANCE TEST
1. Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
2. Make sure that the each cylinder produces a momentary engine speed drop.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.
NG >> GO TO 10.
1. Check the following below.
- Ignition coil and its circuit (Refer to EC-385, "Component Description".)
- Fuel injector and its circuit (Refer to EC-378, "Component Description".)
- Intake air leakage
- Low compression pressure (Refer to EM-23, "Compression Pressure".)
2. If NG, repair or replace the malfunctioning part.
If OK, replace fuel injector. (It may be caused by leakage from fuel injector or clogging.)
>> GO TO 11.
1. Start engine.
the SP value.
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 12.
12.CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 FUNCTION
Perform all DTC Confirmation Procedure related with A/F sensor 1.
• For DTC P0130, refer to EC-139, "DTC Confirmation Procedure".
• For DTC P2A00, refer to EC-366, "DTC Confirmation Procedure".
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 15.
NG >> GO TO 13.
13.CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT
Perform Diagnostic Procedure according to corresponding DTC.
>> GO TO 14.
1. Start engine.
2. Select “A/F ALPHA-B1” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode, and make sure that indication is within the
SP value.
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 15. A
15.DISCONNECT AND RECONNECT ECM HARNESS CONNECTOR
1. Stop the engine.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check pin terminal and connector for damage, and then reconnect EC
it.
C
>> GO TO 16.
1. Start engine. D
the SP value.
OK or NG E
NG >> Detect malfunctioning part according to EC-445, "Symptom Matrix Chart".
17.CHECK “B/FUEL SCHDL” F
value.
OK or NG G
NG (Less than the SP value)>>GO TO 25. H

1. Check for the cause of large engine friction. Refer to the following. I
- Engine oil level is too high
- Engine oil viscosity
- Belt tension of power steering, alternator, A/C compressor, etc. is excessive
- Noise from engine J
- Noise from transmission, etc.
2. Check for the cause of insufficient combustion. Refer to the following.
- Valve clearance malfunction K
- Intake valve timing control function malfunction
- Camshaft sprocket installation malfunction, etc.
L
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning part, and then GO TO 30.
19.CHECK INTAKE SYSTEM
M
Check for the cause of uneven air flow through mass air flow sensor. Refer to the following.
• Crushed air ducts
• Malfunctioning seal of air cleaner element
• Uneven dirt of air cleaner element N
• Improper specification of intake air system
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 21. O
NG >> Repair or replace malfunctioning part, and then GO TO 20.
20.CHECK “A/F ALPHA-B1” AND “B/FUEL SCHDL”
P
Select “A/F ALPHA-B1” and “B/FUEL SCHDL” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode, and make sure that each
indication is within the SP value.
OK or NG
NG (“B/FUEL SCHDL” is more, “A/F ALPHA-B1” is less than the SP value)>>GO TO 21.
21.DISCONNECT AND RECONNECT MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR HARNESS CONNECTOR
1. Stop the engine.
2. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. Check pin terminal and connector for damage and
then reconnect it again.
>> GO TO 22.
1. Start engine.
the SP value.
OK or NG
OK >> 1. Detect malfunctioning part of mass air flow sensor circuit and repair it. Refer to EC-113.
2. GO TO 29.
NG >> GO TO 23.
23.CHECK “MAS A/F SE-B1”
Select “MAS A/F SE-B1” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode, and make sure that the indication is within the
SP value.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 24.
NG (More than the SP value)>>Replace mass air flow sensor, and then GO TO 29.
24.REPLACE ECM
1. Replace ECM.
2. Perform initialization of NVIS(NATS) system and registration of all NVIS(NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to
SEC-6, "ECM RE-COMMUNICATING FUNCTION : Special Repair Requirement".
>> GO TO 29.
• Malfunctioning seal in air cleaner element
• Uneven dirt in air cleaner element
• Improper specification in intake air system
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 27.
value.
OK or NG
NG (Less than the SP value)>>GO TO 27.
Select “MAS A/F SE-B1” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode, and make sure that indication is within the SP
value.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 28.
NG (Less than the SP value)>>Replace mass air flow sensor, and then GO TO 30.
Check for the cause of air leak after the mass air flow sensor. Refer to the following.
• Disconnection, looseness, and cracks in air duct A
• Looseness of oil filler cap
• Disconnection of oil level gauge
• Open stuck, breakage, hose disconnection, or cracks in PCV valve
EC
• Disconnection or cracks in EVAP purge hose, stuck open of EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid
valve
• Malfunctioning seal of rocker cover gasket
• Disconnection, looseness, or cracks in hoses, such as a vacuum hose, connecting to intake air system parts C
• Malfunctioning seal in intake air system, etc.
>> GO TO 30. D
29.CHECK “A/F ALPHA-B1” AND “B/FUEL SCHDL”
Select “A/F ALPHA-B1” and “B/FUEL SCHDL” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode, and make sure that each E
indication is within the SP value.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END F
Select “B/FUEL SCHDL” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode, and then make sure that indication is within the G
SP value.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END H

POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
1.INSPECTION START
Start engine.
Is engine running?
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 8.
No >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and then ON.
2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 109 and ground with
CONSULT-III or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.
MBIB0015E

• Fuse block (J/B) connector M4
• 10A fuse (No.1)
• Harness connectors M31, E152
• Harness for open or short between ECM and fuse
>> Repair open circuit, short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
4.CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
2. Loosen and retighten two ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-91, "Ground Inspection".
BBIA0614E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair or replace ground connections.
5.CHECK ECM GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-I
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 1, 115, 116 and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.

3. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG A
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.
6.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART EC

• Harness connectors F32, E2
C
• Harness for open or short between ECM and ground
>> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors. D

7.CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II
1. Reconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON. E
3. Check voltage between IPDM E/R connector E119 terminal 3
and ground with CONSULT-III or tester.
F
OK or NG
OK >> Go to EC-385. G
NG >> GO TO 8.
H
PBIB2658E
8.CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III

I
2. Turn ignition switch ON and then OFF.
3. Check voltage between ECM terminals 119, 120 and ground
with CONSULT-III or tester. J
Voltage: After turning ignition switch OFF, battery

voltage will exist for a few seconds, then K
drop to approximately 0V.
OK or NG
L
OK >> GO TO 13.
NG (Battery voltage does not exist.)>>GO TO 9.
NG (Battery voltage exists for more than a few seconds.)>>GO TO PBIB1630E
11. M
9.CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-IV
N
Voltage: Battery voltage O

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
P
NG >> GO TO 11.
PBIB1191E
10.CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-V


2. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E119.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 119, 120 and IPDM E/R terminal 4.

4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16.
NG >> Repair open circuit, short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
11.CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-VI
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 111 and IPDM E/R terminal 7.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.
12.CHECK 20A FUSE
1. Disconnect 20A fuse (No.53) from IPDM E/R.
2. Check 20A fuse.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16.
NG >> Replace 20A fuse.
Loosen and retighten two ground screws on the body. Refer toEC-91, "Ground Inspection".
BBIA0614E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 14.
14.CHECK ECM GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-II

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16.
NG >> GO TO 15.
• Harness connectors F32, E2 A
>> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors. EC

16.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to GI-49, "Intermittent Incident".
C
OK or NG
OK >> Replace IPDM E/R.
NG >> Repair open circuit, short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. D
Ground Inspection INFOID:0000000004053296
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground E
connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can
become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drasti-
cally affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even F
when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
• Remove the ground bolt or screw. G
• Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
• Clean as required to assure good contact.
• Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
H
• Inspect for “add-on” accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
• If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the
wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eye-
let make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. I
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to PG-26, "Ground Distribution".
PBIB1870E

U0101 CAN COMM CIRCUIT
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle mul-
with 2 communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less
On Board Diagnosis Logic INFOID:0000000004292677
This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic.
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
• CAN communication line between
When ECM is not transmitting or receiving CAN
U0101 Lost communication TCM and ECM
communication signal of OBD (emission related di-
0101 with TCM • CAN communication line open or
agnosis) with TCM for 2 seconds or more.
shorted
DTC Confirmation Procedure INFOID:0000000004428099

2. Check DTC.
3. If DTC is detected, go to EC-93, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Go to LAN-14, "Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart".

A
D
E
• CAN communication line between
When ECM is not transmitting or receiving CAN
U0140 Lost communication BCM and ECM
communication signal of OBD (emission related di-
0140 with BCM • CAN communication line open or F
agnosis) with BCM for 2 seconds or more.
shorted

G
2. Check DTC.
H
I
Go to LAN-14, "Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart".

The MIL will not light up for this self-diagnosis.
When ECM is not transmitting or receiving CAN • Harness or connectors
U1001
CAN communication line communication signal other than OBD (emission- (CAN communication line is open or
1001
related diagnosis) for 2 seconds or more. shorted)

2. Check 1st trip DTC.
3. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-94, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Go to LAN-55, "CAN System Specification Chart".

P0011 IVT CONTROL
P0011 IVT CONTROL
A
EC
Trouble diagnosis
DTC No. DTC detecting condition Possible cause
name
• Crankshaft position sensor (POS) C
• Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
• Intake valve control solenoid valve
P0011 Intake valve timing There is a gap between angle of target and • Accumulation of debris to the signal pick-up
0011 control performance phase-control angle degree. portion of the camshaft D
• Timing chain installation
• Foreign matter caught in the oil groove for in-
take valve timing control
E
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode.
F
Detected items Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
Intake valve timing control The signal is not energized to the solenoid valve and the valve control does not function
G
CAUTION:
Always drive at a safe speed. H
NOTE:
• If DTC P0011 is displayed with DTC P0075, first perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0075. Refer to
EC-104. I
• If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and
wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is between 10V and 16V at J
idle.
WITH CONSULT-III
K
1. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
2. Maintain the following conditions for at least 10 consecutive seconds.
Hold the accelerator pedal as steady as possible. L
ENG SPEED 1,200 - 2,000 rpm (A constant rotation is maintained.)

COOLAN TEMP/S More than 60°C (140°F) M
B/FUEL SCHDL More than 4.3 msec
Shift lever P or N (A/T), Neutral (M/T)
N
3. Stop vehicle with engine running and let engine idle for 10 seconds.
5. If the 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-96, "Diagnosis Procedure". O
If the 1st trip DTC is not detected, go to next step.
P
ENG SPEED 1,200 - 3,175 rpm (A constant rotation is maintained.)
COOLAN TEMP/S 70 - 105°C (158 - 221°F)
Shift lever 1st or 2nd position
Driving vehicle uphill
Driving location uphill (Increased engine load will help maintain the driving
conditions required for this test.)

P0011 IVT CONTROL
8. If the 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-96, "Diagnosis Procedure".
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-III” above.
1.CHECK OIL PRESSURE WARNING LAMP

1. Start engine.
2. Check oil pressure warning lamp and confirm it is not illumi-
nated.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Go to LU-9, "Inspection".
PBIA8559J
2.CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

Refer to EC-97, "Component Inspection".
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Replace intake valve timing control solenoid valve.
3.CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS)
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Replace crankshaft position sensor (POS).
4.CHECK CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE)
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Replace camshaft position sensor (PHASE).
5.CHECK CAMSHAFT (INTAKE)
• Accumulation of debris on the signal plate of camshaft rear end
• Chipping signal plate of camshaft rear end
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Remove debris and clean the signal plate of camshaft
rear end or replace camshaft.
PBIB0565E

Check service records for any recent repairs that may cause timing chain misaligned.
Are there any service records that may cause timing chain misaligned?
Yes or No

P0011 IVT CONTROL
Yes >> Check timing chain installation. Refer to EM-44, "Removal and Installation".
No >> GO TO 7. A
7.CHECK LUBRICATION CIRCUIT
Refer to EM-52, "Removal and Installation".
EC
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Clean lubrication line.
C
Refer toGI-49, "Intermittent Incident".
D
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection INFOID:0000000004053308 E
INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

1. Disconnect intake valve timing control solenoid valve harness connector. F
2. Check resistance between intake valve timing control solenoid
valve as follows.
G
Terminal Resistance
1 and 2 7.0 - 7.7Ω [at 20°C (68°F)]
H
∞Ω
1 or 2 and ground
(Continuity should not exist.)
If NG, replace intake valve timing control solenoid valve.
If OK, go to next step. I
3. Remove intake valve timing control solenoid valve. PBIB0193E
4. Provide 12V DC between intake valve timing control solenoid J

valve terminals and then interrupt it. Make sure that the plunger
moves as shown in the figure.
CAUTION: K
Never apply 12V DC continuously for 5 seconds or more.
Doing so may result in damage to the coil in intake valve
timing control solenoid valve.
If NG, replace intake valve timing control solenoid valve. L
NOTE:
Always replace O-ring when intake valve timing control
solenoid valve is removed. M
PBIB2275E

P0031, P0032 A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
Engine speed Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
1 heater control heater
The ECM performs ON/OFF duty control of the A/F sensor 1 heater corresponding to the engine operating
condition to keep the temperature of A/F sensor 1 element at the specified range.
The current amperage in the air fuel ratio (A/F) • Harness or connectors
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor
P0031 sensor 1 heater circuit is out of the normal range. (The A/F sensor 1 heater circuit is
1 heater control circuit
0031 (An excessively low voltage signal is sent to ECM open or shorted.)
low
through the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater.) • Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater
The current amperage in the air fuel ratio (A/F)
• Harness or connectors
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor sensor 1 heater circuit is out of the normal range.
P0032 (The A/F sensor 1 heater circuit is
1 heater control circuit (An excessively high voltage signal is sent to
0032 shorted.)
high ECM through the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heat-
• Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater
er.)
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is between 10.5V and 16V at
idle.
WITH CONSULT-III
1. Start engine and run it for at least 10 seconds at idle speed.
WITH GST

BBIA0614E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. A
2.CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
EC
1. Disconnect air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 harness connector.
C
E
BBIA0617E
3. Check voltage between A/F sensor 1 terminal 3 and ground with F


G
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3. H
PBIB1683E I
• Harness connectors E2, F32 J
• IPDM E/R harness connector E119
• 15A fuse (No.54)
• Harness for open or short between A/F sensor 1 and fuse K
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.

4.CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT L

M
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 2 and A/F sensor 1 terminal 4.
Continuity should exist. N

OK or NG
O
OK >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER P
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 7.
Perform GI-45, "Work Flow".
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Repair or replace.
7.REPLACE AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1
Replace air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1.
CAUTION:
• Discard any air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m
(19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
• Before installing new air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Heated Oxygen
Sensor Thread Cleaner [commercial service tool (J-43897-18 or J-43897-12)] and approved anti-seize
lubricant (commercial service tool).
>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection INFOID:0000000004053313
AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 HEATER

Check resistance between terminals 3 and 4.
Resistance: 2.3 - 4.3Ω [at 25°C (77°F)]

Check continuity between terminals 3 and 1, 2, 5, 6, terminals 4 and
1, 2, 5, 6.
Continuity should not exist.

If NG, replace the A/F sensor 1.
CAUTION:
• Discard any A/F sensor which has been dropped from a
height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such
as a concrete floor; use a new one.
• Before installing new A/F sensor, clean exhaust system
threads using Heated Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner [com-
mercial service tool (J-43897-18 or J-43897-12)] and approved
anti-seize lubricant (commercial service tool).
PBIB1684E

P0037, P0038 HO2S2 HEATER
A
Sensor Input Signal to ECM ECM Function Actuator

Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) C
Engine speed
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Heated oxygen sensor 2
Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature heater control
D
The ECM performs ON/OFF control of the heated oxygen sensor 2 heater corresponding to the engine speed,
amount of intake air and engine coolant temperature. E
OPERATION
Engine speed Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater F

Above 3,600 rpm OFF
Below 3,600 rpm after the following conditions are met.
• Engine: After warming up G
ON
• Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1
minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load

H
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause I
The current amperage in the heated oxygen sensor • Harness or connectors
P0037 Heated oxygen sensor 2 2 heater circuit is out of the normal range. (The heated oxygen sensor 2 heater
0037 heater control circuit low (An excessively low voltage signal is sent to ECM circuit is open or shorted.) J
through the heated oxygen sensor 2 heater.) • Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater
The current amperage in the heated oxygen sensor • Harness or connectors
P0038 Heated oxygen sensor 2 2 heater circuit is out of the normal range. (The heated oxygen sensor 2 heater
0038 heater control circuit high (An excessively high voltage signal is sent to ECM circuit is shorted.) K
through the heated oxygen sensor 2 heater.) • Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater

L
NOTE:
wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. M
TESTING CONDITION:
idle. N
WITH CONSULT-III
O
3. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no
load.
P
4. Let engine idle for 1 minute.
WITH GST


BBIA0614E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK HO2S2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 harness connector.
BBIA0613E
3. Check voltage between HO2S2 terminal 3 and ground with


OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.
PBIB0112E

• Harness connectors E2, F32
• IPDM E/R connector E119
• 15A fuse (No.54)
• Harness for open or short between heated oxygen sensor 2 and fuse
4.CHECK HO2S2 OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 25 and HO2S2 terminal 2.

Continuity should exist. A

OK or NG
EC
OK >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 HEATER C
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6. D
NG >> Replace heated oxygen sensor 2.
E
>> INSPECTION END F

HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 HEATER G

1. Check resistance between HO2S2 terminals as follows.
H
Terminal No. Resistance
2 and 3 9.9 - 13.3 Ω [at 25°C (77°F)]
1 and 2, 3, 4 ∞Ω I
4 and 1, 2, 3 (Continuity should not exist)
2. If NG, replace heated oxygen sensor 2.

J
CAUTION:
• Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped
from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface
such as a concrete floor; use a new one. K
• Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system
threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner [commercial
service tool (J-43897-18 or J-43897-12)] and approved anti- L
seize lubricant (commercial service tool).
SEF249Y N

P0075 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Intake valve timing control solenoid valve is activated by ON/OFF

pulse duty (ratio) signals from the ECM.
The intake valve timing control solenoid valve changes the oil
amount and direction of flow through intake valve timing control unit
or stops oil flow.
The longer pulse width advances valve angle.
The shorter pulse width retards valve angle.
When ON and OFF pulse widths become equal, the solenoid valve
stops oil pressure flow to fix the intake valve angle at the control
position.
PBIB1842E
P0075 Intake valve timing con- An improper voltage is sent to the ECM through (Intake valve timing control solenoid
0075 trol solenoid valve circuit intake valve timing control solenoid valve. valve circuit is open or shorted.)
• Intake valve timing control solenoid valve
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-III
1. Start engine and let it idle for 5 seconds.
WITH GST
1.CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
2. Disconnect intake valve timing control solenoid valve harness
connector.
BBIA0622E

4. Check voltage between intake valve timing control solenoid
valve terminal 2 and ground with CONSULT-III or tester. A

OK or NG EC
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 2.
C
PBIB0192E
2.DETECT MALFUNCTION PART D

E
• Harness for open or short between intake valve timing control solenoid valve and IPDM E/R
F
3.CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN
AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. G
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 11 and intake valve timing control solenoid valve termi-
nal 1. Refer to Wiring Diagram. H

4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. I
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair open circuit, short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. J
Refer to EC-105, "Component Inspection". K
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Replace intake valve timing control solenoid valve. L
M
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection INFOID:0000000004053323 N

1. Disconnect intake valve timing control solenoid valve harness connector. O

valve as follows.
Terminal Resistance
1 and 2 7.0 - 7.7Ω [at 20°C (68°F)]
∞Ω
1 or 2 and ground
If OK, go to next step.
4. Provide 12V DC between intake valve timing control solenoid

valve terminals and then interrupt it. Make sure that the plunger
CAUTION:
NOTE:
solenoid valve is removed.
PBIB2275E

P0101 MAF SENSOR
P0101 MAF SENSOR
A
The mass air flow sensor (1) is placed in the stream of intake air. It EC
measures the intake flow rate by measuring a part of the entire
intake flow. The mass air flow sensor controls the temperature of the
hot wire to a certain amount. The heat generated by the hot wire is
reduced as the intake air flows around it. The greater air flow, the C
greater the heat loss.
Therefore, the electric current supplied to hot wire is changed to
maintain the temperature of the hot wire as air flow increases. The D
ECM detects the air flow by means of this current change.
PBIA9559J E
F
(The sensor circuit is open or G
shorted.)
A high voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM
A) • Mass air flow sensor
under light load driving condition.
• EVAP control system pressure
sensor
H
Mass air flow sensor cir- • Intake air temperature sensor
P0101
cuit range/performance • Harness or connectors
0101
problem (The sensor circuit is open or I
shorted.)
A low voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM un- • Intake air leaks
B)
der heavy load driving condition. • Mass air flow sensor
• EVAP control system pressure J
sensor
• Intake air temperature sensor
K
Perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A first.

If the DTC cannot be confirmed, perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B. L
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
M
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A
NOTE:
If engine will not start or stop soon, wait at least 10 seconds with engine stopped (Ignition switch ON) instead N
of running engine at idle speed.
With CONSULT-III
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. O
2. Run engine for at least 10 seconds at idle speed.
4. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-109, "Diagnosis Procedure". P
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-III” above.
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
With CONSULT-III
P0101 MAF SENSOR
If engine cannot be started, go to EC-109, "Diagnosis Procedure".
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III.
3. Check the voltage of “MAS A/F SE-B1” with “DATA MONITOR”.
4. Increases engine speed to about 4,000 rpm.
5. Monitor the linear voltage rise in response to engine speed
increases.
If NG, go to EC-109, "Diagnosis Procedure".
If OK, go to following step.
SEF243Y
ENG SPEED More than 2,000 rpm

TP SEN 1-B1 More than 1.5 V
TP SEN 2-B1 More than 1.5 V
Shift lever Suitable position
Driving vehicle uphill (Increased engine load) will help
Driving location
maintain the driving conditions required for this test.
Overall Function Check INFOID:0000000004053327

Use this procedure to check the overall function of the mass air flow sensor circuit. During this check, a 1st trip
DTC might not be confirmed.
With GST
2. Select Service $01 with GST.
3. Check the mass air flow sensor signal with Service $01.
4. Check for linear mass air flow sensor signal value rise in
response to increases to about 4,000 rpm in engine speed.
SEF534P

P0101 MAF SENSOR
A
1.INSPECTION START
Which malfunction (A or B) is duplicated?
EC
A or B
A >> GO TO 3.
B >> GO TO 2.
C
Check the following for connection.
• Air duct D
• Vacuum hoses
• Intake air passage between air duct and intake manifold
OK or NG E
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Reconnect the parts.
3.CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS F
G
BBIA0614E
OK or NG J
OK >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK MAF SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT K
1. Disconnect mass air flow (MAF) sensor harness connector.

2. Turn ignition switch ON. L
BBIA0622E

P0101 MAF SENSOR
3. Check voltage between MAF sensor terminal 2 and ground with

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.
PBIB1168E

• Harness for open or short between IPDM E/R and mass air flow sensor
• Harness for open or short between mass air flow sensor and ECM
>> Repair harness or connectors.

6.CHECK MAF SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
3. Check harness continuity between MAF sensor terminal 3 and ECM terminal 67.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
7.CHECK MAF SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
8.CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Replace intake air temperature sensor.
9.CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
Refer toEC-227, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
10.CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
OK or NG
P0101 MAF SENSOR
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> Replace mass air flow sensor. A
Refer toGI-49, "Intermittent Incident" .
EC
>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection INFOID:0000000004053329 C
MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR

D
With CONSULT-III
1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
2. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. E
3. Connect CONSULT-III and select “DATA MONITOR” mode.
4. Select “MAS A/F SE-B1” and check indication under the following conditions.
F
Condition MAS A/F SE-B1 (V)
Ignition switch ON (Engine stopped.) Approx. 0.4
G
Idle (Engine is warmed-up to normal
0.9 - 1.2
operating temperature.)
2,500 rpm (Engine is warmed-up to
1.5 - 1.9 H
normal operating temperature.)
Idle to about 4,000 rpm 0.9 - 1.2 to Approx. 2.4*
*: Check for linear voltage rise in response to engine being increased to about 4,000 rpm. I
5. If the voltage is out of specification, proceed the following.
a. Check for the cause of uneven air flow through mass air flow sensor. Refer to following.
• Crushed air ducts J
• Uneven dirt of air cleaner element
• Improper specification of intake air system parts
K
b. If NG, repair or replace malfunctioning part and perform step 2 to 4 again.
L
7. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector and reconnect it again.
8. Perform step 2 to 4 again.
9. If NG, clean or replace mass air flow sensor. M
Without CONSULT-III
N
3. Check voltage between ECM terminal 51 (Mass air flow sensor
signal) and ground.
O
Condition Voltage (V)

Ignition switch ON (Engine stopped.) Approx. 0.4 P
0.9 - 1.2
1.5 - 1.9
Idle to about 4,000 rpm 0.9 - 1.2 to Approx. 2.4* PBIB1106E
*: Check for linear voltage rise in response to engine being increased to about 4,000 rpm.

P0101 MAF SENSOR
b. If NG, repair or replace malfunctioning part and perform step 2 and 3 again.
7. Perform step 2 and 3 again.
8. If NG, clean or replace mass air flow sensor.

P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR
A
reduced as the intake air flows around it. The more air, the greater C
the heat loss.
PBIA9559J E
These self-diagnoses have the one trip detection logic. F
Trouble diagnosis
name
G
P0102 Mass air flow sensor An excessively low voltage from the sensor is sent (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
0102 circuit low input to ECM. • Intake air leaks
• Mass air flow sensor H
P0103 Mass air flow sensor An excessively high voltage from the sensor is
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
0103 circuit high input sent to ECM.
• Mass air flow sensor I
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.
J
Mass air flow sensor circuit Engine speed will not rise more than 2,400 rpm due to the fuel cut.
K
NOTE: L
PROCEDURE FOR DTC P0102 M
With CONSULT-III
1. Start engine and wait at least 5 seconds.
2. Check DTC. N
With GST
O
PROCEDURE FOR DTC P0103
With CONSULT-III P
2. Wait at least 5 seconds.
3. Check DTC.
If DTC is not detected, go to next step.
6. Check DTC.
With GST
1.INSPECTION START
Which malfunction (P0102 or P0103) is duplicated?
P0102 or P0103
P0102 >> GO TO 2.
P0103 >> GO TO 3.
• Air duct
• Vacuum hoses
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
BBIA0614E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK MAF SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
BBIA0622E

CONSULT-III or tester. A

OK or NG EC
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.
C
PBIB1168E
5.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART D

E
F
Refer to Wiring Diagram. H

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Repair open circuit, short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. J
K

L
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8. M
Refer to EC-115, "Component Inspection". N
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Replace mass air flow sensor. O

Refer to GI-49, "Intermittent Incident". P
>> INSPECTION END


With CONSULT-III

0.9 - 1.2
1.5 - 1.9
Without CONSULT-III
signal) and ground.
Condition Voltage (V)

Ignition switch ON (Engine stopped.) Approx 0.4
0.9 - 1.2
1.5 - 1.9
b. If NG, repair or replace malfunctioning part and perform step 2 and 3 again.

A
EC

P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR
The intake air temperature sensor is built into the mass air flow sen-
sor (1). The sensor detects intake air temperature and transmits a
signal to the ECM.
The temperature sensing unit uses a thermistor which is sensitive to
the change in temperature. Electrical resistance of the thermistor
decreases in response to the rise in temperature.
PBIA9559J
<Reference data>
Intake air temperature

Voltage* (V) Resistance (kΩ)
[°C(°F)]
25 (77) 3.3 1.800 - 2.200
80 (176) 1.2 0.283 - 0.359
*: This data is reference value and is measured between ECM terminal 34 (Intake air
temperature sensor) and ground.
CAUTION: SEF012P
Never use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output
voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM termi-
nals, such as the ground.
P0112 Intake air temperature An excessively low voltage from the sensor is
0112 sensor circuit low input sent to ECM. • Harness or connectors
P0113 Intake air temperature An excessively high voltage from the sensor is • Intake air temperature sensor
0113 sensor circuit high input sent to ECM.
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-III
WITH GST


A
EC
BBIA0614E
OK or NG D
OK >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT E
1. Disconnect mass air flow sensor (intake air temperature sensor

is built-into) harness connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON. F
BBIA0622E
I
3. Check voltage between mass air flow sensor terminal 5 and
ground.
J
Voltage: Approximately 5V
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3. K
NG >> Repair harness or connectors.
L
PBIB1169E
3.CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
M
3. Check harness continuity between mass air flow sensor terminal 6 and ECM terminal 67.
Refer to Wiring Diagram. N

4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. O
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair open circuit, short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. P
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Replace mass air flow sensor (with intake air temperature sensor).


>> INSPECTION END

INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR

1. Check resistance between mass air flow sensor (1) terminals 5
and 6 under the following conditions.
Intake air temperature [°C (°F)] Resistance (kΩ)

25 (77) 1.800 - 2.200
2. If NG, replace mass air flow sensor (with intake air temperature
sensor).
PBIA9559J
SEF012P

P0116 ECT SENSOR
P0116 ECT SENSOR
A
The engine coolant temperature sensor is used to detect the engine EC

coolant temperature. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from the
ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the engine coolant
temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to
the change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the ther- C
mistor decreases as temperature increases.
SEF594K E
<Reference data>
F
Engine coolant temperature
[°C (°F)]
–10 (14) 4.4 7.0 - 11.4 G
20 (68) 3.5 2.1 - 2.9
50 (122) 2.2 0.68 - 1.00
H
90 (194) 0.9 0.236 - 0.260
*: This data is reference value and is measured between ECM terminal 73 (Engine
SEF012P
coolant temperature sensor) and ground.
CAUTION: I
Never use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
J
NOTE:
• If DTC P0116 is displayed with P0117 or P0118, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0117, K
P0118. Refer to EC-125, "DTC Confirmation Procedure".
• This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic.
L
Engine coolant temperature signal from engine
Engine coolant tempera- • Harness or connectors
P0116 coolant temperature sensor does not fluctuate, M
ture sensor circuit range/ (High or low resistance in the circuit)
0116 even when some time has passed after starting
performance • Engine coolant temperature sensor
the engine with pre-warming up condition.

N
NOTE:
If DTC confirmation procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at O
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, do not add fuel.
P
2. Rev engine up to 2,000 rpm for more than10 minutes.
3. Move the vehicle to a cool place, then stop engine and turn ignition switch OFF.
4. Check resistance between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” terminals 2 and 4.
5. Soak the vehicle until the resistance between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” terminals 2 and 4
becomes 0.5 kΩ higher than the value measured before soaking.
CAUTION:
P0116 ECT SENSOR
Never turn ignition switch ON during soaking.
NOTE:
Soak time changes depending on ambient air temperature. It may take several hours.
6. Start engine and let it idle for 5 minutes.
7. Check DTC.

2. Loosen and retighten ground screws on the body.
Refer to EC-91, "Ground Inspection".
BBIA0614E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Replace engine coolant temperature sensor.
>> INSPECTION END

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR

1. Check resistance between engine coolant temperature sensor
terminals 1 and 2 as shown in the figure.
PBIB2005E

P0116 ECT SENSOR
Engine coolant temperature [°C (°F)] Resistance (kΩ) A

20 (68) 2.1 - 2.9
50 (122) 0.68 - 1.00
EC
90 (194) 0.236 - 0.260
2. If NG, replace engine coolant temperature sensor.
C
SEF012P

P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR
The engine coolant temperature sensor is used to detect the engine

the change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the ther-
SEF594K
<Reference data>
Engine coolant [°C (°F)] Voltage* (V) Resistance (kΩ)

−10 (14) 4.4 7.0 - 11.4
20 (68) 3.5 2.1 - 2.9
50 (122) 2.2 0.68 - 1.00
90 (194) 0.9 0.236 - 0.260
SEF012P
CAUTION:
These self-diagnoses have the one trip detection logic.
DTC No. Trouble Diagnosis Name DTC Detecting Condition Possible Cause
P0117 Engine coolant temperature An excessively low voltage from the sen-
0117 sensor circuit low input sor is sent to ECM. • Harness or connectors
P0118 Engine coolant temperature An excessively high voltage from the sen- • Engine coolant temperature sensor
0118 sensor circuit high input sor is sent to ECM.
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When this malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.

Engine coolant temperature will be determined by ECM based on the following condition.
CONSULT-III displays the engine coolant temperature decided by ECM.
Engine coolant temperature decided
Condition
(CONSULT-III display)
Engine coolant temper- Just as ignition switch is turned ON or START 40°C (104°F)
ature sensor circuit Approx. 4 minutes or more after engine starting. 80°C (176°F)
40 - 80°C (104 - 176°F)
Except as shown above
(Depends on the time)
When the fail-safe system for engine coolant temperature sensor is activated, the cooling fan operates while
engine is running.

A
NOTE:
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. EC
WITH CONSULT-III
2. Check DTC. C
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-III” above. D
E
2. Loosen and retighten two ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-91, "Ground Inspection". F
BBIA0614E
I
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. J
2.CHECK ECT SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor harness
connector. K
BBIA0615E
N
3. Check voltage between ECT sensor terminal 1 and ground with
O
Voltage: Approximately 5 V
OK or NG
P
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair open circuit, short to ground or short to power in
harness or connectors.
PBIB0080E
3.CHECK ECT SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

3. Check harness continuity between ECT sensor terminal 2 and ECM terminal 67.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
>> INSPECTION END


PBIB2005E
<Reference data>
Engine coolant temperature [°C (°F)] Resistance (kΩ)

20 (68) 2.1 - 2.9
50 (122) 0.68 - 1.00
90 (194) 0.236 - 0.260
SEF012P

P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR
A
Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor, EC

throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle position sensor responds to
the throttle valve movement.
The throttle position sensor has two sensors. These sensors are a
kind of potentiometer which transform the throttle valve position into C
output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. The ECM
judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from these sig-
nals and controls the throttle valve opening angle in response to D
driving conditions via the throttle control motor.
PBIB0145E E
P0122 Throttle position sensor An excessively low voltage from the TP • Harness or connectors G
0122 2 circuit low input sensor 2 is sent to ECM. (The TP sensor 2 circuit is open or shorted.)
(APP sensor 2 circuit is shorted.)
• Electric throttle control actuator
P0123 Throttle position sensor An excessively high voltage from the TP H
(TP sensor 2)
0123 2 circuit high input sensor 2 is sent to ECM. • Accelerator pedal position sensor
(APP sensor 2)
I
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.
J
Engine operation condition in fail-safe mode
The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in order for the idle position to be within +10
degrees.
K
The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal condition.
So, the acceleration will be poor.
DTC Confirmation Procedure INFOID:0000000004053347 L
NOTE:
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. M
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle.
N
WITH CONSULT-III
1. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second.
2. Check DTC. O
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-III” above. P


BBIA0614E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
1. Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector.
BBIA0616E
3. Check voltage between electric throttle control actuator terminal

2 and ground with CONSULT-III or tester.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 3.
PBIB2604E
3.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II

3. Check harness continuity between electric throttle control actuator terminal 2 and ECM terminal 47.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair open circuit.
4.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III
Check harness for short to power and short to ground, between the following terminals.
ECM terminal Sensor terminal

47 Electric throttle control actuator terminal 2
91 APP sensor terminal 1

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. A
NG >> Repair short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
5.CHECK APP SENSOR
EC
Refer to EC-357, "Component Inspection"
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11. C
NG >> GO TO 6.
6.REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY
1. Replace accelerator pedal assembly. D
4. Perform EC-24, "Idle Air Volume Learning". E
>> INSPECTION END

7.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT F

3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 66 and electric throttle control actuator terminal 4. G
Continuity should exist. H

OK or NG
I
OK >> GO TO 8.
8.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT J
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 69 and electric throttle control actuator terminal 3.
K
OK or NG L
OK >> GO TO 9.
M
9.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
OK or NG N
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> GO TO 10.
10.REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR O
1. Replace the electric throttle control actuator.
3. Perform EC-24, "Idle Air Volume Learning". P
>> INSPECTION END


>> INSPECTION END
THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR

4. Set shift lever to D (A/T) or 1st (M/T) position.
5. Check voltage between ECM terminals 50 (TP sensor 1 signal),
69 (TP sensor 2 signal) and ground under the following condi-
tions.
Terminal Accelerator pedal Voltage
50 Fully released More than 0.36V

(Throttle position sensor 1) Fully depressed Less than 4.75V
69 Fully released Less than 4.75V

(Throttle position sensor 2) Fully depressed More than 0.36V
PBIB1060E
6. If NG, replace electric throttle control actuator and go to the next
step.

P0125 ECT SENSOR
P0125 ECT SENSOR
A
NOTE: EC
If DTC P0125 is displayed with P0117 or P0118, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0117 or
P0118. Refer to EC-124.
coolant temperature. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from the C
the change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the ther- D
SEF594K
F
<Reference data> G
Engine coolant
temperature [°C (°F)]
H
−10 (14) 4.4 7.0 - 11.4
20 (68) 3.5 2.1 - 2.9
50 (122) 2.2 0.68 - 1.00 I
90 (194) 0.9 0.236 - 0.260
SEF012P
J
CAUTION:
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. K
L
• Voltage sent to ECM from the sensor is not
Insufficient engine cool- practical, even when some time has passed
• Harness or connectors M
P0125 (High resistance in the circuit)
ant temperature for after starting the engine.
0125 • Engine coolant temperature sensor
closed loop fuel control • Engine coolant temperature is insufficient for
• Thermostat
closed loop fuel control. N
CAUTION: O
Be careful not to overheat engine.
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at P
WITH CONSULT-III
3. Check that “COOLAN TEMP/S” is above 10°C (50°F).
If it is above 10°C (50°F), the test result will be OK.

P0125 ECT SENSOR
If it is below 10°C (50°F), go to following step.
4. Start engine and run it for 65 minutes at idle speed.
If “COOLAN TEMP/S” increases to more than 10°C (50°F) within 65 minutes, stop engine because
the test result will be OK.
WITH GST
Follow the procedure WITH CONSULT-III above.

BBIA0614E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK THERMOSTAT OPERATION
When the engine is cold [lower than 70°C (158°F)] condition, grasp lower radiator hose and confirm the engine
coolant does not flow.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair or replace thermostat. Refer to CO-22, "Removal and Installation Thermostat".
>> INSPECTION END


P0125 ECT SENSOR
terminals 1 and 2 as shown in the figure. A
EC
PBIB2005E
D
<Reference data>
Engine coolant temperature [°C (°F)] Resistance ( kΩ)

E
20 (68) 2.1 - 2.9

50 (122) 0.68 - 1.00
F
90 (194) 0.236 - 0.260
G
SEF012P

P0127 IAT SENSOR
P0127 IAT SENSOR
The intake air temperature sensor is built into mass air flow sensor
(1). The sensor detects intake air temperature and transmits a signal
to the ECM.
decreases in response to the temperature rise.
PBIA9559J
<Reference data>

[°C (°F)]
25 (77) 3.3 1.800 - 2.200
80 (176) 1.2 0.283 - 0.359
CAUTION:
Never use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output SEF012P
voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor.

Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
Rationally incorrect voltage from the sensor is • Harness or connectors
P0127 Intake air temperature
sent to ECM, compared with the voltage signal (The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
0127 too high
from engine coolant temperature sensor. • Intake air temperature sensor
CAUTION:
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
This test may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted in the shop or by driving the vehicle. If a road
test is expected to be easier, it is unnecessary to lift the vehicle.
WITH CONSULT-III
1. Wait until engine coolant temperature is less than 90°C (194°F)
a. Turn ignition switch ON.
b. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III.
c. Check the engine coolant temperature.
d. If the engine coolant temperature is not less than 90°C (194°F), turn ignition switch OFF and cool down
engine.
• Perform the following steps before engine coolant temperature is above 90°C (194°F).

P0127 IAT SENSOR
2. Start engine.
3. Hold vehicle speed at more than 70 km/h (43 MPH) for 100 consecutive seconds. A
EC
WITH GST
Follow the procedure With CONSULT-III above.
C

D
G
BBIA0614E
OK or NG
H
OK >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR I
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3. J
K
>> INSPECTION END L

INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR M

N
Intake air temperature °C (°F) Resistance kΩ
25 (77) 1.800 - 2.200
O
sensor).
P
PBIA9559J

P0127 IAT SENSOR
SEF012P

P0128 THERMOSTAT FUNCTION
A
NOTE: EC
If DTC P0128 is displayed with DTC P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303 or P0304, first perform the trouble
diagnosis for DTC P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304. Refer to EC-191, "DTC Confirmation Proce-
dure".
Engine coolant temperature has not risen enough to open the thermostat even though the engine has run long C
enough.
This is due to a leak in the seal or the thermostat being stuck open.
D
The engine coolant temperature does not • Thermostat
P0128
Thermostat function reach to specified temperature even though • Leakage from sealing portion of thermostat E
0128
the engine has run long enough. • Engine coolant temperature sensor

F
With CONSULT-III G
NOTE:
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. H
TESTING CONDITION:
• For best results, perform at ambient temperature of –10°C (14°F) or higher.
• For best results, perform at engine coolant temperature of –10°C (14°F) to 56°C (133°F).
I
• Before performing the following procedure, do not add fuel.
1. Turn A/C switch OFF.
2. Turn blower fan switch OFF. J
4. Select “COOLAN TEMP/S” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III.
5. Check the indication of “COOLAN TEMP/S”. K
If it is below 56°C (133°F), go to next step.
If it is above 56°C (133°F), cool down the engine to less than 56°C (133°F). then go to next steps.
6. Start engine and drive vehicle for 10 consecutive minutes under the following conditions. L
VHCL SPEED SE More than 56km/h (35 MPH)

CAUTION: M
NOTE:
If “COOLAN TEMP/S” increases to more than 75°C (167°F) within 10 minutes, turn ignition switch N
OFF because the test result will be OK.
8. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-137, "Diagnosis Procedure". O
With GST
P

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK THERMOSTAT
Refer to CO-22, "Removal and Installation Thermostat".
OK or NG
NG >> Replace thermostat.

PBIB2005E
<Reference data>
Engine coolant temperature [°C (°F)] Resistance (kΩ)

20 (68) 2.1 - 2.9
50 (122) 0.68 - 1.00
90 (194) 0.236 - 0.260
SEF012P

P0130 A/F SENSOR 1
P0130 A/F SENSOR 1
A
The A/F sensor 1 is a planar dual-cell limit current sensor. The sen- EC
sor element of the A/F sensor 1 is the combination of a Nernst con-
centration cell (sensor cell) with an oxygen-pump cell, which
transports ions. It has a heater in the element.
The sensor is capable of precise measurement = 1, but also in the C
lean and rich range. Together with its control electronics, the sensor
outputs a clear, continuous signal throughout a wide range (0.7 <
< air). D
The exhaust gas components diffuse through the diffusion gap at the
electrode of the oxygen pump and Nernst concentration cell, where
they are brought to thermodynamic balance. SEF579Z E
An electronic circuit controls the pump current through the oxygen-

pump cell so that the composition of the exhaust gas in the diffusion F
gap remains constant at = 1. Therefore, the A/F sensor 1 is able to
indicate air-fuel ratio by this pumping of current. In addition, a heater
is integrated in the sensor to ensure the required operating tempera-
ture of 700 - 800°C (1,292 - 1,472°F). G
SEF580Z
I
To judge malfunctions, the diagnosis checks that the A/F signal computed by ECM from the air fuel ratio (A/F)
sensor 1 signal fluctuates according to fuel feedback control. J
DTC
Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible Cause
No.
K
The A/F signal computed by ECM from the
A) A/F sensor 1 signal is constantly in a range • Harness or connectors
P0130 other than approx. 1.5V. (A/F sensor 1 circuit is open or
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 circuit L
0130 The A/F signal computed by ECM from the shorted.)
B) A/F sensor 1 signal is constantly approx. • Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
1.5V.
M

N
If the DTC cannot be confirmed, perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B.
NOTE:
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. O
TESTING CONDITION:
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A P
With CONSULT-III
2. Let engine idle for 2 minutes.

P0130 A/F SENSOR 1
With GST
CAUTION:
With CONSULT-III
2. Select “A/F SEN1 (B1)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III.
3. Check “A/F SEN1 (B1)” indication.
If the indication is constantly approx. 1.5V and does not fluctuates, go to EC-140, "Diagnosis Procedure".
If the indication fluctuates around 1.5V, go to next step.
4. Select “A/F SEN1 (B1) P1276” of “A/F SEN1” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-III.
5. Touch “START”.
6. When the following conditions are met, “TESTING” will be displayed on the CONSULT-III screen.
ENG SPEED 1,350 - 3,200 rpm

Vehicle speed More than 64 km/h (40 MPH)
B/FUEL SCHDL 1.0 - 8.0 msec
D position with OD “OFF” (A/T)
Shift lever
4th position (M/T)
If “TESTING” is not displayed after 20 seconds, retry from step 2.
7. Release accelerator pedal fully.

NOTE:
Never apply brake when releasing the accelerator pedal.
8. Make sure that “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”.
If “TESTING” changed to “OUT OF CONDITION”, retry from step 6.
9. Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULT”.
If “NG” is displayed, go to EC-140, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the A/F sensor 1 circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC
might not be confirmed.
With GST
2. Drive the vehicle at a speed of 80 km/h (50 MPH) for a few minutes in the suitable gear position.
3. Set D position with OD “OFF” (A/T) or 4th position (M/T), then release the accelerator pedal fully until the
vehicle speed decreases to 50 km/h (30 MPH).
NOTE:
Never apply brake when releasing the accelerator pedal.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for 5 times.
5. Stop the vehicle and turn ignition switch OFF.
6. Wait at least 10 seconds and restart engine.
8. Stop the vehicle and connect GST to the vehicle.
9. Make sure that no 1st trip DTC is displayed.
If the 1st trip DTC is displayed, go to EC-140, "Diagnosis Procedure".


P0130 A/F SENSOR 1
A
EC
BBIA0614E
OK or NG D
OK >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT E
1. Disconnect A/F sensor 1 harness connector.

F
BBIA0617E
I
3. Check voltage between A/F sensor 1 terminal 3 and ground with
J
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. K
NG >> GO TO 3.
L
PBIB1683E

M
• 15A fuse(No.54) N
• Harness for open or short between A/F sensor 1 and fuse
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors. O

4.CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
P
3. Check harness continuity between the following terminals. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
A/F sensor 1 terminal ECM terminal

1 16
2 75

P0130 A/F SENSOR 1
5 35
6 56

4. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 16, 35, 56, 75 or A/F sensor 1 terminals 1, 2, 5, 6 and
ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
Perform GI-49, "Intermittent Incident".
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
CAUTION:
>> INSPECTION END

P0131 A/F SENSOR 1
P0131 A/F SENSOR 1
A
< air). D

ture of 700 - 800°C (1,292 - 1,472°F). G
SEF580Z

I
To judge the malfunction, the diagnosis checks that the A/F signal computed by ECM from the air fuel ratio (A/
F) sensor 1 signal is not inordinately low. J
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible Cause
• Harness or connectors K
P0131 Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 • The A/F signal computed by ECM from the A/
(A/F sensor 1 circuit is open or shorted.)
0131 circuit low voltage F sensor 1 signal is constantly approx. 0V.
• Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
DTC Confirmation Procedure INFOID:0000000004053371 L
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at M
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10.5V at idle.
N
WITH CONSULT-III
2. Select “A/F SEN1 (B1)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III. O
If the indication is constantly approx. 0V, go to EC-144, "Diagnosis Procedure".
If the indication is not constantly approx. 0V, go to next step.
4. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and then restart engine. P
5. Drive and accelerate vehicle to more than 40 km/h (25 MPH) within 20 seconds after restarting engine.
6. Maintain the following conditions for about 20 consecutive seconds.

VHCL SPEED SE More than 40 km/h (25 MPH)

P0131 A/F SENSOR 1
NOTE:
• Keep the accelerator pedal as steady as possible during cruising.
• If this procedure is not completed within 1 minute after restarting engine at step 4, return to step
4.
8. If 1st trip DTC is displayed, go to EC-144, "Diagnosis Procedure".
WITH GST

BBIA0614E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
BBIA0617E


OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.
PBIB1683E

P0131 A/F SENSOR 1
• IPDM E/R harness connector E119 A
• 15A fuse (No.54)
EC
C
D
1 16
E
2 75
5 35
6 56 F

G
Continuity should not exist. H

OK or NG
I
OK >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT J
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6. K
6.REPLACE AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 L
CAUTION:
M
lubricant (commercial service tool). N
>> INSPECTION END

O

P0132 A/F SENSOR 1
P0132 A/F SENSOR 1
The A/F sensor 1 is a planar dual-cell limit current sensor. The sen-
The sensor is capable of precise measurement = 1, but also in the
< air).
they are brought to thermodynamic balance. SEF579Z

pump cell so that the composition of the exhaust gas in the diffusion
ture of 700 - 800°C (1,292 - 1,472°F).
SEF580Z
F) sensor 1 signal is not inordinately high.
P0132 Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor • The A/F signal computed by ECM from the A/F
0132 1 circuit high voltage sensor 1 signal is constantly approx. 5V.
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
WITH CONSULT-III
2. Select “A/F SEN1 (B1)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III.
4. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and then restart engine.


P0132 A/F SENSOR 1
A
NOTE:
• Keep the accelerator pedal as steady as possible during the cruising.
EC
4.
8. If 1st trip DTC is displayed, go to EC-147, "Diagnosis Procedure". C
WITH GST
1.CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS E

F
BBIA0614E
OK or NG I
OK >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT J

K
BBIA0617E
N
O
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. P
NG >> GO TO 3.
PBIB1683E

P0132 A/F SENSOR 1
• 15A fuse (No.54)


1 16
2 75
5 35
6 56


OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
CAUTION:
>> INSPECTION END

P0133 A/F SENSOR 1
P0133 A/F SENSOR 1
A
< air). D

ture of 700 - 800°C (1,292 - 1,472°F). G
SEF580Z
I
To judge the malfunction of air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1, this diagnosis measures response time of the A/F sig-
nal computed by ECM from the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 signal. The time is compensated by engine operat- J
ing (speed and load), fuel feedback control constant, and the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 temperature index.
Judgment is based on whether the compensated time (the A/F sensor 1 signal cycling time index) is inordi-
nately long or not.
K
L
• The response of the A/F signal computed by
P0133 Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor • Fuel pressure M
ECM from A/F sensor 1 signal takes more than
0133 1 circuit slow response • Fuel Injector
the specified time.
• Intake air leaks
• Exhaust gas leaks
• PCV N
• Mass air flow sensor

O
NOTE:
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. P
TESTING CONDITION:
WITH CONSULT-III
3. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1minute under no load.
P0133 A/F SENSOR 1
5. Select “A/F SEN1(B1) P1278/P1279” of “A/F SEN1” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-III.
If “COMPLETED” appears on CONSULT-III screen, go to step 10.
If “COMPLETED” does not appear on CONSULT-III screen, go to the following steps.
7. After perform the following procedure, “TESTING” will be displayed on the CONSULT-III screen.
a. Increase the engine speed up to between 4,000 and 5,000 rpm and maintain that speed for 10 seconds.
b. Fully release accelerator pedal and then let engine idle for about 10 seconds.
If “TESTING” is not displayed after 10 seconds, refer to EC-400.
8. Wait for about 20 seconds at idle under the condition that “TESTING” is displayed on the CONSULT-III
screen.
9. Make sure that “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”.
If “TESTING” changed to “OUT OF CONDITION”, refer to EC-400.
10. Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULT”.
WITH GST
3. Calculate the total value of “Short term fuel trim” and “Long term fuel trim” indications.
Make sure that the total percentage should be within ±15%.
If OK, go to the following steps.
If NG, check the following.
• Incorrect fuel pressure
• Lack of fuel
• Fuel injector
• Incorrect PCV hose connection
• PCV valve
7. Increase the engine speed up to between 4,000 and 5,000 rpm and maintain that speed for 10 seconds.
8. Fully release accelerator pedal and then let engine idle for about 1 minute.

BBIA0614E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
P0133 A/F SENSOR 1
2.RETIGHTEN AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 A
Loosen and retighten the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1. Refer to EM-
29, "Removal and Installation"
EC
>> GO TO 3.
C
BBIA0617E
3.CHECK EXHAUST GAS LEAK E

1. Start engine and run it at idle.
2. Listen for an exhaust gas leak before three way catalyst (manifold).
F
PBIB1216E
OK or NG I
OK >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK J
Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor.
OK or NG K
OK >> GO TO 5.
5.CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA L
With CONSULT-III
M
2. Select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-III.
3. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR” or “START”.
4. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0172 detected? N
Is it difficult to start engine?
Without CONSULT-III O
P

P0133 A/F SENSOR 1
3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector.
4. Restart engine and let it idle for at least 5 seconds.
5. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness con-
nector.
6. Make sure DTC P0102 is displayed.
7. Erase the DTC memory. Refer to EC-431, "Emission-related
Diagnostic Information".
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0172 detected?
BBIA0622E
Yes or No
Yes >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171 or P0172. Refer to EC-171 or EC-176.
No >> GO TO 6.
BBIA0617E


OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 7.
PBIB1683E

• 15A fuse (No.54)


1 16
2 75

P0133 A/F SENSOR 1
A
5 35
6 56
EC
ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. C

5. Also check harness for short to power. D
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Repair open circuit, short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. E
9.CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 HEATER
Refer to EC-100, "Component Inspection". F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 13. G
H
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> Replace mass air flow sensor.
I
11.CHECK PCV VALVE
OK or NG J
OK >> GO TO 12.
NG >> Repair or replace PCV valve.
12.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT K

OK or NG L
OK >> GO TO 13.
13.REPLACE AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 M
CAUTION:
• Discard any air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m N
Sensor Thread Cleaner [commercial service tool (J-43897-18 or J-43897-12)] and approved anti-seize O
>> INSPECTION END P

P0137 HO2S2
P0137 HO2S2
The heated oxygen sensor 2, after three way catalyst (manifold),

monitors the oxygen level in the exhaust gas.
Even if switching characteristics of the A/F sensor 1 are shifted, the
air-fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric, by the signal from the
heated oxygen sensor 2.
This sensor is made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates volt-
age from approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner condi-
tions.
Under normal conditions the heated oxygen sensor 2 is not used for
engine control operation.
SEF327R
The heated oxygen sensor 2 has a much longer switching time

between rich and lean than the A/F sensor 1. The oxygen storage
capacity before the three way catalyst (manifold) causes the longer
switching time. To judge the malfunctions of heated oxygen sensor
2, ECM monitors whether the maximum voltage of the sensor is suf-
ficiently high during various driving conditions such as fuel cut.
PBIB1921E
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
P0137 Heated oxygen sensor 2 The maximum voltage from the sensor does not • Heated oxygen sensor 2
0137 circuit low voltage reach the specified voltage. • Fuel pressure
• Fuel injector
NOTE:
If DTC confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
WITH CONSULT-III
TESTING CONDITION:
For the best results, perform “DTC WORK SUPPORT” at a temperature of 0 to 30°C (32 to 86°F).
1. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III.
load.
6. Make sure that “COOLAN TEMP/S” indicates more than 70°C (158°F).
If not, warm up engine and go to next step when “COOLAN TEMP/S” indication reaches 70°C (158°F).
7. Open engine hood.
8. Select “HO2S2 (B1) P1147” of “HO2S2” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-III.

P0137 HO2S2
9. Start engine and follow the instruction of CONSULT-III display.
NOTE: A
It will take at most 10 minutes until “COMPLETED” is displayed.
10. Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”.
If “NG” is displayed, refer to EC-155, "Diagnosis Procedure". EC
If “CAN NOT BE DIAGNOSED” is displayed, perform the following.
a. Turn ignition switch OFF and leave the vehicle in a cool place (soak the vehicle).
b. Return to step 1. C
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the heated oxygen sensor 2 circuit. During this check, a 1st D
trip DTC might not be confirmed.
WITH GST
E
3. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no F
load.
4. Let engine idle 1 minute.
5. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 74 (HO2S2 signal) and ground. G
6. Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load
at least 10 times.
(Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.) H
The voltage should be above 0.73V and below 0.18V at least
once during this procedure.
If the voltage can be confirmed in step 6, step 7 is not nec-
essary. I
7. Keep vehicle at idling for 10 minutes, then check the voltage. Or
check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in D
position with OD “OFF”(A/T), 4th gear position (M/T). J
The voltage should be above 0.73V and below 0.18V at least PBIB1197E
8. If NG, go to EC-155, "Diagnosis Procedure". K
1.CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS L

M
BBIA0614E
OK or NG P
OK >> GO TO 2.
2.CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA
With CONSULT-III
P0137 HO2S2
3. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 detected?
Without CONSULT-III
3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector, and restart
and run engine for at least 5 seconds at idle speed.
nector.
6. Erase the DTC memory.
Refer to EC-431, "Emission-related Diagnostic Information".
BBIA0622E
Yes or No
Yes >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171. Refer to EC-171.
No >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK HO2S2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
4. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 78 and HO2S2
terminal 4.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. BBIA0613E
4.CHECK HO2S2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 74 or HO2S2 terminal 1 and ground.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.

P0137 HO2S2
6.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT A

>> INSPECTION END EC

C
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2
With CONSULT-III
1. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III. D
E
load.
F
6. Select “FUEL INJECTION” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode, and select “HO2S2 (B1)” as the monitor item with
CONSULT-III.
7. Check “HO2S2 (B1)” at idle speed when adjusting “FUEL INJECTION” to ±25%.
G
PBIB1920E
“HO2S2 (B1)” should be above 0.73V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is +25%. J
“HO2S2 (B1)” should be below 0.18V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is −25%.
CAUTION:
• Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m K
• Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor
Thread Cleaner [commercial service tool (J-43897-18 or J-43897-12)] and approved anti-seize
lubricant (commercial service tool). L
Without CONSULT-III
1. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. M
load. N
5. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 74 (HO2S2 signal) and ground.
6. Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load O
at least 10 times.
(Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.)
The voltage should be above 0.73V and below 0.18V at least P
If the voltage can be confirmed at step 6, step 7 is not nec-
essary.
7. Keep vehicle at idling for 10 minutes, then check voltage. Or
position with OD “OFF”(A/T), 4th gear position (M/T).
PBIB1197E

P0137 HO2S2
The voltage should be above 0.73V and below 0.18V at least once during this procedure.
CAUTION:
• Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m

P0138 HO2S2
P0138 HO2S2
A
The heated oxygen sensor 2, after three way catalyst (manifold), EC

heated oxygen sensor 2. C
tions. D
SEF327R E
The heated oxygen sensor 2 has a much longer switching time between rich and lean than the air fuel ratio (A/ F
F) sensor 1. The oxygen storage capacity of the three way catalyst (manifold) causes the longer switching
time.
MALFUNCTION A G
To judge the malfunctions of heated oxygen sensor 2, ECM monitors
whether the voltage is unusually high during various driving condi-
tions such as fuel cut. H
J
PBIB1848E
MALFUNCTION B
K
whether the minimum voltage of sensor is sufficiently low during var-
ious driving conditions such as fuel cut.
L
N
PBIB2376E
O
An excessively high voltage from the sensor
A) (The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
is sent to ECM. P
• Heated oxygen sensor 2
P0138 Heated oxygen sensor 2 • Harness or connectors
0138 circuit high voltage (The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
The minimum voltage from the sensor is not
B) • Heated oxygen sensor 2
reached to the specified voltage.
• Fuel pressure
• Fuel injector

P0138 HO2S2

If DTC cannot be confirmed, perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B.
NOTE:
With CONSULT-III
load.
With GST
With CONSULT-III
TESTING CONDITION:
For better results, perform DTC WORK SUPPORT at a temperature of 0 to 30 °C (32 to 86 °F).
load.
9. Start engine and following the instruction of CONSULT-III display.
NOTE:
If “NG” is displayed, refer to EC-161, "Diagnosis Procedure".
b. Return to step 1.
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the heated oxygen sensor 2 circuit. During this check, a 1st
With GST
load.

P0138 HO2S2
5. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 74 (HO2S2 signal) and ground. A
at least 10 times.
(Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.) EC
The voltage should be abobe 0.73V and below 0.18V at least
C
essary.
position (A/T), 4th gear position (M/T). D
The voltage should be abobe 0.73V and below 0.18V at least PBIB1197E
8. If NG, go to EC-161, "Diagnosis Procedure". E
F
2. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-91, "Ground Inspection".
J
BBIA0614E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. K
2.CHECK HO2S2 CONNECTOR FOR WATER L
2. Check that water is not inside connectors.
OK or NG M
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
3.CHECK HO2S2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT N
3. Check harness continuity between HO2S2 terminal 4 and ECM O
terminal 78.
P
OK or NG
NG >> Repair open circuit, short to ground or short to ground or
short to power in harness or connectors.

P0138 HO2S2



OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
>> INSPECTION END

BBIA0614E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
With CONSULT-III
Without CONSULT-III

P0138 HO2S2
and run engine for at least 5 seconds at idle speed. A
nector.
EC
8. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed. C
BBIA0622E
Yes or No D
Yes >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0172. Refer to EC-176.
No >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK HO2S2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT E
3. Disconnect ECM harness connector. F
4. Check harness continuity between HO2S2 terminal 4 and ECM
terminal 78.
Refer to Wiring Diagram. G

5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. H
OK or NG
NG >> Repair open circuit, short to ground or short to power in I
J
Continuity should exist. K

L
M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
N
OK or NG O
OK >> GO TO 6.
P
>> INSPECTION END

P0138 HO2S2

With CONSULT-III
load.
CONSULT-III.
PBIB1920E
“HO2S2 (B1)” should be above 0.73V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is +25%.
CAUTION:
• Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m
Without CONSULT-III
load.
at least 10 times.
essary.
position with OD “OFF” (A/T), 4th gear position (M/T).
CAUTION:
• Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7
in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.

P0138 HO2S2
• Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread
Cleaner [commercial service tool (J-43897-18 or J-43897-12)] and approved anti-seize lubricant A
(commercial service tool).
EC

P0139 HO2S2
P0139 HO2S2
The heated oxygen sensor 2, after three way catalyst (manifold),

heated oxygen sensor 2.
tions.
SEF327R
The heated oxygen sensor 2 has a much longer switching time

between rich and lean than the A/F sensor 1. The oxygen storage
capacity before the three way catalyst (manifold) causes the longer
switching time. To judge the malfunctions of heated oxygen sensor
2, ECM monitors whether the switching response of the sensor's
voltage is faster than specified during various driving conditions such
as fuel cut.
SEF302U
P0139 Heated oxygen sensor 2 It takes more time for the sensor to respond be- • Heated oxygen sensor 2
0139 circuit slow response tween rich and lean than the specified time. • Fuel pressure
• Fuel injector
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-III
TESTING CONDITION:
For better results, perform “DTC WORK SUPPORT” at a temperature of 0 to 30 °C (32 to 86 °F).
load.
If not, warm up engine and go to next step when “COOLAN TEMP/S” indication reaches to 70°C (158°F).
8. Start engine and follow the instruction of CONSULT-III dispiay.

P0139 HO2S2
NOTE:
If will take at most 10 minutes until “COMPLETED” is displayed. A
If “CAN NOT BE DIAGNOSED” is displayed, perform the following. EC
C
trip DTC might not be confirmed. D
WITH GST
1. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. E
load. F
6. Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load G
at least 10 times.
A change of voltage should be more than 0.24V for 1 sec- H
ond during this procedure.
essary.
7. Keep vehicle at idling for 10 minutes, then check the voltage. Or I
A change of voltage should be more than 0.24V for 1 sec- PBIB1197E J
K

L
O
BBIA0614E
OK or NG
P
OK >> GO TO 2.
With CONSULT-III
P0139 HO2S2
Without CONSULT-III
nector.
BBIA0622E
Yes or No
No >> GO TO 3.
4. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 78 and HO2S2
terminal 4.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair open circuit, short to ground or short to power in BBIA0613E


OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.

P0139 HO2S2


C
With CONSULT-III
1. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III. D
E
load.
F
CONSULT-III.
G
PBIB1920E
“HO2S2 (B1)” should be above 0.73V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is +25%. J
CAUTION:
• Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m K
lubricant (commercial service tool). L
Without CONSULT-III
1. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. M
load. N
6. Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load O
at least 10 times.
The voltage should be above 0.73V and below 0.18V at least P
essary.
PBIB1197E

P0139 HO2S2
The voltage should be above 0.73V and below 0.18V at least once during this procedure.
CAUTION:
Cleaner [commercial service tool (J-43897-18 or J-43897-12)] and approved anti-seize lubricant
(commercial service tool).

P0171 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
A
With the Air-Fuel Mixture Ratio Self-Learning Control, the actual mixture ratio can be brought closely to the EC
theoretical mixture ratio based on the mixture ratio feedback signal from A/F sensor 1. The ECM calculates
the necessary compensation to correct the offset between the actual and the theoretical ratios.
In case the amount of the compensation value is extremely large (the actual mixture ratio is too lean), the
ECM judges the condition as the fuel injection system malfunction and illuminates the MIL (2 trip detection C
logic).
ECM D
Sensor Input Signal to ECM Actuator
function
Density of oxygen in exhaust gas Fuel injec-
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 Fuel injector
(Mixture ratio feedback signal) tion control
E
Trouble diagnosis
name F
• Fuel injector
P0171 Fuel injection system
• Fuel injection system does not operate properly.
G
• The amount of mixture ratio compensation is too
0171 too lean • Incorrect fuel pressure
large. (The mixture ratio is too lean.)
• Lack of fuel
I
NOTE:
J
WITH CONSULT-III
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. K
3. Turn ignition switch ON and select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CON-
SULT-III.
4. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”. L
5. Start engine.
If it is difficult to start engine, the fuel injection system has a malfunction.
Performing the following procedure is advised. M
a. Crank engine while depressing accelerator pedal.
NOTE:
When depressing accelerator pedal three-fourths (3/4) or more, the control system does not start the N
engine. Do not depress accelerator pedal too much.
b. If engine starts, go to EC-172, "Diagnosis Procedure".
If engine does not start, check exhaust and intake air leakage visually. O
6. Keep engine at idle for at least 5 minutes.
8. The 1st trip DTC P0171 should be detected at this stage, if a malfunction exists. If so, go to EC-172, P
"Diagnosis Procedure".
NOTE:
If 1st trip DTC is not detected during above procedure, performing the following procedure is advised.
a. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
b. Start engine.
c. Maintain the following conditions for at least 10 consecutive minutes.

Hold the accelerator pedal as steady as possible.
VHCL SPEED SE 50 - 120 km/h (31 - 75 MPH)

CAUTION:
d. Check 1st trip DTC.
e. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-172, "Diagnosis Procedure".
WITH GST
nector.
6. Select Service $03 with GST. Check that DTC P0102 is
detected.
7. Select Service $04 with GST and erase the DTC P0102.
8. Start engine.
If it is difficult to start engine, the fuel injection system has a mal-
function. BBIA0622E
Performing the following procedure is advised.
NOTE:
When depressing accelerator pedal three-fourths (3/4) or more, the control system does not start the
engine. Do not depress accelerator pedal too much.
b. If engine starts, go to EC-172, "Diagnosis Procedure"
If engine does not start, check exhaust and intake air leakage visually.
11. The 1st trip DTC P0171 should be detected at this stage, if a malfunction exists. If so, go to EC-172,
NOTE:
b. Start engine.
c. Maintain the following conditions for at least 10 consecutive minutes.

CAUTION:
d. Check 1st trip DTC.
e. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-172, "Diagnosis Procedure".
1.CHECK EXHAUST GAS LEAK


A
EC
PBIB1216E
OK or NG D
OK >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK E
1. Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor.
2. Check PCV hose connection.
F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
G
3.CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
2. Disconnect A/F sensor 1 harness connector and ECM harness H
connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals and A/F sen-
sor 1 terminals as follows.
I
A/F sensor 1 ECM terminal

J
1 16
2 75
5 35 BBIA0617E K
6 56
L
4. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 16, 35, 56, 75 and ground, or A/F sensor 1 terminals 1,
2, 5, 6 and ground.
M

N
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. O
1. Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to EC-456, "Fuel Pressure Check". P
2. Install fuel pressure gauge kit [SST (J-44321)] and check fuel pressure. Refer to EC-456, "Fuel Pressure
Check".
At idling: Approximately 350 kPa (3.57 kg/cm2, 51 psi)

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.

NG >> GO TO 5.
5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
• Fuel pump and circuit (Refer to EC-381.)
• Fuel pressure regulator (Refer to EC-456, "Fuel Pressure Check".)
• Fuel lines
• Fuel filter for clogging
>> Repair or replace.

With CONSULT-III
1. Install all removed parts.
2. Check “MASS AIR FLOW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III.
At idling: 1.0 - 4.0 g·m/sec

At 2,500 rpm: 4.0 - 12.0 g·m/sec
With GST
2. Check mass air flow sensor signal in Service $01 with GST.
At idling: 1.0 - 4.0 g·m/sec

At 2,500 rpm: 4.0 - 12.0 g·m/sec
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Check connectors for rusted terminals or loose connections in the mass air flow sensor circuit or
grounds. Refer to EC-113, "Component Description".
7.CHECK FUNCTION OF FUEL INJECTOR
With CONSULT-III
1. Start engine.
2. Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-III.
3. Make sure that each circuit produces a momentary engine speed drop.
Without CONSULT-III
1. Start engine.
2. Listen to each fuel injector operating sound.
Clicking noise should be heard.
PBIB1986E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Perform trouble diagnosis for EC-378.
8.CHECK FUEL INJECTOR
1. Confirm that the engine is cooled down and there are no fire hazards near the vehicle.
3. Disconnect fuel injector harness connectors.

4. Remove fuel injector gallery assembly. Refer to EM-38, "Removal and Installation".
Keep fuel hose and all fuel injectors connected to fuel injector gallery. A
The fuel injector harness connectors should remain connected.
5. Disconnect all ignition coil harness connectors.
6. Prepare pans or saucers under each fuel injector.
EC
7. Crank engine for about 3 seconds. Make sure that fuel sprays
out from fuel injectors.
Fuel should be sprayed evenly for each fuel injector. C

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
D
NG >> Replace fuel injectors from which fuel does not spray
out. Always replace O-ring with new ones.
E
PBIB1726E

Perform GI-49, "Intermittent Incident". F
>> INSPECTION END

G

With the Air-Fuel Mixture Ratio Self-Learning Control, the actual mixture ratio can be brought closely to the
theoretical mixture ratio based on the mixture ratio feedback signal from the A/F sensor 1. The ECM calcu-
lates the necessary compensation to correct the offset between the actual and the theoretical ratios.
In case the amount of the compensation value is extremely large (The actual mixture ratio is too rich.), the
ECM judges the condition as the fuel injection system malfunction and lights up the MIL (2 trip detection logic).

Density of oxygen in exhaust gas
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 Fuel injection control Fuel injector
(Mixture ratio feedback signal)
• Fuel injection system does not operate properly. • Fuel injector
P0172 Fuel injection system too
• The amount of mixture ratio compensation is too • Exhaust gas leaks
0172 rich
large. (The mixture ratio is too rich.) • Incorrect fuel pressure
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-III
SULT-III.
5. Start engine.
If it is difficult to start engine, the fuel injection system has a malfunction.
Perform the following procedure is advised.
b. If engine starts, go to EC-177, "Diagnosis Procedure".
If engine does not start, check exhaust and intake air leak visually.
If 1st trip DTC is not detected, performing the following procedure is advised.
b. Start engine and drive the vehicle under the similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data for a certain
time. Refer to the table below.
The similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data means the vehicle operation that the following con-
ditions should be satisfied at the same time.
Engine speed Engine speed in the freeze frame data ± 400 rpm
Vehicle speed Vehicle speed in the freeze frame data ± 10 km/h (6 MPH)

When the freeze frame data shows lower than 70 °C (158 °F),
Engine coolant temperature (T) T should be lower than 70 °C (158 °F). A
condition When the freeze frame data shows higher than or equal to 70 °C (158 °F),
T should be higher than or equal to 70 °C (158 °F).
9. Check 1st trip DTC. EC
10. The 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-177, "Diagnosis Procedure".
C
WITH GST
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. D
3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. Then
restart and run engine for at least 5 seconds at idle speed.
4. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness con- E
nector.
5. Select Service $03 with GST. Make sure DTC P0102 is
detected.
F
7. Start engine again and let it idle for at least 10 minutes.
8. Select Service $07 with GST. The 1st trip DTC P0172 should be G
detected at this stage, if a malfunction exists. If so, go to EC- BBIA0622E
177, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NOTE:
H
b. Start engine and drive the vehicle under the similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data for a certain
I
J
The similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data means the vehicle operation that the following con-
ditions should be satisfied at the same time.
K
Vehicle speed Vehicle speed in the freeze frame data ± 10 km/h (6 MPH)
When the freeze frame data shows lower than 70 °C (158 °F), L
Engine coolant temperature (T) T should be lower than 70 °C (158 °F).
M
9. If it is difficult to start engine at step 7, the fuel injection system has a malfunction.
10. Crank engine while depressing accelerator pedal.
If engine starts, go to EC-177, "Diagnosis Procedure". If engine does not start, remove spark plugs and N
check for fouling, etc.
O
P

PBIB1216E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
2. Disconnect A/F sensor 1 harness connector and ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals and A/F sensor 1 terminals as follows.
A/F sensor 1 ECM terminal

1 16
2 75
5 35
6 56

4. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 16, 35, 56, 75 and ground, or A/F sensor 1 terminals 1,
2, 5, 6 and ground.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
1. Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer toEC-456, "Fuel Pressure Check" .
2. Install fuel pressure gauge kit [SST (J-44321)] and check fuel pressure. Refer toEC-456, "Fuel Pressure
Check".

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.
• Fuel pump and circuit (Refer to EC-381.) A
• Fuel pressure regulator (Refer toEC-456, "Fuel Pressure Check" .)
>> Repair or replace. EC

With CONSULT-III C
D
At idling : 1.0- 4.0 g·m/sec
At 2,500 rpm : 4.0 - 12.0 g·m/sec
With GST E
2. Check mass air flow sensor signal in SERVICE $01 with GST.
F
At idling : 1.0 - 4.0 g·m/sec
At 2,500 rpm : 4.0 - 12.0 g·m/sec
OK or NG G
OK >> GO TO 7.
grounds. Refer to EC-107, "Component Description". H
With CONSULT-III I
1. Start engine.
J
Without CONSULT-III
1. Start engine.
K

L
N
PBIB1986E
OK or NG
O
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Perform trouble diagnosis for EC-378.
8.CHECK FUEL INJECTOR P
1. Remove fuel injector assembly. Refer to EM-38, "Removal and Installation".
Keep fuel hose and all fuel injectors connected to fuel injector gallery.
3. Disconnect all fuel injector harness connectors.
6. Crank engine for about 3 seconds.

Check that fuel does not drip from fuel injector.
OK or NG
OK (Does not drip.)>>GO TO 9.
NG (Drips.)>>Replace the fuel injectors from which fuel is dripping. Always replace O-ring with new one.
>> INSPECTION END

P0181 FTT SENSOR
P0181 FTT SENSOR
A
The fuel tank temperature sensor is used to detect the fuel tempera- EC
ture inside the fuel tank. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from
the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the fuel temper-
ature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the
change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor C
decreases as temperature increases.
BBIA0545E E
<Reference data>
F
Fluid temperature Voltage* Resistance
[°C (°F)] (V) (kΩ)
20 (68) 3.5 2.3 - 2.7 G
50 (122) 2.2 0.79 - 0.90
*: This data is reference value and is measured between ECM terminal 107 (Fuel
tank temperature sensor) and ground. H
CAUTION:
voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. I

Rationally incorrect voltage from the sensor is K
Fuel tank temperature • Harness or connectors
P0181 sent to ECM, compared with the voltage signals
sensor circuit range/per- (The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
0181 from engine coolant temperature sensor and in-
formance • Fuel tank temperature sensor
take air temperature sensor.
L
NOTE: M
N
WITH CONSULT-III
If 1st trip DTC detected, go to EC-182, "Diagnosis Procedure". O
If 1st trip DTC detected, go to following step.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III.
3. Check “COOLAN TEMP/S” value. P
If the “COOLAN TEMP/S” is less than 60°C (140°F), the result will be OK.
If the “COOLAN TEMP/S” is above 60°C (140°F), go to the following steps.
4. Cool engine down until “COOLAN TEMP/S” is less than 60°C (140°F).
WITH GST
P0181 FTT SENSOR

BBIA0614E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK COMBINATION METER FUNCTION
Refer to MWI-3, "Work Flow".
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Go to MWI-33, "Component Inspection".
3.CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
2. Disconnect “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” harness con-
nector.
BBIA0545E
4. Check voltage between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump”
terminal 4 and ground with CONSULT-III or tester.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.
PBIB0932E

• Harness connectors E41, C1
• Harness for open or short between ECM and “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump”

P0181 FTT SENSOR
>> Repair harness or connector.
5.CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT A

2. Disconnect combination meter harness connector.
EC
3. Check harness continuity between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” terminal 2 and combination
meter terminal 9. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist. C

OK or NG
D
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.
• Harness connectors E152, M31 F
• Harness for open or short between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” and combination meter
>> Repair open circuit, short to ground or short to power in harness or connector. G
7.CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR
H
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Replace “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump”.
I
J
>> INSPECTION END
K
FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR

1. Remove fuel level sensor unit. L
2. Check resistance between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump”
terminals 2 and 4 by heating with hot water or heat gun as
shown in the figure. M
Temperature [°C (°F)] Resistance (kΩ

20 (68) 2.3 - 2.7 N
50 (122) 0.79 - 0.90
O
PBIB2663E

P0182, P0183 FTT SENSOR
The fuel tank temperature sensor is used to detect the fuel tempera-
change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor
BBIA0545E
<Reference data>

[°C (°F)] (V) (kΩ)
20 (68) 3.5 2.3 - 2.7
50 (122) 2.2 0.79 - 0.90
*: This data is reference value and is measured between ECM terminal 107 (Fuel
tank temperature sensor) and ground.
CAUTION:

P0182 Fuel tank temperature An excessively low voltage from the sensor is
P0183 Fuel tank temperature An excessively high voltage from the sensor is • Fuel tank temperature sensor
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-III
WITH GST


A
EC
BBIA0614E
OK or NG D
OK >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK COMBINATION METER FUNCTION E
Refer toMWI-3, "Work Flow" .

OK or NG F
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Go to MWI-33, "Component Inspection".
3.CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT G
nector. H
BBIA0545E
K
L
OK or NG
M
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.
N
PBIB0932E
4.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART O

P

5.CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT


OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.
• Harness connectors E152, M31
>> Repair open circuit, short to ground or short to power in harness or connector.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Replace “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump”.
>> INSPECTION END


1. Remove fuel level sensor unit.
shown in the figure.
Temperature [°C (°F)] Resistance (kΩ

20 (68) 2.3 - 2.7
50 (122) 0.79 - 0.90
PBIB2663E

A

The throttle position sensor has the two sensors. These sensors are
a kind of potentiometers which transform the throttle valve position C
into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addi-
tion, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the
throttle valve and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM D
nals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the
throttle valve opening angle properly in response to driving condi-
tion.
PBIB0145E E
F
G
P0222 Throttle position sensor 1 An excessively low voltage from the TP • Harness or connectors
0222 circuit low input sensor 1 is sent to ECM. (The TP sensor 1 circuit is open or shorted.)
• Electric throttle control actuator H
P0223 Throttle position sensor 1 An excessively high voltage from the TP (TP sensor 1)
0223 circuit high input sensor 1 is sent to ECM. • Accelerator pedal position sensor
(APP sensor 2)
I
FAIL-SAFE MODE
J
degrees. K

L
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at M
TESTING CONDITION:
N
WITH CONSULT-III
2. Check DTC. O
WITH GST P


BBIA0614E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
BBIA0616E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 3.
PBIB2604E


OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.


OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. A
5.CHECK APP SENSOR
EC
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11. C
NG >> GO TO 6.
>> INSPECTION END


3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 66 and electric throttle control actuator terminal 4. G

OK or NG
I
OK >> GO TO 8.
K
OK or NG L
OK >> GO TO 9.
M
OK or NG N
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> GO TO 10.
>> INSPECTION END


>> INSPECTION END

5. Check voltage between ECM terminals 50 (TP sensor 1 signal),
tions.


PBIB1060E
step.

P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304 MISFIRE
P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304 MISFIRE
A
When a misfire occurs, engine speed will fluctuate. If the engine speed fluctuates enough to cause the crank- EC
shaft position (CKP) sensor (POS) signal to vary, ECM can determine that a misfire is occurring.
Sensor Input Signal to ECM ECM function

C
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Engine speed On board diagnosis of misfire
The misfire detection logic consists of the following two conditions.
1. One Trip Detection Logic (Three Way Catalyst Damage) D
On the first trip that a misfire condition occurs that can damage the three way catalyst (TWC) due to over-
heating, the MIL will blink.
When a misfire condition occurs, the ECM monitors the CKP sensor (POS) signal every 200 engine revo-
E
lutions for a change.
When the misfire condition decreases to a level that will not damage the TWC, the MIL will turn off.
If another misfire condition occurs that can damage the TWC on a second trip, the MIL will blink.
When the misfire condition decreases to a level that will not damage the TWC, the MIL will remain on. F
If another misfire condition occurs that can damage the TWC, the MIL will begin to blink again.
2. Two Trip Detection Logic (Exhaust quality deterioration)
For misfire conditions that will not damage the TWC (but will affect vehicle emissions), the MIL will only G
light when the misfire is detected on a second trip. During this condition, the ECM monitors the CKP sen-
sor signal every 1,000 engine revolutions.
A misfire malfunction can be detected in any one cylinder or in multiple cylinders.
H
P0300 I
Multiple cylinder misfires detected Multiple cylinder misfire. • Improper spark plug
0300
• Insufficient compression
P0301 • Incorrect fuel pressure
No.1 cylinder misfire detected No. 1 cylinder misfires.
0301 • The fuel injector circuit is open or shorted
J
• Fuel injector
P0302
No. 2 cylinder misfire detected No. 2 cylinder misfires. • Intake air leak
0302
• The ignition signal circuit is open or shorted
P0303 • Lack of fuel K
No. 3 cylinder misfire detected No. 3 cylinder misfires.
0303 • Drive plate or flywheel
P0304
No. 4 cylinder misfire detected No. 4 cylinder misfires. • Incorrect PCV hose connection
0304
L
CAUTION: M
Always drive vehicle in safe manner according to traffic conditions and obey all traffic laws when driv-
ing.
NOTE:
N
WITH CONSULT-III O
3. Restart engine and let it idle for about 15 minutes. P
NOTE:

P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304 MISFIRE
b. Start engine and drive the vehicle under similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data for a certain
Similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data mean that the following conditions should be satisfied at
the same time.
Vehicle speed Vehicle speed in the feaze frame data ± 10 km/h (6 MPH)
Driving time varies according to the engine speed in the freeze frame data.
Engine speed Time

Around 1,000 rpm Approximately 10 minutes
More than 3,000 rpm Approximately 3.5 minutes
WITH GST
1.CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK AND PCV HOSE

1. Start engine and run it at idle speed.
2. Listen for the sound of the intake air leak.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Discover air leak location and repair.
2.CHECK FOR EXHAUST SYSTEM CLOGGING
Stop engine and visually check exhaust tube, three way catalyst and muffler for dents.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair or replace it.
With CONSULT-III
2. Is there any cylinder which does not produce a momentary engine speed drop?
Without CONSULT-III

P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304 MISFIRE
When disconnecting each fuel injector harness connector one at a
time, is there any cylinder which does not produce a momentary A
engine speed drop?
EC
BBIA0604E
D
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 4.
No >> GO TO 9. E
Does each fuel injector make an operating sound at idle? F
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 5.
No >> Check fuel injector(s) and circuit(s). G
PBIB1986E I
5.CHECK FUNCTION OF IGNITION COIL-I
CAUTION:
Never the following procedure in a place with no combusyible objects and good ventilation. J
2. Remove fuel pump fuse in IPDM E/R to release fuel pressure.
NOTE: K
Do not use CONSULT-III to release fuel pressure, or fuel pres-
sure applies again during the following procedure.
3. Start engine.
L
4. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel
pressure.
6. Remove all ignition coil harness connectors to avoid the electri- M
cal discharge from the ignition coils.
7. Remove ignition coil and spark plug of the cylinder to be
BBIA0534E
checked.
N
8. Crank engine for 5 seconds or more to remove combustion gas in the cylinder.
9. Connect spark plug and harness connector to ignition coil.
10. Fix ignition coil using a rope etc. with gap of 13 - 17 mm
between the edge of the spark plug and grounded metal portion O
as shown in the figure.
11. Crank engine for about three seconds, and check whether spark
is generated between the spark plug and the grounded metal P
portion.
Spark should be generated.

CAUTION:
PBIB2325E

P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304 MISFIRE
• Never place the spark plug and the ignition coil within 50 cm (19.7 in) each other. Be careful not
to get an electrical shock while checking, because the electrical discharge voltage becomes 20
kV or more.
• It might damage the ignition coil if the gap of more than 17 mm is made.
NOTE:
When the gap is less than 13 mm, a spark might be generated even if the coil is malfunctioning.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> GO TO 6.
6.CHECK FUNCTION OF IGNITION COIL-II
2. Disconnect spark plug and connect a non-malfunctioning spark plug.
3. Crank engine for about 3 seconds, and recheck whether spark is generated between the spark plug and
the grounded metal portion.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Check ignition coil, power transistor and their circuits.
7.CHECK SPARK PLUG
Check the initial spark plug for fouling, etc.
OK or NG
OK >> Replace spark plug(s) with standard type one(s).
NG >> 1. Repair or clean spark plug.
2. GO TO 8.
SEF156I
8.CHECK FUNCTION OF IGNITION COIL-III

1. Reconnect the initial spark plugs.
the grounded portion.

OK or NG
NG >> Replace spark plug(s) with standard type one(s). For spark plug type.
9.CHECK COMPRESSION PRESSURE
Check compression pressure.
Refer to EM-23, "Compression Pressure".
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> Check pistons, piston rings, valves, valve seats and cylinder head gaskets.
2. Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to EC-456, "Fuel Pressure Check".
3. Install fuel pressure gauge kit [SST (J-44321)] and check fuel pressure. Refer to EC-456, "Fuel Pressure
Check".

P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304 MISFIRE
At idle: Approximately 350 kPa (3.57 kg/cm2, 51 psi) A

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.
EC
NG >> GO TO 11.
Check the following. C
• Fuel pump and circuit.
• Fuel lines
D
>> Repair or replace. E

Check the following items. Refer to EC-19, "Basic Inspection".
F
Items Specifications
Target idle speed G
Ignition timing
H
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13.
NG >> Follow the EC-19, "Basic Inspection".
I
13.CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector and A/F sensor 1 harness J
connector.
3. Check harness continuity between the following terminals. Refer
to Wiring Diagram.
K

1 16 L
2 75
5 35
BBIA0617E M
6 56

N
O
OK or NG P
OK >> GO TO 14.
14.CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 15.
P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304 MISFIRE
NG >> Replace A/F sensor 1.
With CONSULT-III
Check “MASS AIR FLOW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III.

At 2,500 rpm : 4.0 - 12.0 g·m/sec
With GST
Check mass air flow sensor signal in SERVICE $01 with GST.

At 2,500 rpm : 4.0 - 12.0 g·m/sec
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16.
grounds.Refer to EC-107.
16.CHECK SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART
Check items on the rough idle symptom in EC-445, "Symptom Matrix Chart".
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 17.
17.ERASE THE 1ST TRIP DTC
Some tests may cause a 1st trip DTC to be set.
Erase the 1st trip DTC from the ECM memory after performing the tests. Refer to EC-427, "DTC Index".
>> GO TO 18.
>> INSPECTION END

P0327, P0328 KS
P0327, P0328 KS
A
The knock sensor is attached to the cylinder block. It senses engine EC

knocking using a piezoelectric element. A knocking vibration from
the cylinder block is sensed as vibrational pressure. This pressure is
converted into a voltage signal and sent to the ECM.
C
BBIA0618E E
The MIL will not light up for these self-diagnoses. F
DTC No. Trouble Diagnosis Name DTC Detected Condition Possible Cause
P0327 Knock sensor circuit low An excessively low voltage from the sensor is G
0327 input sent to ECM. • Harness or connectors
P0328 Knock sensor circuit high An excessively high voltage from the sensor is • Knock sensor
0328 input sent to ECM. H
NOTE: I
TESTING CONDITION:
J
WITH CONSULT-III
1. Start engine and run it for at least 5 seconds at idle speed. K
L
WITH GST
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004053426 M
1.CHECK KNOCK SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-I
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. N
3. Check resistance between ECM terminal 15 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
NOTE: O
It is necessary to use an ohmmeter which can measure more than 10 MΩ.
Resistance: Approximately 532 - 588 kΩ [at 20°C (68°F)] P

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK KNOCK SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-II

P0327, P0328 KS
1. Disconnect knock sensor harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 15 and knock
sensor terminal 1.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair open circuit, short to ground or short to power in BBIA0618E
3.CHECK KNOCK SENSOR
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Replace knock sensor.
Loosen and retighten two ground screws on the body.
BBIA0614E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK KNOCK SENSOR SHIELD CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
2. Check harness continuity between knock sensor terminal 2 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 7.
• Harness for open or short between knock sensor and ground
>> Repair open circuit or short power in harness or connectors.

>> INSPECTION END

P0327, P0328 KS
A
KNOCK SENSOR
Check resistance between knock sensor terminal 1 and ground.
NOTE: EC
It is necessary to use an ohmmeter which can measure more
than 10 MΩ.
C
Resistance: Approximately 532 - 588kΩ [at 20°C (68°F)]
CAUTION:
Never use any knock sensors that have been dropped or physi- D
cally damaged. Use only new ones.
SEF227W
E

P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS)
The crankshaft position sensor (POS) is located on the cylinder

block rear housing facing the gear teeth (cogs) of the signal plate at
the end of the crankshaft. It detects the fluctuation of the engine rev-
olution.
The sensor consists of a permanent magnet and Hall IC.
When the engine is running, the high and low parts of the teeth
cause the gap with the sensor to change.
The changing gap causes the magnetic field near the sensor to
change.
Due to the changing magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor
changes.
PBIB0562E
The ECM receives the voltage signal and detects the fluctuation of
the engine revolution.
ECM receives the signals as shown in the figure.
PBIB2382E
• The crankshaft position sensor (POS) signal
is not detected by the ECM during the first
few seconds of engine cranking.
• The proper pulse signal from the crankshaft
P0335 Crankshaft position sen- (The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
position sensor (POS) is not sent to ECM
0335 sor (POS) circuit • Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
while the engine is running.
• Signal plate
is not in the normal pattern during engine run-
ning.
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10.5V with igni-
tion switch ON.
WITH CONSULT-III
1. Crank engine for at least 2 seconds and run it for at least 5 seconds at idle speed.
If 1st trip DTC is not detected, go to next step.
4. Maintaining engine speed at more than 800 rpm for at least 5 seconds.
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-III” above. A
EC
2. Loosen and retighten two ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-91, "Ground Inspection". C
BBIA0614E
F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
G
2.CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR (POS) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect crankshaft position (CKP) sensor (POS) harness
connector. H
BBIA0619E
K
3. Check voltage between CKP sensor (POS) terminal 1 and
ground with CONSULT-III or tester.
L
OK or NG
M
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.
N
PBIB0664E

• Harness for open or short between crankshaft position sensor (POS) and ECM P
• Harness for open or short between crankshaft position sensor (POS) and IPDM E/R
4.CHECK CKP (POS) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
2. Check harness continuity between CKP sensor (POS) terminal 3 and ground.


OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.
• Harness for open or short between crankshaft position sensor (POS) and ground.
>> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.

6.CHECK CKP SENSOR (POS) INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 13 and CKP sensor (POS) terminal 2.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Replace crankshaft position sensor (POS).
8.CHECK GEAR TOOTH
Visually check for chipping signal plate gear tooth.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Replace the signal plate.
>> INSPECTION END

CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS)

1. Loosen the fixing bolt of the sensor.
2. Disconnect crankshaft position sensor (POS) harness connector.
3. Remove the sensor.

4. Visually check the sensor for chipping.
A
EC
PBIB0563E
D
5. Check resistance as shown in the figure.
Terminal No. (Polarity) Resistance Ω [at 25°C (77°F)] E

1 (+) - 2 (-)
1 (+) - 3 (-) Except 0 or ∞
F
2 (+) - 3 (-)
6. If NG, replace crankshaft position sensor (POS).
G
PBIB0564E

P0340 CMP SENSOR (PHASE)
The camshaft position sensor (PHASE) senses the retraction with

camshaft (intake) to identify a particular cylinder. The camshaft posi-
tion sensor (PHASE) senses the piston position.
When the crankshaft position sensor (POS) system becomes inoper-
ative, the camshaft position sensor (PHASE) provides various con-
trols of engine parts instead, utilizing timing of cylinder identification
signals.
When engine is running, the high and low parts of the teeth cause
the gap with the sensor to change.
PBIB0562E
change.
Due to the changing magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor changes.
PBIB2382E
• The cylinder No. signal is not sent to ECM for
• Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
the first few seconds during engine cranking.
• Camshaft (Intake)
P0340 Camshaft position sen- • The cylinder No. signal is not set to ECM dur-
• Starter motor (Refer to STR-35, "Remov-
0340 sor (PHASE) circuit ing engine running.
al and Installation (QR25DE)".)
• The cylinder No. signal is not in the normal
• Starting system circuit (Refer to STR-8,
pattern during engine running.
"A/T : System Diagram".)
• Dead (Weak) battery
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
tion switch ON.
WITH CONSULT-III
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-III” above. A
EC
1.CHECK STARTING SYSTEM
Turn ignition switch to START position.
C
Does the engine turn over?
Does the starter motor operate?
Yes or No D
Yes >> GO TO 2.
No >> Check starting system. (Refer to STR-5, "Work Flow".)

F
BBIA0614E
I
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
J
3.CHECK CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR (PHASE) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect camshaft position (CMP) sensor (PHASE) harness
connector. K
BBIA0615E
N
3. Check voltage between CMP sensor (PHASE) terminal 1 and
O
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. P
NG >> GO TO 4.
PBIB0664E

• Harness for open or short between camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and ECM
• Harness for open or short between camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and IPDM E/R
5.CHECK CMP SENSOR (PHASE) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
2. Check harness continuity between CMP sensor (PHASE) terminal 3 and ground.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.
• Harness connector E2, F32
• Harness for open or short between CMP sensor (PHASE) and ground.

7.CHECK CMP SENSOR (PHASE) INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 14 and CMP sensor (PHASE) terminal 2.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Replace camshaft position sensor (PHASE).
• Accumulation of debris to the signal plate of camshaft rear end
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
PBIB0565E


>> INSPECTION END
A
CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE)

EC
2. Disconnect camshaft position sensor (PHASE) harness connector.
3. Remove the sensor. C
F
PBIB0563E
5. Check resistance as shown in the figure. G
Terminal No. (Polarity) Resistance Ω [at 25°C (77°F)]

H
1 (+) - 2 (-)
1 (+) - 3 (-) Except 0 or ∞
2 (+) - 3 (-) I
PBIB0564E
J

P0420 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION
The ECM monitors the switching frequency ratio of air fuel ratio (A/F)
sensor 1 and heated oxygen sensor 2.
A three way catalyst (manifold) with high oxygen storage capacity
will indicate a low switching frequency of heated oxygen sensor 2.
As oxygen storage capacity decreases, the heated oxygen sensor 2
switching frequency will increase.
When the frequency ratio of air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 and heated
oxygen sensor 2 approaches a specified limit value, the three way
catalyst (manifold) malfunction is diagnosed.
PBIB2377E
• Three way catalyst (manifold)
• Exhaust tube
• Three way catalyst (manifold) does not operate
P0420 Catalyst system efficiency properly.
• Fuel injector
0420 below threshold • Three way catalyst (manifold) does not have
• Fuel injector leaks
enough oxygen storage capacity.
• Spark plug
• Improper ignition timing
NOTE:
With CONSULT-III
TESTING CONDITION:
Do not hold engine speed for more than the specified minutes below.
load.
8. Select “DTC & SRT CONFIRMATION” then “SRT WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-III.
9. Rev engine between 2,500 and 3,500 rpm and hold it for 3 consecutive minutes, then release the acceler-
ator pedal completely.
If “INCMP” of “CATALYST” changed to “CMPLT”, go to step 12.
10. Wait 5 seconds at idle.
11. Rev engine between 2,000 and 3,000 rpm and maintain it until “INCMP” of “CATALYST” changes to
“CMPLT” (It will take approximately 5 minutes).
If not “CMPLT”, stop engine and cool it down to less than 70°C (158°F) and then retest step 1.
12. Select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-III.

13. Confirm that the 1st trip DTC is not detected.
If the 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-209, "Diagnosis Procedure".

A
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the three way catalyst (Manifold). During this check, a 1st
EC
With GST
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. C
load.
4. Let engine idle for 1 minute. D
6. Set voltmeter probe between ECM terminal 74 (HO2S2 signal)
and ground. E
7. Keep engine speed at 2,500 rpm constant under no load.
8. Make sure that the voltage does not vary for more than 5 sec-
onds. F
If the voltage fluctuation cycle takes less than 5 seconds, go to
EC-209, "Diagnosis Procedure".
• 1 cycle: 0.6 - 1.0 V → 0 - 0.3 V → 0.6 - 1.0 V
G
PBIB2650E
H
1.CHECK EXHAUST SYSTEM I

Visually check exhaust tubes and muffler for dents.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. J
1. Start engine and run it at idle. K
2. Listen for an exhaust gas leak before the three way catalyst (manifold).
N
PBIB1216E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3. O
3.CHECK INTAKE AIR LEAK P
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.

Target idle speed
Ignition timing
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
1. Stop engine and then turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check voltage between ECM terminals 22, 23, 41, 42 and

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Perform EC-378, "Diagnosis Procedure".
MBIB0030E

CAUTION:
Do the following procedure in the place where ventilation is good without the combustible.
NOTE:
3. Start engine.
pressure.
6. Remove all ignition coil harness connectors to avoid the electri-
BBIA0534E
checked.
between the edge of the spark plug and grounded metal portion
is generated between the spark plug and the grounded metal
portion.

CAUTION:
• Never approach to the spark plug and the ignition coil
within 50cm. Be careful not to get an electrical shock PBIB2325E
while checking, because the electrical discharge voltage

becomes 20kV or more.
• It might cause to damage the ignition coil if the gap of more than 17 mm is taken.
NOTE:
When the gap is less than 13 mm, the spark might be generated even if the coil is malfunctioning.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10. A
NG >> GO TO 7.
EC
2. Disconnect spark plug and connect a known-good spark plug.
the grounded metal portion. C

D
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Check ignition coil, power transistor and their circuits. Refer to EC-385.
E
8.CHECK SPARK PLUG
OK or NG F
OK >> Replace spark plug(s) with standard type one(s).
2. GO TO 9. G
SEF156I
9.CHECK FUNCTION OF IGNITION COIL-III I

the grounded portion. J

K
OK or NG
NG >> Replace spark plug(s) with standard type one(s). For spark plug type.
L
2. Remove fuel injector assembly. Refer to EM-38, "Removal and Installation". M
Keep fuel hose and all fuel injectors connected to fuel injector gallery.
3. Reconnect all fuel injector harness connectors.
N
check that fuel does not drip from fuel injector.
OK or NG
O
OK (Does not drip)>>GO TO 11.
NG (Drips)>>Replace the fuel injector(s) from which fuel is dripping.
11.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT P
PerformGI-49, "Intermittent Incident" .
Trouble is fixed>>INSPECTION END

Trouble is not fixed>>Replace three way catalyst (manifold).

P0441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
NOTE:
If DTC P0441 is displayed with other DTC such as P2122, P2123 P2127, P2128, P2138, first perform
trouble diagnosis for other DTC.
PBIB3640E
In this evaporative emission (EVAP) control system, purge flow occurs during non-closed throttle conditions.
Purge volume is related to air intake volume. Under normal purge conditions (non-closed throttle), the EVAP
canister purge volume control solenoid valve is open to admit purge flow. Purge flow exposes the EVAP con-
trol system pressure sensor to intake manifold vacuum.
Under normal conditions (non-closed throttle), sensor output voltage indicates if pressure drop and purge flow
are adequate. If not, a malfunction is determined.
• EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve stuck closed
• EVAP control system pressure sensor
and the circuit
• Loose, disconnected or improper con-
EVAP control system does not operate properly, nection of rubber tube
P0441 EVAP control system in-
EVAP control system has a leak between intake man- • Blocked rubber tube
0441 correct purge flow
ifold and EVAP control system pressure sensor. • Cracked EVAP canister
• EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve circuit
• Accelerator pedal position sensor
• Blocked purge port
• EVAP canister vent control valve
CAUTION:
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
Always perform test at a temperature of 5°C (41°F) or more.
WITH CONSULT-III
3. Start engine and let it idle for at least 70 seconds. A
4. Select “PURG FLOW P0441” of “EVAPORATIVE SYSTEM” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CON-
SULT-III.
EC
If “COMPLETED” is displayed, go to step 7.
6. When the following conditions are met, “TESTING” will be displayed on the CONSULT-III screen. Main-
tain the conditions continuously until “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”. (It will take at least 35 sec-
onds.) C
Selector lever Suitable position

VHCL SPEED SE 32 - 120 km/h (20 - 75 MPH) D
ENG SPEED 500 - 3,800 rpm
E
COOLAN TEMP/S More than 0°C (32°F)
If TESTING does not change for a long time, retry from step 2.
7. Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. If “NG” is displayed, refer to EC- F
G
Use this procedure to check the overall monitoring function of the EVAP control system purge flow monitoring.
During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed.
H
WITH GST
1. Lift up drive wheels.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds. I
5. Set voltmeter probes to ECM terminals 32 (EVAP control sys-
tem pressure sensor signal) and ground. J
6. Check EVAP control system pressure sensor value at idle
speed and note it.
7. Establish and maintain the following conditions for at least 1
minute. K
Air conditioner switch ON

L
Headlamp switch ON
Engine speed Approx. 3,000 rpm PBIB1109E
Shift lever Any position other than P, N or R M

8. Verify that EVAP control system pressure sensor value stays 0.1V less than the value at idle speed (mea-
sured at step 6) for at least 1 second.
9. If NG, go to EC-213, "Diagnosis Procedure". N
1.CHECK EVAP CANISTER O

2. Check EVAP canister for cracks.
P
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-III)>>GO TO 2.
OK (Without CONSULT-III)>>GO TO 3.
NG >> Replace EVAP canister.
2.CHECK PURGE FLOW
With CONSULT-III

1. Disconnect vacuum hose connected to EVAP canister purge
volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port and install
vacuum gauge.
3. Select “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with
CONSULT-III.
4. Rev engine up to 2,000 rpm.
BBIA0620E
5. Touch “Qd” and “Qu” on CONSULT-III screen to adjust “PURG VOL CONT/V” opening and check vacuum
existence.
PURG VOL CONT/V VACUUM

100% Should exist
0% Should not exist
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 4.
3.CHECK PURGE FLOW
Without CONSULT-III
2. Stop engine.
3. Disconnect vacuum hose connected to EVAP canister purge
volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port and install
vacuum gauge.
Do not depress accelerator pedal even slightly.
5. Check vacuum gauge indication before 60 seconds pass after
starting engine.
Vacuum should not exist.

6. Rev engine up to 2,000 rpm after 100 seconds pass after start-
ing engine. BBIA0620E
Vacuum should exist.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK EVAP PURGE LINE
2. Check EVAP purge line for improper connection or disconnection.
Refer to EC-42, "Description".
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair it.
5.CHECK EVAP PURGE HOSE AND PURGE PORT

1. Disconnect purge hoses connected to EVAP service port A and
EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve B. A
2. Blow air into each hose and EVAP purge port C.
EC
SEF367U
D
3. Check that air flows freely.
OK or NG
E
NG >> Repair or clean hoses and/or purge port.
F
G
SEF368U
6.CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE H

With CONSULT-III
1. Start engine.
2. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-III. Check that engine speed var- I
ies according to the valve opening.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8. J
NG >> GO TO 7.
7.CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
K
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8. L
NG >> Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve.
8.CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR CONNECTOR
1. Disconnect EVAP control system pressure sensor harness connector. M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9. N
9.CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR FUNCTION
O
Refer to DTC Confirmation Procedure for DTC P0452 EC-243, "DTC Confirmation Procedure", P0453 EC-
247, "DTC Confirmation Procedure".
OK or NG
P
OK >> GO TO 10.
10.CHECK RUBBER TUBE FOR CLOGGING
1. Disconnect rubber tube connected to EVAP canister vent control valve.
2. Check the rubber tube for clogging.
OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> Clean the rubber tube using an air blower.
11.CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.
NG >> Replace EVAP canister vent control valve.
Inspect EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube). Check for evidence of leaks.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13.
NG >> Replace it.
13.CLEAN EVAP PURGE LINE
Clean EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) using air blower.
>> GO TO 14.
>> INSPECTION END

A
This diagnosis detects leaks in the EVAP purge line using engine intake manifold vacuum. EC
If pressure does not increase, the ECM will check for leaks in the line between the fuel tank and EVAP canis-
ter purge volume control solenoid valve, under the following Vacuum test conditions.
The EVAP canister vent control valve is closed to shut the EVAP purge line off. The EVAP canister purge vol-
ume control solenoid valve will then be opened to depressurize the EVAP purge line using intake manifold C
vacuum. After this occurs, the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve will be closed.
PBIB3640E
I
• Incorrect fuel tank vacuum relief valve
• Incorrect fuel filler cap used J
• Fuel filler cap remains open or fails to close.
• Foreign matter caught in fuel filler cap.
• Leak is in line between intake manifold and
EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid K
valve.
• Foreign matter caught in EVAP canister vent
control valve.
• EVAP canister or fuel tank leaks
L
• EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) leaks
EVAP control system
P0442 EVAP control system has a leak, EVAP • EVAP purge line rubber tube bent
small leak detected
0442 control system does not operate properly. • Loose or disconnected rubber tube
(negative pressure) M
• EVAP canister vent control valve and the circuit
• EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid
valve and the circuit
• Fuel tank temperature sensor N
• O-ring of EVAP canister vent control valve is
missing or damaged
• EVAP canister is saturated with water
• EVAP control system pressure sensor O
• Fuel level sensor and the circuit
• Refueling EVAP vapor cut valve
• ORVR system leaks
P
CAUTION:
• Use only a genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap as a replacement. If an incorrect fuel filler cap is used, the
MIL may illuminate.
• If the fuel filler cap is not tightened properly, the MIL may illuminate.
• Use only a genuine NISSAN rubber tube as a replacement.

NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
• Perform “DTC WORK SUPPORT” when the fuel level is between 1/4 and 3/4 full, and vehicle is placed
on flat level surface.
• Always perform test at a temperature of 0 to 30°C (32 to 86°F).
WITH CONSULT-III
4. Make sure that the following conditions are met.
COOLAN TEMP/S: 0 - 70°C (32 - 158°F)
INT/A TEMP SE: 0 - 30°C (32 - 86°F)
5. Select “EVAP SML LEAK P0442/P1442” of “EVAPORATIVE SYSTEM” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode
with CONSULT-III.
Follow the instructions displayed.
NOTE:
If the engine speed cannot be maintained within the range displayed on the CONSULT-III screen, go to
EC-19, "Basic Inspection".
6. Make sure that “OK” is displayed.
NOTE:
Make sure that EVAP hoses are connected to the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid
valve properly.
WITH GST
NOTE:
Be sure to read the explanation of EC-47, "Emission-related Diagnostic Information" before driving vehicle.
1. Start engine.
2. Drive vehicle according to EC-47, "Emission-related Diagnostic Information".
3. Stop vehicle.
4. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds and then turn ON.
- If P0442 is displayed on the screen, go to EC-218, "Diagnosis Procedure".
1.CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP DESIGN

2. Check for genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap design.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Replace with genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap.
SEF915U
2.CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP INSTALLATION

Check that the cap is tightened properly by rotating the cap clockwise.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> 1. Open fuel filler cap, then clean cap and fuel filler neck threads using air blower.
2. Retighten until ratcheting sound is heard. A
3.CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP FUNCTION
Check for air releasing sound while opening the fuel filler cap.
EC
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.
C
4.CHECK FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE
OK or NG D
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Replace fuel filler cap with a genuine one.
E
5.INSTALL THE PRESSURE PUMP
To locate the EVAP leak, install EVAP service port adapter and
pressure pump to EVAP service port securely. F
For the location of EVAP service port.
NOTE:
Improper installation of the EVAP service port adapter to the G
EVAP service port may cause leaking.
BBIA0620E
L
SEF916U
With CONSULT-III>>GO TO 6. M
6.CHECK FOR EVAP LEAK
N
With CONSULT-III
2. Select “EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE” of “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-III.
3. Touch “START” and apply pressure into the EVAP line until the pressure indicator reaches the middle of O
the bar graph.
CAUTION:
• Never use compressed air or a high pressure pump. P
• Never exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2, 0.6 psi) of pressure in the system.

4. Using EVAP leak detector, locate the EVAP leak. For the leak
detector, refer to the instruction manual for more details.
Refer to EC-459, "How to Detect Fuel Vapor Leakage".
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
SEF200U

Without CONSULT-III
2. Apply 12 volts DC to EVAP canister vent control valve (1). The
valve will close. (Continue to apply 12 volts until the end of test.)
- EVAP control system pressure sensor (2)
- Drain filter (3)
- EVAP canister (4)
- : Vehicle front
3. Pressurize the EVAP line using pressure pump with 1.3 to 2.7
kPa (10 to 20 mmHg, 0.39 to 0.79 inHg), then remove pump and
EVAP service port adapter.
CAUTION:
• Never use compressed air or a high pressure pump. ALBIA0514ZZ
• Never exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2, 0.6 psi) of pressure

in the system.
detector, refer to the instruction manual for more details. Refer
to EC-459, "How to Detect Fuel Vapor Leakage".
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
SEF200U

Check the following,
• EVAP canister vent control valve is installed properly.
Refer to EC-461, "Removal and Installation".
• EVAP canister vent control valve.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Repair or replace EVAP canister vent control valve and O-ring.
9.CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER IS SATURATED WITH WATER
1. Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor
attached.

2. Does water drain from the EVAP canister?
Yes or No A
Yes >> GO TO 10.
No (With CONSULT-III)>>GO TO 12.
No (Without CONSULT-III)>>GO TO 13. EC
BBIA0558E
10.CHECK EVAP CANISTER D
Weigh the EVAP canister with the EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sen-
sorattached.
E
The weight should be less than 2.0 kg (4.4 lb).
OK or NG
F
NG >> GO TO 11.
11.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART G
• EVAP canister for damage
• EVAP hose connected to EVAP canister and vehicle frame for clogging or poor connection H
>> Repair hose or replace EVAP canister.

12.CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION I
With CONSULT-III
1. Disconnect vacuum hose from EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port. J
2. Start engine.
3. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
4. Touch “Qu” on CONSULT-III screen to increase “PURG VOL CONT/V” opening to 100%.
5. Check vacuum hose for vacuum when revving engine up to 2,000 rpm. K

OK or NG L
OK >> GO TO 15.
NG >> GO TO 14.
M
13.CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION
Without CONSULT-III
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. N
2. Stop engine.
3. Disconnect vacuum hose to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port.
4. Start engine and let it idle for at least 80 seconds. O
5. Check vacuum hose for vacuum when revving engine up to 2,000 rpm.

P
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 15.
NG >> GO TO 14.
14.CHECK VACUUM HOSE
Check vacuum hoses for clogging or disconnection. Refer to EC-42, "Description".
OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 15.
NG >> Repair or reconnect the hose.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 17.
NG >> Replace fuel level sensor unit.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 18.
Check EVAP purge line (pipe, rubber tube, fuel tank and EVAP canister) for cracks or improper connection.
Refer to EC-390.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 19.
>> GO TO 20.
20.CHECK EVAP/ORVR LINE
Check EVAP/ORVR line between EVAP canister and fuel tank for clogging, kinks, looseness and improper
connection. For location, refer to EC-390.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 21.
NG >> Repair or replace hoses and tubes.
21.CHECK RECIRCULATION LINE
Check recirculation line between fuel filler tube and fuel tank for clogging, kinks, cracks, looseness and
improper connection.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 22.
NG >> Repair or replace hoses, tubes or fuel filler tube.
22.CHECK REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 23.
NG >> Replace refueling EVAP vapor cut valve with fuel tank.
23.CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
Refer to MWI-33, "Component Inspection".
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 24.

EC
>> INSPECTION END
C
FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE (BUILT INTO FUEL FILLER CAP)
D
2. Remove fuel filler cap.
3. Wipe clean valve housing.
E
SEF445Y
H
4. Install fuel filler cap adapter (commercial service tool) to fuel filler cap.
5. Check valve opening pressure and vacuum.
I
Pressure: 15.3 - 20.0 kPa
(0.156 - 0.204 kg/cm2, 2.22 - 2.90 psi)
Vacuum: −6.0 to −3.3 kPa J
(−0.061 to −0.034 kg/cm2, −0.87 to −0.48 psi)
6. If out of specification, replace fuel filler cap as an assembly.
K
CAUTION:
Use only a genuine fuel filler cap as a replacement. If an incor- SEF943S
rect fuel filler cap is used, the MIL may illuminate.
L

P0443 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION


EVAP canister purge EVAP canister purge volume
flow control control solenoid valve
Fuel tank temperature sensor Fuel temperature in fuel tank
Wheel sensor Vehicle speed*2
*1: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage.
*2: This signal is sent to the ECM though CAN communication line.
This system controls flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canister. The opening of the vapor by-pass pas-
sage in the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve changes to control the flow rate. The EVAP
canister purge volume control solenoid valve repeats ON/OFF operation according to the signal sent from the
ECM. The opening of the valve varies for optimum engine control. The optimum value stored in the ECM is
determined by considering various engine conditions. When the engine is operating, the flow rate of fuel vapor
from the EVAP canister is regulated as the air flow changes.
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is used to
control the flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canister. The EVAP
canister purge volume control solenoid valve is moved by ON/OFF
pulses from the ECM. The longer the ON pulse, the greater the
amount of fuel vapor that will flow through the valve.
PBIB2057E
• EVAP canister purge volume control so-
lenoid valve
The canister purge flow is detected during the
EVAP canister purge (The valve is stuck open.)
P0443 specified driving conditions, even when EVAP
volume control solenoid • EVAP canister vent control valve
0443 canister purge volume control solenoid valve is
valve • EVAP canister
completely closed.
• Hoses
(Hoses are connected incorrectly or
clogged.)
NOTE:
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. A
TESTING CONDITION:
WITH CONSULT-III EC
C
4. Select “PURG VOL CN/V P1444” of “EVAPORATIVE SYSTEM” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with
CONSULT-III.
D
6. Start engine and let it idle until “TESTING” on CONSULT-III changes to “COMPLETED”. (It will take
approximately 10 seconds.)
E
If “TESTING” is not displayed after 5 minutes, retry from step 2.
7. Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. If “NG” is displayed, refer to EC-
F
WITH GST G
3. Start engine and let it idle for at least 20 seconds. H
I
1.CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT J
2. Disconnect EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
harness connector. K
BBIA0620E
N
4. Check voltage between EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-III or
tester. O

OK or NG P
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 2.
PBIB2651E

• Harness for open or short between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and IPDM E/R
• Harness for open or short between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and ECM

3.CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT
FOR OPEN AND SHORT
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 45 and EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid
valve terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
1. Disconnect EVAP control system pressure sensor harness connector.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
OK or NG
With CONSULT-III
2. Reconnect harness connectors disconnected.
3. Start engine.
4. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-III. Check that engine speed var-
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 7.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.

9.CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE A

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10. EC
C
attached.
Yes or No D
Yes >> GO TO 11.
No >> GO TO 13.
E
BBIA0558E
G
11.CHECK EVAP CANISTER
Weigh the EVAP canister with the EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor
attached. H
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13. I
NG >> GO TO 12.
Check the following. J
• EVAP hose between EVAP canister and vehicle frame for clogging or poor connection
K
13.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT L
>> INSPECTION END M

N
EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
With CONSULT-III
Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control O
solenoid valve under the following conditions.
Condition Air passage continuity P

(PURG VOL CONT/V value) between A and B
100% Yes
0% No
PBIB2058E

Without CONSULT-III
Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control
Air passage continuity

Condition
between A and B
12V direct current supply between
Yes
terminals 1 and 2
No supply No
PBIB2059E

P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE
A
VALVE
EC
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Sensor Input Signal to ECM ECM function Actuator C

D
Battery Battery voltage*1 E
EVAP canister EVAP canister purge volume
purge flow control control solenoid valve
F
G
*2: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line. H
I
J
The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve uses a ON/
OFF duty to control the flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canis-
ter. The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is K
moved by ON/OFF pulses from the ECM. The longer the ON pulse,
the greater the amount of fuel vapor that will flow through the valve.
L
PBIB2057E
On Board Diagnosis Logic INFOID:0000000004053457 N
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause O
EVAP canister purge volume (The solenoid valve circuit is open or
P0444 An excessively low voltage signal is sent
control solenoid valve circuit shorted.)
0444 to ECM through the valve P
open • EVAP canister purge volume control so-
lenoid valve
EVAP canister purge volume
P0445 An excessively high voltage signal is sent (The solenoid valve circuit is shorted.)
control solenoid valve circuit
0445 to ECM through the valve • EVAP canister purge volume control so-
shorted
lenoid valve

VALVE
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm battery voltage is more than 11V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-III
1. Start engine and let it idle for at least 13 seconds.
WITH GST
1.CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
harness connector.
BBIA0620E

tester.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 2.
PBIB2651E


FOR OPEN AND SHORT

VALVE

OK or NG
EC
4.CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION C
With CONSULT-III
1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. D
2. Start engine.
E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.
F
OK or NG G
OK >> GO TO 6.
6.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT H

I
>> INSPECTION END
J
With CONSULT-III K
L
Condition Air passage continuity
(PURG VOL CONT/V value) between A and B
100% Yes M
0% No
N
PBIB2058E
Without CONSULT-III
Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control O
Air passage continuity P

Condition
between A and B
Yes
terminals 1 and 2
No supply No
PBIB2059E

P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
The EVAP canister vent control valve (1) is located on the EVAP canister (4) and is used to seal the canister
vent.
• EVAP control system pressure sensor (2)
• Drain filter (3)
• : Vehicle front
ALBIA0514ZZ
This solenoid valve responds to signals from the ECM. When the
ECM sends an ON signal, the coil in the solenoid valve is energized.
A plunger will then move to seal the canister vent. The ability to seal
the vent is necessary for the on board diagnosis of other evaporative
emission control system components.
This solenoid valve is used only for diagnosis, and usually remains
opened.
When the vent is closed, under normal purge conditions, the evapo-
rative emission control system is depressurized and allows EVAP
Control System diagnoses.
PBIB1263E
P0447 EVAP canister vent control An improper voltage signal is sent to ECM
(The valve circuit is open or shorted.)
0447 valve circuit open through EVAP canister vent control valve.
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
WITH CONSULT-III
WITH GST
1.INSPECTION START
Do you have CONSULT-III?
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 2.
No >> GO TO 3. A
2.CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE CIRCUIT
With CONSULT-III EC
2. Select “VENT CONTROL/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-III.
3. Touch “ON/OFF” on CONSULT-III screen.
4. Check for operating sound of the valve. C
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7. D
NG >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
E
2. Disconnect EVAP canister vent control valve (1) harness con-
nector.
- EVAP control system pressure sensor (2) F
- Drain filter (3)
- EVAP canister (4)
- : Vehicle front G
ALBIA0514ZZ
I
4. Check voltage between EVAP canister vent control valve termi-
nal 1 and ground with CONSULT-III or tester.
J
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. K
NG >> GO TO 4.
L
PBIB0152E

Check the following. M
• Harness for open or short between EVAP canister vent control valve and IPDM E/R N
5.CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT O

P
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 117 and EVAP canister vent control valve terminal 2.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.
• Harness connectors C1, E41
• Harness for open or short between EVAP canister vent control valve and ECM
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
>> INSPECTION END

EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE

With CONSULT-III
1. Remove EVAP canister vent control valve from EVAP canister.
2. Check portion B of EVAP canister vent control valve for rust.
If NG, replace EVAP canister vent control valve.
PBIB1033E
5. Perform “VENT CONTROL/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.

6. Check air passage continuity and operation delay time.
Check that new O-ring is installed properly.
Condition VENT CONTROL/V Air passage continuity between A and B

ON No
OFF Yes
Operation takes less than 1 second.
7. Clean the air passage (Portion A to B) of EVAP canister vent control valve using an air blower.

8. Perform step 6 again.
A
Without CONSULT-III
2. Check portion B of EVAP canister vent control valve for being EC
rusted.
PBIB1033E E
3. Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the
following conditions.
Check that new O-ring is installed properly. F
Condition Air passage continuity between A and B

G
No
terminals 1 and 2
OFF Yes
H
If NG, replace EVAP canister vent control valve. PBIB1034E

I
J

The EVAP canister vent control valve (1) is located on the EVAP canister (4) and is used to seal the canister
vent.
• : Vehicle front
ALBIA0514ZZ
opened.
rative emission control system is depressurized and allows “EVAP
Control System” diagnoses.
PBIB1263E
P0448 EVAP canister vent control EVAP canister vent control valve remains and the circuit
0448 valve close closed under specified driving conditions. • Blocked rubber tube to EVAP canister
vent control valve
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-III
3. Start engine and let it idle for at least 1 minute.
4. Repeat next procedures 3 times.
a. Increase the engine speed between 3,000 and 3,500 rpm and maintain that speed for 2 minutes and 50
seconds to 3 minutes.
Never exceed 3 minutes.
b. Fully released accelerator pedal and keep engine idle for about 5 seconds.

If 1st trip DTC is not detected, go to the next step.
7. Repeat next procedure 20 times. A
a. Quickly increase the engine speed between 4,000 and 4,500 rpm and maintain that speed for 25 to 30
seconds.
b. Fully released accelerator pedal and keep engine idle for at least 35 seconds. EC
JMBIA1516GB E
F
WITH GST
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004053469 G
1.CHECK RUBBER TUBE

H
2. Disconnect rubber tube connected to EVAP canister vent control
valve (1).
- EVAP control system pressure sensor (2) I
- Drain filter (3)
- EVAP canister (4)
- : Vehicle front J
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. K
NG >> Clean rubber tube using an air blower.
ALBIA0514ZZ
2.CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE L

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3. M
N
attached.
Yes or No O
Yes >> GO TO 4.
No >> GO TO 6.
P
BBIA0558E


attached.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.

1. Disconnect EVAP control system pressure sensor (2) harness
connector.
- EVAP canister vent control valve (1)
- Drain filter (3)
- EVAP canister (4)
- : Vehicle front
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
ALBIA0514ZZ

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
>> INSPECTION END


With CONSULT-III
2. Check portion B of EVAP canister vent control valve for being
rusted.
PBIB1033E

6. Check air passage continuity and operation delay time. A
Condition VENT CONTROL/V Air passage continuity between A and B

EC
ON No
OFF Yes
Operation takes less than 1 second. C
Make sure new O-ring is installed properly.
D
Without CONSULT-III E
rusted. F
PBIB1033E
I
J
Condition Air passage continuity between A and B
No K
terminals 1 and 2
OFF Yes
L
Make sure new O-ring is installed properly.
If NG, replace EVAP canister vent control valve. PBIB1034E

4. Clean the air passage (Portion A to B) of EVAP canister vent control valve using an air blower. M

P0451 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
The EVAP control system pressure sensor (2) detects pressure in

the purge line. The sensor output voltage to the ECM increases as
pressure increases.
• EVAP canister vent control valve (1)
• EVAP canister (4)
• : Vehicle front
ALBIA0514ZZ
PBIB3370E
NOTE:
If DTC P0451 is displayed with DTC P0643, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0643. Refer to
EC-288.
P0451 EVAP control system pressure ECM detects a sloshing signal from the • Harness or connectors
0451 sensor performance EVAP control system pressure sensor • EVAP control system pressure sensor
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-III
NOTE:
WITH GST


A
EC
BBIA0614E
OK or NG D
OK >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR CONNECTOR FOR WATER E

connector.
- EVAP canister vent control valve (1) F
- Drain filter (3)
- EVAP canister (4)
: Vehicle front G
2. Check that water is not inside connector.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3. H
NG >> Repair or replace harness connector.
ALBIA0514ZZ
3.CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR I

OK or NG
J
OK >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT K
>> INSPECTION END L
M
EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
1. Remove EVAP control system pressure sensor with its harness connector.
Always replace O-ring with a new one.
N
2. Install a vacuum pump to EVAP control system pressure sensor.
3. Turn ignition switch ON and check output voltage between ECM
terminal 32 and ground under the following conditions. O
Applied vacuum kPa

Voltage (V)
(kg/cm2, psi) P
Not applied 1.8 - 4.8
-26.7 (-0.272, -3.87) 2.1 to 2.5V lower than above value
CAUTION:
• Always calibrate the vacuum pump gauge when using it.
• Never apply below -93.3 kPa (-0.952 kg/cm2, -13.53 psi) or
PBIB1200E
pressure over 101.3 kPa (1.033 kg/cm2, 14.69 psi).

4. If NG, replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.

A
The EVAP control system pressure sensor (2) detects pressure in EC

pressure increases.
• Drain filter (3) C
• : Vehicle front
D
ALBIA0514ZZ E
H
PBIB3370E

I
NOTE:
If DTC P0452 is displayed with DTC P0643, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0643. Refer to J
EC-288.
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause K
P0452 EVAP control system pressure An excessively low voltage from the sensor
0452 sensor low input is sent to ECM.
L
NOTE: M
TESTING CONDITION:
Always perform test at a temperature of 5°C (41°F) or more. N
WITH CONSULT-III
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. O
P
5. Make sure that “FUEL T/TMP SE” is more than 0°C (32°F).
WITH GST

2. Check that voltage between ECM terminal 107 (Fuel tank tem-
perature sensor signal) and ground is less than 4.2V.
PBIB1199E

BBIA0614E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK CONNECTOR
connector.
- Drain filter (3)
- EVAP canister (4)
: Vehicle front
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
ALBIA0514ZZ
3.CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

2. Check voltage between EVAP control system pressure sensor
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.
PBIB0138E

• Harness connectors C1, E41 A
• Harness for open or short between EVAP control system pressure sensor and ECM
EC
5.CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
C
3. Check harness continuity between EVAP control system pressure sensor terminal 1 and ECM terminal
67. D
Continuity should exist. E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7. F
NG >> GO TO 6.
H
I
7.CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND
SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 32 and EVAP control system pressure sensor terminal J
2.
K
OK or NG L
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> GO TO 8.
8.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART M

N
O
Refer to EC-246, "Component Inspection". P
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.

>> INSPECTION END

terminal 32 and ground under the following conditions.
Applied vacuum kPa

Voltage (V)
(kg/cm2, psi)
-26.7 (-200, -7.87) 2.1 to 2.5V lower than above value
CAUTION:
• Never apply below -93.3 kPa (-0.952 kg/cm2, -13.53 psi ) or
PBIB1200E
pressure over 101.3 kPa (1.033 kg/cm2, 14.69 inHg).


A

pressure increases.
• : Vehicle front
D
ALBIA0514ZZ E
H
PBIB3370E

I
NOTE:
If DTC P0453 is displayed with DTC P0643, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0643. Refer to J
EC-288.
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause K
EVAP control system • EVAP control system pressure sensor
P0453 An excessively high voltage from the sensor L
pressure sensor high in- • EVAP canister vent control valve
0453 is sent to ECM.
put • EVAP canister
• Rubber hose to EVAP canister vent control
valve M
NOTE: N
TESTING CONDITION: O
WITH CONSULT-III
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. P
5. Make sure that “FUEL T/TMP SE” is more than 0°C (32°F).

WITH GST
PBIB1199E

BBIA0614E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK CONNECTOR
connector.
- Drain filter (3)
- EVAP canister (4)
: Vehicle front
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
ALBIA0514ZZ

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.
PBIB0138E

4.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART A

EC
C
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. D
67.
Refer to Wiring Diagram. E

4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6. G
• Harness connectors C1, E41 H
I
7.CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND J
SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 32 and EVAP control system pressure sensor terminal
2. K

L
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9. M
NG >> GO TO 8.
Check the following. N
• Harness for open or short between EVAP control system pressure sensor and ECM O
9.CHECK RUBBER TUBE P

2. Check the rubber tube for clogging, vent and kinked.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> Clean the rubber tube using an air blower, repair or replace rubber tube.


OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.
attached.
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 13.
No >> GO TO 15.
BBIA0558E

Weigh the EVAP canister with the EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sen-
sorattached.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 15.
NG >> GO TO 14.
• EVAP hose connected to EVAP canister and vehicle frame for clogging or poor connection

>> INSPECTION END

EVAP CONTROL PRESSURE SENSOR


terminal 32 and ground under the following conditions. A
Applied vacuum kPa

Voltage (V)
(kg/cm2, psi) EC
-26.7 (-200, -7.87) 2.1 to 2.5V lower than above value
C
CAUTION:
PBIB1200E
D
E

This diagnosis detects a very large leak (fuel filler cap fell off etc.) in EVAP system between the fuel tank and
EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve.
PBIB3640E
• Fuel filler cap remains open or fails to
close.
• Incorrect fuel filler cap used
• Leak is in line between intake manifold
and EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve.
• Foreign matter caught in EVAP canister
vent control valve.
EVAP control system has a very large leak • EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube)
P0455 EVAP control system
such as fuel filler cap fell off, EVAP control leaks
0455 gross leak detected
system does not operate properly. • EVAP purge line rubber tube bent.
• Loose or disconnected rubber tube
• EVAP canister vent control valve and the
circuit
• EVAP canister purge volume control sole-
noid valve and the circuit
• Fuel tank temperature sensor
• O-ring of EVAP canister vent control
valve is missing or damaged.
CAUTION:
MIL may illuminate.
CAUTION:
Never remove fuel filler cap during the DTC Confirmation Procedure.
NOTE:

• Make sure that EVAP hose are connected to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
properly. A
• If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
TESTING CONDITION:
EC
• Open engine hood before conducting the following procedure.
C
WITH CONSULT-III
1. Tighten fuel filler cap securely until reteaching sound is heard.
2. Turn ignition switch ON. D
5. Make sure that the following conditions are met.
COOLAN TEMP/S: 0 - 70°C (32 - 158°F) E
INT/A TEMP SE: 0 - 60°C (32 - 140°F)
6. Select “EVAP SML LEAK P0442/P1442” of “EVAPORATIVE SYSTEM” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode
with CONSULT-III. F
NOTE:
EC-19, "Basic Inspection". G
If “NG” is displayed, select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-III and make sure that “EVAP
GROSS LEAK [P0455]” is displayed. If it is displayed, refer to EC-253, "Diagnosis Procedure". H
If P0442 is displayed, perform Diagnostic Procedure for DTC P0442, EC-218, "Diagnosis Procedure".
WITH GST
NOTE: I
Be sure to read the explanation of EC-431 before driving vehicle.
1. Start engine.
2. Drive vehicle according toEC-431. J
3. Stop vehicle.
4. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn ON.
K
5. Select SERVICE $07 with GST.
• If P0455 is displayed on the screen, go to EC-253, "Diagnosis Procedure".
• If P0442 is displayed on the screen, go to EC-218, "Diagnosis Procedure". L
M
2. Check for genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap design. N
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Replace with genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap. O
SEF915U

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
2. Retighten until ratcheting sound is heard.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.
Refer to EC-257, "Component Inspection"
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
Check EVAP purge line (pipe, rubber tube, fuel tank and EVAP canister) for cracks, improper connection or
disconnection.
Refer to EC-42.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
>> GO TO 7.
• EVAP canister vent control is installed properly.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
pressure pump to EVAP service port securely.
NOTE:
Improper installation of the EVAP service port adapter to the
BBIA0620E

EC
SEF916U
D
E
With CONSULT-III
3. Touch “START” and apply pressure into the EVAP line until the pressure indicator reaches the middle of
the bar graph. G
CAUTION:
• Never use compressed air or a high pressure pump.
H
Refer to EC-459, "How to Detect Fuel Vapor Leakage". I
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
J
SEF200U
10.CHECK FOR EVAP LEAK L
Without CONSULT-III
2. Apply 12 volts DC to EVAP canister vent control valve (1). The M
- Drain filter (3) N
- EVAP canister (4)
- : Vehicle front
3. Pressurize the EVAP line using pressure pump with 1.3 to 2.7 O
kPa (0.013 to 0.028 kg/cm2, 0.19 to 0.39 psi), then remove
pump and EVAP service port adapter.
CAUTION:
• Never use compressed air or a high pressure pump. P
ALBIA0514ZZ

in the system.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.
SEF200U

With CONSULT-III
1. Disconnect vacuum hose from EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port.
2. Start engine.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 14.
NG >> GO TO 13.
Without CONSULT-III
2. Stop engine.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 15.
NG >> GO TO 13.
Check vacuum hoses for clogging or disconnection. Refer toEC-42, "Description" .
OK or NG
With CONSULT-III
1. Start engine.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16.
NG >> GO TO 15.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16.
NG >> Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve. A
EC
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 17.
C
OK or NG D
OK >> GO TO 18.
E
connection. For location, refer to EC-42. F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 19.
>> Repair or replace hoses and tubes. G
improper connection. H
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 20.
>> Repair or replace hoses, tubes or fuel filler tube. I

Refer toEC-392, "Component Inspection". J
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 21.
>> Replace refueling EVAP vapor cut valve with fuel tank. K
L
>> INSPECTION END

M
O
SEF445Y


(0.156 - 0.204 kg/cm2, 2.22 - 2.90 psi)
Vacuum: −6.0 to −3.3 kPa
(−0.061 to −0.034 kg/cm2, −0.87 to −0.48 psi)
CAUTION:

A
This diagnosis detects very small leaks in the EVAP line between fuel tank and EVAP canister purge volume EC
control solenoid valve, using the intake manifold vacuum in the same way as conventional EVAP small leak
diagnosis.
If ECM judges a leak which corresponds to a very small leak, the very small leak P0456 will be detected.
If ECM judges a leak equivalent to a small leak, EVAP small leak P0442 will be detected. C
If ECM judges that there are no leaks, the diagnosis will be OK.
PBIB3640E
I
• Leak is in line between intake manifold and EVAP
canister purge volume control solenoid valve. K
• Foreign matter caught in EVAP canister vent control
valve.
L
• EVAP purge line rubber tube bent
Evaporative emission
• EVAP system has a very small leak. • Loose or disconnected rubber tube
P0456 control system very
• EVAP system does not operate • EVAP canister vent control valve and the circuit
0456 small leak (negative M
properly. • EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
pressure check)
and the circuit
• O-ring of EVAP canister vent control valve is missing N
or damaged
• Refueling EVAP vapor cut valve O
• Foreign matter caught in EVAP canister purge vol-
ume control solenoid valve P
CAUTION:
MIL may illuminate.

NOTE:
• If DTC P0456 is displayed with P0442, first perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0456.
• After repair, make sure that the hoses and clips are installed properly.
TESTING CONDITION:
• Open engine hood before conducting the following procedure.
• If any of following conditions are met just before the DTC confirmation procedure, leave the vehicle
for more than 1 hour.
- Fuel filler cap is removed.
- Refilled or drained the fuel.
- EVAP component part/parts is/are removed.
• Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-III
2. Make sure the following conditions are met.
FUEL LEVEL SE: 0.25 - 1.4V
COOLAN TEMP/S: 0 - 32°C (32 - 90°F)
FUEL T/TMP SE: 0 - 35°C (32 - 95°F)
INT/A TEMP SE: More than 0°C (32°F)
If NG, turn ignition switch OFF and leave the vehicle in a cool place (soak the vehicle), or refill/drain fuel
until the output voltage of the “FUEL LEVEL SE” meets within the range above and leave the vehicle for
more than 1 hour. Then start from step 1.
5. Select “EVAP V/S LEAK P0456/P1456” of “EVAPORATIVE SYSTEM” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode
with CONSULT-III.
NOTE:
• If the engine speed cannot be maintained within the range displayed on CONSULT-III screen, go
to EC-19, "Basic Inspection".
• Make sure that EVAP hoses are connected to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid
valve properly.
WITH GST
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the EVAP very small leak function. During this check, a 1st
CAUTION:
• Never use compressed air, doing so may damage the EVAP system.
• Never start engine.
• Never exceeded 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2, 0.6 psi).
1. Attach the EVAP service port adapter (commercial service tool)
securely to the EVAP service port.
BBIA0620E

2. Set the pressure pump and a hose.
3. Also set a vacuum gauge via 3-way connector and a hose. A
5. Connect GST and select Service $08.
6. Using Service $08 control the EVAP canister vent control valve
EC
(close).
7. Apply pressure and make sure the following conditions are sat-
isfied.
Pressure to be applied: 2.7 kPa (0.028 kg/cm2, 0.39 psi) C
Time to be waited after the pressure drawn in to the EVAP
system and the pressure to be dropped: 60 seconds and SEF462UI
the pressure should not be dropped more than 0.4 kPa D
(0.004 kg/cm2, 0.06 psi).
If OK, go to next step. E
8. Disconnect GST.
11. Restart engine and let it idle for 90 seconds. F
12. Keep engine speed at 2,000 rpm for 30 seconds.
NOTE: G
For more information, refer to GST Instruction Manual.
H
2. Check for genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap design. I
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Replace with genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap. J
SEF915U
L
Check that the cap is tightened properly by rotating the cap clockwise. M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> 1. Open fuel filler cap, then clean cap and fuel filler neck threads using air blower. N
Check for air releasing sound while opening the fuel filler cap. O
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4. P

Refer toEC-257, "Component Inspection".
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.


pressure pump to EVAP service port securely. For the location of
EVAP service port.
NOTE:
BBIA0620E
SEF916U
With CONSULT-III
the bar graph.
CAUTION:
Refer to EC-459, "How to Detect Fuel Vapor Leakage".
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
SEF200U

Without CONSULT-III

valve will close. (Continue to apply 12 volts until the end of test.) A
- Drain filter (3)
- EVAP canister (4)
EC
- : Vehicle front
kPa (0.013 to 0.028 kg/cm2, 0.19 to 0.39 psi), then remove
pump and EVAP service port adapter. C
CAUTION:
• Never exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2, 0.6 psi) of pressure D

in the system.
4. Using EVAP leak detector, locate the EVAP leak. For the leak E
OK or NG F
OK >> GO TO 8.
G
SEF200U
H
Check the following. I
Refer to EC-461, "Removal and Installation"
Refer to EC-392, "Component Inspection" J
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Repair or replace EVAP canister vent control valve and O-ring. K

1. Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor L
attached.
Yes or No M
Yes >> GO TO 10.
No (Without CONSULT-III)>>GO TO 13.
N
BBIA0558E
10.CHECK EVAP CANISTER P

attached.
OK or NG

NG >> GO TO 11.

With CONSULT-III
1. Disconnect vacuum hose connected to EVAP service port and EVAP canister purge volume control sole-
noid valve from EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve.
2. Start engine.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 15.
NG >> GO TO 14.
Without CONSULT-III
2. Stop engine.
3. Disconnect vacuum hose connected to EVAP service port and EVAP canister purge volume control sole-
noid valve from EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 15.
NG >> GO TO 14.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 15.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 17.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 18. A
EC
OK or NG
C
OK >> GO TO 19.
19.CLEAN EVAP PURGE LINE D
>> GO TO 20. E

Check EVAP/ORVR line between EVAP canister and fuel tank for clogging, kinks, looseness and improper F
connection. For location, refer to EC-42.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 21. G
H
OK or NG
I
OK >> GO TO 22.
NG >> Repair or replace hose, tube or fuel filler tube.
22.CHECK REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE J
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 23. K
23.CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR L
Refer to EC-381.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 24. M
Refer to GI-49, "Intermittent Incident". N
>> INSPECTION END

O
FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE (BUILT INTO FUEL FILLER CAP) P

SEF445Y

(0.156 - 0.204 kg/cm2, 2.22 - 2.90 psi)
Vacuum: −6.0 to −3.3 kPa
(−0.061 to −0.034 kg/cm2, −0.87 to −0.48 psi)
CAUTION:

P0460 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
A
The fuel level sensor is mounted in the fuel level sensor unit. The EC
sensor detects a fuel level in the fuel tank and transmits a signal to
the combination meter. The combination meter sends the fuel level
sensor signal to the ECM through the CAN communication line.
It consists of two parts, one is mechanical float and the other is vari- C
able resistor. Fuel level sensor output voltage changes depending
on the movement of the fuel mechanical float.
D
BBIA0629E E
NOTE: F
• If DTC P0460 is displayed with DTC UXXXX, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC UXXXX.
Refer to EC-94.
• If DTC P0460 is displayed with DTC P0607, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0607. Refer
G
to EC-286.
When the vehicle is parked, the fuel level in the fuel tank is naturally stable. It means that output signal of the
fuel level sensor does not change. If ECM senses sloshing signal from the sensor, fuel level sensor malfunc-
tion is detected. H
• Harness or connectors I
(The CAN communication line is open or
Even though the vehicle is parked, a signal be- shorted)
P0460 Fuel level sensor circuit
ing varied is sent from the fuel level sensor to • Harness or connectors J
0460 noise
ECM. (The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
• Combination meter
• Fuel level sensor
K
NOTE:
L
WITH CONSULT-III M
1. Start engine and wait maximum of 2 consecutive minutes.
3. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-267, "Diagnosis Procedure". N
WITH GST
O
1.CHECK COMBINATION METER FUNCTION P

Refer to MWI-3.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Go to MWI-93, "Removal and Installation".
>> INSPECTION END

A
D
BBIA0629E E
NOTE: F
Refer to EC-94.
G
to EC-286.
Driving long distances naturally affect fuel gauge level.
This diagnosis detects the fuel gauge malfunction of the gauge not moving even after a long distance has
been driven. H
(the CAN communication line is open or
The output signal of the fuel level sensor does
shorted)
P0461 Fuel level sensor circuit not change within the specified range even
• Harness or connectors J
0461 range/performance though the vehicle has been driven a long dis-
tance.
K
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the fuel level sensor. During this check, a 1st trip DTC
L
WARNING:
When performing the following procedure, always observe the handling of the fuel. Refer to FL-6,
"Removal and Installation". M
TESTING CONDITION:
Before starting overall function check, preparation of draining fuel and refilling fuel is required.
N
WITH CONSULT-III
NOTE:
Start from step 10, if it is possible to confirm that the fuel cannot be drained by 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/
8 Imp gal) in advance. O
1. Prepare a fuel container and a spare hose.
2. Release fuel pressure from fuel line, refer to EC-456, "Fuel Pressure Check".
3. Remove the fuel feed hose on the fuel level sensor unit. P
4. Connect a spare fuel hose where the fuel feed hose was removed.
5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds then turn ON.
6. Select “FUEL LEVEL SE” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III.
7. Check “FUEL LEVEL SE” output voltage and note it.
8. Select “FUEL PUMP” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-III.
9. Touch “ON” and drain fuel approximately 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/8 Imp gal) and stop it.

11. Fill fuel into the fuel tank for 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/8 Imp gal).
13. Confirm whether the voltage changes more than 0.03V during step 7 to 10 and 10 to 12.
WITH GST
NOTE:
Start from step 8, if it is possible to confirm that the fuel cannot be drained by 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/8
Imp gal) in advance.
2. Release fuel pressure from fuel line. Refer to EC-456, "Fuel Pressure Check".
3. Remove the fuel feed hose on the fuel level sensor unit.
6. Drain fuel by 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/8 Imp gal) from the fuel tank using proper equipment.
7. Confirm that the fuel gauge indication varies.

Refer to MWI-3.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Go to MWI-93, "Removal and Installation".
>> INSPECTION END

P0462, P0463 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
A
the combination meter. The combination meter. sends the fuel level
sensor signal to the ECM through CAN communication.
D
BBIA0629E E
NOTE: F
• If DTC P0462 or P0463 is displayed with DTC UXXXX, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC
UXXXX. Refer toEC-94 .
• If DTC P0462 or P0463 is displayed with DTC P0607, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC
G
P0607. Refer to EC-286.
H
P0462 Fuel level sensor circuit An excessively low voltage from the sensor is • Harness or connectors
0462 low input sent to ECM. (The CAN communication line is open or
shorted)
P0463 Fuel level sensor circuit An excessively high voltage from the sensor is (The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
0463 high input sent to ECM. • Combination meter
J
NOTE: K
TESTING CONDITION:
L
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at ignition
switch ON.
WITH CONSULT-III M
WITH GST
O
1.CHECK COMBINATION METER FUNCTION P

Refer to MWI-21.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> GO TO MWI-93, "Removal and Installation".
>> INSPECTION END

P0500 VSS
P0500 VSS
A
The vehicle speed signal is sent to the combination meter from the “ABS actuator and electric unit (control EC
unit)” by CAN communication line. The combination meter then sends a signal to the ECM by CAN communi-
cation line.
On Board Diagnosis Logic INFOID:0000000004053508 C
NOTE:
Refer to EC-94. D
to EC-286.
E
(The CAN communication line is open or short- F
ed)
The almost 0 km/h (0 MPH) signal from • Harness or connectors
P0500
Vehicle speed sensor vehicle speed sensor is sent to ECM even (The vehicle speed signal circuit is open or
0500
when vehicle is being driven. shorted)
G
• Wheel sensor
• ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) H
FAIL-SAFE MODE
I
When the fail-safe system for vehicle speed sensor is activated, the cooling fan operates (High) while
Vehicle speed sensor
engine is running. J
K
CAUTION:
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at L
TESTING CONDITION:
Steps 1 and 2 may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted in the shop or by driving the vehicle. If a M
road test is expected to be easier, it is unnecessary to lift the vehicle.
WITH CONSULT-III
1. Start engine. N
2. Read “VHCL SPEED SE” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III. The vehicle speed on CON-
SULT-III should exceed 10 km/h (6 MPH) when rotating wheels with suitable gear position.
If NG, go to EC-274, "Diagnosis Procedure". O
4. Warm engine up to normal operating temperature. P
1,400 - 6,000 rpm (A/T)

ENG SPEED
1,800 - 6,000 rpm (M/T)

P0500 VSS
Shift lever Except P or N position (A/T)
Except Neutral position (M/T)
PW/ST SIGNAL OFF
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the vehicle speed sensor circuit. During this check, a 1st
WITH GST
2. Start engine.
3. Read vehicle speed sensor signal in Service $01 with GST.
The vehicle speed sensor on GST should be able to exceed 10 km/h (6 MPH) when rotating wheels with
suitable gear position.
1.CHECK DTC WITH “ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT)”
Refer to BRC-20, "CONSULT-III Function (ABS)".
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK COMBINATION METER
Refer to MWI-21.
>> INSPECTION END

P0506 ISC SYSTEM
P0506 ISC SYSTEM
A
NOTE: EC
If DTC P0506 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for the other DTC.
The ECM controls the engine idle speed to a specified level through the fine adjustment of the air, which is let
into the intake manifold, by operating the electric throttle control actuator. The operating of the throttle valve is
varied to allow for optimum control of the engine idling speed. The crankshaft position sensor (POS) detects C
the actual engine speed and sends a signal to the ECM.
The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator so that the engine speed coincides with the target value
memorized in the ECM. The target engine speed is the lowest speed at which the engine can operate steadily. D
The optimum value stored in the ECM is determined by taking into consideration various engine conditions,
such as during warming up, deceleration and engine load (air conditioner, power steering and cooling fan
operation, etc.).
E
F
P0506 Idle speed control system The idle speed is less than the target idle • Electric throttle control actuator
0506 RPM lower than expected speed by 100 rpm or more. • Intake air leak G
NOTE: H
• If the target idle speed is out of the specified value, perform EC-24, "Idle Air Volume Learning", I
before conducting DTC Confirmation Procedure. For the target idle speed, refer to the EC-462.
TESTING CONDITION:
• Always perform the test at a temperature above −10°C (14°F). J
WITH CONSULT-III
1. Open engine hood. K
4. Start engine and run it for at least 1 minute at idle speed. L
M
WITH GST
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004053515 N
1.CHECK INTAKE AIR LEAK

1. Start engine and let it idle. O
OK or NG
P
OK >> GO TO 2.
2.REPLACE ECM
1. Stop engine.
2. Replace ECM.
EC-23, "Procedure After Replacing ECM".

P0506 ISC SYSTEM
>> INSPECTION END

P0507 ISC SYSTEM
P0507 ISC SYSTEM
A
NOTE: EC
varied to allow for optimum control of the engine idling speed. The crankshaft position sensor (POS) detects C
memorized in the ECM. The target engine speed is the lowest speed at which the engine can operate steadily. D
operation, etc.).
E
F
P0507 Idle speed control system The idle speed is more than the target idle
• Intake air leak G
0507 RPM higher than expected speed by 200 rpm or more.
• PCV system
H
NOTE:
I
• If the target idle speed is out of the specified value, perform EC-24, "Idle Air Volume Learning",
TESTING CONDITION:
• Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle. J
• Always perform the test at a temperature above −10°C (14°F).
WITH CONSULT-III
K
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. L
4. Start engine and run it for at least 1 minute at idle speed.
6. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-277, "Diagnosis Procedure". M
WITH GST
N
1.CHECK PCV HOSE CONNECTION O

Confirm that PCV hose is connected correctly.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. P
OK or NG

P0507 ISC SYSTEM
OK >> GO TO 3.
3.REPLACE ECM
1. Stop engine.
2. Replace ECM.
>> INSPECTION END

P0550 PSP SENSOR
P0550 PSP SENSOR
A
Power steering pressure (PSP) sensor is installed to the power EC

steering high-pressure tube and detects a power steering load. This
sensor is a potentiometer which transforms the power steering load
into output voltage, and emits the voltage signal to the ECM. The
ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator and adjusts the C
throttle valve opening angle to increase the engine speed and
adjusts the idle speed for the increased load.
D
BBIA0621E E
The MIL will not light up for this diagnosis. F

NOTE:
EC-288.
G
• Harness or connectors H
P0550 Power steering pressure An excessively low or high voltage from the
0550 sensor circuit sensor is sent to ECM.
• Power steering pressure sensor
DTC Confirmation Procedure INFOID:0000000004053522 I
NOTE:
J
WITH CONSULT-III
1. Start engine and let it idle for at least 5 seconds. K
L
WITH GST
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004053523 M

2. Loosen and retighten two ground screws on the body. Refer toEC-91, "Ground Inspection" .
BBIA0614E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.

P0550 PSP SENSOR
2.CHECK PSP SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect power steering pressure (PSP) sensor harness con-
nector.
BBIA0621E
3. Check voltage between PSP sensor terminal 3 and ground with

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
SEF479Y
3.CHECK PSP SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

3. Check harness continuity between PSP sensor terminal 1 and ECM terminal 67.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK PSP SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 12 and PSP sensor terminal 2.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK PSP SENSOR
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Replace PSP sensor.

P0550 PSP SENSOR
>> INSPECTION END A
EC
POWER STEERING PRESSURE SENSOR
2. Start engine and let it idle. C
3. Check voltage between ECM terminal 12 and ground under the
D
Condition Voltage
Steering wheel: Being turned 0.5 - 4.5V
E
Steering wheel: Not being turned 0.4 - 0.8V
F
MBIB0025E

P0603 ECM POWER SUPPLY
Battery voltage is supplied to the ECM even when the ignition switch
is turned OFF for the ECM memory function of the DTC memory, the
air-fuel ratio feedback compensation value memory, the Idle Air Vol-
ume Learning value memory, etc.
PBIB1164E
P0603 ECM back up RAM system does not function [ECM power supply (back up) circuit is
ECM power supply circuit
0603 properly. open or shorted.]
• ECM
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-III
1. Turn ignition swich ON and wait at least 1 seconds.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds, and then turn it ON.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for four times.
WITH GST
1.CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY


OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 2.
MBIB0026E


• 20A fuse (No.53)
EC
• Harness for open or short between ECM and battery

C
OK or NG D
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
E
With CONSULT-III
2. Select “SELF DIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-III.
3. Touch “ERASE”.
4. Perform DTC Confirmation Procedure.
See EC-282, "DTC Confirmation Procedure". G
5. Is the 1st trip DTC P0603 displayed again?
With GST
1. Turn ignition switch ON. H
3. Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”.
See EC-282, "DTC Confirmation Procedure". I
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 5. J
No >> INSPECTION END
5.REPLACE ECM
1. Replace ECM. K
3. Perform EC-24, "VIN Registration". L
M
>> INSPECTION END

N

P0605 ECM
P0605 ECM
The ECM consists of a microcomputer and connectors for signal

input and output and for power supply. The ECM controls the
engine.
PBIB1164E
This self-diagnosis has one or two trip detection logic.
A) ECM calculation function is malfunctioning.
P0605
Engine control module B) ECM EEP-ROM system is malfunctioning. • ECM
0605
C) ECM self shut-off function is malfunctioning.
FAIL-SAFE MODE
ECM enters fail-safe mode when malfunction A is detected.
Detected items Engine operation condition in fail-safe mode

• ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5
Malfunction A degrees) by the return spring.
• ECM deactivates ASCD operation.
Perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A first. If the 1st trip DTC cannot be confirmed, perform
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B. If there is no malfunction on PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION
B, perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C.
NOTE:
With CONSULT-III
With GST
With CONSULT-III
1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 1 second.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn it ON.
P0605 ECM
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-III” above. A
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C
With CONSULT-III EC
3. Repeat step 2 for 32 times. C
D
With GST
E
1.INSPECTION START
F
With CONSULT-III
3. Touch “ERASE”. G
See EC-284, "DTC Confirmation Procedure".
5. Is the 1st trip DTC P0605 displayed again? H
With GST
2. Select Service $04 with GST. I
J
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 2.
K
2.REPLACE ECM
1. Replace ECM.
2. Perform initialization of NVIS (NATS) system and registration of all NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to L
5. Perform EC-24, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". M
>> INSPECTION END N

P0607 ECM
P0607 ECM
This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic (A/T models).
The MIL will not light up for this diagnosis (M/T models).
P0607 When detecting error during the initial diagno-
CAN communication bus • ECM
0607 sis for CAN controller of each control unit.
WITH CONSULT-III
2. Check 1st trip.
WITH GST
1.INSPECTION START
With CONSULT-III
5. Is the DTC P0607 displayed again?
With GST
2. Select “Service $04” with GST.
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 2.
2.REPLACE ECM
1. Replace ECM.

P0607 ECM
>> INSPECTION END A
EC

P0643 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY
(PSP sensor circuit is shorted.)
(Refrigerant pressure sensor circuit is short-
ed.)
(Battery current sensor circuit is shorted.)
ECM detects that the voltage of power
P0643 Sensor power supply circuit (EVAP control system pressure sensor circuit
source for sensor is excessively low or
0643 short is shorted.)
high.
(APP sensor 1)
• Refrigerant pressure sensor
• Battery current sensor
FAIL-SAFE MODE

ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return
spring.
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
WITH CONSULT-III
2. Check DTC.
WITH GST

BBIA0614E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. A
2.CHECK APP SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
EC
1. Disconnect accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor harness
connector.
C
E
BBIA0592E
3. Check voltage between APP sensor terminal 2 and ground with F

G
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 3. H
PBIB2608E I
3.CHECK SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUITS
J

90 APP sensor terminal 2 K
48 EVAP control system pressure sensor terminal 3
49 Refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 3
49 Battery current sensor terminal 1 L
68 PSP sensor terminal 3
OK or NG M
OK >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK COMPONENTS N
• EVAP control system pressure sensor (Refer to EC-241, "Component Inspection".)
• Refrigerant pressure sensor (Refer to EC-397, "Component Description".) O
• Battery current sensor (Refer to EC-307, "Component Inspection".)
• Power steering pressure sensor (Refer to EC-281, "Component Inspection".)
OK or NG P
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Replace malfunctioning component.
5.CHECK APP SENSOR
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.
1. Replace accelerator pedal assembly.
>> INSPECTION END

>> INSPECTION END

P0850 PNP SWITCH
P0850 PNP SWITCH
A
When the shift lever position is P or N (A/T), Neutral (M/T), park/neutral position (PNP) switch is ON. EC
ECM detects the position because the continuity of the line (the ON signal) exists.
• Harness or connectors D
[The park/neutral position (PNP) switch
The signal of the park/neutral position (PNP)
P0850 Park/neutral position circuit is open or shorted.]
switch does not change during driving after the
0850 switch • Park/neutral position (PNP) switch
engine is started. E
• TCM (A/T models)
DTC Confirmation Procedure INFOID:0000000004053538 F
CAUTION:
NOTE: G
H
WITH CONSULT-III
2. Select “P/N POSI SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III. Then check the “P/N POSI SW” I
signal under the following conditions.
Position (Shift lever) Known-good signal J

P or N position (A/T)
ON
Neutral position (M/T)
Except the above position OFF K
3. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III. L
M
ENG SPEED More than 1,150 rpm (A/T)

More than 1,400 rpm (M/T)
N
VHCL SPEED SE More than 64 km/h (40 MPH) O
7. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-292, "Diagnosis Procedure". P
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the park/neutral position (PNP) switch circuit. During this
check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed.
WITH GST

P0850 PNP SWITCH
2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 102 (PNP switch signal)
and ground under the following conditions.
Condition (shift position) Voltage (Known-good data)

Approx. 0 (V)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
Except the above position
(11 - 14V)
MBIB0043E
A/T MODELS
1.CHECK DTC WITH TCM
Refer toTM-230 .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
Turn ignition switch OFF, then turn it to START.
Does starter motor operate?
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 3.
No >> Refer to STR-5, "Work Flow".
3.CHECK PNP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-I
2. Disconnect A/T assembly harness connector.
4. Check harness continuity between A/T assembly terminal 9 and combination meter terminal 17.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.
• Harness for open or short between A/T assembly and combination meter.
5.CHECK PNP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-II
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 102 and combination meter terminal 7.


P0850 PNP SWITCH
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7. A
NG >> GO TO 6.
EC
• Harness for open or short between ECM and combination meter
C
7.CHECK PNP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-III D
1. Check harness continuity between A/T assembly terminal 9 and TCM terminal 8.
Continuity should exist. E

OK or NG
F
OK >> GO TO 8.
8.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT G
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9. H
9.REPLACE COMBINATION METER
I
Refer to MWI-4.
>> INSPECTION END J

M/T MODELS
1.CHECK PNP SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT K
2. Disconnect PNP switch harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between PNP switch terminal 2 and ground. L

M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3 N
NG >> GO TO 2.
Check the following. O
• Harness for open or short between PNP switch and ground
P
3.CHECK PNP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 102 and PNP switch terminal 1.

P0850 PNP SWITCH

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.
• Harness for open or short between PNP switch and ECM
5.CHECK PNP SWITCH
Refer to TM-233.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Replace PNP switch.
>> INSPECTION END

P1148 CLOSED LOOP CONTROL
P1148 CLOSED LOOP CONTROL
A
This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. EC
• Harness or connectors C
The closed loop control function does not [The air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 circuit is
P1148
Closed loop control function operate even when vehicle is being driven in open or shorted.]
1148
the specified condition. • Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
• Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater D
NOTE:
DTC P1148 is displayed with another DTC for air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1.
Perform the trouble diagnosis for the corresponding DTC. E

P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE
If the cooling fan or another component in the cooling system malfunctions, engine coolant temperature will
rise.
When the engine coolant temperature reaches an abnormally high temperature condition, a malfunction is
indicated.
• Cooling fan (crankshaft driven)
• Cooling fan does not operate properly
• Radiator hose
(Overheat).
• Radiator
• Cooling fan system does not operate
• Radiator cap
Engine over temperature properly (Overheat).
P1217 • Water pump
(Overheat) • Engine coolant was not added to the sys-
• Thermostat
tem using the proper filling method.
• Engine coolant temperature sensor
• Engine coolant is not within the specified
For more information, refer to EC-298, "Main
range.
12 Causes of Overheating" .
CAUTION:
When a malfunction is indicated, always replace the coolant. Refer to CO-12, "Changing Engine Cool-
ant", “Changing Engine Coolant”. Also, replace the engine oil.
1. Fill radiator with coolant up to specified level with a filling speed of 2 liters per minute. Always use
coolant with the proper mixture ratio. Refer to MA-12, "Fluids and Lubricants".
2. After refilling coolant, run engine to ensure that no water-flow noise is emitted.
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the engine coolant over temperature enrichment protection
check, a DTC might not be confirmed.
WARNING:
Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could be caused by high pres-
sure fluid escaping from the radiator.
Wrap a thick cloth around cap. Carefully remove the cap by turning it a quarter turn to allow built-up
pressure to escape. Then turn the cap all the way off.
WITH CONSULT-III
1. Check the coolant level in the reservoir tank and radiator.
NOTE:
Allow engine to cool before checking coolant level.
If the coolant level in the reservoir tank and/or radiator is below
the proper range, skip the following steps and go to EC-297,
"Diagnosis Procedure" .
2. Confirm whether customer filled the coolant or not. If customer
filled the coolant, skip the following steps and go to EC-297,
"Diagnosis Procedure" .
3. Start engine.
4. Make sure that cooling fan (crankshaft driven) operates.
SEF621W
5. If NG, go to EC-297, "Diagnosis Procedure" .
WITH GST
NOTE:
If the coolant level in the reservoir tank and/or radiator is below the proper range, skip the following steps
and go to EC-297, "Diagnosis Procedure" .
2. Confirm whether customer filled the coolant or not. If customer filled the coolant, skip the following steps
and go to EC-297, "Diagnosis Procedure" .
3. Start engine and make sure that cooling fan (crankshaft driven) operates.
CAUTION:

Be careful not to overheat engine.
4. If NG, go to EC-297, "Diagnosis Procedure" . A
1.CHECK COOLING FAN (CRANKSHAFT DRIVEN) OPERATION EC

2. Make sure that cooling fan (crankshaft driven) operates normally.
C
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Check cooling fan (crankshaft driven). Refer to CO-19, "Exploded View".
D
2.CHECK COOLING SYSTEM FOR LEAK
Refer to CO-11, "System Inspection".
OK or NG E
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Check the following for leak.
• Hose F
• Radiator
• Water pump
• Reservoir tank G
3.CHECK RADIATOR CAP
Refer to CO-16, "Exploded View".
H
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Replace radiator cap.
I
4.CHECK THERMOSTAT
Refer to CO-22, "Exploded View".
OK or NG J
OK >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR K

OK or NG L
OK >> GO TO 6.
6.CHECK MAIN 12 CAUSES M
If the cause cannot be isolated, go to EC-298, "Main 12 Causes of Overheating" .
N
>> INSPECTION END

Main 12 Causes of Overheating INFOID:0000000004053545
Engine Step Inspection item Equipment Standard Reference page

OFF 1 • Blocked radiator • Visual No blocking —
• Blocked condenser
• Blocked radiator grille
• Blocked bumper
2 • Coolant mixture • Coolant tester Refer toCO-11, "System Inspection"
3 • Coolant level • Visual Coolant up to MAX level See CO-12, "Changing
in reservoir tank and radi- Engine Coolant".
ator filler neck
4 • Radiator cap • Pressure tester See CO-11, "System Inspection".
ON*1 5 • Coolant leaks • Visual No leaks See CO-11, "System In-

spection".
ON*1 6 • Thermostat • Touch the upper and Both hoses should be hot See CO-11, "System In-
lower radiator hoses spection".
See CO-19, "Exploded
ON*1 7 • Cooling fan • Visual Operating
View".
OFF 8 • Combustion gas leak • Color checker chemical Negative —
tester 4 Gas analyzer
ON*2 9 • Coolant temperature • Visual Gauge less than 3/4 when —

gauge driving
• Coolant overflow to res- • Visual No overflow during driving See CO-12, "Changing
ervoir tank and idling Engine Coolant".
OFF*3 10 • Coolant return from • Visual Should be initial level in See CO-11, "System In-
reservoir tank to radia- reservoir tank spection".
tor
OFF 11 • Cylinder head • Straight gauge feeler 0.1 mm (0.004 in) Maxi- See EM-64, "Exploded
gauge mum distortion (warping) View".
12 • Cylinder block and pis- • Visual No scuffing on cylinder See CO-9, "Troubleshoot-
tons walls or piston ing Chart".
*1: Engine running at 3,000 rpm for 10 minutes.
*2: Drive at 90 km/h (55 MPH) for 30 minutes and then let idle for 10 minutes.
*3: After 60 minutes of cool down time.
For more information, refer to CO-9, "Troubleshooting Chart".

P1225 TP SENSOR
P1225 TP SENSOR
A

kind of potentiometers which transform the throttle valve position into C
output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addition,
these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the throttle
valve and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the D
current opening angle of the throttle valve from these signals and the
ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve
opening angle properly in response to driving condition.
PBIB0145E E
The MIL will not light up for this self-diagnosis. F
P1225 Closed throttle position learning Closed throttle position learning value is • Electric throttle control actuator G
1225 performance problem excessively low. (TP sensor 1 and 2)

H
NOTE:
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. I
TESTING CONDITION:
WITH CONSULT-III J
K
WITH GST L
M
1.CHECK ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR VISUALLY
2. Remove the intake air duct.
3. Check if foreign matter is caught between the throttle valve and
the housing.
O
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Remove the foreign matter and clean the electric throttle
control actuator inside. P
BBIA0623E
2.REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR

P1225 TP SENSOR
>> INSPECTION END

P1226 TP SENSOR
P1226 TP SENSOR
A

kind of potentiometers which transform the throttle valve position into C
output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addition,
these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the throttle
valve and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the D
current opening angle of the throttle valve from these signals and the
ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve
opening angle properly in response to driving condition.
PBIB0145E E
The MIL will not light up for this self-diagnosis. F
P1226 Closed throttle position learning Closed throttle position learning is not performed • Electric throttle control actuator G
1226 performance problem successfully, repeatedly. (TP sensor 1 and 2)
DTC Confirmation Procedure INFOID:0000000004053552 H
NOTE:
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. I
TESTING CONDITION:
J
WITH CONSULT-III
2. Turn ignition switch ON. K
5. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-301, "Diagnosis Procedure". L
WITH GST
M
1.CHECK ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR VISUALLY N

3. Check if foreign matter is caught between the throttle valve and O
the housing.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. P
control actuator inside.
BBIA0623E

P1226 TP SENSOR

>> INSPECTION END

P1421 COLD START CONTROL
A
ECM controls ignition timing and engine idle speed when engine is started with prewarming up condition. EC
This control promotes the activation of three way catalyst by heating the catalyst and reduces emissions.
ECM does not control ignition timing and engine • Lack of intake air volume D
P1421 Cold start emission reduction
idle speed properly when engine is started with • Fuel injection system
1421 strategy monitoring
prewarming up condition. • ECM
E
NOTE:
• If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at F
• If DTC P1421 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for other DTC.
TESTING CONDITION: G
WITH CONSULT-III
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. H
I
4. Check that the “COOLAN TEMP/S” indication is between 4°C (39°F) and 36°C (97°F).
If "COOLAN TEMP/S" indication is within the specified value, go to the following steps.
If "COOLAN TEMP/S" indication is out of the specified value, cool engine down or warm engine up and go
to step 1. J
K
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-III” above. L
1.PERFORM IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING M

Perform EC-24, "Idle Air Volume Learning".
N
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 2.
No >> Follow the instruction of Idle Air Volume Learning.
O
Check for the cause of intake air volume lacking. Refer to the following.
• Crushed intake air passage P
• Intake air passage clogging
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair or replace malfunctioning part
3.CHECK FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
Perform EC-171, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" for DTC P0171.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Go to EC-172, "Diagnosis Procedure" for DTC P0171.
With CONSULT-III
With GST
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 5.
5.REPLACE ECM
1. Replace ECM.
2. Perform initialization of NVIS (NATS) system and registration of all NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs.
Refer to SEC-6, "ECM RE-COMMUNICATING FUNCTION : Special Repair Requirement".
>> INSPECTION END

P1550 BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR
A
The power generation voltage variable control enables fuel con- EC

sumption to be decreased by reducing the engine load which is
caused by the power generation of the generator. The battery cur-
rent sensor is installed to the battery cable at the negative terminal.
The sensor measures the charging/discharging current of the bat- C
tery. Based on the sensor signal, ECM judges whether or not the
power generation voltage variable control is performed. When per-
forming the power generation voltage variable control, ECM calcu- D
lates the target power generation voltage based on the sensor
signal. And ECM sends the calculated value as the power genera-
tion command value to IPDM E/R. For the details of the power gen-
eration voltage variable control, refer to CHG-6, "System
BBIA0630E E
Description".
CAUTION:
Never connect the electrical component or the ground wire directly to the battery terminal.The con- F
nection causes the malfunction of the power generation voltage variable control, and then the battery
discharge may occur.
On Board Diagnosis Logic INFOID:0000000004053559 G

NOTE: H
EC-288.
The output voltage of the battery current • Harness or connectors
P1550 Battery current sensor circuit
sensor remains within the specified (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
1550 range/performance
range while engine is running. • Battery current sensor J
K
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle. L
WITH CONSULT-III
1. Start engine and wait at least 10 seconds. M
WITH GST N
O

1. Turn ignition switch OFF. P
2. Loosen and retighten two ground screws on the body.

BBIA0614E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect battery current sensor harness connector.
BBIA0630E
3. Check voltage between battery current sensor terminal 1 and

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.
PBIA9891J

• Harness for open or short between battery current sensor and ECM
4.CHECK BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
3. Check harness continuity between battery current sensor terminal 2 and ECM terminal 67.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.

EC
6.CHECK BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT C
D
E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 7.
F
• Harness connectors E5, F14 G
>> Repair open circuit, short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. H
8.CHECK BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR
I
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Replace battery negative cable assembly. J
K
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection INFOID:0000000004053562 L
BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR

1. Reconnect harness connectors disconnected. M
2. Disconnect battery negative cable.
3. Install jumper cable between battery negative terminal and body
ground. N
BBIA0631E

5. Check voltage between ECM terminal 71 (battery current sensor
signal) and ground.
Voltage: Approximately 2.5V

6. If NG, replace battery negative cable assembly.
PBIB2617E

P1551, P1552 BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR
A

BBIA0630E E
Description".
CAUTION:
Never connect the electrical component or the ground wire directly to the battery terminal. The con- F
The MIL will not light up for these diagnosis.

NOTE: H
If DTC P1551 or P1552 is displayed with DTC P0643, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0643.
Refer to EC-288.
P1551 Battery current sensor circuit An excessively low voltage from the
1551 low input sensor is sent to ECM. • Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) J
P1552 Battery current sensor circuit An excessively high voltage from the • Battery current sensor
1552 high input sensor is sent to ECM.

K
TESTING CONDITION: L
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V with ignition
switch ON
WITH CONSULT-III M

2. Check 1st trip DTC. N
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-III” above. O
1.CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS P


BBIA0614E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
BBIA0630E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.
PBIA9891J

>> Repair circuit, short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.


OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.

EC
>> Repair circuit, short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

D
E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 7.
F
>> Repair circuit, short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. H

I
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
K
>> INSPECTION END

ground. N
BBIA0631E

signal) and ground.

PBIB2617E

A

BBIA0630E E
Description".
CAUTION:

NOTE: H
EC-288.
The signal voltage transmitted from the • Harness or connectors
P1553 Battery current sensor
sensor to ECM is higher than the amount of (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
1553 performance
the maximum power generation. • Battery current sensor J
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at K
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle. L
WITH CONSULT-III
M
WITH GST N
O

BBIA0614E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
BBIA0630E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.
PBIA9891J


OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.

EC
D
E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 7.
F
I
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
K
>> INSPECTION END

ground. N
BBIA0631E

signal) and ground.

PBIB2617E

A

BBIA0630E E
Description".
CAUTION:

NOTE: H
EC-288.
P1554 Battery current sensor per-
sensor is lower than the specified value (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
1554 formance
while the battery voltage is high enough. • Battery current sensor J
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the battery current sensor circuit. During this check, a 1st K
TESTING CONDITION:
• Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 12.8V at idle. L
• Before performing the following procedure, confirm that all load switches and A/C switch are turned
OFF.
WITH CONSULT-III M
2. Select “BAT CUR SEN” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III.
N
3. Check “BAT CUR SEN” indication for 10 seconds.
“BAT CUR SEN” should be above 2,300mV at least once.
O
WITH GST
P

signal) and ground for 10 seconds.
The voltage should be above 2.3V at least once.
PBIA9891J

Refer toEC-91, "Ground Inspection".
BBIA0614E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
BBIA0630E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.
PBIB2609E

• Harness connectors E5, F14 A
>> Repair open circuit, short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. EC
C
D
E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.
F
6.CHECK BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
I

J
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8. K
NG >> GO TO 7.
Check the following. L
M
8.CHECK BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR N
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9. O
NG >> Replace battery negative cable assembly.
>> INSPECTION END


ground.
BBIA0631E

signal) and ground.

PBIB2617E

P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH
A
ASCD steering switch has variant values of electrical resistance for each button. ECM reads voltage variation EC
of switch, and determines which button is operated.
E
PBIB2645E
Refer to CCS-2 for the ASCD function.

F
NOTE: G
EC-284.
H
• An excessively high voltage signal from the
ASCD steering switch is sent to ECM. • Harness or connectors I
P1564 • ECM detects that input signal from the ASCD (The switch circuit is open or shorted.)
ASCD steering switch
1564 steering switch is out of the specified range. • ASCD steering switch
• ECM detects that the ASCD steering switch is • ECM
stuck ON. J
NOTE: K
L
WITH CONSULT-III
2. Press MAIN switch for at least 10 seconds, then release it and wait at least 10 seconds. M
3. Press CANCEL switch for at least 10 seconds, then release it and wait at least 10 seconds.
4. Press RESUME/ACCELERATE switch for at least 10 seconds, then release it and wait at least 10 sec-
onds. N
5. Press SET/COAST switch for at least 10 seconds, then release it and wait at least 10 seconds.
6. Check DTC.
7. If DTC is detected, go to EC-321, "Diagnosis Procedure". O
WITH GST
P


BBIA0614E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK ASCD STEERING SWITCH CIRCUIT
With CONSULT-III
2. Select “MAIN SW”, “RESUME/ACC SW”, “SET SW and “CANCEL SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with
CONSULT-III.
3. Check each item indication under the following conditions.
Switch Monitor item Condition Indication

Pressed ON
MAIN switch MAIN SW
Released OFF
Pressed ON
CANCEL switch CANCEL SW
Released OFF
RESUME/ACCELERATE Pressed ON
RESUME/ACC SW
switch Released OFF
Pressed ON
SET/COAST switch SET SW
Released OFF
Without CONSULT-III
pressing each button.
Switch Condition Voltage [V]

Pressed Approx. 0
MAIN switch
Released Approx. 4.0
Pressed Approx. 1.0
CANCEL switch
RESUME/ACCELERATE Pressed Approx. 3.0 PBIB0311E

switch Released Approx. 4.0
Pressed Approx. 2.0
SET/COAST switch
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK ASCD STEERING SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
2. Disconnect combination switch harness connector M102.
4. Check harness continuity between combination switch terminal 15 and ECM terminal 67. A
Continuity should exist. EC

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. C
NG >> GO TO 4.
D
• Combination switch (spiral cable)
• Harness for open and short between ECM and combination switch E
F
5.CHECK ASCD STEERING SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 99 and combination switch terminal 14.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6. I
Check the following. J
• Harness for open and short between ECM and combination switch
K
7.CHECK ASCD STEERING SWITCH L
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8. M
NG >> Replace ASCD steering switch.
8.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT N
>> INSPECTION END O

ASCD STEERING SWITCH P
1. Disconnect combination switch (spiral cable) harness connector M102.

2. Check continuity between ASCD steering switch terminals 14
and 15 with pushing each switch.
Switch Condition Resistance [Ω]

Pressed Approx. 0
MAIN switch
Released Approx. 4,000
Pressed Approx. 250
CANCEL switch
RESUME/ACCELERATE Pressed Approx. 1,480 JMBIA1066GB

switch Released Approx. 4,000
Pressed Approx. 660
SET SW/COAST switch
If NG, replace ASCD steering switch.

P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
A
When the brake pedal is depressed, ASCD brake switch is turned EC

OFF and stop lamp switch is turned ON. ECM detects the state of
the brake pedal by those two types of input (ON/OFF signal).
C
BBIA0560E E
This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. F

NOTE:
G
to EC-284.
• This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. When malfunction A is detected, DTC is not
stored in ECM memory. And in that case, 1st trip DTC and 1st trip freeze frame data are displayed.
1st trip DTC is erased when ignition switch OFF. And even when malfunction A is detected in two H
consecutive trips, DTC is not stored in ECM memory.
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC Detecting Condition Possible Cause I
• When the vehicle speed is above • Harness or connectors
30km/h (19 MPH), ON signals from (The stop lamp switch circuit is shorted.)
A) the stop lamp switch and the ASCD • Harness or connectors
brake switch are sent to ECM at the (The ASCD brake switch circuit is shorted.) J
same time. • Harness or connectors
(The ASCD clutch switch circuit is shorted.)
(M/T models)
P1572 K
ASCD brake switch • Stop lamp switch
1572
• ASCD brake switch
• ASCD brake switch signal is not sent • ASCD clutch switch (M/T models)
B) to ECM for extremely long time while • Incorrect stop lamp switch installation L
the vehicle is driving • Incorrect ASCD brake switch installation
• Incorrect ASCD clutch switch installation
(M/T models)
• ECM M
CAUTION: N
NOTE:
• If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at O
• The procedure for malfunction B is not described. It takes an extremely long time to complete the procedure
for malfunction B. By performing the procedure for malfunction A, the condition that causes malfunction B
can be detected. P
TESTING CONDITION:
Steps 4 and 7 may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted in the shop or by driving the vehicle. If a
WITH CONSULT-III
1. Start engine.
3. Press MAIN switch and make sure that CRUISE indicator lights up.
4. Drive the vehicle for at least 5 consecutive seconds under the following condition.

5. Check DTC.
If DTC is not detected, go to the following steps.

Depress the brake pedal for more than 5
Driving location seconds so as not to come off from the
above-mentioned vehicle speed.
8. Check DTC.
WITH GST
A/T MODELS
1.CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-I
With CONSULT-III
2. Select “BRAKE SW1” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III.
3. Check “BRAKE SW1” indication under the following conditions.
CONDITION INDICATION
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed OFF
Brake pedal: Fully released ON
Without CONSULT-III
CONDITION VOLTAGE
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed Approximately 0V
Brake pedal: Fully released Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> GO TO 3.
MBIB0061E
2.CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-II

With CONSULT-III
Check “BRAKE SW2” indication in “DATA MONITOR” mode.

CONDITION INDICATION A
Brake pedal: Fully released OFF
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed ON
EC
Without CONSULT-III
Check voltage between ECM terminal 101 and ground under the following conditions.
C
CONDITION VOLTAGE
Brake pedal: Fully released Approximately 0V
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed Battery voltage D
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11. E
NG >> GO TO 7.
MBIB0060E F
3.CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
2. Disconnect ASCD brake switch harness connector. G
J
BBIA0560E
4. Check voltage between ASCD brake switch terminal 1 and

ground with CONSULT-III or tester. K

L
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.
M
PBIB0857E
N
• Fuse block (J/B) connector E160 O
• 10A fuse (No.12)
• Harness for open or short between ASCD brake switch and fuse
P
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground in harness or connectors.
5.CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 108 and ASCD brake switch terminal 2.


OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
6.CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> Replace ASCD brake switch.
7.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
2. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector.
BBIA0560E
3. Check voltage between stop lamp switch terminal 1 and ground

with CONSULT-III or tester.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> GO TO 8.
PBIB1184E

• Fuse block (J/B) connector E160
• 10A fuse (No.20)
• Harness for open or short between stop lamp switch and battery
9.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 101 and stop lamp switch terminal 2.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
10.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH A

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11. EC
NG >> Replace stop lamp switch.
C
>> INSPECTION END D

M/T MODELS
1.CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-I E
With CONSULT-III
F
G
Brake pedal and/or clutch pedal: Slightly depressed OFF
Brake pedal and clutch pedal: Fully released ON
Without CONSULT-III H
following conditions. I
CONDITION VOLTAGE
Brake pedal and/or clutch pedal: Slightly depressed Approximately 0V J
Brake pedal and clutch pedal: Fully released Battery voltage
OK or NG K
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> GO TO 3.
MBIB0061E
2.CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-II L
With CONSULT-III
Check “BRAKE SW2” indication in “DATA MONITOR” mode. M
Brake pedal: Fully released OFF N
Without CONSULT-III
Check voltage between ECM terminal 101 and ground under the fol- O
lowing conditions.
CONDITION VOLTAGE
P

Brake pedal: Slightly depressed Battery voltage
PBIB1677E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 14.
NG >> GO TO 10.
3.CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH CIRCUIT
2. Disconnect ASCD clutch switch harness connector.
BBIA0624E
4. Check voltage between ASCD clutch switch terminal 1 and

ground under the following conditions with CONSULT-III or
tester.
CONDITION VOLTAGE
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed Approx. 0V
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
PBIB0799E
NG >> GO TO 4.
2. Disconnect ASCD brake switch harness connector.
BBIA0560E


OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.
PBIB0857E

• Fuse block (J/B) connector E160 A
• 10A fuse (No.12)
EC
C
2. Check harness continuity between ASCD brake switch terminal 2 and ASCD clutch switch terminal 1.
D
E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
F
OK or NG G
OK >> GO TO 14.
8.CHECK ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT H

I
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 108 and ASCD clutch switch terminal 2.
Continuity should exist. J

OK or NG
K
OK >> GO TO 9.
9.CHECK ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH L
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 14. M
NG >> Replace ASCD clutch switch.
10.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT N
O
BBIA0560E


OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.
NG >> GO TO 11.
PBIB0117E

• 10A fuse(No.20)
• Harness for open or short between stop lamp switch and fuse

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13.
13.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 14.
>> INSPECTION END

ASCD BRAKE SWITCH


3. Check continuity between ASCD brake switch terminals 1 and 2
under the following conditions. A
Condition Continuity
Brake pedal: Fully released Should exist EC
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed Should not exist
If NG, adjust ASCD brake switch installation, refer to BR-18, and C
perform step 3 again.
SEC023D
D
ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH
2. Disconnect ASCD clutch switch harness connector. E
3. Check continuity between ASCD clutch switch terminals 1 and 2
under the following conditions.
F
Clutch pedal: Fully released Should exist
Clutch pedal: Slightly depressed Should not exist G
If NG, adjust ASCD clutch switch installation, refer to CL-7, "On-
Vehicle Inspection and Adjustment", and perform step 3 again.
H
SEC024D
STOP LAMP SWITCH

I
3. Check continuity between stop lamp switch terminals 1 and 2 under the following conditions. J
PBIB2285E
M
Brake pedal: Fully released Should not exist N
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed Should exist
If NG, adjust stop lamp switch installation, refer to BR-18, and perform step 3 again.
O

P1574 ASCD VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR
The ECM receives two vehicle speed sensor signals via CAN communication line. One is sent from combina-
tion meter, and the other is from TCM (Transmission control module). The ECM uses these signals for ASCD
control. Refer toTM-123 for ASCD functions.

NOTE:
Refer to EC-94.
to EC-286.
to EC-273.
to EC-284.
shorted.)
(The combination meter circuit is open or
P1574 ASCD vehicle speed ECM detects a difference between two vehicle
shorted.)
1574 sensor speed signals is out of the specified range.
• Wheel sensor
• ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
• ECM
CAUTION:
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
Step 3 may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted in the shop or by driving the vehicle. If a road test
is expected to be easier, it is unnecessary to lift the vehicle.
WITH CONSULT-III
1. Start engine.
2. Drive the vehicle at more than 40 km/h (25MPH).
3. Check DTC.
WITH GST

Check DTC with TCM. Refer to TM-150, "CONSULT-III Function (TRANSMISSION)".
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Perform trouble shooting relevant to DTC indicated.
2.CHECK DTC WITH “ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT)” A
Refer to BRC-20, "CONSULT-III Function (ABS)".

OK or NG EC
OK >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK COMBINATION METER C
Check combination meter function.
Refer to MWI-23.
D
>> INSPECTION END

P1715 INPUT SPEED SENSOR (TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR)
ECM receives turbine revolution sensor signal from TCM through CAN communication line. ECM uses this
signal for engine control.
NOTE:
Refer to EC-94.
• If DTC P1715 is displayed with DTC P0607 first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0607.
Refer to EC-286.
to EC-200.
to EC-204.
to EC-284.
Turbine revolution sensor signal is different
Input speed sensor shorted)
P1715 from the theoretical value calculated by
(Turbine revolution sensor) • Harness or connectors
1715 ECM from revolution sensor signal and en-
(TCM output) (Turbine revolution sensor circuit is open
gine rpm signal.
or shorted)
• TCM

Check DTC with TCM. Refer toTM-230 .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
2.REPLACE TCM
Replace TCM.
>> INSPECTION END

P1805 BRAKE SWITCH
P1805 BRAKE SWITCH
A
Brake switch signal is applied to the ECM through the stop lamp switch when the brake pedal is depressed. EC
This signal is used mainly to decrease the engine speed when the vehicle is driving.
C
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause D
P1805 A brake switch signal is not sent to ECM for ex- (Stop lamp switch circuit is open or short-
Brake switch
1805 tremely long time while the vehicle is driving. ed.)
E
• Stop lamp switch
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode. F
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode

ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator by regulating the throttle opening to a small range. Therefore, acceleration will be G
poor.
Vehicle condition Driving condition
When engine is idling Normal H
When accelerating Poor acceleration
NOTE:
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. J
WITH CONSULT-III
2. Fully depress the brake pedal for at least 5 seconds.
3. Erase the 1st trip DTC with CONSULT-III.
4. Check 1st trip DTC. L
WITH GST M
N
1.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH CIRCUIT
2. Check the stop lamp when depressing and releasing the brake pedal. O
Brake pedal Stop lamp

P
Fully released Not illuminated
Slightly depressed Illuminated
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 2.
P1805 BRAKE SWITCH
BBIA0560E
2. Check voltage between stop lamp switch terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-III or tester.
PBIB2284E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.
• 10A fuse (No.12)
• Harness for open and short between stop lamp switch and battery

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.

P1805 BRAKE SWITCH
>> INSPECTION END A
EC
STOP LAMP SWITCH
C
BBIA0560E
F
2. Check continuity between stop lamp switch terminals 1 and 2 under the following conditions.
I
PBIB2285E
Conditions Continuity
J
Brake pedal: Fully released Should not exist
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed Should exist
If NG, adjust stop lamp switch installation, refer to BR-18, and perform step 2 again. K

P2100, P2103 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY
Power supply for the throttle control motor is provided to the ECM via throttle control motor relay. The throttle
control motor relay is ON/OFF controlled by the ECM. When the ignition switch is turned ON, the ECM sends
an ON signal to throttle control motor relay and battery voltage is provided to the ECM. When the ignition
switch is turned OFF, the ECM sends an OFF signal to throttle control motor relay and battery voltage is not
provided to the ECM.
These self-diagnoses have one trip detection logic.
P2100 Throttle control motor ECM detects a voltage of power source for (Throttle control motor relay circuit is
2100 relay circuit open throttle control motor is excessively low. open)
• Throttle control motor relay
P2103 Throttle control motor ECM detects the throttle control motor relay is (Throttle control motor relay circuit is
2103 relay circuit short stuck ON. shorted)
FAIL-SAFE MODE

spring.
NOTE:
With CONSULT-III
3. Check DTC.
With GST
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 8V.
With CONSULT-III
2. Check DTC.
With GST

A
1.CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 104 and ground with EC
Voltage: Battery voltage C

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 2. D
E
PBIB1171E
2.CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II

3. Check continuity between ECM terminal 104 and IPDM E/R terminal 47.
G
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair open circuit, short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. I
3.CHECK FUSE
1. Disconnect 20A fuse (No.52).
2. Check 20A fuse for blown. J
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Replace 20A fuse. K
4.CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT-I

Check voltage between ECM terminal 3 and ground under the fol- L
lowing conditions with CONSULT-III or tester.
Ignition switch Voltage M

OFF Approximately 0V
Battery voltage
ON
(11 - 14V) N
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 5. MBIB0028E O
5.CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT-II

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.
• Harness for open or short between ECM and IPDM E/R
OK or NG

P2101 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION
A
NOTE: EC
If DTC P2101 is displayed with DTC P2100 or 2119, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P2100
or P2119. Refer to EC-340 or EC-349.
Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor, throttle position sensor, etc.
The throttle control motor is operated by the ECM and it opens and closes the throttle valve. C
The current opening angle of the throttle valve is detected by the throttle position sensor and it provides feed-
back to the ECM to control the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening angle properly in
response to driving condition. D
This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. E
• Harness or connectors F
P2101 Electric throttle control Electric throttle control function does not
(Throttle control motor circuit is open or shorted)
2101 performance problem operate properly.
FAIL-SAFE MODE G
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode H

spring.
I
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at J
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V when engine is run- K
ning.
WITH CONSULT-III
1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2 seconds. L
3. Check DTC.
M
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-III” above. N
1.CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS O

P

BBIA0614E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
Check voltage between ECM terminal 3 and ground under the fol-
Ignition switch Voltage

Battery voltage
ON
(11 - 14V)
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> GO TO 3. MBIB0028E


OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 4.
PBIB1171E


OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK FUSE
2. Check 20A fuse for blown.
OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Replace 20A fuse. A
EC
C
D
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 7.
E
• Harness connectors E2, F32 F
>> Repair open circuit, short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. G
H
OK or NG
I
9.CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN OR SHORT
2. Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector. J
4. Check harness continuity between the following terminals.
K
Electric throttle control

ECM terminal Continuity
actuator terminal
L
5 Should not exist
5
4 Should exist
5 Should exist BBIA0623E M
6
4 Should not exist
N
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
O
P

the housing.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
BBIA0623E
11.CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.
NG >> GO TO 13.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13.
13. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
>> INSPECTION END

THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR

2. Check resistance between terminals 5 and 6.
Resistance: Approximately 1 - 15 Ω [at 25 °C (77°F)]

3. If NG, replace electric throttle control actuator and go to next
step.
PBIB2606E

P2118 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR
A
The throttle control motor is operated by the ECM and it opens and closes the throttle valve. EC
The current opening angle of the throttle valve is detected by the throttle position sensor and it provides feed-
back to the ECM to control the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening angle properly in
response to driving condition.
C

D
• Harness or connectors E
P2118 Throttle control motor ECM detects short in both circuits between (Throttle control motor circuit is shorted.)
2118 circuit short ECM and throttle control motor. • Electric throttle control actuator
(Throttle control motor)
F
FAIL-SAFE MODE
G
spring.
H
NOTE: I
WITH CONSULT-III J
3. Check DTC. K
WITH GST L
M
2. Loosen and retighten two ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-91, "Ground Inspection". N
BBIA0614E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.


actuator terminal
5 Should not exist
5
4 Should exist
5 Should exist BBIA0616E
6
4 Should not exist
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 5.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
>> INSPECTION END



step.
PBIB2606E

P2119 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
A
Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor, throttle position sensor, etc. EC
The throttle control motor is operated by the ECM and it opens and closes the throttle valve.
The throttle position sensor detects the throttle valve position, and the opening and closing speed of the throt-
tle valve and feeds the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the throttle
valve from these signals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening C
angle properly in response to driving condition.
D
E
Electric throttle control actuator does not function
A)
properly due to the return spring malfunction.
P2119 Electric throttle control F
Throttle valve opening angle in fail-safe mode is • Electric throttle control actuator
2119 actuator B)
not in specified range.
C) ECM detects the throttle valve is stuck open.
G
FAIL-SAFE MODE
H
ECM controls the electric throttle actuator by regulating the throttle opening around the idle position. The
Malfunction A I
engine speed will not rise more than 2,000 rpm.
Malfunction B ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator by regulating the throttle opening to 20 degrees or less.
While the vehicle is driving, it slows down gradually by fuel cut. After the vehicle stops, the engine stalls.
Malfunction C J
The engine can restart in N or P (A/T), Neutral (M/T), and engine speed will not exceed 1,000 rpm or more.
K
NOTE:
• Perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A AND B first. If the DTC cannot be confirmed, perform
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C.
• If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at L
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A AND B
M
With CONSULT-III
2. Set shift lever to D position (A/T) or 1st position (M/T), and wait at least 3 seconds. N
3. Set shift lever to P position (A/T) or Neutral position (M/T).
O
6. Set shift lever to D position (A/T) or 1st position (M/T), and wait at least 3 seconds.
7. Set shift lever to P position (A/T) or Neutral position (M/T). P
9. Check DTC.
With GST
With CONSULT-III
2. Set shift lever to D position (A/T) or 1st position (M/T) and wait at least 3 seconds.
3. Set shift lever to N, P position (A/T) or Neutral (M/T) position.
5. Check DTC.
With GST

2. Check if a foreign matter is caught between the throttle valve
and the housing.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
BBIA0623E

>> INSPECTION END

P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR
A
The accelerator pedal position sensor is installed on the upper end EC

of the accelerator pedal assembly. The sensor detects the accelera-
tor position and sends a signal to the ECM.
Accelerator pedal position sensor has two sensors. These sensors
are a kind of potentiometers which transform the accelerator pedal C
position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM.
In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of
the accelerator pedal and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The D
ECM judges the current opening angle of the accelerator pedal from
these signals and controls the throttle control motor based on these
signals.
Idle position of the accelerator pedal is determined by the ECM
PBIB1741E E
receiving the signal from the accelerator pedal position sensor. The ECM uses this signal for the engine oper-
ation such as fuel cut.
F

NOTE: G
Refer to EC-288.
H
P2122 Accelerator pedal position An excessively low voltage from the APP • Harness or connectors
2122 sensor 1 circuit low input sensor 1 is sent to ECM. (The APP sensor 1 circuit is open or I
shorted.)
P2123 Accelerator pedal position An excessively high voltage from the APP • Accelerator pedal position sensor
2123 sensor 1 circuit high input sensor 1 is sent to ECM. (Accelerator pedal position sensor 1)
J
FAIL-SAFE MODE
K
degrees. L
DTC Confirmation Procedure INFOID:0000000004053620 M
NOTE:
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. N
TESTING CONDITION:
O
WITH CONSULT-III
2. Check DTC. P
WITH GST


BBIA0614E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
1. Disconnect accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor harness
connector.
BBIA0592E
3. Check voltage between APP sensor terminal 2 and ground with

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
PBIB2608E
3.CHECK APP SENSOR 1 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

3. Check harness continuity between APP sensor terminal 4 and ECM terminal 82.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK APP SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 106 and APP sensor terminal 3.
Refer to Wiring Diagram. A

2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. EC
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair open circuit, short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. C
5.CHECK APP SENSOR
Refer to EC-353, "Component Inspection". D
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6. E
2. Perform EC-24, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". F
G
>> INSPECTION END
7.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT H
>> INSPECTION END I

J
ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR
3. Check voltage between ECM terminals 106 (APP sensor 1 sig-
nal), 98 (APP sensor 2 signal) and ground under the following
conditions. L

106 Fully released 0.6 - 0.95V M
(Accelerator pedal position
sensor 1) Fully depressed Less than 4.75V
98 Fully released 0.3 - 0.45V

N
sensor 2) Fully depressed Less than 2.4V MBIB0023E
4. If NG, replace accelerator pedal assembly and go to the next step.

O

The accelerator pedal position sensor is installed on the upper end

are a kind of potentiometers which transform the accelerator pedal
the accelerator pedal and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The
signals.
PBIB1741E
P2127 Accelerator pedal position An excessively low voltage from the APP • Harness or connectors
2127 sensor 2 circuit low input sensor 2 is sent to ECM. (The APP sensor 2 circuit is open or
shorted.)
(TP sensor circuit is shorted.)
P2128 Accelerator pedal position An excessively high voltage from the APP • Accelerator pedal position sensor
2128 sensor 2 circuit high input sensor 2 is sent to ECM. (Accelerator pedal position sensor 2)
(TP sensor 1 and 2)
FAIL-SAFE MODE

degrees.
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
WITH CONSULT-III
2. Check DTC.
WITH GST

A
2. Loosen and retighten two ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-91, "Ground Inspection". EC
BBIA0614E
E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. F
2.CHECK APP SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
1. Disconnect accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor harness G
connector.
H
BBIA0592E J

CONSULT-III or tester. K
OK or NG L
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 3.
M
PBIB2611E
3.CHECK APP SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II N

3. Check harness continuity between APP sensor terminal 1 and ECM terminal 91. O
Continuity should exist. P

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK APP SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III


OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> GO TO 6.
>> INSPECTION END


OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
9.CHECK APP SENSOR
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> GO TO 10.

>> INSPECTION END

EC
>> INSPECTION END
C
D
E
conditions.

F
sensor 1) Fully depressed Less than 4.75V
G
sensor 2) Fully depressed Less than 2.4V MBIB0023E
4. If NG, replace accelerator pedal assembly and go to the next step. H

I

P2135 TP SENSOR
P2135 TP SENSOR
Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor,

a kind of potentiometers which transform the throttle valve position
throttle valve and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM
PBIB0145E
tion.
• Harness or connector
(The TP sensor 1 and 2 circuit is open or
shorted.)
Throttle position sensor cir- Rationally incorrect voltage is sent to ECM
P2135 (APP sensor 2 circuit is shorted.)
cuit range/performance compared with the signals from TP sensor 1
2135 • Electric throttle control actuator
problem and TP sensor 2.
(TP sensor 1 and 2)
(APP sensor 2)
FAIL-SAFE MODE

degrees.
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
WITH CONSULT-III
2. Check DTC.
WITH GST


P2135 TP SENSOR
A
EC
BBIA0614E
OK or NG D
OK >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I E

F
BBIA0616E
I
J
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7. K
NG >> GO TO 3.
L
PBIB2604E
3.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II

M

OK or NG O
OK >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III P


P2135 TP SENSOR
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK APP SENSOR
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> GO TO 6.
>> INSPECTION END

7.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
8.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 50 and electric throttle control actuator terminal 1, ECM
terminal 69 and electric throttle control actuator terminal 3.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> GO TO 10.
>> INSPECTION END


P2135 TP SENSOR
>> INSPECTION END A
EC
2. Perform EC-24, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". C
5. Check voltage between ECM terminals 50 (TP sensor 1 signal), D
tions.
E

F

PBIB1060E
G
step.
7. Perform EC-24, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". H

P2138 APP SENSOR
P2138 APP SENSOR

signals.
PBIB1741E

NOTE:
If DTC P2138 is displayed with DTC P0643, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0643.
Refer to EC-288.
(The APP sensor 1 and 2 circuit is open
or shorted.)
Accelerator pedal position Rationally incorrect voltage is sent to ECM
P2138 (TP sensor circuit is shorted.)
sensor circuit range/perfor- compared with the signals from APP sensor
2138 • Accelerator pedal position sensor
mance problem 1 and APP sensor 2.
(APP sensor 1 and 2)
(TP sensor 1 and 2)
FAIL-SAFE MODE

degrees.
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
WITH CONSULT-III
2. Check DTC.
WITH GST

P2138 APP SENSOR
A
2. Loosen and retighten two ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-91, "Ground Inspection". EC
BBIA0614E
E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
1. Disconnect accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor harness G
connector.
H
BBIA0592E J

CONSULT-III or tester. K
OK or NG L
OK >> GO TO 3.
harness or connectors. M
PBIB2608E
3.CHECK APP SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I N
Check voltage between APP sensor terminal 1 and ground with

O
OK or NG P
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 4.
PBIB2611E
4.CHECK APP SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II

P2138 APP SENSOR

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.
NG >> GO TO 7.
>> INSPECTION END

8.CHECK APP SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
3. Check harness continuity between APP sensor terminal 4 and ECM terminal 82, APP sensor terminal 5
and ECM terminal 83.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
9.CHECK APP SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 106 and APP sensor terminal 3, ECM terminal 98 and
APP sensor terminal 6.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.

P2138 APP SENSOR
10.CHECK APP SENSOR A

OK or NG EC
OK >> GO TO 12.
NG >> GO TO 11.
11.REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY C
3. Perform EC-24, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". D
>> INSPECTION END E

Refer to GI-49, "Intermittent Incident". F
>> INSPECTION END

G

H
3. Check voltage between ECM terminals 106 (APP sensor 1 sig- I
conditions.
J
sensor 1) Fully depressed Less than 4.75V K

sensor 2) Fully depressed Less than 2.4V MBIB0023E L
4. If NG, replace accelerator pedal assembly and go to the next step.
M
N

P2A00 A/F SENSOR 1
P2A00 A/F SENSOR 1
The A/F sensor 1 is a planar dual-cell limit current sensor. The sen-
< air).
they are brought to thermodynamic balance. SEF579Z

pump cell so that the composition of the exhaust gas in the diffusion
ture of 700 - 800°C (1,292 - 1,472°F).
SEF580Z
To judge the malfunction, the A/F signal computed by ECM from the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 signal is mon-
itored not to be shifted to LEAN side or RICH side.
• The output voltage computed by ECM from the
air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 signal is shifted to
P2A00 Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 the lean side for a specified period.
• Fuel pressure
2A00 circuit range/performance • The A/F signal computed by ECM from the air
• Fuel injector
fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 signal is shifted to the
rich side for a specified period.
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
WITH CONSULT-III
SULT-III.
4. Clear the self-learning coefficient by touching “CLEAR”.
6. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute under no load.
8. Keep engine speed between 2,500 and 3,000 rpm for 20 minutes.

P2A00 A/F SENSOR 1
A
WITH GST
EC
nector. C
6. Select Service $03 with GST and make sure that DTC P0102 is
detected.
7. Select Service $04 with GST and erase the DTC P0102. D
8. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and
4,000 rpm for 1 minute under no load.
10. Keep engine speed between 2,500 and 3,000 rpm for 20 min- E
BBIA0622E
utes.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-367, "Diagnosis Procedure". F
1.CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS G

H
BBIA0614E
OK or NG K
OK >> GO TO 2.
L
2.RETIGHTEN AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1
Loosen and retighten the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1. Refer toEM-
29, "Removal and Installation" M
>> GO TO 3.
N
BBIA0617E
3.CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK P

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.

P2A00 A/F SENSOR 1
4.CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA.

With CONSULT-III
Without CONSULT-III
nector.
BBIA0622E
Yes or No
No >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR
3. Check harness connector for water.
Water should not exit.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
BBIA0617E

BBIA0617E

P2A00 A/F SENSOR 1

OK or NG EC
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 7.
C
PBIB1683E

E
• 10A fuse
F
8.CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT G
3. Check harness continuity between the following terminals. Refer to Wiring Diagram. H

1 16 I
2 75
5 35
J
6 56

L
OK or NG M
OK >> GO TO 9.
9.CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER N

OK or NG O
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 11.
10.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT P
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
P2A00 A/F SENSOR 1
CAUTION:
>> GO TO 12.
12.CONFIRM A/F ADJUSTMENT DATA
2. Select “A/F ADJ-B1” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III.
3. Make sure that “0.000” is displayed on CONSULT-III screen.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END.
NG >> GO TO 13.
With CONSULT-III
Without CONSULT-III
nector.
>> GO TO 14.
BBIA0622E

2. Select “A/F ADJ-B1” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III.
3. Make sure that “0.000” is displayed on CONSULT-III screen.
>> INSPECTION END

ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
A
When depress on the brake pedal, ASCD brake switch is turned EC

the brake pedal by this those two types of input (ON/OFF signal)
C
BBIA0560E E
A/T MODELS F

With CONSULT-III G
3. Check “BRAKE SW1” indication under the following conditions. H
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed OFF I
Without CONSULT-III J
following conditions. K
CONDITION VOLTAGE
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed Approximately 0V L
MBIB0061E
N
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END.
NG >> GO TO 2. O
P

ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
BBIA0560E


OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.
PBIB0857E

• 10A fuse (No.12)


OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
>> INSPECTION END

M/T MODELS
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
With CONSULT-III
1. Turn ignition switch ON. A
EC
Brake pedal and/or clutch pedal: Slightly depressed OFF
Brake pedal and clutch pedal: Fully released ON C
Without CONSULT-III
E
CONDITION VOLTAGE
Brake pedal and/or clutch pedal: Slightly depressed Approximately 0V
F
Brake pedal and clutch pedal: Fully released Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END. G
NG >> GO TO 2.
MBIB0061E
2.CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH CIRCUIT H

I
BBIA0624E
L
tester.
M
CONDITION VOLTAGE
Brake pedal: Fully released Battery voltage N
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed Approx. 0V
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7. O
PBIB0799E
NG >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT P

ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
BBIA0560E


OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.
PBIB0857E

• 10A fuse (No.12)

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
7.CHECK ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT


ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8. A
8.CHECK ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH
EC
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9. C
NG >> Replace ASCD clutch switch
Refer to GI-49, "Intermittent Incident". D
>> INSPECTION END

E
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH F

3. Check continuity between ASCD brake switch terminals 1 and 2 G
under the following conditions.
H
Brake pedal: Fully released Should exist
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed Should not exist
I
If NG, adjust ASCD brake switch installation, refer to BR-18, and
perform step 3 again.
J
SEC023D
ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH

1. Turn ignition switch OFF. K
3. Check continuity between ASCD clutch switch terminals 1 and 2
under the following conditions. L
Clutch pedal: Fully released Should exist M
Clutch pedal: Slightly depressed Should not exist
If NG, adjust ASCD clutch switch installation, refer to CL-7, "On- N
SEC024D

ASCD INDICATOR
ASCD INDICATOR
ASCD indicator lamp illuminates to indicate ASCD operation status. Lamp has two indicators, CRUISE and
SET, and is integrated in combination meter.
CRUISE indicator illuminates when MAIN switch on ASCD steering switch is turned ON to indicate that ASCD
system is ready for operation.
SET indicator illuminates when the following conditions are met.
• CRUISE indicator is illuminated.
• SET/COAST switch on ASCD steering switch is turned ON while vehicle speed is within the range of ASCD
setting.
SET indicator remains lit during ASCD control.
Refer toCCS-2 for the ASCD function.
1.CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION

Check ASCD indicator under the following conditions.
ASCD INDICATOR CONDITION SPECIFICATION

MAIN switch: Pressed at the 1st
CRUISE LAMP • Ignition switch: ON ON → OFF
time → at the 2nd time
• MAIN switch: ON ASCD: Operating ON
SET LAMP • When vehicle speed is between
40 km/h (25 MPH) and 144 km/h (89 MPH) ASCD: Not operating OFF
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC
Check that DTC UXXXX is not displayed.
Yes or No
Yes >> Perform trouble diagnoses for DTC UXXXX, refer to EC-94.
No >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK COMBINATION METER OPERATION
Refer to MWI-3.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Go to MWI-5, "METER SYSTEM : Arrangement of Combination Meter".
Refer to GI-49.
>> INSPECTION END

ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL
A
The electrical load signal (Headlamp switch signal, etc.) is transferred through the CAN communication line EC
from BCM to ECM via IPDM E/R.
C
1.CHECK LOAD SIGNAL CIRCUIT OVERALL FUNCTION-II
2. Connect CONSULT-III and select “DATA MONITOR” mode. D
3. Select “LOAD SIGNAL” and check indication under the following conditions.
Condition Indication E
Lighting switch: ON at 2nd position ON
Lighting switch: OFF OFF
F
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 2. G
2.CHECK HEADLAMP SYSTEM
Refer toEXL-136 or EXL-140.
H
>> INSPECTION END

I

FUEL INJECTOR
FUEL INJECTOR
The fuel injector is a small, precise solenoid valve. When the ECM
supplies a ground to the fuel injector circuit, the coil in the fuel injec-
tor is energized. The energized coil pulls the ball valve back and
allows fuel to flow through the fuel injector into the intake manifold.
The amount of fuel injected depends upon the injection pulse dura-
tion. Pulse duration is the length of time the fuel injector remains
open. The ECM controls the injection pulse duration based on
engine fuel needs.
SEF375Z
1.INSPECTION START
Turn ignition switch to START.
Is any cylinder ignited?
Yes or No
Yes (With CONSULT-III)>>GO TO 2.
Yes (Without CONSULT-III)>>GO TO 3.
No >> GO TO 4.
With CONSULT-III
1. Start engine.
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 4.
Without CONSULT-III
1. Start engine.
Clicking noise should exist.

OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 4.
PBIB1986E
4.CHECK FUEL INJECTOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT


FUEL INJECTOR
2. Disconnect fuel injector harness connector.
A
EC
BBIA0625E
D
4. Check voltage between fuel injector terminal 1 and ground with
CONSULT-III or tester. E

OK or NG F
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.
G
PBIB0582E
5.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART H

I
• Harness connectors F45, F210
• 15A fuse (No.55)
• Harness for open or short between fuel injector and fuse J

K
6.CHECK FUEL INJECTOR OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. L
3. Check harness continuity between fuel injector terminal 2 and ECM terminals 22, 23, 41, 42.
Continuity should exist. M

OK or NG N
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 7.
• Harness for open or short between fuel injector and ECM P
OK or NG

FUEL INJECTOR
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Replace fuel injector.
>> INSPECTION END

FUEL INJECTOR
2. Check resistance between terminals as shown in the figure.
Resistance: 11.1 - 14.3Ω [at 10 - 60°C (50 - 140°F)]
PBIB1727E

FUEL PUMP
FUEL PUMP
A

Crankshaft position sensor (POS) C
Engine speed*
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Fuel pump control Fuel pump relay
Battery Battery voltage*
*: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage. D
The ECM activates the fuel pump for 1 second after the ignition switch is turned ON to improve engine start
ability. If the ECM receives a engine speed signal from the camshaft position sensor (PHASE), it knows that
the engine is rotating, and causes the pump to operate. If the engine speed signal is not received when the E
ignition switch is ON, the engine stalls. The ECM stops pump operation and prevents battery discharging,
thereby improving safety. The ECM does not directly drive the fuel pump. It controls the ON/OFF fuel pump
relay, which in turn controls the fuel pump.
F
Condition Fuel pump operation
Ignition switch is turned to ON Operates for 1 second.
G
Engine running and cranking Operates.
When engine is stopped Stops in 1.5 seconds.
Except as shown above Stops. H
A turbine type design fuel pump is used in the fuel tank.
I
BBIA0529E
L
1.CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION M

2. Pinch fuel feed hose with two fingers.
Fuel pressure pulsation should be felt on the fuel feed hose N
for 1 second after ignition switch is turned ON.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END O
NG >> GO TO 2.
BBIA0626E
2.CHECK FUEL PUMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I

FUEL PUMP

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 3.
PBIB1187E
3.CHECK FUEL PUMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II

Check voltage between IPDM E/R terminal 46 and ground with

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 12.
PBIB2656E

Check harness for open or short between IPDM E/R and ECM

5.CHECK FUEL PUMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III
nector.
BBIA0545E
Voltage: Battery voltage should exist for 1 second

after ignition switch is turned ON.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> GO TO 6.
PBIB0795E
6.CHECK 15A FUSE

FUEL PUMP
3. Check 15A fuse. A
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Replace fuse. EC
7.CHECK FUEL PUMP POWER SUPPLY CURCUIT-IV
C
2. Check harness continuity between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” terminal 1 and IPDM E/R termi-
nal 13.
D
E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.
NG >> GO TO 8.
F
• Harness connectors C1, E41 G
• Harness for open or short between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” and IPDM E/R
9.CHECK FUEL PUMP GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” terminal 3 and ground.
I

J
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11. K
NG >> GO TO 10.
Check the following. L
• Harness for open or short between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” and ground
M
11.CHECK FUEL PUMP N
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12. O
NG >> Replace fuel pump.
Refer toGI-49, "Intermittent Incident" . P
OK or NG

FUEL PUMP
FUEL PUMP
nector.
BBIA0545E
terminals 1 and 3.
Resistance: 0.2 - 5.0Ω [at 25°C (77°F)]
SEC918C

IGNITION SIGNAL
IGNITION SIGNAL
A
IGNITION COIL & POWER TRANSISTOR EC

The ignition signal from the ECM is sent to and amplified by the
power transistor. The power transistor turns ON and OFF the ignition
coil primary circuit. This ON/OFF operation induces the proper high C
voltage in the coil secondary circuit.
E
BBIA0604E

F
1.CHECK ENGINE START
Turn ignition switch OFF, and restart engine. G
Is engine running?
Yes or No
Yes (With CONSULT-III)>>GO TO 2. H
No >> GO TO 4.
2.CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION I
With CONSULT-III
2. Make sure that each circuit produce a momentary engine speed drop. J
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 10. K
Without CONSULT-III L
1. Let engine idle.
2. Read the voltage signal between ECM terminals 61, 62, 80, 81
and ground with an oscilloscope.
3. Verify that the oscilloscope screen shows the signal wave as M
shown below.
NOTE:
The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at idle. N
PBIB1204E
PBIB0521E P
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 10.
4.CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I

IGNITION SIGNAL

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Go to EC-88.
MBIB0034E
5.CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II

2. Disconnect condenser-1 harness connector.
BBIA0628E
4. Check voltage between condenser-1 terminal 1 and ground with


OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 6.
PBIB0624E
6.CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III

3. Check harness continuity between IPDM E/R terminal 3 and condenser-1 terminal 1.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 15.
NG >> GO TO 7.
• Harness for open or short between condenser-1 and IPDM E/R
8.CHECK CONDENSER-1 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
IGNITION SIGNAL
2. Check harness continuity between condenser-1 terminal 2 and ground. A
Continuity should exist. EC

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9. C
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
9.CHECK CONDENSER-1
D
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10. E
NG >> Replace condenser-1.
10.CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-IV
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. F
3. Disconnect ignition coil harness connector.
4. Turn ignition switch ON. G
BBIA0604E
J
5. Check voltage between ignition coil terminal 3 and ground with
K
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12. L
NG >> GO TO 11.
M
PBIB0138E
11.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART N

• Harness connector E2, F32
• Harness for open or short between ignition coil and IPDM E/R.
O
12.CHECK IGNITION COIL GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT P
2. Check harness continuity between ignition coil terminal 2 and ground.


IGNITION SIGNAL
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13.
13.CHECK IGNITION COIL OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 61, 62, 80, 81 and ignition coil terminal 1.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 14.
14.CHECK IGNITION COIL WITH POWER TRANSISTOR
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 15.
NG >> Replace ignition coil with power transistor.
>> INSPECTION END

IGNITION COIL WITH POWER TRANSISTOR

CAUTION:
3. Check resistance between ignition coil terminals as follows.

1 and 2 Except 0 or ∞
1 and 3
Except 0
2 and 3
4. If NG, Replace ignition coil with power transistor.
PBIB0847E
NOTE:
8. Start engine.
pressure.
11. Remove ignition coil harness connectors to avoid the electrical
discharge from the ignition coils.
BBIA0534E
checked.
IGNITION SIGNAL
between the edge of the spark plug and grounded metal portion A
is generated between the spark plug and the grounded part.
EC
CAUTION: C
• Never approach to the spark plug and the ignition coil
within 50cm. Be careful not to get an electrical shock
while checking, because the electrical discharge voltage PBIB2325E
becomes 20kV or more. D

• It might cause to damage the ignition coil if the gap of more than 17 mm is taken.
NOTE:
When the gap is less than 13 mm, the spark might be generated even if the coil is malfunctioning. E
CONDENSER-1
3. Check resistance between condenser-1 terminals 1 and 2.
G
Resistance: Above 1 MΩ [at 25°C (77°F)]
H
PBIB0794E
J

ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR)
JMBIA1930GB
From the beginning of refueling, the air and vapor inside the fuel tank go through refueling EVAP vapor cut
valve and EVAP/ORVR line to the EVAP canister. The vapor is absorbed by the EVAP canister and the air is
released to the atmosphere.
When the refueling has reached the full level of the fuel tank, the refueling EVAP vapor cut valve is closed and
refueling is stopped because of auto shut-off. The vapor which was absorbed by the EVAP canister is purged
during driving.
WARNING:
When conducting inspections below, be sure to observe the following:
• Put a “CAUTION: FLAMMABLE” sign in workshop.
• Never smoke while servicing fuel system. Keep open flames and sparks away from work area.
• Be sure to furnish the workshop with a CO2 fire extinguisher.
CAUTION:
• Before removing fuel line parts, carry out the following procedures:
- Put drained fuel in an explosion-proof container and put lid on securely.
- Release fuel pressure from fuel line. Refer to EC-456, "Fuel Pressure Check".
- Disconnect battery ground cable.
• Always replace O-ring when the fuel gauge retainer is removed.
• Never kink or twist hose and tube when they are installed.
• Never tighten hose and clamps excessively to avoid damaging hoses.
• After installation, run engine and check for fuel leaks at connection.
• Never attempt to top off the fuel tank after the fuel pump nozzle shuts off automatically.
Continued refueling may cause fuel overflow, resulting in fuel spray and possibly a fire.
SYMPTOM: FUEL ODOR FROM EVAP CANISTER IS STRONG.

attached.
2. Weigh the EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sen-
sor attached.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> GO TO 3.
2.CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER

Does water drain from the EVAP canister?
Yes or No A
Yes >> GO TO 3.
No >> GO TO 5.
EC
BBIA0558E
3.REPLACE EVAP CANISTER D
Replace EVAP canister with a new one.

E
>> GO TO 4.
F
Check the EVAP hose between EVAP canister and vehicle frame for clogging or poor connection.
>> Repair or replace EVAP hose. G

H
OK or NG
I
SYMPTOM: CANNOT REFUEL/FUEL ODOR FROM THE FUEL FILLER OPENING IS STRONG
WHILE REFUELING.
J
attached. K
sor attached.
The weight should be less than 2.0 kg (4.4 lb). L
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> GO TO 3. M
2.CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER
N
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 3.
No >> GO TO 5.
O
BBIA0558E
3.REPLACE EVAP CANISTER


>> GO TO 4.
>> Repair or replace EVAP hose.

5.CHECK VENT HOSES AND VENT TUBES
Check hoses and tubes between EVAP canister and refueling EVAP vapor cut valve for clogging, kink, loose-
ness and improper connection.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
Check recirculation line for clogging, dents and cracks.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Replace fuel filler tube.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
8.CHECK FUEL FILLER TUBE
Check fuel filler tube and hose connected to the fuel tank for clogging, dents and cracks.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
9.CHECK ONE-WAY FUEL VALVE-I
Check one-way valve for clogging.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> Repair or replace one-way fuel valve with fuel tank.
10.CHECK ONE-WAY FUEL VALVE-II
1. Make sure that fuel is drained from the tank.
2. Remove fuel filler tube and hose.
3. Check one-way fuel valve for operation as follows.
When a stick is inserted, the valve should open, when removing
stick it should close.
Do not drop any material into the tank.
OK or NG
NG >> Replace fuel filler tube or replace one-way fuel valve
with fuel tank.
SEF665U
REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE

With CONSULT-III

1. Remove fuel tank. Refer to FL-6, "Removal and Installation".
2. Drain fuel from the tank as follows: A
a. Remove fuel feed hose located on the fuel gauge retainer.
b. Connect a spare fuel hose, one side to fuel gauge retainer where the hose was removed and the other
side to a fuel container. EC
c. Drain fuel using “FUEL PUMP RELAY” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-III.
3. Check refueling EVAP vapor cut valve for being stuck to close as follows.
Blow air into the refueling EVAP vapor cut valve (from the end of EVAP/ORVR line hose), and check that C
the air flows freely into the tank.
4. Check refueling EVAP vapor cut valve for being stuck to open as follows.
a. Connect vacuum pump to hose end. D
b. Remove fuel gauge retainer with fuel gauge unit.
Always replace O-ring with new one.
E
c. Put fuel tank upside down.
d. Apply vacuum pressure to hose end [−13.3 kPa (−100 mmHg, −3.94 inHg)] with fuel gauge retainer
remaining open and check that the pressure is applicable.
F
BBIA0568E
K
Without CONSULT-III
1. Remove fuel tank. Refer to FL-6, "Removal and Installation". L
2. Drain fuel from the tank as follows:
a. Remove fuel gauge retainer.
b. Drain fuel from the tank using a handy pump into a fuel container. M
Blow air into the refueling EVAP vapor cut valve (from the end of EVAP/ORVR line hose), and check that
the air flows freely into the tank. N
a. Connect vacuum pump to hose end.
b. Remove fuel gauge retainer with fuel gauge unit. O
c. Put fuel tank upside down.
P

BBIA0568E

POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION
A
G
PBIB0492E
This system returns blow-by gas to the intake manifold. H

The positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) valve is provided to conduct crankcase blow-by gas to the intake
manifold. During partial throttle operation of the engine, the intake manifold sucks the blow-by gas through the
PCV valve. Normally, the capacity of the valve is sufficient to handle any blow-by and a small amount of venti-
I
lating air. The ventilating air is then drawn from the air inlet tubes into the crankcase. In this process the air
passes through the hose connecting air inlet tubes to rocker cover. Under full-throttle condition, the manifold
vacuum is insufficient to draw the blow-by flow through the valve. The flow goes through the hose connection
in the reverse direction. J
On vehicles with an excessively high blow-by, the valve does not
meetthe requirement. This is because some of the flow will go
through the hoseconnection to the air inlet tubes under all condi- K
tions.
M
PBIB1588E

N
PCV (POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION) VALVE
With engine running at idle, remove PCV valve from rocker cover. A
properly working valve makes a hissing noise as air passes through O
it. A strong vacuum should be felt immediately when a finger is
placed over valve inlet.
P
PBIB1589E

PCV VALVE VENTILATION HOSE
1. Check hoses and hose connections for leaks.
2. Disconnect all hoses and clean with compressed air. If any
hosecannot be freed of obstructions, replace.
S-ET277

REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR
A
The refrigerant pressure sensor is installed at the condenser of the EC

air conditioner system. The sensor uses an electrostatic volume
pressure transducer to convert refrigerant pressure to voltage. The
voltage signal is sent to ECM, and ECM controls cooling fan system.
C
BBIA0627E E
H
PBIB2657E

I
1.CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR OVERALL FUNCTION
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. J
2. Turn A/C switch and blower fan switch ON.
3. Check voltage between ECM terminal 70 and ground with CON-
SULT-III or tester.
K
Voltage: 1.0 - 4.0V
OK or NG
L
NG >> GO TO 2.
M
PBIB1188E
2.CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS N

1. Turn A/C switch and blower fan switch OFF.
2. Stop engine.
3. Loosen and retighten two ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-91, "Ground Inspection". O
BBIA0614E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect refrigerant pressure sensor harness connector.
BBIA0627E
3. Check voltage between refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 3

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.
PBIB1872E

• Harness for open or short between ECM and refrigerant pressure sensor

5.CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
3. Check harness continuity between refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 1 and ECM terminal 67.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.
7.CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 70 and refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 2.


OK or NG
EC
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> GO TO 8.
8.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART C
D
9.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT E
OK or NG
F
OK >> Replace refrigerant pressure sensor.

ECM
< ECU DIAGNOSIS > [QR25DE]
ECU DIAGNOSIS
ECM
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode INFOID:0000000004053665
Remarks:
z Specification data are reference values.
z Specification data are output/input values which are detected or supplied by the ECM at the connector.
* Specification data may not be directly related to their components signals/values/operations.
i.e. Adjust ignition timing with a timing light before monitoring IGN TIMING, because the monitor may show the specification data in spite of the
ignition timing not being adjusted to the specification data. This IGN TIMING monitors the data calculated by the ECM according to the signals
input from the camshaft position sensor and other ignition timing related sensors.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
Almost the same speed as
ENG SPEED • Run engine and compare the CONSULT-III value with tachometer indication.
the tachometer indication.
MAS A/F SE-B1 • See EC-80.
B/FUEL SCHDL • See EC-80.
A/F ALPHA-B1 • See EC-80.
COOLAN TEMP/S • Engine: After warming up More than 70°C (158°F)
A/F SEN1 (B1) • Engine: After warming up Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 rpm Fluctuates around 1.5V
• Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly after the following conditions are
met.
0 - 0.3V ←→ Approx. 0.6 -
HO2S2 (B1) - Engine: After warming up
1.0V
- Keeping engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for
1 minute under no load.
• Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly after the following conditions are
met.
HO2S2 MNTR (B1) - Engine: After warming up LEAN ←→ RICH
- Keeping engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for
• Turn drive wheels and compare the CONSULT-III value with speedometer indi-
VHCL SPEED SE the speedometer indica-
cation.
tion.
BATTERY VOLT • Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) 11 - 14V
ACCEL SEN 1 • Ignition switch: ON Accelerator pedal: Fully released 0.6 - 0.95V
ACCEL SEN 2*1 (Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed Less than 4.75V
TP SEN 1-B1 • Ignition switch: ON Accelerator pedal: Fully released More than 0.36V
(Engine stopped)
TP SEN 2-B1*1 • Shift lever: D (A/T) or 1st (M/T) Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed Less than 4.75V
EVAP SYS PRES • Ignition switch: ON Approx. 1.8 - 4.8V

START SIGNAL • Ignition switch: ON → START → ON OFF → ON → OFF
• Ignition switch: ON Accelerator pedal: Fully released ON

CLSD THL POS
(Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Slightly depressed OFF
Air conditioner switch: OFF OFF
• Engine: After warming up, idle the en-
AIR COND SIG Air conditioner switch: ON
gine ON
(Compressor operates.)
Shift lever: P or N (A/T), Neutral (M/T) ON
P/N POSI SW • Ignition switch: ON
Shift lever: Except above OFF
• Engine: After warming up, idle the en- Steering wheel: Not being turned OFF
PW/ST SIGNAL
gine Steering wheel: Being turned ON
Lighting switch: 2nd ON
LOAD SIGNAL • Ignition switch: ON
IGNITION SW • Ignition switch: ON → OFF → ON ON → OFF → ON

ECM
A
• Engine: After warming up, idle the en- Heater fan: Operating ON
HEATER FAN SW
gine Heater fan: Not operating OFF
Brake pedal: Fully released OFF EC
BRAKE SW • Ignition switch: ON
• Engine: After warming up Idle 2.0 - 3.0 msec
• Shift lever: P or N (A/T), Neutral (M/T) C
INJ PULSE-B1
• Air conditioner switch: OFF 2,000 rpm 1.9 - 4.0 msec
• No load
• Engine: After warming up Idle 10° - 20° BTDC
D
• Shift lever: P or N (A/T), Neutral (M/T)
IGN TIMING
• Air conditioner switch: OFF 2,000 rpm 25° - 45° BTDC
• No load
• Engine: After warming up Idle 10% - 35% E
CAL/LD VALUE
• Air conditioner switch: OFF 2,500 rpm 10% - 35%
• No load
F
• Engine: After warming up Idle 1.0 - 4.0 g·m/s
MASS AIRFLOW
• Air conditioner switch: OFF 2,500 rpm 4.0 - 12.0 g·m/s
• No load G
• Engine: After warming up Idle
• Shift lever: P or N (A/T), Neutral (M/T) (Accelerator pedal is not depressed 0%
PURG VOL C/V even slightly, after engine starting) H
• Air conditioner switch: OFF
• No load 2,000 rpm —
• Engine: After warming up Idle −5° - 5°CA
• Shift lever: P or N (A/T), Neutral (M/T) I
INT/V TIM (B1)
• Air conditioner switch: OFF 2,000 rpm Approx. 0° - 20°CA
• No load
• Engine: After warming up Idle 0% - 2% J
INT/V SOL (B1)
• Air conditioner switch: OFF 2,000 rpm Approx. 0% - 60%
• No load
Air conditioner switch: OFF OFF K
• Engine: After warming up, idle the en-
AIR COND RLY Air conditioner switch: ON
gine ON
(Compressor operates)
L
• For 1 second after turning ignition switch ON
ON
FUEL PUMP RLY • Engine running or cranking
• Except above conditions OFF
M
VENT CONT/V • Ignition switch: ON OFF
THRTL RELAY • Ignition switch: ON ON
• Engine speed: Below 3,600 rpm after the following conditions are met. N
- Engine: After warming up
ON
HO2S2 HTR (B1) - Keeping engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for
O
• Engine speed: Above 3,600 rpm OFF
• Turn drive wheels and compare CONSULT-III value with the speedometer indi-
VEHICLE SPEED the speedometer indica-
cation. P
tion
Vehicle has traveled after MIL has 0 - 65,535 km
TRVL AFTER MIL • Ignition switch: ON
turned ON. (0 - 40,723 mile)
A/F S1 HTR (B1) • Engine: After warming up, idle the engine 0 - 100%
• Engine: Idle
AC PRESS SEN 1.0 - 4.0V
• Both A/C switch and blower fan switch: ON (Compressor operates)

ECM
• Turn drive wheels and compare CONSULT-III value with the speedometer indi-
VHCL SPEED SE the speedometer indica-
cation.
tion
The preset vehicle speed
SET VHCL SPD • Engine: Running ASCD: Operating
is displayed.
MAIN switch: Pressed ON
MAIN SW • Ignition switch: ON
MAIN switch: Released OFF
CANCEL switch: Pressed ON
CANCEL SW • Ignition switch: ON
CANCEL switch: Released OFF
RESUME/ACCELERATE switch:
ON
Pressed
RESUME/ACC SW • Ignition switch: ON
RESUME/ACCELERATE switch: Re-
OFF
leased
SET/COAST switch: Pressed ON
SET SW • Ignition switch: ON
SET/COAST switch: Released OFF
• Brake pedal: Fully released (A/T)
• Clutch pedal and/or brake pedal: Fully ON
BRAKE SW1 released (M/T)
(ASCD brake switch) • Brake pedal: Slightly depressed (A/T)
• Clutch pedal and/or brake pedal: OFF
Slightly depressed (M/T)
BRAKE SW2 Brake pedal: Fully released OFF

(STOP lamp switch) Brake pedal: Slightly depressed ON
MAIN switch: Pressed at the 1st time →
at the 2nd time
• When vehicle speed is between
SET LAMP
40 km/h (25 MPH) and 144 km/h (89 ASCD: Not operating OFF
MPH)
ALT DUTY • Engine: Idle 0 - 80%
• Engine: Idle
• Battery: Fully charged*2
BAT CUR SEN • Shift lever: P or N (A/T), Neutral (M/T) Approx. 2,600 - 3,500mV
• No load
• Power generation voltage variable control: Operating ON
ALT DUTY SIG
• Power generation voltage variable control: Not operating OFF
*1: Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 signal and throttle position sensor 2 signal are converted by ECM internally. Thus, they differ
from ECM terminals voltage signal.
*2: Before measuring the terminal voltage, confirm that the battery is fully charged. Refer to PG-4, "How to Handle Battery".
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout INFOID:0000000004053666
PBIB1192E

ECM
ECM Terminal and Reference Value INFOID:0000000004053667
A
PREPARATION
ECM located in the engine room passenger side behind reservoir
tank. EC
BBIA0537E
E
ECM INSPECTION TABLE
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-III.
CAUTION: F
G
TERMI-
WIRE
NAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
H
[Engine is running]
1 BR ECM ground Body ground
• Idle speed
Approximately 5V I
[Engine is running]
2 Y A/F sensor 1 heater • Warm-up condition J
• Idle speed
PBIB1584E
K
Throttle control motor power BATTERY VOLTAGE
3 V [Ignition switch: ON]
supply (11 - 14V)
0 - 14V L
[Ignition switch: ON]

• Engine: Stopped
4 L/W Throttle control motor (Close) M
• Shift lever: D (A/T) or 1st (M/T)
• Accelerator pedal: Fully released
PBIB0534E N
0 - 14V
[Ignition switch: ON] O

Throttle control motor • Engine: Stopped
5 L/B
(Open) • Shift lever: D (A/T) or 1st (M/T)
• Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed
P
PBIB0533E

ECM
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
• Warm-up condition
(11 - 14V)
• Idle speed
7 - 10V
Intake valve timing control
11 LG
solenoid valve [Engine is running]
• Engine speed: 2,500 rpm
PBIB1790E
[Engine is running]
0.5 - 4.0V
Power steering pressure • Steering wheel: Being turned
12 P
sensor [Engine is running]
0.4 - 0.8V
• Steering wheel: Not being turned
Approximately 3.0V
[Engine is running]
• Idle speed
NOTE:
The pulse cycle changes depending on
rpm at idle.
Crankshaft position sensor PBIB0527E

13 G
(POS)
Approximately 3.0V
[Engine is running]
PBIB0528E
1.0 - 4.0V
[Engine is running]
• Idle speed
NOTE:
rpm at idle.
Camshaft position sensor PBIB0525E

14 Y
(PHASE)
1.0 - 4.0V
[Engine is running]
PBIB0526E
[Engine is running]
15 W Knock sensor Approximately 2.5V
• Idle speed
16 V Approximately 3.1V
35 O [Engine is running] Approximately 2.6V
A/F sensor 1 • Warm-up condition
56 W • Idle speed Approximately 2.3V
75 L Approximately 2.3V

ECM
TERMI-
WIRE
NAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) A
COLOR
NO.
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V) EC
[Engine is running]
• Idle speed
NOTE: C
rpm at idle.
22 LG Fuel injector No. 3
23 SB Fuel injector No. 1 PBIB0529E D
41 R Fuel injector No. 4 BATTERY VOLTAGE
42 O Fuel injector No. 2
(11 - 14V)
E
[Engine is running]
F
PBIB0530E
G
Approximately 5V
[Engine is running]
• Engine speed: Below 3,600 rpm after the
following conditions are met. H
- Keeping the engine speed between 3,500
Heated oxygen sensor 2 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1
25 P
heater minute under on load I
SEC981D

• Engine: Stopped BATTERY VOLTAGE
[Engine is running] (11 - 14V)
J
• Engine speed: Above 3,600 rpm
EVAP control system pres-
32 GR [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 1.8 - 4.8V
sure sensor K
Approximately 0 - 4.8V
34 BR [Engine is running] Output voltage varies with intake
sensor
air temperature. L
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running] M
• Idle speed
• Accelerator pedal: Not depressed even
slightly, after engine starting
N

45 R PBIB0050E
control solenoid valve
Approximately 1V
O
[Engine is running]
• Engine speed: About 2,000 rpm (More than P
100 seconds after starting engine)
PBIB2652E
Sensor power supply

47 L [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V
(Throttle position sensor)

ECM
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Sensor power supply
48 SB (EVAP control system pres- [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V
sure sensor)
Sensor power supply
(Refrigerant pressure
49 P [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V
sensor, Battery current sen-
sor)
• Engine: Stopped
More than 0.36V
50 W Throttle position sensor 1
• Engine: Stopped
Less than 4.75V
[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition 0.9 - 1.2V
• Idle speed
51 P Mass air flow sensor
[Engine is running]
0 - 0.1V
[Engine is running]
• Idle speed
NOTE:
rpm at idle.
61 L Ignition signal No. 3
62 Y Ignition signal No. 1 PBIB0521E
80 GR Ignition signal No. 4

0 - 0.2V
81 G Ignition signal No. 2
[Engine is running]
PBIB0522E
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
66 B • Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
• Idle speed
[Engine is running]
67 B Sensor ground • Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
• Idle speed
Sensor power supply
68 G (Power steering pressure [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V
sensor)
• Engine: Stopped
Less than 4.75V
69 R Throttle position sensor 2
• Engine: Stopped
More than 0.36V

ECM
TERMI-
WIRE
NAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) A
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition EC
70 BR Refrigerant pressure sensor 1.0 - 4.0V
• Both A/C switch and blower fan switch: ON
[Engine is running]
71 R Battery current sensor • Battery: Fully charged* Approximately 2.6 - 3.5V
C
• Idle speed
Engine coolant temperature D
73 Y [Engine is running] Output voltage varies with engine
sensor
coolant temperature.
[Engine is running]
• Revving engine from idle up to 3,000 rpm E
quickly after the following conditions are
met.
74 W Heated oxygen sensor 2 0 - Approximately 1.0V
- Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 F
and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1
minute under no load
[Engine is running] G
Sensor ground
(Heated oxygen sensor 2)
• Idle speed
Sensor ground [Engine is running]
82 B (Accelerator pedal position • Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
H
sensor 1) • Idle speed
Sensor ground [Engine is running]
83 B (Accelerator pedal position • Warm-up condition Approximately 0V I
sensor 2) • Idle speed
85 W DATA link connector — —
86 P CAN communication line — — J
Sensor power supply
90 L (Accelerator pedal position [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V
sensor 1) K
Sensor power supply
91 G (Accelerator pedal position [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V
sensor 2) L
94 L CAN communication line — —
• Engine: Stopped 0.3 - 0.45V M
Accelerator pedal position • Accelerator pedal: Fully released
98 GR
sensor 2 [Ignition switch: ON]
• Engine: Stopped Less than 2.4V
N
Approximately 4V
• ASCD steering switch: OFF
O
Approximately 0V
• MAIN switch: Pressed
99 SB ASCD steering switch Approximately 1V P
• CANCEL switch: Pressed
Approximately 3V
• RESUME/ACCELERATE switch: Pressed
Approximately 2V
• SET/COAST switch: Pressed

ECM
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Approximately 0V
• Brake pedal: Fully released
101 LG Stop lamp switch
[Ignition switch: ON] BATTERY VOLTAGE
• Brake pedal: Slightly depressed (11 - 14V)
Approximately 0V
102 O PNP switch
• Shift lever: Except above (11 - 14V)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
[Ignition switch: OFF]
104 O Throttle control motor relay (11 - 14V)
[Ignition switch: ON] 0 - 1.0V
• Engine: Stopped 0.6 - 0.95V
106 R
• Engine: Stopped Less than 4.75V
Fuel tank temperature sen-
107 Y [Engine is running] Output voltage varies with fuel
sor
tank temperature.
• Brake pedal: Slightly depressed (A/T)
Approximately 0V
• Clutch pedal and/or clutch pedal:
Slightly depressed (M/T)
108 LG ASCD brake switch
• Brake pedal: Fully released (A/T) BATTERY VOLTAGE
• Clutch pedal and brake pedal: (11 - 14V)
Fully released (M/T)
[Ignition switch: OFF] 0V
109 W/R Ignition switch BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
0 - 1.0V
• For a few seconds after turning ignition
111 BR ECM relay (Self shut-off) switch OFF
BATTERY VOLTAGE
• More than a few seconds after turning igni-
(11 - 14V)
tion switch OFF
• For 1 second after turning ignition switch
0 - 1.0V
ON
113 V Fuel pump relay [Engine is running]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
• More than 1 second after turning ignition
(11 - 14V)
switch ON
115 B [Engine is running]
ECM ground Body ground
116 GR • Idle speed
EVAP canister vent control BATTERY VOLTAGE
117 G [Ignition switch: ON]
valve (11 - 14V)
119 R BATTERY VOLTAGE
Power supply for ECM [Ignition switch: ON]
120 P (11 - 14V)
Power supply for ECM BATTERY VOLTAGE
121 R/B [Ignition switch: OFF]
(Back-up) (11 - 14V)

ECM
: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
*: Before measuring the terminal voltage, confirm that the battery is fully charged. Refer to PG-4, "How to Handle Battery". A
Wiring Diagram - ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM - INFOID:0000000004053668
EC
ABBWA0044GB

ECM
ABBWA0045GB

ECM
EC
ABBWA0046GB

ECM
ABBWA0047GB

ECM
EC
ABBIA0120GB

ECM
ABBIA0121GB

ECM
EC
ABBIA0122GB

ECM
ABBIA0123GB

ECM
EC
ABBIA0124GB

ECM
ABBIA0125GB

ECM
EC
ABBIA0126GB

ECM
ABBIA0127GB

ECM
EC
ABBIA0128GB

ECM
ABBIA0129GB

ECM
EC
ABBIA0130GB

ECM
ABBIA0131GB

ECM
EC
ABBIA0132GB
Fail-safe Chart INFOID:0000000004053669 P
When the DTC listed below is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.

ECM
DTC No. Detected items Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode

P0102 Mass air flow sensor circuit Engine speed will not rise more than 2,400 rpm due to the fuel cut.
P0103
P0117 Engine coolant temperature Engine coolant temperature will be determined by ECM based on the following condi-
P0118 sensor circuit tion.
Engine coolant temperature decided (CONSULT-
Condition
III display)
Just as ignition switch is turned ON
40°C (104°F)
or START
Approx. 4 minutes or more after
80°C (176°F)
engine starting
40 - 80°C (104 - 176°F)
When the fail-safe system for engine coolant temperature sensor is activated, the cool-
ing fan operates while engine is running.
P0122 Throttle position sensor The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening
P0123 in order for the idle position to be within +10 degrees.
P0222 The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal
P0223 condition.
P2135 Therefore, the acceleration will be poor.
P0643 Sensor power supply ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a
fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring.
P2100 Throttle control motor relay ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a
P2103 fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring.
P2101 Electric throttle control func- ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a
tion fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring.
P2118 Throttle control motor ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a
P2119 Electric throttle control actu- (When electric throttle control actuator does not function properly due to the return
ator spring malfunction:)
ECM controls the electric throttle actuator by regulating the throttle opening around the
idle position. The engine speed will not rise more than 2,000 rpm.
(When throttle valve opening angle in fail-safe mode is not in specified range:)
ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator by regulating the throttle opening to
20 degrees or less.
(When ECM detects the throttle valve is stuck open:)
While the vehicle is being driven, it slows down gradually because of fuel cut. After the
vehicle stops, the engine stalls.
The engine can restart in P or N (A/T), neutral position (M/T), and engine speed will not
exceed 1,000 rpm or more.
P2122 Accelerator pedal position The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening
P2123 sensor in order for the idle position to be within +10 degrees.
P2128 condition.
• When there is an open circuit on MIL circuit, the ECM cannot warn the driver by illuminating MIL when there
is malfunction on engine control system.
Therefore, when electrical controlled throttle and part of ECM related diagnoses are continuously detected
as NG for 5 trips, ECM warns the driver that engine control system malfunctions and MIL circuit is open by
means of operating the fail-safe function.
The fail-safe function also operates when above diagnoses except MIL circuit are detected, and demands
the driver to repair the malfunction.

ECM
DTC Inspection Priority Chart INFOID:0000000004053670
A
If some DTCs are displayed at the same time, perform inspections one by one based on the following priority
chart.
EC
Priority Detected items (DTC)
1 • U0101 U0140 U1001 CAN communication line
• P0101 P0102 P0103 Mass air flow sensor
• P0112 P0113 P0127 Intake air temperature sensor
C
• P0116 P0117 P0118 P0125 Engine coolant temperature sensor
• P0122 P0123 P0222 P0223 P1225 P1226 P2135 Throttle position sensor
• P0128 Thermostat function D
• P0181 P0182 P0183 Fuel tank temperature sensor
• P0327 P0328 Knock sensor
• P0335 Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
• P0340 Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) E
• P0460 P0461 P0462 P0463 Fuel level sensor
• P0500 Vehicle speed sensor
• P0605 P0607 ECM
• P0643 Sensor power supply F
• P0700 TCM
• P0705 Park/Neutral position (PNP) switch
• P0850 Park/neutral position (PNP) switch
• P1610 - P1615 NATS G
• P1550 P1551 P1552 P1553 P1554 Battery current sensor
• P2122 P2123 P2127 P2128 P2138 Accelerator pedal position sensor
2 • P0031 P0032 A/F sensor 1 heater H
• P0037 P0038 Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater
• P0075 Intake valve timing control solenoid valve
• P0130 P0131 P0132 P0133 P2A00 A/F sensor 1
• P0137 P0138 P0139 Heated oxygen sensor 2 I
• P0441 EVAP control system purge flow monitoring
• P0443 P0444 P0445 EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
• P0447 P0448 EVAP canister vent control valve
• P0451 P0452 P0453 EVAP control system pressure sensor
J
• P0506 P0507 Idle speed control system
• P0550 Power steering pressure sensor
• P0603 ECM power supply K
• P0710 P0717 P0720 P0731 P0732 P0733 P0734 P0735 P0740 P0744 P0745 P1730 P1752 P1754 P1757 P1759
P1762 P1764 P1767 P1769 P1772 P1774 A/T related sensors and solenoid valves
• P1805 Brake switch
• P2101 Electric throttle control function L
• P2100 P2103 P2118 Electric throttle control actuator
3 • P0011 Intake valve timing control
• P0171 P0172 Fuel injection system function
M
• P0300 - P0304 Misfire
• P0420 Three way catalyst function
• P0442 P0456 EVAP control system (SMALL LEAK, VERY SMALL LEAK)
• P0455 EVAP control system (GROSS LEAK) N
• P1148 Closed loop control
• P1217 Engine over temperature (OVERHEAT)
• P1421 Cold start control
• P1564 ASCD steering switch O
• P1572 ASCD brake switch
• P1574 ASCD vehicle speed sensor
• P1715 Turbine revolution sensor
• P2119 Electric throttle control actuator P
DTC Index INFOID:0000000004053671
EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION ITEMS

ECM
Items DTC*1 Test value/

MIL Reference
(CONSULT-III screen CONSULT-III SRT code Test limit Trip
lighting up page
terms) ECM*3 (GST only)
GST*2
LAST COMM (TCM) U0101 0101 — — 1 × EC-92
LAST COMM (BCM) U0140 0140 — — 1 × EC-93
CAN COMM CIRCUIT U1001 1001*6 — — 2 — EC-94
NO DTC IS DETECTED.
FURTHER TESTING P0000 0000 — — — Flashing*7 EC-60
MAY BE REQUIRED.
INT/V TIM CONT-B1 P0011 0011 — — 2 × EC-45
A/F SEN1 HTR (B1) P0031 0031 — × 2 × EC-98
A/F SEN1 HTR (B1) P0032 0032 — × 2 × EC-98
HO2S2 HTR (B1) P0037 0037 — × 2 × EC-101
HO2S2 HTR (B1) P0038 0038 — × 2 × EC-101
INT/V TIM V/CIR-B1 P0075 0075 — — 2 × EC-104
MAF SEN/CIRCUIT P0101 0101 — — 2 × EC-107
IAT SEN/CIRCUIT P0112 0112 — — 2 × EC-118
IAT SEN/CIRCUIT P0113 0113 — — 2 × EC-118
ECT SEN/CIRC P0116 0116 — — 1 × EC-121
ECT SEN/CIRC P0117 0117 — — 1 × EC-124
ECT SEN/CIRC P0118 0118 — — 1 × EC-124
TP SEN 2/CIRC P0122 0122 — — 1 × EC-127
TP SEN 2/CIRC P0123 0123 — — 1 × EC-127
ECT SENSOR P0125 0125 — — 2 × EC-131
IAT SENSOR P0127 0127 — — 2 × EC-134
THERMSTAT FNCTN P0128 0128 — — 2 × EC-137
A/F SENSOR1 (B1) P0130 0130 — × 2 × EC-139
A/F SENSOR1 (B1) P0131 0131 — × 2 × EC-143
A/F SENSOR1 (B1) P0132 0132 — × 2 × EC-146
A/F SENSOR1 (B1) P0133 0133 × × 2 × EC-149
HO2S2 (B1) P0137 0137 × × 2 × EC-154
HO2S2 (B1) P0138 0138 × × 2 × EC-159
HO2S2 (B1) P0139 0139 × × 2 × EC-166
FUEL SYS-LEAN-B1 P0171 0171 — — 2 × EC-171
FUEL SYS-RICH-B1 P0172 0172 — — 2 × EC-176
FTT SENSOR P0181 0181 — — 2 × EC-181
FTT SEN/CIRCUIT P0182 0182 — — 2 × EC-184
FTT SEN/CIRCUIT P0183 0183 — — 2 × EC-184
TP SEN 1/CIRC P0222 0222 — — 1 × EC-187
TP SEN 1/CIRC P0223 0223 — — 1 × EC-187
MULTI CYL MISFIRE P0300 0300 — — 1 or 2 × EC-191
CYL 1 MISFIRE P0301 0301 — — 1 or 2 × EC-191

ECM

MIL Reference A
lighting up page
GST*2
CYL 3 MISFIRE P0303 0303 — — 1 or 2 × EC-191 EC
KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 P0327 0327 — — 2 — EC-197
KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 P0328 0328 — — 2 — EC-197 C
CKP SEN/CIRCUIT P0335 0335 — — 2 × EC-200
CMP SEN/CIRC-B1 P0340 0340 — — 2 × EC-204
D
TW CATALYST SYS-B1 P0420 0420 × × 2 × EC-208
EVAP PURG FLOW/MON P0441 0441 × × 2 × EC-212
EVAP SMALL LEAK P0442 0442 × × 2 × EC-217 E
PURG VOLUME CONT/V P0443 0443 — — 2 × EC-224
F
VENT CONTROL VALVE P0447 0447 — — 2 × EC-232
VENT CONTROL VALVE P0448 0448 — — 2 × EC-236 G
EVAP SYS PRES SEN P0451 0451 — — 2 × EC-240
H
EVAP GROSS LEAK P0455 0455 — — 2 × EC-252
EVAP VERY SML LEAK P0456 0456 ×*4 × 2 × EC-259 I
FUEL LEV SEN SLOSH P0460 0460 — — 2 × EC-267
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR P0461 0461 — — 2 × EC-269
J
FUEL LEVL SEN/CIRC P0462 0462 — — 2 × EC-271
FUEL LEVL SEN/CIRC P0463 0463 — — 2 × EC-271
VEH SPEED SEN/CIRC*5 P0500 0500 — — 2 × EC-273 K

ISC SYSTEM P0506 0506 — — 2 × EC-275
ISC SYSTEM P0507 0507 — — 2 × EC-277
L
PW ST P SEN/CIRC P0550 0550 — — 2 — EC-279
ECM BACK UP/CIRCUIT P0603 0603 — — 2 × EC-282
ECM P0605 0605 — — 1 or 2 × or — EC-284 M
1 (A/T) × (A/T)
ECM P0607 0607 — — EC-286
2 (M/T) — (M/T)
SENSOR POWER/CIRC P0643 0643 — — 1 × EC-288 N
TCM P0700 0700 — — 1 × TM-162
PNP SW/CIRC P0705 0705 — — 2 × TM-163
O
ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC*8 P0710 0710 — — 2 × TM-190
TURBINE SENSOR P0717 0717 — — 2 × TM-165
VEH SPD SEN/CIR AT*5 P0720 0720 — — 2 × TM-167 P

A/T 1ST GR FNCTN*8 P0731 0731 — — 2 × TM-172
A/T 2ND GR FNCTN*8 P0732 0732 — — 2 × TM-174
A/T 3RD GR FNCTN*8 P0733 0733 — — 2 × TM-176
A/T 4TH GR FNCTN*8 P0734 0734 — — 2 × TM-178

ECM

MIL Reference
lighting up page
GST*2
A/T 5TH GR FNCTN*8 P0735 0735 — — 2 × TM-180

TCC SOLENOID/CIRC P0740 0740 — — 2 × TM-182
A/T TCC S/V FNCTN P0744 0744 — — 2 × TM-184
L/PRESS SOL/CIRC P0745 0745 — — 2 × TM-186
P-N POS SW/CIRCUIT P0850 0850 — — 2 × EC-291
CLOSED LOOP-B1 P1148 1148 — — 1 × EC-295
ENG OVER TEMP P1217 1217 — — 1 × EC-296
CTP LEARNING P1225 1225 — — 2 — EC-299
CTP LEARNING P1226 1226 — — 2 — EC-301
COLD START CONTROL P1421 1421 — — 2 × EC-303
BAT CURRENT SENSOR P1550 1550 — — 2 — EC-305
ASCD SW P1564 1564 — — 1 — EC-321
ASCD BRAKE SW P1572 1572 — — 1 — EC-325
ASCD VHL SPD SEN P1574 1574 — — 1 — EC-334
LOCK MODE P1610 1610 — — 2 — SEC-25
ID DISCORD IMMU-ECM P1611 1611 — — 2 — SEC-22
CHAIN OF ECM-IMMU P1612 1612 — — 2 — SEC-24
CHAIN OF IMMU-KEY P1614 1614 — — 2 — SEC-18
DIFFRENCE OF KEY P1615 1615 — — 2 — SEC-21
IN PULY SPEED P1715 1715 — — 2 — EC-336
A/T INTERLOCK P1730 1730 — — 1 × TM-194
I/C SOLENOID/CIRC P1752 1752 — — 1 × TM-198
I/C SOLENOID/CIRC P1754 1754 — — 1 × TM-198
FR/B SOLENOID/CIRC P1757 1757 — — 1 × TM-200
FR/B SOLENOID/CIRC P1759 1759 — — 1 × TM-200
D/C SOLENOID/CIRC P1762 1762 — — 1 × TM-202
D/C SOLENOID/CIRC P1764 1764 — — 1 × TM-202
HLR/C SOL/CIRC P1767 1767 — — 1 × TM-204
HLR/C SOL/CIRC P1769 1769 — — 1 × TM-204
LC/B SOLENOID/CIRC P1772 1772 — — 1 × TM-206
LC/B SOLENOID FNCT P1774 1774 — — 1 × TM-208
BRAKE SW/CIRCUIT P1805 1805 — — 2 — EC-337
ETC MOT PWR P2100 2100 — — 1 × EC-340
ETC FUNCTION/CIRC P2101 2101 — — 1 × EC-343
ETC MOT PWR P2103 2103 — — 1 × EC-340
ETC MOT P2118 2118 — — 1 × EC-347
ETC ACTR P2119 2119 — — 1 × EC-349
APP SEN 1/CIRC P2122 2122 — — 1 × EC-351

ECM

MIL Reference A
lighting up page
GST*2
APP SEN 1/CIRC P2123 2123 — — 1 × EC-351 EC
APP SEN 2/CIRC P2127 2127 — — 1 × EC-354
APP SEN 2/CIRC P2128 2128 — — 1 × EC-354
TP SENSOR P2135 2135 — — 1 × EC-358 C
APP SENSOR P2138 2138 — — 1 × EC-362
A/F SENSOR1 (B1) P2A00 2A00 — × 2 × EC-362
D
*1: 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No.
*2: This number is prescribed by SAE J2012.
*3: In Diagnostic Test Made II (Self-diagnostic results), this number is controlled by NISSAN. E
*4: SRT code will not be set if the self-diagnostic result is NG.
*5: When the fail-safe operations for both self-diagnoses occur at the same time, the MIL illuminates.
*6: The troubleshooting for this DTC needs CONSULT-III.
F
*7: When the ECM is in the mode of displaying SRT status, MIL may flash. For the details, refer to "How to Display SRT Status".
*8: When erasing this DTC, always use CONSULT-III or GST.
Emission-related Diagnostic Information INFOID:0000000004053672 G

The 1st trip DTC (whose number is the same as the DTC number) is displayed for the latest self-diagnostic H
If a malfunction is detected during the 1st trip, the 1st trip DTC is stored in the ECM memory. The MIL will not I
light up (two trip detection logic). If the same malfunction is not detected in the 2nd trip (meeting the required
2nd trip, both the 1st trip DTC and DTC are stored in the ECM memory and the MIL lights up. In other words,
the DTC is stored in the ECM memory and the MIL lights up when the same malfunction occurs in two consec- J
utive trips. If a 1st trip DTC is stored and a non-diagnostic operation is performed between the 1st and 2nd
trips, only the 1st trip DTC will continue to be stored. For malfunctions that blink or light up the MIL during the
1st trip, the DTC and 1st trip DTC are stored in the ECM memory. K
MATION ITEMS". These items are required by legal regulations to continuously monitor the system/compo- L
1st trip DTC is specified in Service $07 of SAE J1979. 1st trip DTC detection occurs without lighting up the MIL
and therefore does not warn the driver of a malfunction. However, 1st trip DTC detection will not prevent the M
vehicle from being tested, for example during Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) tests.
data as specified in Work Flow procedure Step 2, refer to EC-14, "Trouble Diagnosis Introduction". Then per-
N
form DTC Confirmation Procedure or Overall Function Check to try to duplicate the malfunction. If the mal-
How to Read DTC and 1st Trip DTC
O
DTC and 1st trip DTC can be read by the following methods.
WITH CONSULT-III
WITH GST
CONSULT-III or GST (Generic Scan Tool) Examples: P0340, P0850, P1148, etc. P
NO TOOLS
Example: 0340, 0850, 1148, etc.
These DTCs are controlled by NISSAN.
• 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No.
ECM
mal. CONSULT-III can identify malfunction status as shown below. Therefore, using CONSULT-III (if
Time data indicates how many times the vehicle was driven after the last detection of a DTC.
If the DTC is being detected currently, the time data will be [0].
FREEZE FRAME DATA AND 1ST TRIP FREEZE FRAME DATA
Data which are stored in the ECM memory, along with the 1st trip DTC, are called 1st trip freeze frame data.
details, see "FREEZE FRAME DATA AND 1ST TRIP FREEZE FRAME DATA".
freeze frame data (2nd trip detection/MIL on) is stored in the ECM memory, 1st trip freeze frame data is no
Priority Items
Misfire — DTC: P0300 - P0304
1
Freeze frame data Fuel Injection System Function — DTC: P0171, P0172
For example, the EGR malfunction (Priority: 2) was detected and the freeze frame data was stored in the 2nd
ECM memory.
ory is erased. Procedures for clearing the ECM memory are described in "EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOS-
TIC INFORMATION ITEMS".
NOTE:
NOTE:

ECM
though the SRT indicates “CMPLT” for all test items. Therefore, it is important to check SRT (“CMPLT”) and A
SRT Item
The table below shows required self-diagnostic items to set the SRT to “CMPLT”. EC
SRT item Perfor-

(CONSULT-III indica- mance Required self-diagnostic items to set the SRT to “CMPLT” Corresponding DTC No.
C
tion) Priority*
CATALYST 2 Three way catalyst function P0420
1 EVAP control system P0442 D
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 P0133 E
HO2S 1
F
*: If completion of several SRTs is required, perform driving patterns (DTC confirmation procedure), one by one based on the priority for
models with CONSULT-III. G
SRT Set Timing
done regardless of whether the result is OK or NG. The set timing is different between OK and NG results and H
is shown in the table below.
Example
I
Diagnosis
All OK Case 1 P0400 OK (1) — (1) OK (2) — (2) J
P0402 OK (1) — (1) — (1) OK (2)
P1402 OK (1) OK (2) — (2) — (2)
K
Case 2 P0400 OK (1) — (1) — (1) — (1)
P0402 — (0) — (0) OK (1) — (1) L
P1402 OK (1) OK (2) — (2) — (2)
NG exists Case 3 P0400 OK OK — — M
P0402 — — — —
NG
P1402 NG — NG (Consecutive N
NG)
(1st trip) DTC
DTC (= MIL “ON”) O
SRT of EGR “INCMP” “INCMP” “INCMP” “CMPLT”
P
—: Self-diagnosis is not carried out.
When all SRT related self-diagnoses showed OK results in a single cycle (Ignition OFF-ON-OFF), the SRT will
When all SRT related self-diagnoses showed OK results through several different cycles, the SRT will indicate
If one or more SRT related self-diagnoses showed NG results in 2 consecutive cycles, the SRT will also indi-
cate “CMPLT”. → Case 3 above
ECM
The table above shows that the minimum number of cycles for setting SRT as “INCMP” is one (1) for each
self-diagnosis (Case 1 & 2) or two (2) for one of self-diagnoses (Case 3). However, in preparation for the state
emissions inspection, it is unnecessary for each self-diagnosis to be executed twice (Case 3) for the following
reasons:
• When, during SRT driving pattern, 1st trip DTC (NG) is detected prior to “CMPLT” of SRT, the self-diagnosis
memory must be erased from ECM after repair.
NOTE:
PBIB2320E

ECM
WITH CONSULT-III
Selecting “SRT STATUS” in “DTC & SRT CONFIRMATION” mode with CONSULT-III. A
For items whose SRT codes are set, a “CMPLT” is displayed on the CONSULT-III screen; for items whose
SRT codes are not set, “INCMP” is displayed.
A sample of CONSULT-III display for SRT code is shown at right. EC
“INCMP” means the self-diagnosis is incomplete and SRT is not set. “CMPLT” means the self-diagnosis is
complete and SRT is set.
NOTE:
Though displayed on the CONSULT-III screen, “HO2S HTR” is not SRT item. C
WITH GST
NO TOOLS D
A SRT code itself can not be displayed while only SRT status can be.
2. SRT status is indicated as shown below. E
• When all SRT codes are set, MIL lights up continuously.
• When any SRT codes are not set, MIL will flash periodically for 10 seconds.
F
PBIB2317E
K
How to Set SRT Code
To set all SRT codes, self-diagnosis for the items indicated above must be performed one or more times. Each
diagnosis may require a long period of actual driving under various conditions. L
WITH CONSULT-III
Perform corresponding DTC Confirmation Procedure one by one based on Performance Priority in the table
on "SRT Item".
M
WITHOUT CONSULT-III
The most efficient driving pattern in which SRT codes can be properly set is explained below. The driving pat-
tern should be performed one or more times to set all SRT codes.
N

ECM
Driving Pattern
PBIB3622E
habits, etc.
est.
zone A.

ECM
• Sea level
• Flat road A
EC
Pattern 1:
Pattern 2:
Pattern 3:
• Release the accelerator pedal during deceleration of vehicle speed F
from 90 km/h (56 MPH) to 0 km/h (0 MPH).
Pattern 4:
state driving. G
• If the accelerator pedal is moved, the test must be conducted
again.
PBIB2244E

Suggested upshift speeds for M/T models

L
[less than 1,219 m (4,000 ft)]:
[over 1,219 m (4,000 ft)]:
Gear change CRUISE shift point km/h (MPH) ACCEL shift point km/h (MPH) km/h (MPH)
M
1st to 2nd 17 (11) 20 (12) 24 (15)
2nd to 3rd 25 (15) 37 (23) 40 (25)
3rd to 4th 38 (24) 54 (34) 64 (40) N
4th to 5th 55 (35) 71 (44) 75 (45)
O
Suggested Maximum Speed in Each Gear
Do not exceed the maximum suggested speed (shown below) in any gear. For level road driving, use the high- P
est gear suggested for that speed. Always observe posted speed limits and drive according to the road condi-
tions to ensure safe operation. Do not over-rev the engine when shifting to a lower gear as it may cause

ECM
Gear km/h (MPH)

1st 50 (30)
2nd 90 (55)
3rd —
4th —
5th —
TEST VALUE AND TEST LIMIT (GST ONLY — NOT APPLICABLE TO CONSULT-III)
ECM. (eg., if bank 2 is not applied on this vehicle, only the items of bank 1 are displayed)
Test value and

Test limit
OBD- (GST display)
MID Unit and
TID Scaling
ID
P0131 83H 0BH
cycle
P0131 84H 0BH
cycle
P0130 85H 0BH
cycle
P0130 86H 0BH
cycle
(Bank 1) P0133 87H 04H
Rich)
P0133 88H 04H
Lean)
P0138 07H 0CH
cycle

02H P0137 08H 0CH
(Bank 1) cycle
P0143 07H 0CH
cycle

03H P0144 08H 0CH
(Bank 1) cycle

ECM
Test value and
Test limit A
OBD- (GST display)
MID Unit and
TID Scaling EC
ID
P0151 83H 0BH
cycle
C
P0151 84H 0BH
cycle
Minimum sensor output voltage for test D
P0150 85H 0BH
cycle
P0150 86H 0BH
cycle
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 E
(Bank 2) P0153 87H 04H
Rich)
P0153 88H 04H
Lean)
F
G
Minimum sensor output voltage for test H
P0158 07H 0CH
cycle

06H P0157 08H 0CH
(Bank 2) cycle I
J
P0163 07H 0CH
cycle

07H P0164 08H 0CH K
(Bank2) cycle
L
P0420 82H 01H
Three way catalyst function value M
21H
P2423 83H 0CH
age
CATA- P2423 84H 84H O2 storage index in HC trap catalyst N

P0430 82H 01H
Three way catalyst function value O
22H
P2424 83H 0CH
age
P2424 84H 84H O2 storage index in HC trap catalyst P

ECM
Test value and
Test limit
OBD- (GST display)
MID Unit and
TID Scaling
ID
P0400 80H 96H
rate (short term)
P0400 81H 96H
rate (long term)
EGR Low Flow Faults: Difference between
31H EGR function
SYSTEM P0400 82H 96H max EGR temp and EGR temp under
idling condition
High Flow Faults: EGR temp increase
P1402 84H 96H
rate
P0011 80H 9DH
P0014 81H 9DH
P0011 82H 9DH
P0014 83H 9DH
VVT drive failure diagnosis)
SYSTEM VTC intake function diagnosis (VTC
P0021 80H 9DH
P0024 81H 9DH
P0021 82H 9DH
P0024 83H 9DH
EVAP control system leak Difference in pressure sensor output
39H P0455 80H 0CH
(Cap Off) voltage before and after pull down
EVAP control system leak Leak area index (for more than 0.04
3BH P0442 80H 05H
(Small leak) inch)
Leak area index (for more than 0.02
EVAP P0456 80H 05H
EVAP control system leak inch)
SYSTEM 3CH
(Very small leak) Maximum internal pressure of EVAP
P0456 81H FDH
system during monitoring
Difference in pressure sensor output
3DH Purge flow system P0441 83H 0CH voltage before and after vent control
valve close
A/F sensor 1 heater Low Input:P0031 Converted value of Heater electric cur-
41H 81H 0BH
42H 80H 0CH
O2 SEN- 43H P0043 80H 0CH
SOR
HEATER A/F sensor 1 heater Low Input:P0051 Converted value of Heater electric cur-
45H 81H 0BH
46H 80H 0CH
47H P0063 80H 0CH

ECM
Test value and
Test limit A
OBD- (GST display)
MID Unit and
TID Scaling EC
ID
Secondary Air Injection System Incor-
P0411 80H 01H
rect Flow Detected
C
Bank1: P0491 Secondary Air Injection System Insuffi-
81H 01H
Bank2: P0492 cient Flow
Secondary Air Injection System Pump D
P2445 82H 01H
Stuck Off
SEC-
Secondary Air Injection System High
Airflow
ARY AIR E
Bank1: P2440 Secondary Air Injection System Switch-
84H 01H
Bank2: P2442 ing Valve Stuck Open
Secondary Air Injection System Switch-
P2440 85H 01H
ing Valve Stuck Open
F
Secondary Air Injection System Pump
P2444 86H 01H
Stuck On
G
Fuel injection system function P0171 or P0172 80H 2FH Long term fuel trim
81H
FUEL
Fuel injection system function H
82H

ECM
Test value and
Test limit
OBD- (GST display)
MID Unit and
TID Scaling
ID
P0301 80H 24H
the first cylinder
P0302 81H 24H
the second cylinder
P0303 82H 24H
the third cylinder
P0304 83H 24H
the fourth cylinder
P0305 84H 24H
the fifth cylinder
P0306 85H 24H
the sixth cylinder
P0307 86H 24H
the seventh cylinder
P0308 87H 24H
the eighth cylinder
P0300 88H 24H
the multiple cylinders
P0301 89H 24H
first cylinder
MISFIRE A1H Multiple Cylinder Misfires
P0302 8AH 24H
second cylinder
P0303 8BH 24H
third cylinder
P0304 8CH 24H
fourth cylinder
P0305 8DH 24H
fifth cylinder
P0306 8EH 24H
sixth cylinder
P0307 8FH 24H
seventh cylinder
P0308 90H 24H
eighth cylinder
P0300 91H 24H
the single cylinder
P0300 92H 24H
single cylinder
P0300 93H 24H
multiple cylinders

ECM
Test value and
Test limit A
OBD- (GST display)
MID Unit and
TID Scaling EC
ID
ing cycles
C
P0301 0CH 24H
cles
D
Misfire counts for last/current driving cy- E
P0302 0CH 24H
cles
P0303 0BH 24H Average) misfire counts for last 10 driv- F
P0303 0CH 24H
cles G
H
P0304 0CH 24H
cles
MISFIRE
I
P0305 0CH 24H J
cles
A7H No. 6 Cylinder Misfire ing cycles K
P0306 0CH 24H
cles
EWMA (Exponential Weighted Moving L
Misfire counts for last/current driving cy- M
P0307 0CH 24H
cles
ing cycles
N
P0308 0CH 24H
cles
O
How to Erase DTC
With CONSULT-III P
NOTE:
• If the ignition switch stays ON after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch OFF once. Wait at
• If the DTC is not for A/T related items (see EC-427), skip step 1.

ECM
4. Touch “ERASE”. (DTC in ECM will be erased.)
With GST
NOTE:
• If the ignition switch stays ON after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch OFF.once.Wait at least
No Tools
NOTE:
• If the ignition switch stays ON after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch OFF once.Wait at
1. Erase DTC in ECM. Refer to How To ERASE DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE II (SELF-DIAGNOSTIC
RESULTS).
NOTE:
• If the battery is disconnected, the emission-related diagnostic information will be cleared within 24
hours.
- Freeze frame data
- Test values
• Actual work procedures are explained using a DTC as an example. Be careful so that not only the DTC, but
all of the data listed above, are cleared from the ECM memory during work procedures.

ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM SYMPTOMS
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [QR25DE]
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS A
Symptom Matrix Chart INFOID:0000000004053673
EC
SYSTEM — BASIC ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM

C
SYMPTOM
OVERHEATS/WATER TEMPERATURE HIGH

LACK OF POWER/POOR ACCELERATION
D
HARD/NO START/RESTART (EXCP. HA)
BATTERY DEAD (UNDER CHARGE)

HESITATION/SURGING/FLAT SPOT
EXCESSIVE FUEL CONSUMPTION
EXCESSIVE OIL CONSUMPTION

E
SPARK KNOCK/DETONATION
SLOW/NO RETURN TO IDLE

Reference
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
page
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE

F
IDLING VIBRATION
ENGINE STALL
H
Warranty symptom code AA AB AC AD AE AF AG AH AJ AK AL AM HA
Fuel Fuel pump circuit 1 1 2 3 2 2 2 3 2 EC-378
Fuel pressure regulator system 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 EC-456 I
Fuel injector circuit 1 1 2 3 2 2 2 2 EC-378
Evaporative emission system 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 EC-42
J
Air Positive crankcase ventilation sys-
3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 1 EC-395
tem
Incorrect idle speed adjustment 3 3 1 1 1 1 1 EC-19
K
EC-137,
EC-340 ,
Electric throttle control actuator 1 1 2 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2
EC-343 ,
EC-347 L
Ignition Incorrect ignition timing adjustment 3 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 EC-19
Ignition circuit 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 EC-385
M
Power supply and ground circuit 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 EC-385
EC-107,
Mass air flow sensor circuit 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2
EC-113
N
EC-124,
Engine coolant temperature sensor circuit 1 1 2 2 2 3 2 2 3 1 2
EC-131
EC-340, O
EC-343 ,
Throttle position sensor circuit 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 EC-347 ,
EC-349 ,
EC-358 P
EC-351,
Accelerator pedal position sensor circuit 3 2 1 2 2 EC-354 ,
EC-362

SYMPTOM




Reference
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
page
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
IDLING VIBRATION
Warranty symptom code AA ENGINE STALL
AB AC AD AE AF AG AH AJ AK AL AM HA
EC-139,
EC-143 ,
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 circuit 1 2 3 2 2 2 2 EC-146 ,
EC-149 ,
EC-366
Knock sensor circuit 2 2 3 EC-200
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) circuit 2 2 EC-200
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) circuit 2 2 EC-204
Vehicle speed signal circuit 2 3 3 3 EC-273
Power steering pressure sensor circuit 3 3 3 3 EC-279
EC-282,
ECM 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
EC-284
Intake valve timing control solenoid valve cir-
3 3 2 1 3 2 2 3 3 EC-95
cuit
Park/neutral position (PNP) switch circuit 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 EC-291
Refrigerant pressure sensor circuit 2 3 3 3 3 4 EC-397
Electrical load signal circuit 3 3 3 3 EC-377
HAC-120
Air conditioner circuit 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2
HAC-52
1 - 6: The numbers refer to the order of inspection.
(continued on next page)
SYSTEM — ENGINE MECHANICAL & OTHER

SYMPTOM A

EC



C
Reference
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
page
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
IDLING VIBRATION
D
ENGINE STALL
E
Warranty symptom code AA AB AC AD AE AF AG AH AJ AK AL AM HA F

Fuel Fuel tank FL-6
5
Fuel piping 5 5 5 5 5 5 EM-38
G
Vapor lock —
5
Valve deposit —
Poor fuel (Heavy weight gasoline, 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
— H
Low octane)
Air Air duct EM-25
Air cleaner EM-25 I
Air leakage from air duct
(Mass air flow sensor —electric EM-25
5 5 5 5 5 5
throttle control actuator) J
5 5 5 5
Electric throttle control actuator EC-137
Air leakage from intake manifold/
EM-26
Collector/Gasket K
Cranking Battery PG-6
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Generator circuit CHG-4
Starter circuit 3 STR-5
L
Signal plate/Flywheel/Drive plate 6 EM-74

Park/neutral position (PNP)
4 TM-163 M
switch
Engine Cylinder head
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 EM-64
Cylinder head gasket 4 3 N
Cylinder block
Piston 4
Piston ring O
6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 EM-74
Connecting rod
Bearing
P
Crankshaft

SYMPTOM




Reference
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
page
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
IDLING VIBRATION
Warranty symptom code AA ENGINE STALL
AB AC AD AE AF AG AH AJ AK AL AM HA
Valve Timing chain EM-43
mecha-
Camshaft EM-52
nism
Intake valve timing control 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 EC-101
Intake valve
3 EM-64
Exhaust valve
Exhaust Exhaust manifold/Tube/Muffler/
Gasket EM-29,
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
EC-137
Three way catalyst
Lubrica- EM-32, LU-
Oil pan/Oil strainer/Oil pump/Oil
tion 12 , LU-13 ,
filter/Oil gallery 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 2 LU-7
Oil level (Low)/Filthy oil LU-9
Cooling Radiator/Hose/Radiator filler cap CO-16
Thermostat 5 CO-22
Water pump CO-20
Water gallery 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 2 5 CO-7
Cooling fan 5 CO-19
Coolant level (low)/Contaminated
CO-11
coolant
NVIS (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System —
1 1 SEC-7
NATS)

NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION
A
Fuel Cut Control (at No Load and High Engine Speed) INFOID:0000000004053674

Park/neutral position (PNP) switch Gear position C
Fuel cut control Fuel injector D
Engine speed
Combination meter Vehicle speed*
E
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
If the engine speed is above 1,800 rpm under no load (for example, the shift position is neutral and engine F
speed is over 1,800 rpm) fuel will be cut off after some time. The exact time when the fuel is cut off varies
based on engine speed.
Fuel cut will be operated until the engine speed reaches 1,500 rpm, then fuel cut will be cancelled. G
NOTE:
This function is different from deceleration control listed under EC-34, "System Description".
H

PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [QR25DE]
PRECAUTION
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER" INFOID:0000000004053675
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Man-
ual.
WARNING:
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see the SRS section.
• Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or har-
ness connectors.
On Board Diagnosis (OBD) System of Engine and A/T INFOID:0000000004053676
The ECM has an on board diagnostic system. It will light up the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) to warn the
driver of a malfunction causing emission deterioration.
CAUTION:
• Be sure to turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the negative battery cable before any repair
or inspection work. The open/short circuit of related switches, sensors, solenoid valves, etc. will
cause the MIL to light up.
• Be sure to connect and lock the connectors securely after work. A loose (unlocked) connector will
cause the MIL to light up due to the open circuit. (Be sure the connector is free from water, grease,
dirt, bent terminals, etc.)
• Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-lock-
ing type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect.
• Be sure to route and secure the harnesses properly after work. The interference of the harness with
a bracket, etc. may cause the MIL to light up due to the short circuit.
• Be sure to connect rubber tubes properly after work. A misconnected or disconnected rubber tube
may cause the MIL to light up due to the malfunction of the EVAP system or fuel injection system,
etc.
• Be sure to erase the unnecessary malfunction information (repairs completed) from the ECM and
TCM (Transmission control module) before returning the vehicle to the customer.
Precaution INFOID:0000000004053677
• Always use a 12 volt battery as power source.

• Do not attempt to disconnect battery cables while engine is
running.
• Before connecting or disconnecting the ECM harness con-
nector, turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect battery
ground cable. Failure to do so may damage the ECM because
battery voltage is applied to ECM even if ignition switch is
turned OFF.
• Before removing parts, turn ignition switch OFF and then dis-
connect battery ground cable.
SEF289H

PRECAUTIONS
• Do not disassemble ECM.
• If battery cable is disconnected, the memory will return to the A
initial ECM values.
The ECM will now start to self-control at its initial values.
Engine operation can vary slightly when the cable is discon-
EC
nected. However, this is not an indication of a malfunction. Do
not replace parts because of a slight variation.
• If the battery is disconnected, the following emission-related
diagnostic information will be lost within 24 hours. C
PBIB1164E
- Freeze frame data D
- Test values
• When connecting ECM harness connector, fasten it securely E
with a lever as far as it will go as shown in the figure.
PBIB1512E
H
• When connecting or disconnecting pin connectors into or

from ECM, take care not to damage pin terminals (bend or I
break).
Make sure that there are not any bends or breaks on ECM pin
terminal, when connecting pin connectors. J
• Securely connect ECM harness connectors.
A poor connection can cause an extremely high (surge) volt-
age to develop in coil and condenser, thus resulting in dam-
age to ICs. K
• Keep engine control system harness at least 10 cm (4 in) away
from adjacent harness, to prevent engine control system mal-
PBIB0090E
functions due to receiving external noise, degraded operation L
of ICs, etc.
• Keep engine control system parts and harness dry.
• Before replacing ECM, perform “ECM Terminals and Refer-
ence Value” inspection and make sure ECM functions prop- M
erly. Refer to EC-403, "ECM Terminal and Reference Value".
• Handle mass air flow sensor carefully to avoid damage.
• Do not clean mass air flow sensor with any type of detergent. N
• Do not disassemble electric throttle control actuator.
• Even a slight leak in the air intake system can cause serious
incidents.
• Do not shock or jar the camshaft position sensor (PHASE), O
crankshaft position sensor (POS).
MEF040D
P

PRECAUTIONS
• After performing each TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS, perform DTC
Confirmation Procedure or Overall Function Check.
The DTC should not be displayed in the DTC Confirmation
Procedure if the repair is completed. The Overall Function
Check should be a good result if the repair is completed.
SEF217U
• When measuring ECM signals with a circuit tester, never

allow the two tester probes to contact.
Accidental contact of probes will cause a short circuit and
damage the ECM power transistor.
• Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/out-
put voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's tran-
sistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the
ground.
SEF348N
• Do not operate fuel pump when there is no fuel in lines.

• Tighten fuel hose clamps to the specified torque.
BBIA0529E

PRECAUTIONS
• Do not depress accelerator pedal when starting.
• Immediately after starting, do not rev up engine unnecessar- A
ily.
• Do not rev up engine just prior to shutdown.
EC
SEF709Y
D
• When installing C.B. ham radio or a mobile phone, be sure to
observe the following as it may adversely affect electronic
control systems depending on installation location. E
- Keep the antenna as far as possible from the electronic con-
trol units.
- Keep the antenna feeder line more than 20 cm (8 in) away
from the harness of electronic controls. F
Do not let them run parallel for a long distance.
- Adjust the antenna and feeder line so that the standing-wave
radio can be kept smaller. G
- Be sure to ground the radio to vehicle body.
SEF708Y

PREPARATION
< PREPARATION > [QR25DE]
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
Special Service Tool INFOID:0000000004053678
The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.) Description
Tool name
(J-44321) Checking fuel pressure
Fuel pressure gauge
kit
LEC642
(J-44321-6) Connecting fuel pressure gauge to quick connec-

Fuel pressure gauge tor type fuel lines.
adapter
LBIA0376E
Commercial Service Tool INFOID:0000000004053679
Tool name
Description
(Kent-Moore No.)
Leak detector Locating the EVAP leak
i.e.:(J-41416)
S-NT703
EVAP service port Applying positive pressure through EVAP service

adapter port
i.e.:(J-41413-OBD)
S-NT704
Fuel filler cap adapter Checking fuel tank vacuum relief valve opening
i.e.: (J-41416) pressure
S-NT815

PREPARATION
< PREPARATION > [QR25DE]
Tool name
Description
(Kent-Moore No.) A
Socket wrench Removing and installing engine coolant tempera-
ture sensor
EC
C
S-NT705
Oxygen sensor thread Reconditioning the exhaust system threads before

cleaner installing a new oxygen sensor. Use with anti- D
i.e.: (J-43897-18) seize lubricant shown below.
(J-43897-12) a: 18 mm diameter with pitch 1.5 mm for Zirco-
nia Oxygen Sensor E
b: 12 mm diameter with pitch 1.25 mm for Tita-
nia Oxygen Sensor
AEM488
F
Anti-seize lubricant Lubricating oxygen sensor thread cleaning tool
i.e.: (PermatexTM when reconditioning exhaust system threads.
133AR or equivalent
meeting MIL specifica- G
tion MIL-A-907)
H
S-NT779

FUEL PRESSURE
< ON-VEHICLE MAINTENANCE > [QR25DE]
ON-VEHICLE MAINTENANCE
FUEL PRESSURE
Fuel Pressure Check INFOID:0000000004053680
FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE

With CONSULT-III
2. Perform “FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-III.
3. Start engine.
4. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel pressure.
Without CONSULT-III
1. Remove fuel pump fuse located in IPDM E/R.
2. Start engine.
pressure.
5. Reinstall fuel pump fuse after servicing fuel system.
BBIA0534E
FUEL PRESSURE CHECK

CAUTION:
Before disconnecting fuel line, release fuel pressure from fuel line to eliminate danger.
NOTE:
Prepare pans or saucers under the disconnected fuel line because the fuel may spill out. The fuel
pressure cannot be completely released because D40 models do not have fuel return system.
Method A
CAUTION:
• The fuel hose connection method used when taking fuel pressure check must not be used for other
purposes.
• Be careful not to scratch or put debris around connection area when servicing, so that the quick
connector maintains seal ability with O-rings inside.
• Never perform fuel pressure check with electrical systems operating (i.e. lights, A/C, etc.) Fuel pres-
sure gauge may indicate false readings due to varying engine load and changes in manifold vacuum.
1. Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE".
2. Prepare fuel hose for fuel pressure check, and connect fuel pressure gauge.
• Use suitable fuel hose for fuel pressure check (genuine NISSAN fuel hose without quick connector).
• To avoid unnecessary force or tension to hose, use moderately long fuel hose for fuel pressure check.
• Never use the fuel hose for checking fuel pressure with damage or cracks on it.
• Use Pressure Gauge to check fuel pressure.
3. Remove fuel hose. Refer to EM-26, "Removal and Installation".
• Never twist or kink fuel hose because it is plastic hose.
• Never remove fuel hose from quick connector.
• Keep the original fuel hose to be free from intrusion of dust or foreign substances with a suitable cover.

FUEL PRESSURE
4. Install the fuel pressure gauge as shown in the figure.
• Wipe off oil or dirt from hose insertion part using cloth moist- A
ened with gasoline.
• Apply proper amount of gasoline between top of the fuel tube
and No.1 spool.
EC
• Insert fuel hose for fuel pressure check until it touches the
No.1 spool on fuel tube.
• Use NISSAN genuine hose clamp (part number: 16439-N4710
or 16439-40U00). C
• When reconnecting fuel line, always use new clamps.
• When reconnecting fuel hose, check the original fuel hose for
PBIB0669E
damage and abnormality. D
• Use a torque driver to tighten clamps.
• Install hose clamp to the position within 1 - 2 mm (0.04 - 0.08
in).
E
Tightening torque: 1 - 1.5 N·m (0.1 - 0.15 kg-m, 9
- 13 in-lb)
• Make sure that clamp screw does not contact adjacent parts. F
5. After connecting fuel hose for fuel pressure check, pull the hose
with a force of approximately 98 N (10 kg, 22 lb) to confirm fuel
tube does not come off. G
6. Turn ignition switch ON, and check for fuel leakage. BBIA0606E
7. Start engine and check for fuel leakage.

H
8. Read the indication of fuel pressure gauge.
• Never perform fuel pressure check with system operating. Fuel pressure gauge may indicate false read-
ings.
• During fuel pressure check, confirm for fuel leakage from fuel connection every 3 minutes. I

J
9. If result is unsatisfactory, go to next step.
• Fuel hoses and fuel tubes for clogging K
• Fuel pump
• Fuel pressure regulator for clogging
If OK, replace fuel level sensor unit, fuel filter and fuel pump assembly. L
If NG, repair or replace.
Method B
CAUTION: M
• Be careful not to scratch or get the fuel hose connection area dirty when servicing, so that the quick
connector o-ring maintains seal ability.
• Use Fuel Pressure Gauge Kit [SST (J-44321)] and Fuel Pressure Gauge Adapter [SST (J-44321-6)] to N
check fuel pressure.
2. Remove fuel hose using Quick Connector Release [SST (J-45488)]. Refer to EM-38, "Removal and O
Installation".
• Keep fuel hose connections clean. P

FUEL PRESSURE
3. Install Fuel Pressure Gauge Adapter [SST (J-44321-6)] and
Fuel Pressure Gauge kit [SST (J-44321)] as shown in the figure.
• Never distort or bend fuel rail tube when installing fuel pres-
sure gauge adapter.
damage and abnormality.
4. Turn ignition switch ON (reactivate fuel pump), and check for
fuel leakage.
6. Read the indication of fuel pressure gauge kit [SST (J-44321)].
• During fuel pressure check, check for fuel leakage from fuel BBIA0607E
connection every 3 minutes.

• Fuel hoses and fuel tubes for clogging
• Fuel pump
If OK, replace fuel level sensor unit, fuel filter and fuel pump assembly.
9. Before disconnecting Fuel Pressure Gauge kit [SST (J-44321)] and Fuel Pressure Adapter [SST (J-
44321-6)], release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE".

EVAP LEAK CHECK
EVAP LEAK CHECK
A
How to Detect Fuel Vapor Leakage INFOID:0000000004053681
CAUTION: EC
• Never exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2, 0.6 psi) of pressure in EVAP system.
NOTE:
C
• Do not start engine.
• Improper installation of EVAP service port adapter (commercial service tool) to the EVAP service port may
cause a leak.
D
WITH CONSULT-III
1. To locate the EVAP leak, install EVAP service adapter (commercial service tool) and pressure pump to
EVAP service port. E
3. Select the “EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE” of “WORK SUPPORT MODE” with CONSULT-III.
4. Touch “START”. A bar graph (Pressure indicating display) will appear on the screen. F
5. Apply positive pressure to the EVAP system until the pressure indicator reaches the middle of the bar
graph.
6. Remove EVAP service port adapter (commercial service tool) and hose with pressure pump. G
7. Locate the leak using a leak detector (commercial service tool).
H
J
SEF200U
WITHOUT CONSULT-III K
1. To locate the EVAP leak, install EVAP service adapter (com-
mercial service tool) and pressure pump to EVAP service port.
2. Attach the pressure pump with pressure gauge to the EVAP ser- L
vice port adapter.
N
SEF462UC
3. Apply battery voltage between the terminals of EVAP canister O

vent control valveb (1) to make a closed EVAP system.
- Drain filter (3)
- EVAP canister (4) P
- : Vehicle front
4. To locate the leak, deliver positive pressure to the EVAP system
until pressure gauge points reach 1.38 to 2.76 kPa (0.014 to
0.028 kg/cm2, 0.2 to 0.4 psi).
5. Remove EVAP service port adapter (commercial service tool)
ALBIA0514ZZ
and hose with pressure pump.

EVAP LEAK CHECK
6. Locate the leak using a leak detector (commercial service tool). Refer to EC-42, "Description".

EVAP CANISTER
< ON-VEHICLE REPAIR > [QR25DE]
ON-VEHICLE REPAIR A
EVAP CANISTER
EC
EVAP CANISTER
Check EVAP canister as follows: C
1. Block port B.
2. Blow air into port A and check that it flows freely out of port C.
3. Release blocked port B. D
4. Apply vacuum pressure to port B and check that vacuum pres-
sure exists at the ports A and C.
5. Block port A and B. E
6. Apply pressure to port C and check that there is no leakage.
BBIA0639E
F
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000004053683
EVAP CANISTER G
Tighten EVAP canister as shown in the figure.
BBIA0566E
M
1. Turn EVAP canister vent control valve counterclockwise.
2. Remove the EVAP canister vent control valve. N
Do not reuse the O-ring, replace it with a new one.
BBIA0567E

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [QR25DE]

Fuel Pressure INFOID:0000000004053684
Fuel pressure at idle Approximately 350 kPa (3.57kg/cm2, 51psi)
Idle Speed and Ignition Timing INFOID:0000000004053685
A/T: 700 ± 50 rpm

Target idle speed No load*1 [in P or N position (A/T) or neutral position (M/T)] M/T: 625 ± 50 rpm
Air conditioner: ON In P or N position (A/T) or neutral position (M/T) 725 rpm or more*2
Ignition timing In P or N position (A/T) or neutral position (M/T) 15° ± 5° BTDC
*1: Under the following conditions:
• Electric load: OFF (Lights, heater fan)
• Steering wheel: Kept in straight-ahead position
*2: If refrigerant pressure is low, the idle speed may not be increased.
Calculated Load Value INFOID:0000000004053686
Conditions Calculated load value% (Using CONSULT-III or GST)

At idle 10 - 35
At 2,500 rpm 10 - 35
Mass Air Flow Sensor INFOID:0000000004053687
Supply voltage Battery voltage (11 - 14V)

Output voltage at idle 0.9 - 1.2V*
1.0 - 4.0 g·m/sec at idle*
Mass air flow (Using CONSULT-III or GST)
4.0 - 12.0 g·m/sec at 2,500 rpm*
*: Engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature and running under no load.
Intake Air Temperature Sensor INFOID:0000000004053688
Temperature °C (°F) Resistance kΩ

25 (77) 1.800 - 2.200
80 (176) 0.283 - 0.359
Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor INFOID:0000000004053689

20 (68) 2.1 - 2.9
50 (122) 0.68 - 1.00
90 (194) 0.236 - 0.260

< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [QR25DE]
Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor 1 Heater INFOID:0000000004053690
Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)] 2.3 - 4.3Ω

EC
Heated Oxygen sensor 2 Heater INFOID:0000000004053691
Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)] 9.9 - 13.3Ω C
Crankshaft Position Sensor (POS) INFOID:0000000004053692
Camshaft Position Sensor (PHASE) INFOID:0000000004053693
E
Throttle Control Motor INFOID:0000000004053694
Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)] Approximately 1 - 15Ω
Fuel Injector INFOID:0000000004053695

G
Resistance [at 10 - 60°C (50 - 140°F)] 11.1 - 14.3Ω H

Fuel Pump INFOID:0000000004053696
I

DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION > [VQ40DE]
BASIC INSPECTION
Trouble Diagnosis Introduction INFOID:0000000004053697
INTRODUCTION
The engine has an ECM to control major systems such as fuel con-
trol, ignition control, idle air control system, etc. The ECM accepts
input signals from sensors and instantly drives actuators. It is essen-
tial that both input and output signals are proper and stable. At the
same time, it is important that there are no malfunctions such as vac-
uum leaks, fouled spark plugs, or other malfunctions with the engine.
MEF036D
It is much more difficult to diagnose an incident that occurs intermit-

tently rather than continuously. Most intermittent incidents are
caused by poor electric connections or improper wiring. In this case,
careful checking of suspected circuits may help prevent the replace-
ment of good parts.
SEF233G
A visual check only may not find the cause of the incidents. A road
test with CONSULT-III (or GST) or a circuit tester connected should
be performed. Follow the Work Flow on "Work Flow".
Before undertaking actual checks, take a few minutes to talk with a
customer who approaches with a driveability complaint. The cus-
tomer can supply good information about such incidents, especially
intermittent ones. Find out what symptoms are present and under
what conditions they occur. A Diagnostic Worksheet like the exam-
ple on "Worksheet Sample" should be used.
Start your diagnosis by looking for conventional malfunctions first.
This will help troubleshoot driveability malfunctions on an electroni-
SEF234G
cally controlled engine vehicle.
WORK FLOW

Overall Sequence
A
EC
JMBIA1416GB
Detailed Flow P
1.GET INFORMATION FOR SYMPTOM
Get the detailed information from the customer about the symptom (the condition and the environment when
the incident/malfunction occurred) using the "DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET".
>> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK DTC*1
1. Check DTC*1.
2. Perform the following procedure if DTC*1 is displayed.
- Record DTC*1 and freeze frame data*2. (Print them out with CONSULT-III or GST.)
- Erase DTC*1. (Refer to EC-915, "DTC Index".)
- Study the relationship between the cause detected by DTC*1 and the symptom described by the cus-
tomer. (Symptom Matrix Chart is useful. Refer to EC-932.)
3. Check related service bulletins for information.
Are any symptoms described and any DTCs detected?
Symptom is described, DTC*1 is displayed>>GO TO 3.
Symptom is described, DTC*1 is not displayed>>GO TO 4.
Symptom is not described, DTC*1 is displayed>>GO TO 5.
Try to confirm the symptom described by the customer (except MIL ON).
Connect CONSULT-III to the vehicle and check diagnosis results.
>> GO TO 5.
Try to confirm the symptom described by the customer.
Connect CONSULT-III to the vehicle and check diagnosis results.
>> GO TO 6.
Perform DTC Confirmation Procedure for the displayed DTC*1, and then check that DTC*1 is detected again.
If two or more DTCs*1 are detected, refer to EC-914, "DTC Inspection Priority Chart" and determine trouble
diagnosis order.
NOTE:
• Freeze frame data*2 is useful if the DTC*1 is not detected.
• Perform Overall Function Check if DTC Confirmation Procedure is not included on Service Manual. This
simplified check procedure is an effective alternative though DTC*1 cannot be detected during this check.
If the result of Overall Function Check is NG, it is the same as the detection of DTC*1 by DTC Confirmation
Procedure.
Is DTC*1 detected?
Yes >> GO TO 10.
No >> Check according to GI-49, "Intermittent Incident".
6.PERFORM BASIC INSPECTION
Perform EC-470, "Basic Inspection".
7.PERFORM SPEC IN DATA MONITOR MODE
With CONSULT-III
Check that “MAS A/F SE-B1”, “B/FUEL SCHDL”, and “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2” are within the SP
value using CONSULT-III “SPEC” in “DATA MONITOR” mode. Refer to EC-534, "Description".
Are they within the SP value?

Yes >> GO TO 9.
No >> GO TO 8. A
8.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART BY TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE
Detect malfunctioning part according to EC-534, "Diagnosis Procedure".
EC
Is a malfunctioning part detected?
Yes >> GO TO 11.
No >> GO TO 9.
C
9.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING SYSTEM BY SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART
Detect malfunctioning system according to EC-932, "Symptom Matrix Chart" based on the confirmed symptom
in step 4, and determine the trouble diagnosis order based on possible causes and symptom. D
>> GO TO 10.
E
10.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART BY DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
Inspect according to Diagnostic Procedure of the system.
NOTE: F
The Diagnostic Procedure in EC section described based on open circuit inspection. A short circuit inspection
is also required for the circuit check in the Diagnostic Procedure. For details, refer to Circuit Inspection in GI-
52, "Circuit Inspection".
Is malfunctioning part detected? G
Yes >> GO TO 11.
No >> Monitor input data from related sensors or check voltage of related ECM terminals using CON-
SULT-III. Refer to EC-881, "CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode", EC-884, H
"ECM Terminal and Reference Value".
11.REPAIR OR REPLACE THE MALFUNCTIONING PART I
1. Repair or replace the malfunctioning part.
2. Reconnect parts or connectors disconnected during Diagnostic Procedure again after repair and replace-
ment.
3. Check DTC. If DTC is displayed, erase it, refer to EC-915, "DTC Index". J
>> GO TO 12.
K
12.FINAL CHECK
When DTC was detected in step 2, perform DTC Confirmation Procedure or Overall Function Check again,
and then check that the malfunction have been completeky repaired. L
When symptom was described from the customer, refer to confirmed symptom in step 3 or 4, and check that
the symptom is not detected.
OK or NG M
NG (DTC*1 is detected)>>GO TO 10.
NG (Symptom remains)>>GO TO 6.
OK >> 1. Before returning the vehicle to the customer, check to always erase unnecessary DTC*1 in N
ECM and TCM (Transmission Control Module). (Refer to EC-503, "Emission-related Diagnos-
tic Information" and TM-148, "OBD-II Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)".)
2. If the completion of SRT is needed, drive vehicle under the specific driving pattern. Refer to
EC-915, "DTC Index". O
3. INSPECTION END
*1: Include 1st trip DTC.
*2: Include 1st trip freeze frame data. P
DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET
Description

There are many operating conditions that lead to the malfunction of
engine components. A good grasp of such conditions can make trou-
bleshooting faster and more accurate.
In general, each customer feels differently about symptoms. It is
important to fully understand the symptoms or conditions for a cus-
tomer complaint.
Utilize a diagnostic worksheet like the one on the next page in order
to organize all the information for troubleshooting.
Some conditions may cause the MIL to illuminate or blink and DTC
to be detected. Examples:
• Vehicle ran out of fuel, which caused the engine to misfire.
SEF907L
• Fuel filler cap was left off or incorrectly screwed on, allowing fuel to
evaporate into the atmosphere.

Worksheet Sample
A
EC
LEC031A

Basic Inspection INFOID:0000000004053698
1.INSPECTION START
1. Check service records for any recent repairs that may indicate a related malfunction, or a current need for
scheduled maintenance.
2. Open engine hood and check the following:
- Harness connectors for improper connections
- Wiring harness for improper connections, pinches and cut
- Vacuum hoses for splits, kinks and improper connections
- Hoses and ducts for leakage
- Air cleaner clogging
- Gasket
3. Check that electrical or mechanical loads are not applied.
- Headlamp switch is OFF.
- Air conditioner switch is OFF.
- Rear window defogger switch is OFF.
SEF983U
- Steering wheel is in the straight-ahead position, etc.
4. Start engine and warm it up until engine coolant temperature
indicator points to the middle of gauge.
Ensure engine stays below 1,000 rpm.
SEF976U
5. Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no

load.
6. Check that no DTC is displayed with CONSULT-III or GST.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 2.
SEF977U
2.REPAIR OR REPLACE
Repair or replace components as necessary according to corresponding Diagnostic Procedure.
>> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED
With CONSULT-III

2. Rev engine (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) two or three times under no
load, then run engine at idle speed for about 1 minute. A
EC
PBIA8513J
D
3. Read idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III.
Refer to EC-474, "Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Check".
E
F
Without CONSULT-III
2. Rev engine (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) two or three times under no load, then run engine at idle speed for about G
1 minute.
M/T: 625 ± 50 rpm (in Neutral position) H

A/T: 625± 50 rpm (in P or N position)
OK or NG
I
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 4.
4.PERFORM ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION LEARNING J
1. Stop engine.
K
>> GO TO 5.
5.PERFORM THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING L
>> GO TO 6. M
N
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 7. O
2. GO TO 4.
7.CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED AGAIN P
With CONSULT-III
2. Read idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III.

A/T: 625± 50 rpm (in P or N position)

Without CONSULT-III
2. Check idle speed.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 8.
• Check camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and circuit. Refer to EC-668, "Diagnosis Procedure".
• Check crankshaft position sensor (POS) and circuit. Refer to EC-663, "Diagnosis Procedure".
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
2. GO TO 4.
SEC-6, "ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT : Special Repair Requirement".
>> GO TO 4.
2. Check ignition timing with a timing light.
M/T: 15± 5° BTDC (in Neutral position)

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 19.
NG >> GO TO 11.
BBIA0531E

1. Stop engine.
>> GO TO 12.
>> GO TO 13.

Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 14. A
2. GO TO 4.
14.CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED AGAIN EC
With CONSULT-III
2. Read idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III. C
M/T: 625 ± 50 rpm (in Neutral position) D

Without CONSULT-III
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. E
M/T: 625 ± 50 rpm (in Neutral position) F

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 15. G
NG >> GO TO 17.
15.CHECK IGNITION TIMING AGAIN H
2. Check ignition timing with a timing light.
I
M/T: 15± 5° BTDC (in Neutral position)
J
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 19.
NG >> GO TO 16. K
BBIA0531E
L
Check timing chain installation. Refer to EM-174, "Removal and Installation".
OK or NG M
OK >> GO TO 17.
NG >> 1. Repair the timing chain installation.
2. GO TO 4. N
Check the following. O
• Check camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and circuit. Refer to EC-668, "Diagnosis Procedure".
• Check crankshaft position sensor (POS) and circuit. Refer to EC-663, "Diagnosis Procedure".
OK or NG
P
OK >> GO TO 18.
2. GO TO 4.

>> GO TO 4.
19.INSPECTION END
Did you replace the ECM, referring this Basic Inspection Procedure?
Yes or No
Yes >> 1. Perform EC-475, "VIN Registration".
2. INSPECTION END
Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Check INFOID:0000000004053699
IDLE SPEED
With CONSULT-III
Check idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III.
With GST
Check idle speed with GST.
IGNITION TIMING
1. Attach timing light to loop wire as shown.
BBIA0530E
2. Check ignition timing.

Any of following two methods may be used.
BBIA0531E
Procedure After Replacing ECM INFOID:0000000004053700
When replacing ECM, the following procedure must be performed.


VIN Registration INFOID:0000000004053701
A
DESCRIPTION
VIN Registration is an operation to register VIN in ECM. It must be performed each time ECM is replaced.
NOTE: EC
Accurate VIN which is registered in ECM may be required for Inspection & Maintenance (I/M).
OPERATION PROCEDURE
C
With CONSULT-III
1. Check the VIN of the vehicle and note it. Refer to GI-30, "Model Variation".
2. Turn ignition switch ON with engine stopped. D
3. Select “VIN REGISTRATION” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode.
4. Follow the instruction on the CONSULT-III display.
E
Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning INFOID:0000000004053702
DESCRIPTION F
Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning is an operation to learn the fully released position of the accel-
erator pedal by monitoring the accelerator pedal position sensor output signal. It must be performed each time
the harness connector of the accelerator pedal position sensor or ECM is disconnected.
G
OPERATION PROCEDURE
1. Check that accelerator pedal is fully released.
2. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2 seconds. H
5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. I
Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning INFOID:0000000004053703
J
DESCRIPTION
Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning is an operation to learn the fully closed position of the throttle valve by
monitoring the throttle position sensor output signal. It must be performed each time the harness connector of K
electric throttle control actuator or ECM is disconnected.
OPERATION PROCEDURE
1. Check that accelerator pedal is fully released. L
Check that throttle valve moves during the above 10 seconds by confirming the operating sound. M
Idle Air Volume Learning INFOID:0000000004053704
N
DESCRIPTION
Idle Air Volume Learning is an operation to learn the idle air volume that keeps each engine within the specific
range. It must be performed under the following conditions:
• Each time electric throttle control actuator or ECM is replaced. O
• Idle speed or ignition timing is out of specification.
PREPARATION
P
Before performing Idle Air Volume Learning, Check that all of the following conditions are satisfied.
Learning will be cancelled if any of the following conditions are missed for even a moment.
• Battery voltage: More than 12.9 V (At idle)
• PNP switch: ON
• Electric load switch: OFF
(Air conditioner, headlamp, rear window defogger)

On vehicles equipped with daytime light systems, if the parking brake is applied before the engine is
started the headlamp will not illuminate.
• Steering wheel: Neutral (Straight-ahead position)
• Vehicle speed: Stopped
- With CONSULT-III: Drive vehicle until “ATF TEMP SE” in “DATA MONITOR” mode of “A/T” system indicates
less than 0.9 V.
- Without CONSULT-III: Drive vehicle for 10 minutes.
OPERATION PROCEDURE
With CONSULT-III
5. Select “IDLE AIR VOL LEARN” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode.
6. Touch “START” and wait 20 seconds.
7. Check that “CMPLT” is displayed on CONSULT-III screen. If “CMPLT” is not displayed, Idle Air Volume
Learning will not be carried out successfully. In this case, find the cause of the incident by referring to the
Diagnostic Procedure below.
8. Rev up the engine two or three times and check that idle speed and ignition timing are within the specifi-
cations.
ITEM SPECIFICATION
Without CONSULT-III
NOTE:
a malfunction.
6. Confirm that accelerator pedal is fully released, then turn ignition switch ON and wait 3 seconds.
7. Repeat the following procedure quickly five times within 5 seconds.
8. Wait 7 seconds, fully depress the accelerator pedal it for approx. 20 seconds until the MIL stops blinking
and turns ON.
9. Fully release the accelerator pedal within 3 seconds after the MIL turns ON.

11. Wait 20 seconds.
A
EC
SEC897C
12. Rev up the engine two or three times and check that idle speed and ignition timing are within the specifi- D
cations.
ITEM SPECIFICATION E
Ignition timing M/T: 15 ± 5° BTDC (in Neutral position) F
13. If idle speed and ignition timing are not within the specification, Idle Air Volume Learning will not be carried
out successfully. In this case, find the cause of the incident by referring to the DIAGNOSTIC PROCE- G
DURE below.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
If idle air volume learning cannot be performed successfully, proceed as follows: H
1. Check that throttle valve is fully closed.
2. Check PCV valve operation.
I
3. Check that downstream of throttle valve is free from air leakage.
4. When the above three items check out OK, engine component parts and their installation condi-
tion are questionable. Check and eliminate the cause of the incident.
J
It is useful to perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE”. Refer to EC-534.
5. If any of the following conditions occur after the engine has started, eliminate the cause of the
incident and perform Idle Air Volume Learning again:
• Engine stalls. K
• Incorrect idle.

< FUNCTION DIAGNOSIS > [VQ40DE]
FUNCTION DIAGNOSIS
System Diagram INFOID:0000000004053705
JMBIA0741GB

Engine Control Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000004053706
EC
BBIA0536E
P

BBIA0578E

EC
L
ALBIA0516ZZ
1. EVAP canister purge volume control 2. EVAP service port 3. Oil filler cap M
solenoid valve (view with engine
cover removed)
4. EVAP canister vent control valve 5. EVAP control system pressure sen- 6. Drain filter
N
(view with bed removed) sor
7. EVAP canister 8. Power steering pressure sensor 9. Throttle valve (view with intake air
duct removed)
10. Electric throttle control actuator 11. Intake manifold collector 12. Intake valve timing control solenoid O
valve (bank 1)
13. Intake valve timing control solenoid 14. Cooling fan motor harness connec- 15. Fuel pump, fuel level sensor unit and
valve (bank 2) (view with engine cov- tor (view with battery removed) fuel filter P
er and intake air duct removed)
16. Fuel pressure regulator
: Front

PBIB2530E

EC
BBIA0577E

PBIB2757E

EC
BBIA0581E


Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 Density of oxygen in exhaust gas
Accelerator pedal position sensor Accelerator pedal position Fuel injection
Park/neutral position (PNP) switch Gear position & mixture ratio Fuel injector
control
Knock sensor Engine knocking condition
Heated oxygen sensor 2*1 Density of oxygen in exhaust gas
Air conditioner switch Air conditioner operation*2

*1: This sensor is not used to control the engine system under normal conditions.
*2: This signal is sent to the ECM via the CAN communication line.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The amount of fuel injected from the fuel injector is determined by the ECM. The ECM controls the length of
time the valve remains open (injection pulse duration). The amount of fuel injected is a program value in the
ECM memory. The program value is preset by engine operating conditions. These conditions are determined
by input signals (for engine speed and intake air) from both the crankshaft position sensor and the mass air
flow sensor.
VARIOUS FUEL INJECTION INCREASE/DECREASE COMPENSATION
In addition, the amount of fuel injected is compensated to improve engine performance under various operat-
ing conditions as listed below.
<Fuel increase>
• During warm-up
• When starting the engine
• Hot-engine operation
• When selector lever is changed from N to D (A/T models)
<Fuel decrease>
• During deceleration
• During high engine speed operation

MIXTURE RATIO FEEDBACK CONTROL (CLOSED LOOP CONTROL)
A
EC
PBIB3020E
The mixture ratio feedback system provides the best air-fuel mixture ratio for driveability and emission control. D
The three way catalyst (manifold) can better reduce CO, HC and NOx emissions. This system uses air fuel
ratio (A/F) sensor 1 in the exhaust manifold to monitor whether the engine operation is rich or lean. The ECM
adjusts the injection pulse width according to the sensor voltage signal. For more information about air fuel
ratio (A/F) sensor 1, refer to EC-594. This maintains the mixture ratio within the range of stoichiometric (ideal E
air-fuel mixture).
This stage is referred to as the closed loop control condition.
Heated oxygen sensor 2 is located downstream of the three way catalyst (manifold). Even if the switching F
characteristics of air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 shift, the air-fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric by the signal
from heated oxygen sensor 2.
Open Loop Control G
The open loop system condition refers to when the ECM detects any of the following conditions. Feedback
control stops in order to maintain stabilized fuel combustion.
• Deceleration and acceleration H
• Malfunction of air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 or its circuit
• Insufficient activation of air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 at low engine coolant temperature
• High engine coolant temperature I
• During warm-up
• After shifting from N to D (A/T models)
• When starting the engine J
MIXTURE RATIO SELF-LEARNING CONTROL
The mixture ratio feedback control system monitors the mixture ratio signal transmitted from air fuel ratio (A/F)
sensor 1. This feedback signal is then sent to the ECM. The ECM controls the basic mixture ratio as close to K
the theoretical mixture ratio as possible. However, the basic mixture ratio is not necessarily controlled as orig-
inally designed. Both manufacturing differences (i.e., mass air flow sensor hot wire) and characteristic
changes during operation (i.e., fuel injector clogging) directly affect mixture ratio.
L
Accordingly, the difference between the basic and theoretical mixture ratios is monitored in this system. This is
then computed in terms of “injection pulse duration” to automatically compensate for the difference between
the two ratios.
“Fuel trim” refers to the feedback compensation value compared against the basic injection duration. Fuel trim M
includes short-term fuel trim and long-term fuel trim.
“Shor-term fuel trim” is the short-term fuel compensation used to maintain the mixture ratio at its theoretical
value. The signal from air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 indicates whether the mixture ratio is RICH or LEAN com- N
pared to the theoretical value. The signal then triggers a reduction in fuel volume if the mixture ratio is rich, and
an increase in fuel volume if it is lean.
“Long-term fuel trim” is overall fuel compensation carried out overtime to compensate for continual deviation of
the short-term fuel trim from the central value. Continual deviation will occur due to individual engine differ- O
ences, wear over time and changes in the usage environment.

FUEL INJECTION TIMING
SEF179U
Two types of systems are used.

Sequential Multiport Fuel Injection System
Fuel is injected into each cylinder during each engine cycle according to the firing order. This system is used
when the engine is running.
Simultaneous Multiport Fuel Injection System
Fuel is injected simultaneously into all six cylinders twice each engine cycle. In other words, pulse signals of
the same width are simultaneously transmitted from the ECM.
The six fuel injectors will then receive the signals two times for each engine cycle.
This system is used when the engine is being started and/or if the fail-safe system (CPU) is operating.
FUEL SHUT-OFF
Fuel to each cylinder is cut off during deceleration, operation of the engine at excessively high speeds or oper-
ation of the vehicle at excessively high speeds.

A

C
D
Ignition timing
Power transistor
Accelerator pedal position sensor Accelerator pedal position control E
Knock sensor Engine knocking
F
*1: This signal is sent to the ECM via the CAN communication line. G
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION H
Firing order: 1-2-3-4-5-6
The ignition timing is controlled by the ECM to maintain the best air-fuel ratio for every running condition of the
engine. The ignition timing data is saved in the ECM.
The ECM receives information such as the injection pulse width and camshaft position sensor (PHASE) sig- I
nal. Computing this information, ignition signals are transmitted to the power transistor.
During the following conditions, the ignition timing is revised by the ECM according to the other data saved in
the ECM. J
• At starting
• During warm-up
• At idle
• At low battery voltage K
The knock sensor retard system is designed only for emergencies. The basic ignition timing is programmed
within the anti-knocking zone, if recommended fuel is used under dry conditions. The retard system does not L
operate under normal driving conditions. If engine knocking occurs, the knock sensor monitors the condition.
The signal is transmitted to the ECM. The ECM retards the ignition timing to eliminate the knocking condition.
M

Input/Output Signal Chart INFOID:0000000004053709

Air conditioner switch 1
Air conditioner ON signal*
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature Air conditioner

Air conditioner relay
cut control
*1: This signal is sent to the ECM via the CAN communication line.
This system improves engine operation when the air conditioner is used.
Under the following conditions, the air conditioner is turned off.
• When the accelerator pedal is fully depressed.
• When cranking the engine.
• At high engine speeds.
• When the engine coolant temperature becomes excessively high.
• When operating power steering during low engine speed or low vehicle speed.
• When engine speed is excessively low.
• When refrigerant pressure is excessively low or high.

A

ASCD brake switch Brake pedal operation C
Stop lamp switch Brake pedal operation
ASCD clutch switch Clutch pedal operation
Electric throttle control D
ASCD steering switch ASCD steering switch operation ASCD vehicle speed control
actuator
Park/Neutral position (PNP) switch Gear position
Wheel sensor Vehicle speed* E
TCM Powertrain revolution*
*: This signal is sent to the ECM via the CAN communication line.
F
BASIC ASCD SYSTEM
Refer to Owner's Manual for ASCD operating instructions.
Automatic Speed Control Device (ASCD) allows a driver to keep vehicle at predetermined constant speed
G
without depressing accelerator pedal. Driver can set vehicle speed in advance between approximately 40 km/
h (25 MPH) and 144 km/h (89 MPH).
ECM controls throttle angle of electric throttle control actuator to regulate engine speed.
Operation status of ASCD is indicated by CRUISE indicator and SET indicator in combination meter. If any H
malfunction occurs in the ASCD system, it automatically deactivates control.
NOTE:
Always drive vehicle in a safe manner according to traffic conditions and obey all traffic laws. I
SET OPERATION
Press MAIN switch. (The CRUISE indicator in combination meter illuminates.)
When vehicle speed reaches a desired speed between approximately 40 km/h (25 MPH) and 144 km/h (89 J
MPH), press SET/COAST switch. (Then SET indicator in combination meter illuminates.)
ACCELERATE OPERATION
If the RESUME/ACCELERATE switch is pressed during cruise control driving, increase the vehicle speed until K
the switch is released or vehicle speed reaches maximum speed controlled by the system.
And then ASCD will maintain the new set speed.
CANCEL OPERATION L
When any of following conditions exist, cruise operation will be canceled.
• CANCEL switch is pressed
• More than 2 switches on ASCD steering switch are pressed at the same time (Set speed will be cleared) M
• Brake pedal is depressed
• Clutch pedal is depressed or gear position is changed to the neutral position (M/T models)
• Selector lever position is changed to N, P or R (A/T models)
N
• Vehicle speed decreased to 13 km/h (8 MPH) lower than the set speed
• VDC system is operated
When the ECM detects any of the following conditions, the ECM will cancel the cruise operation and inform
the driver by blinking indicator lamp. O
• Engine coolant temperature is slightly higher than the normal operating temperature, CRUISE lamp may
blink slowly.
When the engine coolant temperature decreases to the normal operating temperature, CRUISE lamp will
P
stop blinking and the cruise operation will be able to work by depressing SET/COAST switch or RESUME/
ACCELERATE switch.
• Malfunction for some self-diagnoses regarding ASCD control: SET lamp will blink quickly.
If MAIN switch is turned to OFF while ASCD is activated, all of ASCD operations will be canceled and vehicle
speed memory will be erased.
COAST OPERATION

When the SET/COAST switch is pressed during cruise control driving, decrease vehicle set speed until the
switch is released. And then ASCD will maintain the new set speed.
RESUME OPERATION
When the RESUME/ACCELERATE switch is pressed after canceling operation other than depressing the
MAIN switch, vehicle speed will return to last set speed. To resume vehicle set speed, vehicle condition must
meet following conditions.
• Brake pedal is released
• Clutch pedal is released (M/T models)
• Selector lever position is in other than P and N (A/T models)
• Vehicle speed is greater than 40 km/h (25 MPH) and less than 144 km/h (89 MPH)

Refer to EC-788.
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH
STOP LAMP SWITCH
Refer to EC-792, EC-807 and EC-841.
ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
Refer to EC-810, EC-813, EC-817 and EC-819.
ASCD INDICATOR
Refer to EC-849.

CAN COMMUNICATION
CAN COMMUNICATION
A
Refer to LAN-55, "CAN System Specification Chart", about CAN communication for detail.
D

COOLING FAN CONTROL
COOLING FAN CONTROL
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Cooling Fan Control


Wheel sensor Vehicle speed*2 Cooling fan IPDM E/R
control (Cooling fan relays)
Air conditioner switch Air conditioner ON signal*2
*1: The ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage.
*2: This signal is sent to ECM via the CAN communication line.
The ECM controls the cooling fan corresponding to the vehicle speed, engine coolant temperature, refrigerant
pressure, and air conditioner ON signal. The control system has 3-step control [HIGH/LOW/OFF].
Cooling Fan Operation
PBIB2531E
Cooling Fan Relay Operation

The ECM controls cooling fan relays in the IPDM E/R via the CAN communication line.
Cooling fan relay

Cooling fan speed
LO HI
Stop (OFF) OFF OFF
Low (LOW) ON OFF
High (HI) ON ON

A
G
PBIB3639E
The evaporative emission system is used to reduce hydrocarbons emitted into the atmosphere from the fuel H
system. This reduction of hydrocarbons is accomplished by activated charcoals in the EVAP canister.
The fuel vapor in the sealed fuel tank is led into the EVAP canister which contains activated carbon and the
vapor is saved there when the engine is not operating or when refueling to the fuel tank.
I
The vapor in the EVAP canister is purged by the air through the purge line to the intake manifold when the
engine is operating. EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is controlled by ECM. When the
engine operates, the flow rate of vapor controlled by EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is
proportionally regulated as the air flow increases. J
EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve also shuts off the vapor purge line during decelerating.

EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING
PBIB2528E

EC
L
ALBIA0513ZZ
1. EVAP vapor purge line 2. EVAP canister vent control valve 3. EVAP control system pressure sen- M
(view with bed removed) sor
4. Drain filter 5. EVAP canister
:Vehicle front N
:Previous page

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

Engine speed and piston position
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Intake valve Intake valve timing control
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature timing control solenoid valve
Wheel sensor Vehicle speed*

*: This signal is sent to the ECM via the CAN communication line
PBIB3279E
This mechanism hydraulically controls cam phases continuously with the fixed operating angle of the intake
valve.
The ECM receives signals such as crankshaft position, camshaft position, engine speed, and engine coolant
temperature. Then, the ECM sends ON/OFF pulse duty signals to the intake valve timing control solenoid
valve depending on driving status. This makes it possible to control the shut/open timing of the intake valve to
increase engine torque in low/mid speed range and output in high-speed range.

VARIABLE INDUCTION AIR SYSTEM
A

Crankshaft position sensor (POS) C
Engine speed*
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature D
VIAS control VIAS control solenoid valve
E
*: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage.
F
PBIB1822E
K
When the engine is running at medium speed, the ECM sends the ON signal to the VIAS control solenoid
valve. This signal introduces the intake manifold vacuum into the power valve actuator and therefore closes
the power valve.
Under this condition, the effective intake manifold length is equivalent to the total length of passage A and pas- L
sage B. This long intake manifold provides increased amount of intake air, which results in improved suction
efficiency and higher torque.
When engine is running at low or high speed, the ECM sends the OFF signal to the VIAS control solenoid M
valve and the power valve is opened.
Under this condition, the effective intake manifold length is equivalent to the length of passage B. This short-
ened intake manifold length results in enhanced engine output due to reduced suction resistance under high
speeds. N
Power Valve O

The power valve is installed in intake manifold collector and used to
control the suction passage of the variable induction air control sys-
tem. It is set in the fully closed or fully opened position by the power
valve actuator operated by the vacuum saved in the surge tank. The
vacuum in the surge tank is controlled by the VIAS control solenoid
valve.
BBIA0569E
VIAS Control Solenoid Valve

The VIAS control solenoid valve cuts the intake manifold vacuum
signal for power valve control. It responds to ON/OFF signals from
the ECM. When the solenoid is off, the vacuum signal from the
intake manifold is cut. When the ECM sends an ON signal the coil
pulls the plunger downward and feeds the vacuum signal to the
power valve actuator.
BBIA0569E

Vacuum Hose Drawing INFOID:0000000004053718
EC
PBIB2529E
Refer to EC-478, "System Diagram" for Vacuum Control System. P

Introduction INFOID:0000000004053719
The ECM has an on board diagnostic system, which detects malfunctions related to engine sensors or actua-
tors. The ECM also records various emission-related diagnostic information including:
Emission-related diagnostic information SAE Mode

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Service $03 of SAE J1979
Freeze Frame data Service $02 of SAE J1979
System Readiness Test (SRT) code Service $01 of SAE J1979
1st Trip Diagnostic Trouble Code (1st Trip DTC) Service $07 of SAE J1979
1st Trip Freeze Frame data
Test values and Test limits Service $06 of SAE J1979
Calibration ID Service $09 of SAE J1979
The above information can be checked using procedures listed in the table below.
Freeze Frame 1st trip Freeze
DTC 1st trip DTC SRT code SRT status Test value
data Frame data
CONSULT-III × × × × × × —
GST × × × — × × ×
ECM × ×* — — — × —
*: When DTC and 1st trip DTC simultaneously appear on the display, they cannot be clearly distinguished from each other.
The malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) on the instrument panel illuminates when the same malfunction is
detected in two consecutive trips (Two trip detection logic), or when the ECM enters fail-safe mode. (Refer to
EC-912.)
Two Trip Detection Logic INFOID:0000000004053720
When a malfunction is detected for the first time, 1st trip DTC and 1st trip Freeze Frame data are saved in the
ECM memory. The MIL will not illuminate at this stage. <1st trip>
If the same malfunction is detected again during the next drive, the DTC and Freeze Frame data are saved in
the ECM memory, and the MIL illuminates. The MIL illuminates at the same time when the DTC is saved.
<2nd trip> The “trip” in the “Two Trip Detection Logic” means a driving mode in which self-diagnosis is per-
formed during vehicle operation. Specific on board diagnostic items will cause the ECM to illuminate or blink
the MIL, and save DTC and Freeze Frame data, even in the 1st trip, as shown below.
MIL DTC 1st trip DTC

1st trip 2nd trip 2nd trip
Items 1st trip 2nd trip 1st trip
Illuminat- Illuminat- display-
Blinking Blinking displaying displaying displaying
ed ed ing
Misfire (Possible three way catalyst

damage) — DTC: P0300 - P0306 is × — — — — — × —
being detected
Misfire (Possible three way catalyst
damage) — DTC: P0300 - P0306 is — — × — — × — —
being detected
One trip detection diagnoses (Re-
— × — — × — — —
fer to EC-915.)
Except above — — — × — × × —
When there is an open circuit on MIL circuit, the ECM cannot warn the driver by illuminated MIL when there is

NG for 5 trips, ECM warns the driver that engine control system malfunctions and MIL circuit is open by means A
The fail-safe function also operates when above diagnoses except MIL circuit are detected and demands the
EC
Emission-related Diagnostic Information INFOID:0000000004053721 C

The 1st trip DTC (whose number is the same as the DTC number) is displayed for the latest self-diagnostic D
If a malfunction is detected during the 1st trip, the 1st trip DTC is saved in the ECM memory. The MIL will not
E
illuminate (two trip detection logic). If the same malfunction is not detected in the 2nd trip (meeting the required
2nd trip, both the 1st trip DTC and DTC are saved in the ECM memory and the MIL illuminates. In other words,
the DTC is saved in the ECM memory and the MIL illuminates when the same malfunction occurs in two con- F
secutive trips. If a 1st trip DTC is saved and a non-diagnostic operation is performed between the 1st and 2nd
trips, only the 1st trip DTC will continue to be saved. For malfunctions that blink or illuminate the MIL during
the 1st trip, the DTC and 1st trip DTC are saved in the ECM memory.
G
MATION ITEMS". These items are required by legal regulations to continuously monitor the system/compo- H
and therefore does not warn the driver of a malfunction. However, 1st trip DTC detection will not prevent the I
form DTC Confirmation Procedure or Overall Function Check to try to duplicate the malfunction. If the mal- J
DTC and 1st trip DTC can be read by the following methods. K
With CONSULT-III
With GST
CONSULT-III or GST (Generic Scan Tool) Examples: P0340, P0850, P1148, etc. L
No Tools M
Example: 0340, 0850, 1148, etc.
• 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No. N
• Output of a DTC indicates a malfunction. However, GST and the Diagnostic Test Mode II do not indi-
mal. CONSULT-III can identify malfunction status as shown below. Therefore, using CONSULT-III (if O
If the DTC is being detected currently, the time data will be [0]. P
If a 1st trip DTC is saved in the ECM, the time data will be [1t].
FREEZE FRAME DATA AND 1ST TRIP FREEZE FRAME DATA

Data which are saved in the ECM memory, along with the 1st trip DTC, are called 1st trip freeze frame data.
The data, saved together with the DTC data, are called freeze frame data and displayed on CONSULT-III or
details, see EC-523, "CONSULT-III Function (ENGINE)".
Only one set of freeze frame data (either 1st trip freeze frame data or freeze frame data) can be saved in the
ECM. 1st trip freeze frame data is saved in the ECM memory along with the 1st trip DTC. There is no priority
freeze frame data (2nd trip detection/MIL on) is saved in the ECM memory, 1st trip freeze frame data is no
longer saved. Remember, only one set of freeze frame data can be saved in the ECM. The ECM has the fol-
Priority Items
Freeze frame data Misfire — DTC: P0300 - P0306
1
Fuel Injection System Function — DTC: P0171, P0172, P0174, P0175
For example, the EGR malfunction (Priority: 2) was detected and the freeze frame data was saved in the 2nd
saved in the ECM memory, 1st trip freeze data is no longer saved (because only one freeze frame data or 1st
trip freeze frame data can be saved in the ECM). If freeze frame data is saved in the ECM memory and freeze
ECM memory.
ory is erased. Procedures for clearing the ECM memory are described in "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-
RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION".
NOTE:
NOTE:
SRT Item
SRT item Perfor-

(CONSULT-III indica- mance Pri- Required self-diagnostic items to set the SRT to “CMPLT” Corresponding DTC No.
tion) ority*1
CATALYST 2 Three way catalyst function P0420, P0430

SRT item Perfor-
(CONSULT-III indica- mance Pri- Required self-diagnostic items to set the SRT to “CMPLT” Corresponding DTC No. A
tion) ority*1
EVAP SYSTEM 1 EVAP control system P0442 EC
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 P0133, P0153
C
Heated oxygen sensor 2 P0137, P0157
HO2S 1
Heated oxygen sensor 2 P0139, P0159 D
*1: If completion of several SRTs is required, perform driving patterns (DTC confirmation procedure), one by one based on the priority
for models with CONSULT-III.
E
SRT Set Timing
is shown in the table below. F
Example
Self-diagnosis result Ignition cycle G
Diagnosis
All OK Case 1 P0400 OK (1) — (1) OK (2) — (2)
P0402 OK (1) — (1) — (1) OK (2) H
P1402 OK (1) OK (2) — (2) — (2)
I
Case 2 P0400 OK (1) — (1) — (1) — (1)
P0402 — (0) — (0) OK (1) — (1)
P1402 OK (1) OK (2) — (2) — (2) J
K
P0402 — — — —
NG
L
NG)
(1st trip) DTC
DTC (= MIL ON)
M
N
When all SRT related self-diagnoses show OK results in a single cycle (Ignition OFF-ON-OFF), the SRT will
When all SRT related self-diagnoses show OK results through several different cycles, the SRT will indicate O
If one or more SRT related self-diagnoses show NG results in 2 consecutive cycles, the SRT will also indicate
“CMPLT”. → Case 3 above P
The table above shows that the minimum number of cycles for setting SRT as “INCMP” is the number one (1)
for each self-diagnosis (Case 1 & 2) or the number two (2) for one of self-diagnoses (Case 3). However, in
preparation for the state emissions inspection, it is unnecessary for each self-diagnosis to be executed twice
(Case 3) for the following reasons:

• During SRT driving pattern, the 1st trip DTC (NG) is detected prior to “CMPLT” of SRT, the self-diagnosis
memory must be erased from the ECM after repair.
NOTE:
PBIB2320E

WITH CONSULT-III
For items whose SRT codes are set, “CMPLT” is displayed on the CONSULT-III screen; for items whose SRT
codes are not set, “INCMP” is displayed.
NOTE:

WITH GST
Selecting Service $01 with GST (Generic Scan Tool) A
NO TOOLS
A SRT code itself cannot be displayed ,however SRT status can. EC
• When all SRT codes are set, MIL illuminates continuously. C
• When any SRT codes are not set, MIL will brink periodically for 10 seconds.
JMBIA1515GB
How to Set SRT Code I

diagnosis may require a long period of actual driving under various conditions.
WITH CONSULT-III J
on "SRT Item".
WITHOUT CONSULT-III K
The most efficient driving pattern in which SRT codes can be properly set is explained on the next page. The
driving pattern should be performed one or more times to set all SRT codes.
L

Driving Pattern
PBIB3622E
habits, etc.
est.
zone A.

• Sea level
• Flat road A
EC
Pattern 1:
Pattern 2:
Pattern 3:
• Replace the accelerator pedal during decelerating vehicle speed F
from 90km/h (56MPH) to 0km/h (0MPH).
Pattern 4:
state driving. G
over again.
PBIB2244E

Suggested Upshift Speeds for M/T Models
Shown below are suggested vehicle speeds vehicle speeds for shifting into a higher gear. These suggestions
relate to fuel economy and vehicle performance. Actual upshift speeds will vary according to road conditions, K
the weather and individual driving habits.

For normal acceleration in altitude areas
L
[less than 1,219 m (4,000 ft)]:
[over 1,219 m (4,000 ft)]:
Gear change ACCEL shift point km/h (MPH) CRUISE shift point km/h (MPH) km/h (MPH)
M
1st to 2nd 21 (13) 17 (11) 24 (15)
2nd to 3rd 38 (24) 27 (17) 40 (25)
3rd to 4th 53 (33) 40 (25) 64 (40) N
4th to 5th 69 (43) 51 (32) 72 (45)
6th 77 (48) 72 (45) 80 (50)
Suggested Maximum Speed in Each Gear O
Do not exceed the maximum suggested speed (shown below) in any gear. For level road driving, use the high-
est gear suggested for that speed. Always observe posted speed limits and drive according to the road condi- P
tions to ensure sage operation. Do not over-rev the engine when shifting to a lower gear as it may cause
Gear km/h (MPH)

1st 56 (35)
2nd 96 (60)

Gear km/h (MPH)
3rd 136 (85)
4th —
5th —
6th —
TEST VALUE AND TEST LIMIT

ECM. (e.g., if the bank 2 is not applied on this vehicle, only the items of the bank 1 is displayed)
Test value and

Test limit
OBD- (GST display)
MID Unit and
TID Scaling
ID
Minimum sensor output voltage
P0131 83H 0BH
for test cycle
Maximum sensor output voltage
P0131 84H 0BH
for test cycle
P0130 85H 0BH
for test cycle
P0130 86H 0BH
for test cycle
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 Response rate: Response ratio

01H P0133 87H 04H
(Bank 1) (Lean to Rich)
Response rate: Response ratio
P0133 88H 04H
(Rich to Lean)
Difference in sensor output volt-
P0130 8BH 0BH
age
HO2S
Response gain at the limited fre-
P0133 8CH 83H
quency
P0138 07H 0CH
for test cycle
Heated oxygen sensor 2 P0137 08H 0CH
02H for test cycle
(Bank 1)
P0139 81H 0CH
age
P0143 07H 0CH
for test cycle
03H for test cycle
(Bank 1)
P0145 81H 0CH
age

Test value and
Test limit A
OBD- (GST display)
MID Unit and
TID Scaling EC
ID
P0151 83H 0BH
for test cycle
C
P0151 84H 0BH
for test cycle
Minimum sensor output voltage D
P0150 85H 0BH
for test cycle
P0150 86H 0BH
for test cycle
E
05H P0153 87H 04H
P0153 88H 04H
(Rich to Lean)
F
G
P0150 8BH 0BH
age
HO2S
Response gain at the limited fre- H
P0153 8CH 83H
quency
P0158 07H 0CH
for test cycle
I
06H for test cycle
(Bank 2)
P0158 80H 0CH Sensor output voltage J
P0159 81H 0CH
age
Minimum sensor output voltage K
P0163 07H 0CH
for test cycle
07H for test cycle
(Bank2) L
P0165 81H 0CH
age M
Switching time lag engine exhaust
P0420 82H 01H
index value N
Three way catalyst function
21H Difference in 3rd O2 sensor out-
(Bank1) P2423 83H 0CH
put voltage
P2423 84H 84H

O2 storage index in HC trap cata- O
CATA- lyst
Switching time lag engine exhaust P
P0430 82H 01H
index value
(Bank2) P2424 83H 0CH
put voltage
O2 storage index in HC trap cata-
P2424 84H 84H
lyst

Test value and
Test limit
OBD- (GST display)
MID Unit and
TID Scaling
ID
Low Flow Faults: EGR temp
P0400 80H 96H
change rate (short term)
P0400 81H 96H
change rate (long term)
EGR Low Flow Faults: Difference be-
31H EGR function
SYSTEM P0400 82H 96H tween max EGR temp and EGR
temp under idling condition
High Flow Faults: EGR temp in-
P1402 84H 96H
crease rate
Difference in pressure sensor out-
EVAP control system leak
39H P0455 80H 0CH put voltage before and after pull
(Cap Off)
down
EVAP control system leak Leak area index (for more than
3BH P0442 80H 05H
(Small leak) 0.04inch)
EVAP Leak area index (for more than
P0456 80H 05H
SYSTEM EVAP control system 0.02inch)
3CH
(Very small leak) Maximum internal pressure of
P0456 81H FDH
EVAP system during monitoring
3DH Purge flow system P0441 83H 0CH put voltage before and after vent
control value close
A/F sensor 1 heater Low Input:P0031 Converted value of Heater electric
41H 81H 0BH
(Bank 1) High Input:P0032 current to voltage
Heated oxygen sensor 2 heat- Low Input:P0037 Converted value of Heater electric
42H 80H 0CH
er (Bank 1) High Input:P0038 current to voltage
Heated oxygen sensor 3 heat- Converted value of Heater electric
O2 SEN- 43H P0043 80H 0CH
er (Bank 1) current to voltage
SOR
HEATER A/F sensor 1 heater Low Input:P0051 Converted value of Heater electric
45H 81H 0BH
46H 80H 0CH
47H P0063 80H 0CH
Secondary Air Injection System
P0411 80H 01H
Incorrect Flow Detected
Bank1: P0491 Secondary Air Injection System
81H 01H
Bank2: P0492 Insufficient Flow
P2445 82H 01H
Pump Stuck Off
SEC-
High Airflow
ARY AIR
84H 01H
Bank2: P2442 Switching Valve Stuck Open
P2440 85H 01H
Switching Valve Stuck Open
P2444 86H 01H
Pump Stuck On

Test value and
Test limit A
OBD- (GST display)
MID Unit and
TID Scaling EC
ID
P0171 or P0172 80H 2FH Long term fuel trim
Fuel injection system function
81H The number of lambda control C
(Bank 1) P0171 or P0172 81H 24H
FUEL clamped
82H The number of lambda control D
(Bank 2) P0174 or P0175 81H 24H
clamped
Misfiring counter at 1000 revolu-
P0301 80H 24H
tion of the first cylinder E
P0302 81H 24H
tion of the second cylinder
Misfiring counter at 1000 revolu- F
P0303 82H 24H
tion of the third cylinder
P0304 83H 24H
tion of the fourth cylinder
G
P0305 84H 24H
tion of the fifth cylinder
Misfiring counter at 1000 revolu- H
P0306 85H 24H
tion of the sixth cylinder
P0307 86H 24H
tion of the seventh cylinder
I
P0308 87H 24H
tion of the eighth cylinder
Misfiring counter at 1000 revolu- J
P0300 88H 24H
tion of the multiple cylinders
Misfiring counter at 200 revolution
P0301 89H 24H
of the first cylinder
MISFIRE A1H Multiple Cylinder Misfire K
P0302 8AH 24H
of the second cylinder
P0303 8BH 24H L
of the third cylinder
P0304 8CH 24H
of the fourth cylinder
M
P0305 8DH 24H
of the fifth cylinder
P0306 8EH 24H N
of the sixth cylinder
P0307 8FH 24H
of the seventh cylinder
O
P0308 90H 24H
of the eighth cylinder
P0300 91H 24H P
tion of the single cylinder
P0300 92H 24H
of the single cylinder
P0300 93H 24H
of the multiple cylinders

Test value and
Test limit
OBD- (GST display)
MID Unit and
TID Scaling
ID
EWMA (Exponential Weighted
P0301 0BH 24H Moving Average) misfire counts
A2H No.1 Cylinder Misfire for last 10 driving cycles
Misfire counts for last/current driv-
P0301 0CH 24H
ing cycles
P0302 0CH 24H
ing cycles
P0303 0CH 24H
ing cycles
P0304 0CH 24H
ing cycles
MISFIRE
P0305 0CH 24H
ing cycles
P0306 0CH 24H
ing cycles
P0307 0CH 24H
ing cycles
P0308 0CH 24H
ing cycles

How to Erase DTC and 1st Trip DTC
With CONSULT-III
NOTE:
• If the ignition switch stays ON after rpair work, be sure to turn ignition OFF once. Wait at least 10 seconds
and then turn it ON (engine stopped) again.
• If the DTC is not for A/T related items (see EC-915, "DTC Index"), skip step 1.

4. Touch “ERASE”. (DTC in ECM will be erased.) A
With GST
NOTE:
• If the ignition switch stays ON after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch OFF once. Wait at EC
No Tools C
NOTE:
• If the ignition switch stays ON after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch OFF once.
Wait at least 10 seconds and then turn it ON (engine stopped) again.
1. Erase DTC in ECM. Refer to HOW TO ERASE DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE II (SELF-DIAGNOSTIC D
RESULTS).
2. Change the diagnostic test mode from Mode II to Mode I by depressing the accelerator pedal.
• If the battery is disconnected, the emission-related diagnostic information will be lost within 24 E
hours.
- 1st trip diagnostic trouble codes F
- Freeze frame data
- System readiness test (SRT) codes G
- Test values
Actual work procedures are explained using a DTC as an example. Be careful so that not only the DTC, but all
of the data listed above, are cleared from the ECM memory during work procedures. H
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) INFOID:0000000004053722
DESCRIPTION I
The MIL is located on the instrument panel.
1. The MIL will illuminate when the ignition switch is turned ON
without the engine running. This is a bulb check. J
If the MIL does not illuminate, refer to MWI-17, "WARNING
LAMPS/INDICATOR LAMPS : System Diagram".
2. When the engine is started, the MIL should turn off. K
If the MIL remains on, the on board diagnostic system has
detected an engine system malfunction.
L
SEF217U
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM FUNCTION

M
The on board diagnostic system has the following three functions.

Diagnostic Test KEY and ENG. Function Explanation of Function

Mode Status
Mode I Ignition switch in BULB CHECK This function checks the MIL bulb for damage (blown, open
ON position circuit, etc.).
If the MIL does not come on, check MIL circuit.
Engine stopped
Engine running MALFUNCTION When a malfunction is detected twice in two consecutive

WARNING driving cycles (two trip detection logic), the MIL will illumi-
nate to inform the driver that a malfunction has been detect-
ed.
The following malfunctions will illuminate or blink the MIL in
the 1st trip.
• Misfire (Possible three way catalyst damage)
• One trip detection diagnoses
Mode II Ignition switch in SELF-DIAGNOSTIC This function allows DTCs and 1st trip DTCs to be read.
ON position RESULTS
Engine stopped
When there is an open circuit on MIL circuit, the ECM cannot warn the driver by lighting up MIL when there is
NG for 5 trips, ECM warns the driver that engine control system malfunctions and MIL circuit is open by means
MIL Brinking Without DTC

When any SRT codes are not set, MIL may brink without DTC. For the details, refer to EC-915, "DTC Index".
HOW TO SWITCH DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE
NOTE:
a malfunction.
• ECM always returns to Diagnostic Test Mode I after the ignition switch is turned OFF.
How to Set Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results)
1. Confirm that accelerator pedal is fully released, turn ignition switch ON and wait 3 seconds.
2. Repeat the following procedure quickly five times within 5 seconds.
3. Wait 7 seconds, fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it depressed for approx. 10 seconds until
the MIL starts blinking.
NOTE:
Do not release the accelerator pedal for 10 seconds if MIL starts blinking during this period. This
blinking is displaying SRT status and is continued for another 10 seconds. For the details, refer to
EC-915, "DTC Index".

4. Fully release the accelerator pedal.
ECM has entered to Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results). A
NOTE:
Wait until the same DTC (or 1st trip DTC) appears to completely confirm all DTCs.
EC
PBIB0092E
How to Erase Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results) E

1. Set ECM in Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results). Refer to "How to Set Diagnostic Test Mode
II (Self-diagnostic Results)".
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it depressed for more than 10 seconds. F
The emission-related diagnostic information has been erased from the backup memory in the ECM.
3. Fully release the accelerator pedal, and confirm the DTC 0000 is displayed.
DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE I — BULB CHECK G
In this mode, the MIL on the instrument panel should stay ON. If it remains OFF, check the bulb. Refer to
MWI-17, "WARNING LAMPS/INDICATOR LAMPS : System Diagram".
H
DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE I — MALFUNCTION WARNING
MIL Condition
I
ON When the malfunction is detected.
OFF No malfunction.
This DTC number is clarified in Diagnostic Test Mode II (SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS) J
DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE II — SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
In this mode, the DTC and 1st trip DTC are indicated by the number of blinks of the MIL as shown below.
The DTC and 1st trip DTC are displayed at the same time. If the MIL does not illuminate in diagnostic test K
mode I (Malfunction warning), all displayed items are 1st trip DTCs. If only one code is displayed when the MIL
illuminates in diagnostic test mode II (SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS), it is a DTC; if two or more codes are
displayed, they may be either DTCs or 1st trip DTCs. DTC No. is same as that of 1st trip DTC. These uniden- L

tified codes can be identified by using the CONSULT-III or GST. A DTC will be used as an example for how to
read a code.
PBIB3005E
A particular trouble code can be identified by the number of four-digit numeral flashes. The “zero” is indicated
by the number of ten flashes. The “A” is indicated by the number of eleven flash. The length of time the
1,000th-digit numeral flashes on and off is 1.2 seconds consisting of an ON (0.6-seconds) - OFF (0.6-sec-
onds) cycle.
The 100th-digit numeral and lower digit numerals consist of a 0.3-seconds ON and 0.3-seconds OFF cycle.
A change from one digit numeral to another occurs at an interval of 1.0-second OFF. In other words, the later
numeral appears on the display 1.3 seconds after the former numeral has disappeared.
A change from one trouble code to another occurs at an interval of 1.8-seconds OFF.
In this way, all the detected malfunctions are classified by their DTC numbers. The DTC 0000 refers to no mal-
function. (See EC-915, "DTC Index")
The DTC can be erased from the back up memory in the ECM by depressing accelerator pedal. Refer to "How
to Set Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results)".
• If the battery is disconnected, the DTC will be lost from the backup memory within 24 hours.
• Be careful not to erase the saved memory before starting trouble diagnoses.
OBD System Operation Chart INFOID:0000000004053723
RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MIL, 1ST TRIP DTC, DTC, AND DETECTABLE ITEMS
• When a malfunction is detected for the first time, the 1st trip DTC and the 1st trip freeze frame data are
saved in the ECM memory.
• When the same malfunction is detected in two consecutive trips, the DTC and the freeze frame data are
saved in the ECM memory, and the MIL will come on. For details, refer to EC-502, "Two Trip Detection
Logic".
• The MIL will go off after the vehicle is driven 3 times with no malfunction. The drive is counted only when the
recorded driving pattern is met (as saved in the ECM). If another malfunction occurs while counting, the
counter will reset.
• The DTC and the freeze frame data will be saved until the vehicle is driven 40 times (driving pattern A) with-
out the same malfunction recurring (except for Misfire and Fuel Injection System). For Misfire and Fuel Injec-

tion System, the DTC and freeze frame data will be saved until the vehicle is driven 80 times (driving pattern
C) without the same malfunction recurring. The “TIME” in “SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS” mode of CON- A
SULT-III will count the number of times the vehicle is driven.
• The 1st trip DTC is not displayed when the self-diagnosis results in OK for the 2nd trip.
SUMMARY CHART EC
Items Fuel Injection System Misfire Other

MIL (turns off) 3 (pattern B) 3 (pattern B) 3 (pattern B) C
DTC, Freeze Frame Data (no
80 (pattern C) 80 (pattern C) 40 (pattern A)
display)
1st Trip DTC (clear) 1 (pattern C), *1 1 (pattern C), *1 1 (pattern B) D
1st Trip Freeze Frame Data
*1, *2 *1, *2 1 (pattern B)
(clear)
E
For details about patterns B and C under “Fuel Injection System” and “Misfire”, see "EXPLANATION FOR DRIVING PATTERNS FOR
“MISFIRE <EXHAUST QUALITY DETERIORATION>”, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM”".
For details about patterns A and B under Other, see "EXPLANATION FOR DRIVING PATTERNS FOR “MISFIRE <EXHAUST QUAL-
ITY DETERIORATION>”, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM”". F
*1: Clear timing is at the moment OK is detected.
*2: Clear timing is when the same malfunction is detected in the 2nd trip.
G
RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MIL, DTC, 1ST TRIP DTC AND DRIVING PATTERNS FOR “MISFIRE ”
<EXHAUST QUALITY DETERIORATION>, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM”
H

JMBIA1417GB
*1: When the same malfunction is de- *2: MIL will turn off after vehicle is driven *3: When the same malfunction is de-
will illuminate. functions. DTC and the freeze frame data will
be saved in ECM.
*4: The DTC and the freeze frame data *5: When a malfunction is detected for *6: The 1st trip DTC and the 1st trip
will not be displayed any longer after the first time, the 1st trip DTC and the freeze frame data will be cleared at
vehicle is driven 80 times (pattern C) 1st trip freeze frame data will be the moment OK is detected.
without the same malfunction. (The saved in ECM.
DTC and the freeze frame data still
remain in ECM.)
*7: When the same malfunction is de- *8: 1st trip DTC will be cleared when ve-
tected in the 2nd trip, the 1st trip hicle is driven once (pattern C) with-
freeze frame data will be cleared. out the same malfunction after DTC
is saved in ECM.
EXPLANATION FOR DRIVING PATTERNS FOR “MISFIRE <EXHAUST QUALITY DETERIORA-

TION>”, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM”
<Driving Pattern B>
Driving pattern B means the vehicle operation as par the following:
• The B counter will be cleared when the malfunction is detected once regardless of the driving pattern. A
• The B counter will be counted up when driving pattern B is satisfied without any malfunction.
• The MIL will turn off when the B counter reaches 3. (*2 in “OBD SYSTEM OPERATION CHART”)
<Driving Pattern C> EC
Driving pattern C means operating vehicle as par the following:
The following conditions should be satisfied at the same time:
Engine speed: (Engine speed in the freeze frame data) ±375 rpm C
Calculated load value: (Calculated load value in the freeze frame data) x (1±0.1) [%]
Engine coolant temperature (T) condition:
• When the freeze frame data shows lower than 70°C (158°F), T should be lower than 70°C (158°F).
• When the freeze frame data shows higher than or equal to 70°C (158°F), T should be higher than or equal to D
70°C (158°F).
Example:
If the saved freeze frame data is as par the following: E
Engine speed: 850 rpm, Calculated load value: 30%, Engine coolant temperature: 80°C (176°F)
To be satisfied with driving pattern C, the vehicle should run under the following conditions:
Engine speed: 475 - 1,225 rpm, Calculated load value: 27 - 33%, Engine coolant temperature: more than 70°C
(158°F) F
• The C counter will be cleared when the malfunction is detected regardless of vehicle conditions above.
• The C counter will be counted up when vehicle conditions above are satisfied without the same malfunction.
• The DTC will not be displayed after C counter reaches 80. G
• The 1st trip DTC will be cleared when C counter is counted once without the same malfunction after DTC is
saved in ECM.
RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MIL, DTC, 1ST TRIP DTC AND DRIVING PATTERNS EXCEPT FOR H
“MISFIRE <EXHAUST QUALITY DETERIORATION>”, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM”

JMBIA1418GB
*1: When the same malfunction is de- *2: MIL will turn off after vehicle is driven *3: When the same malfunction is de-
will illuminate. functions. DTC and the freeze frame data will
be saved in ECM.
*4: The DTC and the freeze frame data *5: When a malfunction is detected for *6: 1st trip DTC will be cleared after vehi-
will not be displayed any longer after the first time, the 1st trip DTC and the cle is driven once (pattern B) without
vehicle is driven 40 times (pattern A) 1st trip freeze frame data will be the same malfunction.
without the same malfunction. saved in ECM.
(The DTC and the freeze frame data
still remain in ECM.)
*7: When the same malfunction is de-
tected in the 2nd trip, the 1st trip
freeze frame data will be cleared.
EXPLANATION FOR DRIVING PATTERNS EXCEPT FOR “MISFIRE <EXHAUST QUALITY DETE-
RIORATION>”, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM”

<Driving Pattern A>
A
EC
JMBIA1920GB F
• The A counter will be cleared when the malfunction is detected regardless of (1) - (4).
• The A counter will be counted up when (1) - (4) are satisfied without the same malfunction.
• The DTC will not be displayed after the A counter reaches 40.
G
<Driving Pattern B>
Driving pattern B means operating vehicle as par the following:
H
• The B counter will be counted up when driving pattern B is satisfied without any malfunctions.
• The MIL will turn off when the B counter reaches 3 (*2 in OBD SYSTEM OPERATION CHART).
I
CONSULT-III Function (ENGINE) INFOID:0000000004053724
FUNCTION J

This mode enables a technician to adjust some devices faster and more accurately by following the in- K
Work support
dications on the CONSULT-III unit.
Self-diagnostic results such as 1st trip DTC, DTCs and 1st trip freeze frame data or freeze frame data
Self-diagnostic results
can be read and erased quickly.*
L
Data monitor Input/Output data in the ECM can be read.
Diagnostic Test Mode in which CONSULT-III drives some actuators apart from the ECMs and also
Active test
shifts some parameters in a specified range.
M
Function test This mode is used to inform customers when the vehicle requires periodic maintenance.
DTC & SRT confirmation The status of system monitoring tests and the self-diagnosis status/results can be confirmed.
ECU part number ECM part number can be read. N
*: The following emission-related diagnostic information is cleared when the ECM memory is erased.
• Diagnostic trouble codes
• 1st trip diagnostic trouble codes O
• Freeze frame data
• 1st trip freeze frame data
• System readiness test (SRT) codes P
• Test values
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENT PARTS/CONTROL SYSTEMS APPLICATION


Item DATA
WORK ACTIVE DTC
FREEZE MONI-
DTC*1 FRAME TOR
STATUS SUP-
DATA*2
PORT
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) × × ×
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) × × ×
Mass air flow sensor × ×
Engine coolant temperature sensor × × × ×
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 × × × ×
Heated oxygen sensor 2 × × × ×
Wheel sensor × × ×
Accelerator pedal position sensor × ×
Throttle position sensor × × ×

Fuel tank temperature sensor × × ×
EVAP control system pressure sensor × ×
Intake air temperature sensor × × ×
INPUT
Knock sensor ×
Refrigerant pressure sensor ×
Closed throttle position switch (accel-
×
erator pedal position sensor signal)
Air conditioner switch ×
Park/neutral position (PNP) switch × ×
Stop lamp switch × ×
Power steering pressure sensor × ×
Battery voltage ×
Load signal ×
Fuel level sensor × ×
Battery current sensor × ×
ASCD steering switch × ×
ASCD brake switch × ×

A
Item DATA
WORK ACTIVE DTC
FREEZE MONI-
SUPPORT TEST SRT WORK EC
DTC*1 FRAME TOR
STATUS SUP-
DATA*2
PORT
Fuel injector × × C
Power transistor (Ignition timing) × ×
Throttle control motor relay × ×
D
Throttle control motor ×

EVAP canister purge volume control
× × × ×
solenoid valve
E
Air conditioner relay ×
Fuel pump relay × × ×
OUTPUT
Cooling fan relay × × × F

Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater × × ×* 3
Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater × × ×*3

G
EVAP canister vent control valve × × × ×
Intake valve timing control solenoid
× × ×
valve H
VIAS control solenoid valve × × ×
Alternator × ×
Calculated load value × × I
X: Applicable
*1: This item includes 1st trip DTCs.
J
*2: This mode includes 1st trip freeze frame data or freeze frame data. The items appear on CONSULT-III screen in freeze frame data
mode only if a 1st trip DTC or DTC is detected. For details, refer to "Freeze Frame Data and 1st Trip Freeze Frame Data".
*3: Always “CMPLT” is displayed.
K
WORK SUPPORT MODE
Work Item
L
FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE • FUEL PUMP WILL STOP BY TOUCHING “START” DUR- When releasing fuel pressure from
ING IDLING. fuel line M
CRANK A FEW TIMES AFTER ENGINE STALLS.
IDLE AIR VOL LEARN • THE IDLE AIR VOLUME THAT KEEPS THE ENGINE When learning the idle air volume
WITHIN THE SPECIFIED RANGE IS MEMORIZED IN
N
ECM.
SELF-LEARNING CONT • THE COEFFICIENT OF SELF-LEARNING CONTROL When clearing the coefficient of
MIXTURE RATIO RETURNS TO THE ORIGINAL COEF- self-learning control value
FICIENT. O

EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE CLOSE THE EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE IN When detecting EVAP vapor leak
ORDER TO MAKE EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE UNDER THE in the EVAP system
FOLLOWING CONDITIONS.
• IGN SW ON
• ENGINE NOT RUNNING
• AMBIENT TEMPERATURE IS ABOVE 0°C (32°F).
• NO VACUUM AND NO HIGH PRESSURE IN EVAP SYS-
TEM
• FUEL TANK TEMP. IS MORE THAN 0°C (32°F).
• WITHIN 10 MINUTES AFTER STARTING “EVAP SYS-
TEM CLOSE”
• WHEN TRYING TO EXECUTE “EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE”
UNDER THE CONDITION EXCEPT ABOVE, CONSULT-
III WILL DISCONTINUE IT AND DISPLAY APPROPRI-
ATE INSTRUCTION.
NOTE:
WHEN STARTING ENGINE, CONSULT-III MAY DIS-
PLAY “BATTERY VOLTAGE IS LOW. CHARGE BAT-
TERY”, EVEN WHEN USING A CHARGED BATTERY.
VIN REGISTRATION • IN THE MODE, VIN IS REGISTERED IN ECM. When registering VIN in ECM
TARGET IDLE RPM ADJ* • IDLE CONDITION When setting target idle speed
TARGET IGN TIM ADJ* • IDLE CONDITION When adjusting target ignition tim-
ing
*: This function is not necessary in the usual service procedure.
SELF-DIAG RESULTS MODE

Self Diagnostic Item
Regarding items of DTC and 1st trip DTC, refer to EC-915, "DTC Index".
Freeze Frame Data and 1st Trip Freeze Frame Data
Freeze frame data

Description
item*
DIAG TROUBLE
• The engine control component part/control system has a trouble code that is displayed as PXXXX. (Refer
CODE
to EC-915, "DTC Index".)
[PXXXX]
FUEL SYS-B1 • “Fuel injection system status” at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
• One of in the following mode is displayed.
Mode2: Open loop due to detected system malfunction
FUEL SYS-B2 Mode3: Open loop due to driving conditions (power enrichment, deceleration enleanment)
Mode4: Closed loop - using oxygen sensor(s) as feedback for fuel control
Mode5: Open loop - has not yet satisfied condition to go to closed loop
CAL/LD VALUE [%] • The calculated load value at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
COOLANT TEMP [°C]
• The engine coolant temperature at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
or [°F]
L-FUEL TRM-B1 [%] • “Long-term fuel trim” at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
• The long-term fuel trim indicates much more gradual feedback compensation to the base fuel schedule than
L-FUEL TRM-B2 [%] short-term fuel trim.
S-FUEL TRM-B1 [%] • “Short-term fuel trim” at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
• The short-term fuel trim indicates dynamic or instantaneous feedback compensation to the base fuel sched-
S-FUEL TRM-B2 [%] ule.
ENGINE SPEED [rpm] • The engine speed at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
VEHICL SPEED [km/
• The vehicle speed at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
h] or [mph]
ABSOL TH-P/S [%] • The throttle valve opening angle at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
B/FUEL SCHDL
• The base fuel schedule at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
[msec]

Freeze frame data
Description
item* A
INT/A TEMP SE [°C]
• The intake air temperature at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
or [°F]
INT MANI PRES [kPa] EC
• Always a certain value is displayed.
COMBUST CONDI- • These items are displayed but are not applicable to this model.
TION
*: The items are the same as those of 1st trip freeze frame data. C
DATA MONITOR MODE

Monitored Item D
×: Applicable
Monitored item Unit Description Remarks
• Accuracy becomes poor if engine speed E
• Indicates the engine speed computed from the sig- drops below the idle rpm.
ENG SPEED rpm nal of the crankshaft position sensor (POS) and • If the signal is interrupted while the en-
camshaft position sensor (PHASE). gine is running, an abnormal value may
F
be indicated.
• The signal voltage of the mass air flow sensor is value is indicated.
MAS A/F SE-B1 V G
displayed. • When engine is runnning specification
range is indicated in “SPEC”.
• “Base fuel schedule” indicates the fuel injection
• When engine is runnning specification
B/FUEL SCHDL msec pulse width programmed into ECM, prior to any
range is indicated in “SPEC”.
H
learned on board correction.
A/F ALPHA-B1 % • When the engine is stopped, a certain
value is indicated. I
• The mean value of the air-fuel ratio feedback cor- • When engine is runnning specification
A/F ALPHA-B2 % rection factor per cycle is indicated. range is indicated in “SPEC”.
• This data also includes the data for the
air-fuel ratio learning control. J
• When the engine coolant temperature
• The engine coolant temperature (determined by sensor is open or short-circuited, ECM
COOLAN TEMP/S °C or °F the signal voltage of the engine coolant tempera- enters fail-safe mode. The engine cool-
K
ture sensor) is displayed. ant temperature determined by the ECM
is displayed.
A/F SEN1 (B1) V • The A/F signal computed from the input signal of
L
A/F SEN1 (B2) V the Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 is displayed.
HO2S2 (B1) V • The signal voltage of the heated oxygen sensor 2

HO2S2 (B2) V is displayed. M
RICH/ • Display of heated oxygen sensor 2 signal:
HO2S2 MNTR (B1)
LEAN RICH: Means the amount of oxygen after three way
catalyst is relatively small.
RICH/ value is indicated. N
HO2S2 MNTR (B2) LEAN: Means the amount of oxygen after three
LEAN way catalyst is relatively large.
• The vehicle speed computed from the vehicle
km/h or O
VHCL SPEED SE speed signal sent from combination meter is dis-
mph
played.
BATTERY VOLT V • The power supply voltage of ECM is displayed.
ACCEL SEN 1 V • ACCEL SEN 2 signal is converted by P
• The accelerator pedal position sensor signal volt-
ACCEL SEN 2 V age is displayed.
TP SEN 1-B1 V • THRTL SEN 2 signal is converted by
• The throttle position sensor signal voltage is dis-
TP SEN 2-B1 V played.

• The fuel temperature (determined by the signal
FUEL T/TMP SE °C or °F voltage of the fuel tank temperature sensor) is dis-
played.
• The intake air temperature (determined by the sig-
INT/A TEMP SE °C or °F nal voltage of the intake air temperature sensor) is
indicated.
EVAP SYS PRES V
FUEL LEVEL SE V
• Indicates start signal status [ON/OFF] computed by
• After starting the engine, [OFF] is dis-
START SIGNAL ON/OFF the ECM according to the signals of engine speed
played regardless of the starter signal.
and battery voltage.
• Indicates idle position [ON/OFF] computed by ECM
CLSD THL POS ON/OFF according to the accelerator pedal position sensor
signal.
• Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of the air conditioner
AIR COND SIG ON/OFF
switch as determined by the air conditioner signal.
• Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the park/neutral
P/N POSI SW ON/OFF
position (PNP) switch signal.
• [ON/OFF] condition of the power steering system
PW/ST SIGNAL ON/OFF (determined by the signal voltage of the power
steering pressure sensor signal) is indicated.
• Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the electrical
load signal.
ON: Rear window defogger switch is ON and/or
LOAD SIGNAL ON/OFF
lighting switch is in 2nd position.
OFF: Both rear window defogger switch and light-
ing switch are OFF.
• Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from ignition switch
IGNITION SW ON/OFF
signal.
• Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the heater fan
HEATER FAN SW ON/OFF
switch signal.
• Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the stop lamp
BRAKE SW ON/OFF
switch signal.
INJ PULSE-B1 msec • Indicates the actual fuel injection pulse width com- • When the engine is stopped, a certain
INJ PULSE-B2 msec pensated by ECM according to the input signals. computed value is indicated.
• Indicates the ignition timing computed by ECM ac- • When the engine is stopped, a certain
IGN TIMING BTDC
cording to the input signals. value is indicated.
• Calculated load value indicates the value of the
CAL/LD VALUE %
current air flow divided by peak air flow.
• Indicates the mass air flow computed by ECM ac-
MASS AIRFLOW g·m/s cording to the signal voltage of the mass air flow
sensor.
• Indicates the EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve control value computed by the ECM
PURG VOL C/V % according to the input signals.
• The opening becomes larger as the value increas-
es.
INT/V TIM (B1) °CA
• Indicates [°CA] of intake camshaft advanced angle.
INT/V TIM (B2)° °CA
INT/V SOL (B1) % • The control condition of the intake valve timing con-
trol solenoid valve (determined by ECM according
to the input signals) is indicated.
INT/V SOL (B2) % • The advance angle becomes larger as the value in-
creases.

A
• The control condition of the VIAS control solenoid
valve (determined by ECM according to the input
VIAS S/V-1 ON/OFF signals) is indicated.
ON: VIAS control solenoid valve is operating. EC
OFF: VIAS control solenoid valve is not operating.
• The air conditioner relay control condition (deter-
AIR COND RLY ON/OFF mined by ECM according to the input signals) is in-
dicated.
C
• Indicates the fuel pump relay control condition de-
FUEL PUMP RLY ON/OFF
termined by ECM according to the input signals.
D
• The control condition of the EVAP canister vent
control valve (determined by ECM according to the
VENT CONT/V ON/OFF input signals) is indicated.
ON: Closed E
OFF: Open
• Indicates the throttle control motor relay control
THRTL RELAY ON/OFF condition determined by the ECM according to the
input signals.
F
• The control condition of the cooling fan (deter-

mined by ECM according to the input signals) is in-
HI/LOW/ dicated. G
COOLING FAN
OFF HI: High speed operation
LOW: Low speed operation
OFF: Stop
H
HO2S2 HTR (B1) ON/OFF • Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of heated oxygen
sensor 2 heater determined by ECM according to
HO2S2 HTR (B2) ON/OFF the input signals.
I
• Indicates the engine speed computed from the tur-
I/P PULLY SPD rpm
bine revolution sensor signal.
km/h or • Indicates the vehicle speed computed from the rev-
VEHICLE SPEED J
mph olution sensor signal.
• Displays the condition of idle air volume learning
YET: Idle air volume learning has not been per-
YET/
IDL A/V LEARN
CMPLT
formed yet. K
CMPLT: Idle air volume learning has already been
performed successfully.
km or L
TRVL AFTER MIL • Distance traveled while MIL is activated.
mile
A/F S1 HTR (B1) % • Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater control value
computed by ECM according to the input signals.
• The current flow to the heater becomes larger as M
A/F S1 HTR (B2) %
the value increases.
• The signal voltage from the refrigerant pressure
AC PRESS SEN V
sensor is displayed. N
km/h or • The vehicle speed computed from the vehicle
VHCL SPEED SE
mph speed signal sent from TCM is displayed.
km/h or O
SET VHCL SPD • The preset vehicle speed is displayed.
mph
• Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from MAIN switch
MAIN SW ON/OFF
signal. P
• Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from CANCEL switch
CANCEL SW ON/OFF
signal.
• Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from RESUME/AC-
RESUME/ACC SW ON/OFF
CELERATE switch signal.
• Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from SET/COAST
SET SW ON/OFF
switch signal.

• Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from ASCD brake
BRAKE SW1 ON/OFF
switch signal.
• Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of stop lamp switch
BRAKE SW2 ON/OFF
signal.
NON: Vehicle speed is maintained at the ASCD set
NON/ speed.
VHCL SPD CUT
CUT CUT: Vehicle speed increased to excessively high
compared with the ASCD set speed, and ASCD op-
eration is cut off.
NON: Vehicle speed is maintained at the ASCD set
NON/ speed.
LO SPEED CUT
CUT CUT: Vehicle speed decreased to excessively low
compared with the ASCD set speed, and ASCD op-
eration is cut off.
• Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of A/T O/D according
AT OD MONITOR ON/OFF
to the input signal from the TCM.
• Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of A/T O/D cancel
AT OD CANCEL ON/OFF
signal sent from the TCM.
• Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of CRUISE lamp de-
CRUISE LAMP ON/OFF termined by the ECM according to the input sig-
nals.
• Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of SET lamp deter-
SET LAMP ON/OFF
mined by the ECM according to the input signals.
• Indicates the duty ratio of the power generation
ALT DUTY % command value. The ratio is calculated by ECM
based on the battery current sensor signal.
• The signal voltage of battery current sensor is dis-
BAT CUR SEN mV
played.
• The control condition of the power generation volt-
age variable control (determined by ECM accord-
ing to the input signals) is indicated.
ALT DUTY SIG ON/OFF ON: Power generation voltage variable control is
active
OFF: Power generation voltage variable control is
inactive.
A/F ADJ-B1 — • Indicates the correction factor saved in ECM. The
factor is calculated from the difference between the
A/F ADJ-B2 — target air-fuel ratio saved in ECM and the air-fuel
ratio calculated from A/F sensor 1 signal.
NOTE:
Any monitored item that does not match the vehicle being diagnosed is deleted from the display automatically.
ACTIVE TEST MODE

Test Item

FUEL INJEC- non-standard condition If malfunctioning symptom disap-
• Fuel injector
TION • Change the amount of fuel injec- pears, see CHECK ITEM.
tion using CONSULT-III.
non-stantard condition
IGNITION TIM- If malfunctioning symptom disap-
• Timing light: Set • Perform Idle Air Volume Learning.
ING pears, see CHECK ITEM.
• Retard the ignition timing using
CONSULT-III.

A
engine.
• Compression
• A/C switch: OFF
POWER BAL- • Fuel injector
• Shift lever: P or N (A/T), Neutral Engine runs rough or stops. EC
ANCE • Power transistor
(M/T)
• Spark plug
• Cut off each fuel injector signal
• Ignition coil
one at a time using CONSULT-III.
• Ignition switch: ON • Harness and connectors
C
COOLING FAN* • Turn the cooling fan HI, LOW and Cooling fan moves and stops. • Cooling fan motor
OFF using CONSULT-III. • IPDM E/R
• Engine: Return to the original • Harness and connectors D
ENG COOLANT non-standard condition If mulfunctioning symptom disap- • Engine coolant temperature sen-
TEMP • Change the engine coolant tem- pears, see CHECK ITEM. sor
perature using CONSULT-III. • Fuel injector
E
stopped)
FUEL PUMP RE- Fuel pump relay makes the operat- • Harness and connectors
• Turn the fuel pump relay ON and
LAY ing sound. • Fuel pump relay
OFF using CONSULT-III and lis- F
ten to operating sound.
• Turn solenoid valve ON and OFF Solenoid valve makes an operating • Harness and connectors G
VIAS SOL VALVE
with CONSULT-III and listen for sound. • Solenoid valve
operating sound.
• Engine: After warming up, run en-
gine at 1,500 rpm.
H
PURG VOL • Change the EVAP canister purge Engine speed changes according to • Harness and connectors
CONT/V volume control solenoid valve the opening percent. • Solenoid valve
opening percent using CON-
I
SULT-III.
FUEL/T TEMP
• Change the fuel tank temperature using CONSULT-III.
SEN
J
stopped)
VENT CON- Solenoid valve makes an operating • Harness and connectors
• Turn solenoid valve ON and OFF
TROL/V sound. • Solenoid valve
with the CONSULT-III and listen K
to operating sound.
V/T ASSIGN AN- non-standard condition If malfunctioning symptom disap- L
• Intake valve timing control sole-
GLE • Change intake valve timing using pears, see CHECK ITEM.
noid valve
CONSULT-III.
• Engine: Idle • Harness and connectors
ALTERNATOR M
• Change duty ratio using CON- Battery voltage changes. • IPDM E/R
DUTY
SULT-III. • Alternator
*: Leaving cooling fan OFF with CONSULT-III while engine is running may cause the engine to overheat.
N
DTC & SRT CONFIRMATION MODE
SRT STATUS Mode
For details, refer to EC-503, "Emission-related Diagnostic Information". O
SRT Work Support Mode
This mode enables a technician to drive a vehicle to set the SRT while monitoring the SRT status.
P
DTC Work Support Mode

Test mode Test item Corresponding DTC No. Reference page

P0442 EC-681
EVP SML LEAK P0442/P1442*
P0455 EC-717
EVAPORATIVE SYS-
EVP V/S LEAK P0456/P1456* P0456 EC-724
TEM
PURG VOL CN/V P1444 P0443 EC-688
PURG FLOW P0441 P0441 EC-676
A/F SEN1 (B1) P1278/P1279 P0133 EC-606
A/F SEN1 (B1) P1276 P0130 EC-594
A/F SEN1
A/F SEN1 (B2) P1288/P1289 P0153 EC-606
A/F SEN1 (B2) P1286 P0150 EC-594
HO2S2 (B1) P1146 P0138 EC-617
HO2S2 (B1) P1147 P0137 EC-611
HO2S2 (B1) P0139 P0139 EC-625
HO2S2
HO2S2 (B2) P1166 P0158 EC-617
HO2S2 (B2) P1167 P0157 EC-611
HO2S2 (B2) P0159 P0159 EC-625
*: DTC P1442 and P1456 does not apply to D40 models but appears in DTC Work Support Mode screens.
Generic Scan Tool (GST) Function INFOID:0000000004053725
DESCRIPTION
Generic Scan Tool (OBDII scan tool) complying with SAE J1978 has
several functions explained below.
ISO15765-4 is used as the protocol.
The name GST or Generic Scan Tool is used in this service manual.
SEF139P
FUNCTION

This diagnostic service gains access to current emission-related data values, including an-
Service $01 READINESS TESTS
alog inputs and outputs, digital inputs and outputs, and system status information.
This diagnostic service gains access to emission-related data value that were saved by
Service $02 (FREEZE DATA) ECM during the freeze frame. For details, refer to EC-503, "Emission-related Diagnostic
Information" .
This diagnostic service gains access to emission-related power train trouble codes which
Service $03 DTCs
were saved by ECM.
This diagnostic service can clear all emission-related diagnostic information. This in-
cludes:
• Clear number of diagnostic trouble codes (Service $01)
• Clear diagnostic trouble codes (Service $03)
Service $04 CLEAR DIAG INFO
• Clear trouble code for freeze frame data (Service $01)
• Clear freeze frame data (Service $02)
• Reset status of system monitoring test (Service $01)
• Clear on board monitoring test results (Service $06 and $07)
This diagnostic service accesses the results of on board diagnostic monitoring tests of
Service $06 (ON BOARD TESTS)
specific components/systems that are not continuously monitored.

A
This diagnostic service enables the off board test drive to obtain test results for emission-
Service $07 (ON BOARD TESTS) related powertrain components/systems that are continuously monitored during normal
driving conditions.
This diagnostic service can close EVAP system in ignition switch ON position (Engine EC
stopped). When this diagnostic service is performed, the EVAP canister vent control valve
can be closed.
In the following conditions, this diagnostic service cannot function.
• Low ambient temperature
C
Service $08 —
• Low battery voltage
• Engine running
• Ignition switch OFF D
• Low fuel temperature
• Too much pressure is applied to EVAP system
This diagnostic service enables the off-board test device to request specific vehicle infor-
Service $09 (CALIBRATION ID) E
mation such as Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) and Calibration IDs.
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
2. Connect GST to data link connector, which is located under LH
dash panel near the hood opener handle.
G
I
BBIA0538E
3. Turn ignition switch ON. J

4. Enter the program according to instruction on the screen or in
the operation manual.
(*: Regarding GST screens in this section, sample screens are K
shown.)
SEF398S M
5. Perform each diagnostic mode according to each service proce-

dure.
For further information, see the GST Operation Manual of N
the tool maker.
SEF416S

< COMPONENT DIAGNOSIS > [VQ40DE]
COMPONENT DIAGNOSIS
The specification (SP) value indicates the tolerance of the value that is displayed in “SPEC” of “DATA MONI-
TOR” mode of CONSULT-III during normal operation of the Engine Control System. When the value in
“SPEC” of “DATA MONITOR” mode is within the SP value, the Engine Control System is confirmed OK. When
the value “SPEC” of “DATA MONITOR” mode is NOT within the SP value, the Engine Control System may
have one or more malfunctions.
The SP value is used to detect malfunctions that may affect the Engine Control System, but will not illuminate
the MIL.
The SP value will be displayed for the following three items:
• B/FUEL SCHDL (The fuel injection pulse width programmed into ECM prior to any learned on board correc-
tion)
• A/F ALPHA-B1/B2 (The mean value of air-fuel ratio feedback correction factor per cycle)
• MAS A/F SE-B1 (The signal voltage of the mass air flow sensor)
Testing Condition INFOID:0000000004053727
• Vehicle driven distance: More than 5,000 km (3,107 miles)

• Barometric pressure: 98.3 - 104.3 kPa (1.003 - 1.064 kg/cm2, 14.25 - 15.12 psi)
• Atmospheric temperature: 20 - 30°C (68 - 86°F)
• Transmission: Warmed-up*1
• Electrical load: Not applied*2
*1: After the engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature, drive vehicle until “FLUID TEMP SE” (A/T
fluid temperature sensor signal) indicates more than 60°C (140°F).
*2: Rear window defogger switch air conditioner switch, lighting switch are OFF. Steering wheel is straight
ahead.
Inspection Procedure INFOID:0000000004053728
NOTE:
Perform “SPEC” of “DATA MONITOR” mode in maximum scale display.
1. Perform EC-470, "Basic Inspection".
2. Confirm that the testing conditions indicated above are met.
3. Select “B/FUEL SCHDL”, “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2” and “MAS A/F SE-B1” in “SPEC” of “DATA
MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III.
4. Make sure that monitor items are within the SP value.
OVERALL SEQUENCE

EC
JMBIA1468GB

PBIB3214E
DETAILED PROCEDURE
1.CHECK “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2”
1. Start engine.
2. Confirm that the testing conditions are met. Refer to EC-534, "Testing Condition".
3. Select “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2” in “SPEC” of “DATA MONITOR” mode, and make sure that
each indication is within the SP value.
NOTE:

Check “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2” for approximately 1 minute because they may fluctuate. It is NG
if the indication is out of the SP value even a little. A
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 17.
NG (Less than the SP value)>>GO TO 2. EC
C
Select “B/FUEL SCHDL” in “SPEC” of “DATA MONITOR” mode, and make sure that the indication is within
the SP value.
OK or NG
D
OK >> GO TO 4.
3.CHECK “B/FUEL SCHDL” E
the SP value.
OK or NG F
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG (Less than the SP value)>>GO TO 25. G
1. Stop the engine.
2. Disconnect PCV hose, and then plug it. H
3. Start engine.
each indication is within the SP value. I
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 6. J
5.CHANGE ENGINE OIL
1. Stop the engine.
2. Change engine oil. K
NOTE:
This symptom may occur when a large amount of gasoline is mixed with engine oil because of driving
conditions (such as when engine oil temperature does not rise enough since a journey distance is too L
short during winter). The symptom will not be detected after changing engine oil or changing driving con-
ditions.
M
>> INSPECTION END
N
Check fuel pressure. (Refer to EC-943, "Fuel Pressure Check".)
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9. O
NG (Fuel pressure is too high)>>Replace fuel pressure regulator, refer to EC-943, "Fuel Pressure Check".
GO TO 8.
NG (Fuel pressure is too low)>>GO TO 7.
P
- Clogged and bent fuel hose and fuel tube
- Clogged fuel filter
- Fuel pump and its circuit (Refer to EC-858, "Description".)
2. If NG, repair or replace the malfunctioning part. (Refer to EC-534, "Diagnosis Procedure".)

>> GO TO 8.
1. Start engine.
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 9.
2. Make sure that the each cylinder produces a momentary engine speed drop.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.
NG >> GO TO 10.
1. Check the following below.
- Ignition coil and its circuit (Refer to EC-862, "Component Description".)
- Fuel injector and its circuit (Refer to EC-854, "Component Description".)
- Intake air leakage
- Low compression pressure (Refer to EM-205, "Exploded View".)
2. If NG, repair or replace the malfunctioning part.
If OK, replace fuel injector. (It may be caused by leakage from fuel injector or clogging.)
>> GO TO 11.
1. Start engine.
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 12.
12.CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 FUNCTION
Perform all DTC Confirmation Procedure related with A/F sensor 1.
• For DTC P0130, P0150, refer to EC-594, "DTC Confirmation Procedure".
• For DTC P2A00, P2A03, refer to EC-836, "DTC Confirmation Procedure".
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 15.
NG >> GO TO 13.
13.CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT
Perform Diagnostic Procedure according to corresponding DTC.
>> GO TO 14.
1. Start engine.
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 15. A
15.DISCONNECT AND RECONNECT ECM HARNESS CONNECTOR
1. Stop the engine.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check pin terminal and connector for damage, and then reconnect EC
it.
C
>> GO TO 16.
1. Start engine. D
OK or NG E
17.CHECK “B/FUEL SCHDL” F
the SP value.
OK or NG G
NG (Less than the SP value)>>GO TO 25. H

1. Check for the cause of large engine friction. Refer to the following. I
- Engine oil level is too high
- Engine oil viscosity
- Belt tension of power steering, alternator, A/C compressor, etc. is excessive
- Noise from engine J
- Noise from transmission, etc.
2. Check for the cause of insufficient combustion. Refer to the following.
- Valve clearance malfunction K
- Intake valve timing control function malfunction
- Camshaft sprocket installation malfunction, etc.
L
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning part, and then GO TO 30.
M
• Uneven dirt of air cleaner element N
• Improper specification of intake air system
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 21. O
20.CHECK “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2”, AND “B/FUEL SCHDL”
P
Select “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2”, and “B/FUEL SCHDL” in “SPEC” of “DATA MONITOR” mode, and
make sure that each indication is within the SP value.
OK or NG
NG (“B/FUEL SCHDL” is more, “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2” are less than the SP value)>>GO TO 21.
21.DISCONNECT AND RECONNECT MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR HARNESS CONNECTOR
1. Stop the engine.
2. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. Check pin terminal and connector for damage and
then reconnect it again.
>> GO TO 22.
1. Start engine.
OK or NG
OK >> 1. Detect malfunctioning part of mass air flow sensor circuit and repair it. Refer to EC-567.
2. GO TO 29.
NG >> GO TO 23.
Select “MAS A/F SE-B1” in “SPEC” of “DATA MONITOR” mode, and make sure that the indication is within
the SP value.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 24.
NG (More than the SP value)>>Replace mass air flow sensor, and then GO TO 29.
24.REPLACE ECM
1. Replace ECM.
>> GO TO 29.
• Malfunctioning seal in air cleaner element
• Uneven dirt in air cleaner element
• Improper specification in intake air system
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 27.
the SP value.
OK or NG
NG (Less than the SP value)>>GO TO 27.
Select “MAS A/F SE-B1” in “SPEC” of “DATA MONITOR” mode, and make sure that the indication is within
the SP value.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 28.
NG (Less than the SP value)>>Replace mass air flow sensor, and then GO TO 30.
Check for the cause of air leak after the mass air flow sensor. Refer to the following.
• Disconnection, looseness, and cracks in air duct A
• Looseness of oil filler cap
• Disconnection of oil level gauge
• Open stuck, breakage, hose disconnection, or cracks of PCV valve
EC
• Disconnection or cracks in EVAP purge hose, stick open canister purge volume control solenoid valve
• Malfunctioning seal in rocker cover gasket
• Disconnection, looseness, or cracks in hoses, such as a vacuum hose, connecting to intake air system parts
• Malfunctioning seal in intake air system, etc. C
>> GO TO 30.
D
29.CHECK “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2”, AND “B/FUEL SCHDL”
Select “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2”, and “B/FUEL SCHDL” in “SPEC” of “DATA MONITOR” mode, and
make sure that each indication is within the SP value. E
OK or NG
NG >> Detect malfunctioning part according to EC-932, "Symptom Matrix Chart". F
Select “B/FUEL SCHDL” in “SPEC” of “DATA MONITOR” mode, and then make sure that the indication is
within the SP value. G
OK or NG
NG >> Detect malfunctioning part according to EC-932, "Symptom Matrix Chart". H

1.INSPECTION START
Start engine.
Is engine running?
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 8.
No >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.
MBIB0015E

• Fuse block (J/B) connector M4
• 10A fuse (No.1)
• Harness for open or short between ECM and fuse

BBIA0539E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK ECM GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-I

OK or NG A
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.

C

7.CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II
1. Reconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check voltage between IPDM E/R connector E119 terminal 3
F
OK or NG
OK >> Go to .EC-862, "Diagnosis Procedure" G
NG >> GO TO 8.
H
PBIB2569E
8.CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III

I
2. Turn ignition switch ON and then OFF.
with CONSULT-III or tester. J
Voltage: After turning ignition switch OFF, battery

voltage will exist for a few seconds, then K
drop approximately 0V.
OK or NG
L
OK >> GO TO 13.
NG (Battery voltage does not exist.)>>GO TO 9.
NG (Battery voltage exists for more than a few seconds.)>>GO TO PBIB1630E
11. M
9.CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-IV
Check voltage between ECM terminal 111 and ground with CON-
N
SULT-III or tester.

O
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 11.
P
PBIB1191E
10.CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-V


3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 119, 120 and IPDM E/R terminal 4.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16.
11.CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-VI

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.
12.CHECK 20A FUSE
1. Disconnect 20 A fuse (No.53) from IPDM E/R.
2. Check 20 A fuse.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16.
Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-545, "Ground Inspection".
BBIA0539E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 14.
14.CHECK ECM GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-II

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16.
NG >> GO TO 15.
A
16.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT EC
OK or NG
OK >> Replace IPDM E/R. C
Ground Inspection INFOID:0000000004053731
D
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground
connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can
become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. E
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drasti-
cally affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even
when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: F
• Remove the ground bolt or screw.
• Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
• Clean as required to assure good contact. G
• Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
• Inspect for “add-on” accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
• If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the
H
wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eye-
let make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to GI-52, "Circuit Inspection".
I
PBIB1870E N

Trouble diagnosis
name
• When ECM is not transmitting or receiving • CAN communication line between TCM
U0101*1 Lost communication CAN communication signal of OBD (emission- and ECM
0101*1 with TCM related diagnosis) with TCM for 2 seconds or • CAN communication line is open or short-
more. ed
*1: This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic (A/T)


A
D
The MIL will not illuminate for this diagnosis.
E
Trouble diagnosis
name
• When ECM is not transmitting or receiving
U1001 CAN communication CAN communication signal other than OBD F
(CAN communication line is open or
1001 line (emission-related diagnosis) for 2 seconds or
shorted)
more.
G

H
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004332441 I

J

P0011, P0021 IVT CONTROL
Trouble diagnosis
DTC No. Detecting condition Possible cause
name
P0011 • Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
0011 • Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
(Bank 1) • Intake valve timing control solenoid valve
Intake valve timing There is a gap between angle of target and • Accumulation of debris to the signal pick-up
P0021 control performance phase-control angle degree. portion of the camshaft
0021 • Timing chain installation
(Bank 2) • Foreign matter caught in the oil groove for in-
take valve timing control
FAIL-SAFE MODE

Intake valve timing control The signal is not energized to the solenoid valve and the valve control does not function.
CAUTION:
Always drive at a safe speed.
NOTE:
• If DTC P0011 or P0021 is displayed with DTC P0075 or P0081, first perform trouble diagnosis for DTC
P0075 or P0081. Refer to EC-558.
least 10 seconds before conducting the next step.
1. Turn ignition swich OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
2. Turn ignition swich ON.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is between 10 V and 16 V at
idle.
WITH CONSULT-III
3. Maintain the following conditions for at least 6 consecutive seconds. Hold the accelerator pedal as steady
as possible.

B/FUEL SCHDL More than 3.5 msec
Selector lever
4. Stop vehicle with engine running and let engine idle for 10 seconds.
6. If the 1st trip DTC is detected, go toEC-549, "Diagnosis Procedure".
If the 1st trip DTC is not detected, go to next step.

ENG SPEED 1,700 - 3,175 rpm (A constant rotation is maintained.) A

Selector lever 1st or 2nd position
EC
Driving vehicle uphill
Driving location uphill (Increased engine load will help maintain the driving
conditions required for this test.)
C
9. If the 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-549, "Diagnosis Procedure".
WITH GST D
E
1.CHECK OIL PRESSURE WARNING LAMP
1. Start engine. F
2. Check oil pressure warning lamp and confirm it is not illumi-
nated.
OK or NG
G
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Go to LU-22, "Changing Engine Oil".
H
I
PBIA8559J

Refer to EC-550, "Component Inspection". J
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Replace malfunctioning intake valve timing control solenoid valve. K

Refer to EC-665, "Component Inspection". L
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Replace crankshaft position sensor (POS). M
N
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Replace malfunctioning camshaft position sensor (PHASE).
O
P

• Accumulation of debris on the signal plate of camshaft rear end
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
SEC905C

Check service records for any recent repairs that may cause timing chain misalignment.
Are there any service records that may cause timing chain misalignment?
Yes or No
Yes >> Check timing chain installation. Refer to EM-174, "Removal and Installation".
No >> GO TO 7.
7.CHECK LUBRICATION CIRCUIT
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Clean lubrication line.
>> INSPECTION END


1. Disconnect intake valve timing control solenoid valve harness connector.
valve as follows.
Terminal Resistance
1 and 2 7.0 - 7.7Ω at 20°C (68°F)
∞Ω
1 or 2 and ground

valve terminals and then interrupt it. Check that the plunger
CAUTION:
NOTE:
PBIB2275E

P0031, P0032, P0051, P0052 A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER
A

Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) C
Engine speed Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater
heater control
The ECM performs ON/OFF duty control of the A/F sensor 1 heater corresponding to the engine operating D
condition to keep the temperature of A/F sensor 1 element within the specified range.
E
F
P0031
0031 The current amperage in the A/F sensor 1 heater • Harness or connectors
(Bank 1) Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor circuit is out of the normal range. (The A/F sensor 1 heater circuit is
P0051 1 heater control circuit low (An excessively low voltage signal is sent to ECM open or shorted.) G
0051 through the A/F sensor 1 heater.) • A/F sensor 1 heater
(Bank 2)
P0032 H
0032 The current amperage in the A/F sensor 1 heater • Harness or connectors
(Bank 1) Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor
circuit is out of the normal range. (The A/F sensor 1 heater circuit is
1 heater control circuit
P0052 (An excessively high voltage signal is sent to ECM shorted.)
high
through the A/F sensor 1 heater.) • A/F sensor 1 heater
I
0052
(Bank 2)
DTC Confirmation Procedure INFOID:0000000004053746 J
NOTE:
least 10 seconds before conducting the next step. K
L
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is between 10.5V and 16V at M
idle.

P

BBIA0539E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Repair or Replace ground connections.
1. Disconnect air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 harness connector.
BBIA0544E

3. Check voltage between air fuel ratio sensor 1 terminal 4 and

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.
PBIB3308E

• 15 A fuse (No.54)
• Harness for open or short between air fuel ratio sensor 1 and fuse

4.CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 HEATER OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 2 (bank 1) or 24, 43 (bank 2) and air fuel ratio (A/F) sen-
sor 1 terminal 3.

4. Also check harness for short to ground or short to power.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. A
5.CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 HEATER
EC
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6. C
NG >> GO TO 7.
Perform GI-49, "Intermittent Incident". D
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Repair or replace. E

Replace malfunctioning air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1. F
CAUTION:
• Before installing new air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Heated Oxygen G
Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
H
>> INSPECTION END
I
AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 HEATER
1. Check resistance between A/F sensor 1 terminals as follows.
J
3 and 4 1.80 - 2.44 Ω [at 25°C (77°F)]
K
3 and 1, 2 ∞Ω
4 and 1, 2 (Continuity should not exist)
2. If NG, replace air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1. L

CAUTION:
• Discard any A/F sensor which has been dropped from a
height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such M
as a concrete floor; use a new one.
• Before installing new A/F sensor, clean exhaust system
threads using Heated Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-
43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant. N
P
PBIB3309E

P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER
P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

Engine speed
Heated oxygen sensor 2
Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature heater control
The ECM performs ON/OFF control of the heated oxygen sensor 2 heater corresponding to the engine speed,
amount of intake air and engine coolant temperature.
OPERATION
Engine speed rpm Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater

Above 3,600 OFF
Below 3,600 rpm after the following conditions are met.
• Engine: After warming up
ON
• Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1
minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load
Trouble diagnosis
name
P0037
0037 The current amperage in the heated oxygen sen- • Harness or connectors
(Bank 1) Heated oxygen
sor 2 heater circuit is out of the normal range. (The heated oxygen sensor 2 heater circuit is
sensor 2 heater
P0057 (An excessively low voltage signal is sent to ECM open or shorted.)
control circuit low
0057 through the heated oxygen sensor 2 heater.) • Heater oxygen sensor 2 heater
(Bank 2)
P0038
0038 The current amperage in the heated oxygen sen-
(Bank 1) Heated oxygen sor 2 heater circuit is out of the normal range.
(The heated oxygen sensor 2 heater circuit is
sensor 2 heater (An excessively high voltage signal is sent to
P0058 shorted.)
control circuit high ECM through the heated oxygen sensor 2 heat-
0058 • Heater oxygen sensor 2 heater
er.)
(Bank 2)
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conduct-
ing the next step.
TESTING CONDITION:
idle.
WITH CONSULT-III
P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER
5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. A
6. Start the engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 rpm and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under
no load.
7. Let engine idle for 1 minute. EC
C
WITH GST
D

E
H
BBIA0539E
OK or NG
I
OK >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK HO2S2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT J
BBIA0540E

P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER
3. Check voltage between HO2S2 terminal 3 and ground with

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.
PBIB0112E

• 15 A fuse (No.54)
• Harness for open or short between heated oxygen sensor 2 and fuse

4.CHECK HO2S2 OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal and HO2S2 terminal as follows.
Terminals
DTC Bank
ECM Sensor
P0037, P0038 25 2 1
P0057, P0058 6 2 2

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 HEATER
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 2.
>> INSPECTION END

HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 HEATER

P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER
1. Check resistance between HO2S2 terminals as follows.
A
2 and 3 9.9 - 13.3 Ω at 25°C (77°F)
EC
1 and 2, 3, 4 ∞Ω
4 and 1, 2, 3 (Continuity should not exist)
2. If NG, replace heated oxygen sensor 2. C

CAUTION:
• Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped
from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface D
such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
• Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system
threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18
or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant. E
G
SEF249Y

P0075, P0081 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Intake valve timing control solenoid valve is activated by ON/OFF

pulse duty (ratio) signals from the ECM.
The intake valve timing control solenoid valve changes the oil
amount and direction of flow through intake valve timing control unit
or stops oil flow.
The longer pulse width advances valve angle.
The shorter pulse width retards valve angle.
When ON and OFF pulse widths become equal, the solenoid valve
stops oil pressure flow to fix the intake valve angle at the control
position.
PBIB1842E
P0075
0075 • Harness or connectors
(Bank 1) An improper voltage is sent to the ECM
Intake valve timing control (Intake valve timing control solenoid valve
through intake valve timing control solenoid
P0081 solenoid valve circuit circuit is open or shorted.)
valve.
0081 • Intake valve timing control solenoid valve
(Bank 2)
1. If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before con-
ducting the next step.
b. Turn ignition switch ON.
c. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
1.CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
BBIA0553E

4. Check voltage between intake valve timing control solenoid
valve terminal 2 and ground with CONSULT-III or tester. A

OK or NG EC
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 2.
C
PBIB0192E

E
• Harness connectors F26, F225 (bank 1)
• Harness for open or short between intake valve timing control solenoid valve and IPDM E/R
• Harness for open or short between intake valve timing control solenoid valve and ECM
F
3.CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN G
AND SHORT
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. H
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 11 (bank 1) or 10 (bank 2) and intake valve timing con-
trol solenoid valve terminal 1. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist. I

OK or NG J
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.
4.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART K
• Harness connectors F26, F225 (bank 1)
• Harness for open and short between ECM and intake valve timing control solenoid valve L
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
M
OK or NG N
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Replace malfunctioning intake valve timing control solenoid valve.
6.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT O

P
>> INSPECTION END


valve as follows.
Terminal Resistance
1 and 2 7.0 - 7.7Ω at 20°C (68°F)
∞Ω
1 or 2 and ground

valve terminals and then interrupt it. Check that the plunger
CAUTION:
NOTE:
PBIB2275E

P0101 MAF SENSOR
P0101 MAF SENSOR
A
reduced as the intake air flows around it. The greater air flow, the C
greater the heat loss.
PBIA9559J E
F
(The sensor circuit is open or G
shorted.)
A high voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM
A) • Mass air flow sensor
under light load driving condition.
• EVAP control system pressure
sensor
H
P0101 Mass air flow sensor cir-
0101 cuit range/performance • Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or I
shorted.)
A low voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM un- • Intake air leaks
B)
der heavy load driving condition. • Mass air flow sensor
• EVAP control system pressure J
sensor
K

If the DTC cannot be confirmed, perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B. L
NOTE:
ing the next step.
M
NOTE:
If engine will not start or stops soon, wait at least 10 seconds with engine stopped (Ignition switch ON) instead N
of running engine at idle speed.
2. Turn ignition switch ON. O
With CONSULT-III
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. P
2. Run engine for at least 10 seconds at idle speed.
With GST
P0101 MAF SENSOR
CAUTION:
With CONSULT-III
If engine cannot be started, go to EC-563, "Diagnosis Procedure".
3. Check the voltage of “MAS A/F SE-B1” with “DATA MONITOR”.
4. Increases engine speed to about 4,000 rpm.
5. Monitor the linear voltage rise in response to engine speed
increases.
PBIB3457E
ENG SPEED More than 2,000 rpm

THRTL SEN 1 More than 1.5 V
THRTL SEN 2 More than 1.5 V
Driving vehicle uphill (Increased engine load) will help
Driving location
maintain the driving conditions required for this test.

Use this procedure to check the overall function of the mass air flow sensor circuit. During this check, a 1st trip
DTC might not be confirmed.
With GST

P0101 MAF SENSOR
3. Check the mass air flow sensor signal with Service $01.
4. Check for linear mass air flow sensor signal value rise in A
response to increases to about 4,000 rpm in engine speed.
EC
SEF534P
D
1.INSPECTION START E
Which malfunction (A or B) is duplicated?
A or B
A >> GO TO 3. F
B >> GO TO 2.
G
• Air duct
• Vacuum hoses
• Intake air passage between air duct and intake manifold H
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Reconnect the parts. I
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. J
M
BBIA0539E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. N
1. Disconnect mass air flow (MAF) sensor harness connector. O
BBIA0541E

P0101 MAF SENSOR


OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.
PBIB1168E



OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Replace intake air temperature sensor.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.

P0101 MAF SENSOR
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11. A
EC
>> INSPECTION END C

MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR D
With CONSULT-III
1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. E
4. Select “MAS A/F SE-B1” and check indication under the following conditions. F

G
0.9 - 1.2
H
1.5 - 1.8
I
a. Check for the cause of uneven air flow through mass air flow sensor. Refer to following. J
• Uneven dirt of air cleaner element K
L
8. Perform step 2 to 4 again. M
Without CONSULT-III
N
3. Check voltage between ECM terminal 51 (Mass air flow sensor O
signal) and ground.
Condition Voltage V
P
0.9 - 1.2
1.5 - 1.8

P0101 MAF SENSOR

A
reduced as the intake air flows around it. The more air, the greater C
the heat loss.
Therefore, the electric current is supplied to hot wire is changed to
PBIA9559J E
Trouble diagnosis
name
G
P0102 Mass air flow sensor An excessively low voltage from the sensor is sent (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
0102 circuit low input to ECM. • Intake air leaks
P0103 Mass air flow sensor An excessively high voltage from the sensor is
0103 circuit high input sent to ECM.
• Mass air flow sensor I
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL illuminates.
J
Mass air flow sensor circuit Engine speed will not rise more than 2,400 rpm due to the fuel cut.
K
NOTE: L
ing the next step.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. M
PROCEDURE FOR DTC P0102 N
2. Check DTC.
3. If DTC is detected, go to EC-568, "Diagnosis Procedure". O
2. Check DTC. P
If DTC is not detected, go to next step.
5. Check DTC.

1.INSPECTION START
Which malfunction (P0102 or P0103) is duplicated?
P0102 or P0103
P0102 >> GO TO 2.
P0103 >> GO TO 3.
• Air duct
• Vacuum hoses
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
BBIA0539E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
BBIA0541E


OK or NG EC
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.
C
PBIB1168E

E
F

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. J
K

L
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8. M
Refer to EC-565, "Component Inspection". N
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Replace mass air flow sensor. O

>> INSPECTION END


With CONSULT-III

0.9 - 1.2
1.5 - 1.8
Without CONSULT-III
signal) and ground.
Condition Voltage V
0.9 - 1.2
1.5 - 1.8

A
EC

The intake air temperature sensor is built-into the mass air flow sen-
sor (1). The sensor detects intake air temperature and transmits a
signal to the ECM.
decreases in response to the rise in temperature.
PBIA9559J
<Reference data>

Voltage* V Resistance kΩ
°C (°F)
25 (77) 3.3 1.800 - 2.200
80 (176) 1.2 0.283 - 0.359
CAUTION:

Trouble diagnosis
name
Intake air tempera-
P0112 An excessively low voltage from the sensor is
ture sensor circuit
0112 sent to ECM. • Harness or connectors
low input
Intake air tempera- • Intake air temperature sensor
P0113 An excessively high voltage from the sensor is
ture sensor circuit
0113 sent to ECM.
high input


A
EC
BBIA0539E
OK or NG D
OK >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT E
1. Disconnect mass air flow sensor (intake air temperature sensor

is built-in) harness connector.
BBIA0541E
I
3. Check voltage between mass air flow sensor terminal 5 and
ground.
J
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3. K
NG >> Repair harness or connectors.
L
PBIB1169E
3.CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
M
3. Check harness continuity between mass air flow sensor terminal 6 and ECM terminal 67.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. P
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.


>> INSPECTION END



25 (77) 1.800 - 2.200
sensor).
PBIA9559J
SEF012P

P0116 ECT SENSOR
P0116 ECT SENSOR
A
The engine coolant temperature sensor is used to detect the engine EC

the change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the ther- C
SEF594K E
<Reference data>
F
Engine coolant
temperature °C (°F)]
−10 (14) 4.4 7.0 - 11.4 G
20 (68) 3.5 2.1 - 2.9
50 (122) 2.2 0.68 - 1.00
H
90 (194) 0.9 0.236 - 0.260
SEF012P
CAUTION: I
J
K
Engine coolant temperature signal from engine
Engine coolant tempera- • Harness or connectors
P0116 coolant temperature sensor does not fluctuate,
0116
ture sensor circuit range/
even when some time has passed after starting
(High or low resistance in the circuit) L
performance • Engine coolant temperature sensor
the engine with pre-warming up condition.
NOTE:
• If DTC P0116 is displayed with P0117 or P0118, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0117,
P0118. Refer to EC-579, "DTC Confirmation Procedure". N
• If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before con-
1. Turn ignition swich OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. O
P
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, never fill with the fuel.
2. Rev engine up to 2,000 rpm for more than10 minutes.
3. Move the vehicle to a cool place, then stop engine and turn ignition switch OFF.
4. Check resistance between “fuel level sensor and fuel pump” terminals 3 and 4.
5. Soak the vehicle until the resistance between “fuel level sensor and fuel pump” terminals 3 and 4
becomes 0.5 kΩ higher than the value measured before soaking.
P0116 ECT SENSOR
CAUTION:
Never turn ignition switch ON during the soaking time.
NOTE:
Soak time changes depending on ambient air temperature. It may take several hours.

2. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body.
BBIA0539E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
Refer to GI-46, "How to Check Terminal" and GI-49, "Intermittent Incident".
For Wiring Diagram, refer to EC-893, "Wiring Diagram - ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM -".
>> INSPECTION END


PBIB2005E

P0116 ECT SENSOR
Engine coolant temperature °C (°F)] Resistance (kΩ A

20 (68) 2.1 - 2.9
50 (122) 0.68 - 1.00
EC
90 (194) 0.236 - 0.260
C
SEF012P


SEF594K
<Reference data>

°C (°F)
-10 (14) 4.4 7.0 - 11.4
20 (68) 3.5 2.1 - 2.9
50 (122) 2.2 0.68 - 1.00
90 (194) 0.9 0.236 - 0.260
SEF012P
CAUTION:
Trouble Diagnosis
DTC No. DTC Detecting Condition Possible Cause
Name
Engine coolant tem-
perature sensor cir-
0117 sent to ECM. • Harness or connectors
cuit low input
Engine coolant tem- • Engine coolant temperature sensor
P0118 An excessively high voltage from the sensor is
perature sensor cir-
0118 sent to ECM.
cuit high input
FAIL-SAFE MODE

Detected items Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode A

Engine coolant temperature will be determined by ECM based on the following condition.
Engine coolant temperature decided EC
Condition
(CONSULT-III display)
Engine coolant temper- Just as ignition switch is turned ON or START 40°C (104°F)
ature sensor circuit Approx. 4 minutes or more after engine starting 80°C (176°F) C
40 - 80°C (104 - 176°F)
When the fail-safe system for engine coolant temperature sensor is activated, the cooling fan operates while D
engine is running.
DTC Confirmation Procedure INFOID:0000000004053777 E
F
c. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. G
3. Check DTC.
4. If DTC is detected, go to EC-579, "Diagnosis Procedure". H
I
2. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-545, "Ground Inspection". J
BBIA0539E
M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. N
2.CHECK ECT SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor harness
connector. O
BBIA0542E

3. Check voltage between ECT sensor terminal 1 and ground with
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power
in harness or connectors.
PBIB0080E
3.CHECK ECT SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

3. Check harness continuity between ECT sensor terminal 2 and ECM terminal 67.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
>> INSPECTION END


PBIB2005E

<Reference data>
A
Engine coolant temperature °C (°F) Resistance kΩ
20 (68) 2.1 - 2.9
EC
50 (122) 0.68 - 1.00
90 (194) 0.236 - 0.260
2. If NG, replace engine coolant temperature sensor. C
SEF012P


a kind of potentiometer which transform the throttle valve position
into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM.The ECM
nals and controls the throttle valve opening angle in response to
driving conditions via the throttle control motor.
PBIB0145E
P0122 Throttle position sensor An excessively low voltage from the TP sensor • Harness or connectors
0122 2 circuit low input 2 is sent to ECM. (The TP sensor 2 circuit is open or short-
ed.)
(The APP sensor 2 circuit is shorted.)
P0123 Throttle position sensor An excessively high voltage from the TP sensor • Electric throttle control actuator
0123 2 circuit high input 2 is sent to ECM. (TP sensor 2)
(APP sensor 2)
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL illuminates.

degrees.
NOTE:
ing the next step.
TESTING CONDITION:
2. Check DTC.


A
EC
BBIA0539E
OK or NG D
OK >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I E

F
BBIA0543E
I
J
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7. K
NG >> GO TO 3.
L
PBIB2604E

M

OK or NG O
OK >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III P
ECM terminal Sensor terminal Reference Wiring Diagram

EC-893

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK APP SENSOR
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> GO TO 6.
>> INSPECTION END

7.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
8.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> GO TO 10.
>> INSPECTION END


>> INSPECTION END
A

EC
3. Turn ignition switch ON. C
4. Set selector lever to D position (A/T), 1st position (M/T)
5. Check voltage between ECM terminals 50 (TP sensor 1 signal), 69 (TP sensor 2 signal) and ground under
the following conditions. D

Fully released More than 0.36V E
50

F
step. G
7. Perform EC-475, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". PBIB1170E

H

P0125 ECT SENSOR
P0125 ECT SENSOR

SEF594K
<Reference data>
Engine coolant
temperature °C (°F)
-10 (14) 4.4 7.0 - 11.4
20 (68) 3.5 2.1 - 2.9
50 (122) 2.2 0.68 - 1.00
90 (194) 0.9 0.236 - 0.260
SEF012P
CAUTION:
NOTE:
If DTC P0125 is displayed with P0116, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0116. Refer to EC-
575, "Component Description".
NOTE:
If DTC P0125 is displayed with P0117 or P0118, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0117 or
P0118. Refer to EC-578, "Component Description".
• Voltage sent to ECM from the sensor is not
Insufficient engine cool- practical, even when some time has passed
P0125 (High resistance in the circuit)
ant temperature for after starting the engine.
0125 • Engine coolant temperature sensor
closed loop fuel control • Engine coolant temperature is insufficient for
• Thermostat
closed loop fuel control.
CAUTION:
Never overheat engine.
NOTE:
ing the next step.
WITH CONSULT-III
P0125 ECT SENSOR
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III. A
3. Check that “COOLAN TEMP/S” is above 20°C (68°F).
If the temperature is above 20°C (68°F), the test result will be OK.
If the temperature is below 20°C (68°F), go to following step.
EC
4. Start engine and run it for 65 minutes at idle speed.
If “COOLAN TEMP/S” increases to more than 20°C (68°F) within 65 minutes, stop engine because
the test result will be OK.
5. Check 1st trip DTC. C
WITH GST
E
2. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-545, "Ground Inspection". F
BBIA0539E
I
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. J
K
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
L
3.CHECK THERMOSTAT OPERATION
When the engine is cold [lower than 70°C (158°F)] condition, grasp lower radiator hose and confirm that the
engine coolant does not flow. M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair or replace thermostat. Refer to CO-55, "Removal and Installation". N
O
>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection INFOID:0000000004053789 P

P0125 ECT SENSOR
PBIB2005E
<Reference data>

20 (68) 2.1 - 2.9
50 (122) 0.68 - 1.00
90 (194) 0.236 - 0.260
SEF012P

P0127 IAT SENSOR
P0127 IAT SENSOR
A
The intake air temperature sensor is built into mass air flow sensor EC
(1). The sensor detects intake air temperature and transmits a signal
to the ECM.
the change in temperature. Electrical resistance of the thermistor C
decreases in response to the temperature rise.
PBIA9559J E
<Reference data>
F
°C (°F)
25 (77) 3.3 1.800 - 2.200 G
80 (176) 1.2 0.283 - 0.359
temperature sensor) and ground. H
CAUTION:

Rationally incorrect voltage from the sensor is • Harness or connectors K
P0127 Intake air temperature
sent to ECM, compared with the voltage signal (The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
0127 too high
from engine coolant temperature sensor. • Intake air temperature sensor
L
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conduct- M
ing the next step.
2. Turn ignition switch ON. N
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. O
TESTING CONDITION:
This test may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted in the shop or by driving the vehicle. If a road
test is expected to be easier, it is unnecessary to lift the vehicle. P
WITH CONSULT-III
1. Wait until engine coolant temperature is less than 90°C (194°F)
a. Turn ignition switch ON.
b. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III.
c. Check the engine coolant temperature.

P0127 IAT SENSOR
d. If the engine coolant temperature is not less than 90°C (194°F), turn ignition switch OFF and cool down
engine.
• Perform the following steps before engine coolant temperature is above 90°C (194°F).
4. Start engine.
5. Hold vehicle speed at more than 70 km/h (43 MPH) for 100 consecutive seconds.
WITH GST

BBIA0539E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
>> INSPECTION END


1. Check resistance between intake air temperature sensor (1) ter-
minals 5 and 6 under the following conditions.

25 (77) 1.800 - 2.200
sensor).
PBIA9559J

P0127 IAT SENSOR
EC
SEF012P

NOTE:
If DTC P0128 is displayed with DTC P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304, P0305 or P0306, first perform
the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304, P0305, P0306. Refer to EC-653,
"DTC Confirmation Procedure".
Engine coolant temperature has not risen enough to open the thermostat even though the engine has run long
enough.
This is due to a leak in the seal or the thermostat being stuck open.
The engine coolant temperature does not • Thermostat
P0128
Thermostat function reach to specified temperature even though • Leakage from sealing portion of thermostat
0128
the engine has run long enough. • Engine coolant temperature sensor
NOTE:
ing the next test.
WITH CONSULT-III
TESTING CONDITION:
• For best results, perform at ambient temperature of –10°C (14°F) or higher.
• For best results, perform at engine coolant temperature of –10°C (14°F) to 56°C (133°F).
• Before performing the following procedure, do not add fuel.
1. Turn A/C switch OFF.
2. Turn blower fan switch OFF.
4. Select “COOLAN TEMP/S” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III.
5. Check the indication of “COOLAN TEMP/S”.
If it is below 56°C (133°F), go to following step.
If it is above 56°C (133°F), cool down the engine to less than 56°C (133°F). Then go to next steps.
6. Start engine and wait at idle for at least 10 minutes under the following conditions.
VHCL SPEED SE More than 56 km/h (35MPH)

CAUTION:
NOTE:
If “COOLAN TEMP/S” increases to more than 71°C (160°F) within 30 minutes, turn ignition switch
OFF because the test result will be OK.
WITH GST

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Replace engine coolant temperature sensor. A
2.CHECK THERMOSTAT
Refer to CO-55, "Removal and Installation".
EC
OK or NG
C
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR D

E
G
PBIB2005E
H
<Reference data>

I
20 (68) 2.1 - 2.9
50 (122) 0.68 - 1.00
90 (194) 0.236 - 0.260 J
K
SEF012P

P0130, P0150 A/F SENSOR 1
The air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 is a planar one-cell limit current sen-
sor. The sensor element of the A/F sensor 1 is composed an elec-
trode layer, which transports ions. It has a heater in the element.
outputs a clear, continuous signal throughout a wide range.
The exhaust gas components diffuse through the diffusion layer at
the sensor cell. An electrode layer is applied voltage, and this cur-
rent relative oxygen density in lean. Also this current relative hydro-
carbon density in rich.
Therefore, the A/F sensor 1 is able to indicate air fuel ratio by this PBIB3353E
electrode layer of current. In addition, a heater is integrated in the
sensor to ensure the required operating temperature of about 800°C
(1,472°F).
PBIB3354E
To judge the malfunctions, the diagnosis checks that the A/F signal computed by ECM from the air fuel ratio
(A/F) sensor 1 signal fluctuates according to fuel feedback control.
P0130 The A/F signal computed by ECM from the A/F
0130 A) sensor 1 signal is constantly in a range other • Harness or connectors
(Bank 1) Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 than approx. 2.2V. (The A/F sensor 1 circuit is open
P0150 circuit or shorted.)
The A/F signal computed by ECM from the A/F • Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
0150 B)
sensor 1 signal is constantly approx. 2.2V.
(Bank 2)

If the DTC cannot be confirmed, perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B.
NOTE:
ing the next step.
TESTING CONDITION:

CAUTION: A
With CONSULT-III
EC
2. Select “A/F SEN1 (B1)” or “A/F SEN1 (B2)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III.
3. Check “A/F SEN1 (B1)” or “A/F SEN1 (B2)” indication.
If the indication is constantly approx. 2.2V and does not fluctuates, go to EC-595, "Diagnosis Procedure". C
If the indication fluctuate around 2.2V, go to next step.
4. Select “A/F SEN1 (B1) P1276” (for DTC P0130) or “A/F SEN1 (B2) P1286” (for DTC P0150) of “A/F
SEN1” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-III. D
6. When the following conditions are met, “TESTING” will be displayed on the CONSULT-III screen.
E
B/FUEL SCHDL 1.0 - 8.0 msec F
Shift lever D position with “OD” OFF (A/T)
5th position (M/T)
If “TESTING” is not displayed after 20 seconds, retry from step 2. G
7. Release accelerator pedal fully.
NOTE:
Never apply brake when releasing the accelerator pedal. H
8. Check that “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”.
If “TESTING” changed to “OUT OF CONDITION”, retry from step 6.
9. Check that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULT”.
If “NG” is displayed, go to EC-595, "Diagnosis Procedure". I
J
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the A/F sensor 1 circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC
K
With GST
2. Drive the vehicle at a speed of 80 km/h (50 MPH) for a few minutes in the suitable gear position. L
3. Set D position with “OD” OFF (A/T) or 5th position (M/T), then release the accelerator pedal fully until the
vehicle speed decreases to 50 km/h (30 MPH).
NOTE:
M
Never apply brake during releasing the accelerator pedal.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for five times.
5. Stop the vehicle and turn ignition switch OFF.
8. Restart engine.
9. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for five times. O
10. Stop the vehicle and connect GST to the vehicle.
11. Check that no 1st trip DTC is displayed.
P


BBIA0539E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
BBIA0544E


OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.
PBIB3308E

• 15 A fuse (No.54)

3. Check harness continuity between A/F sensor 1 terminal and ECM terminal as follows.

1 35
Bank1
2 56

1 16
Bank 2 A
2 75

EC
4. Check harness continuity between the following terminals and ground.
C
Bank 1 Bank 2
A/F sensor 1 terminal ECM terminal A/F sensor 1 terminal ECM terminal
1 35 1 16 D
2 56 2 75
E
OK or NG F
OK >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT G
OK or NG
H
OK >> GO TO 6.
6.REPLACE A/F SENSOR 1 I
Replace malfunctioning A/F sensor 1.
CAUTION:
• Discard any A/F sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a J
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
• Before installing new A/F sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Heated Oxygen Sensor
Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
K
>> INSPECTION END

L

(1,472°F).
PBIB3354E
F) sensor 1 signal is not inordinately low.
P0131
(Bank 1) Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 • The A/F signal computed by ECM from the A/ (The A/F sensor 1 circuit is open or
P0151 circuit low voltage F sensor 1 signal is constantly approx. 0V. shorted.)
0151 • A/F sensor 1
(Bank 2)
NOTE:
ing the next step.
TESTING CONDITION:
WITH CONSULT-III

7. Restart engine.
EC

VHCL SPEED SE More than 40 km/h (25 MPH) C
Gear position Suitable position
D
NOTE:
• Keep the accelerator pedal as steady as possible during cruising.
4. E
11. If 1st trip DTC is displayed, go to EC-599, "Diagnosis Procedure".
F
WITH GST

1. Turn ignition switch OFF. H
K
BBIA0539E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. L
M
BBIA0544E
P


OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.
PBIB3308E

• 15 A fuse (No.54)


1 35
Bank1
2 56
1 16
Bank 2
2 75

Bank 1 Bank 2
1 35 1 16
2 56 2 75

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.

6.REPLACE A/F SENSOR 1 A

CAUTION:
• Discard any A/F sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
EC
C
>> INSPECTION END

(1,472°F).
PBIB3354E
To judge the malfunction, the diagnosis checks that the A/F signal computed by ECM from the A/F sensor 1
signal is not inordinately high.
P0132
(Bank 1) Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 • The A/F signal computed by ECM from the A/F (The A/F sensor 1 circuit is open or
P0152 circuit high voltage sensor 1 signal is constantly approx. 5V. shorted.)
0152 • A/F sensor 1
(Bank 2)
NOTE:
ing the next step.
TESTING CONDITION:
WITH CONSULT-III

7. Restart engine.
EC

Gear position Suitable position
D
NOTE:
• Keep the accelerator pedal as steady as possible during the cruising.
4. E
11. If 1st trip DTC displayed, go to EC-603, "Diagnosis Procedure".
F
WITH GST

2. Loosen and retighten three ground screws. Refer to EC-545, "Ground Inspection".
K
BBIA0539E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. L
M
BBIA0544E
P


OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.
PBIB3308E

• 15 A fuse (No.54)


1 35
Bank1
2 56
1 16
Bank 2
2 75

Bank 1 Bank 2
1 35 1 16
2 56 2 75

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.

6.REPLACE A/F SENSOR 1 A

CAUTION:
EC
C
>> INSPECTION END

(1,472°F).
PBIB3354E
To judge the malfunction of A/F sensor 1, this diagnosis measures response time of the A/F signal computed
by ECM from the A/F sensor 1 signal. The time is compensated by engine operating (speed and load), fuel
feedback control constant, and the A/F sensor 1 temperature index. Judgment is based on whether the com-
pensated time (the A/F signal cycling time index) is inordinately long or not.
P0133 • Harness or connectors
0133 (The A/F sensor 1 circuit is open or
(Bank 1) shorted.)
• A/F sensor 1
• The response of the A/F signal computed by • A/F sensor 1 heater
ECM from A/F sensor 1 signal takes more than • Fuel pressure
P0153 circuit slow response
the specified time. • Fuel injector
0153 • Intake air leaks
(Bank 2) • Exhaust gas leaks
• PCV
NOTE:
ing the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
WITH CONSULT-III

5. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1minute under no load. A
7. Select “A/F SEN1(B1) P1278/P1279” (for DTC P0133) or “A/F SEN1(B2) P1288/P1289” (for DTC P0153)
of “A/F SEN1” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-III. EC
If “COMPLETED” appears on CONSULT-III screen, go to step 10.
If “COMPLETED” does not appear on CONSULT-III screen, go to the following step. C
9. After perform the following procedure, “TESTING” will be displayed on the CONSULT-III screen.
a. Increase the engine speed between 4,000 to 5,000 rpm and maintain that speed it for 10 seconds.
b. Fully release accelerator pedal and then let engine idle for about 10 seconds. D
If “TESTING” is not displayed after 10 seconds, refer to EC-534, "Description".
10. Wait for about 20 seconds at idle under the condition that “TESTING” is displayed on the CONSULT-III
screen. E
11. Check that “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”.
If “TESTING” changed to “OUT OF CONDITION”, refer to EC-534, "Description".
12. Check that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULT”. F
WITH GST G
3. Calculate the total value of “Short term fuel trim” and “Long term fuel trim” indications. H
Check that the total percentage should be within ±15%.
If OK, go to the following step.
If NG, check the following. I
• Lack of fuel J
• Fuel injector
• PCV valve K
8. Let engine idle for 1 minute. M
9. Increase the engine speed between 4,000 to 5,000 rpm and keep it for 10 seconds.
10. Fully release accelerator pedal and then let engine idle for about 1 minute.
N
11. Select Service $03 with GST and check that no DTC is displayed.
If the DTC is displayed, go to EC-607, "Diagnosis Procedure".
O


BBIA0539E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
Loosen and retighten A/F sensor 1.
>> GO TO 3.
PBIB1216E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
With CONSULT-III
3. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR” or “START”.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171, P172, P0174 or P0175 detected? Is it difficult to start engine?
Without CONSULT-III

4. Restart engine and let it idle for at least 3 seconds. A
nector.
6. Check DTC P0102 is displayed.
EC
9. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed. C
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171, P0172, P0174 or P0175 detected?
BBIA0541E
Yes or No D
Yes >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171, P0174 or P0172, P0175. Refer to EC-631 or EC-637.
No >> GO TO 6.
6.CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT E
F
BBIA0544E
3. Turn ignition switch ON. I

J
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8. K
NG >> GO TO 7.
L
PBIB3308E

M
• 15 A fuse (No.54) N
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors. O


1 35
Bank1
2 56
1 16
Bank 2
2 75

Bank 1 Bank 2
1 35 1 16
2 56 2 75

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 13.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
11.CHECK PCV VALVE
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.
NG >> Repair or replace PCV valve.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13.
13.REPLACE A/F SENSOR 1
CAUTION:
>> INSPECTION END

P0137, P0157 HO2S2
P0137, P0157 HO2S2
A

monitors the oxygen level in the exhaust gas on each bank.
Even if switching characteristics of the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
are shifted, the air-fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric, by the sig-
nal from the heated oxygen sensor 2. C
tions. D
SEF327R E
The heated oxygen sensor 2 has a much longer switching time F

between rich and lean than the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1. The oxy-
gen storage capacity of the three way catalyst (manifold) causes the
longer switching time. To judge the malfunctions of heated oxygen
G
sensor 2, ECM monitors whether the maximum voltage of the sensor
is sufficiently high during various driving conditions such as fuel-cut.
SEF259VA I
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause J
0137 (The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
(Bank 1) Heated oxygen sensor 2 The maximum voltage from the sensor is not • Heated oxygen sensor 2 K
P0157 circuit low voltage reached to the specified voltage. • Fuel pressure
0157 • Fuel injector
(Bank 2) • Intake air leaks
L
NOTE: M
If DTC confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conduct-
ing the next step.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. N
O
WITH CONSULT-III
TESTING CONDITION:
P

P0137, P0157 HO2S2
load.
8. Check that “COOLAN TEMP/S” indicates more than 70°C (158°F).
10. Select “HO2S2 (B1) P1147” (for DTC P0137) or “HO2S2 (B2) P1167” (for DTC P0157) of “HO2S2” in
“DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-III.
11. Follow the instruction of CONSULT-III.
NOTE:
12. Check that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”.
WITH GST
load.
7. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 74 [HO2S2 (B1) signal] or 55 [HO2S2 (B2) signal] and
ground.
at least 10 times.
essary.
position with “OD” OFF (A/T), 5th gear position (M/T).


P0137, P0157 HO2S2
A
EC
BBIA0539E
OK or NG D
OK >> GO TO 2.
2.CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA E
With CONSULT-III
F
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0174 detected? G
3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector, and restart I
nector.
5. Check DTC P0102 is displayed. J
7. Check DTC P0000 is displayed. K
BBIA0541E L
Yes or No
Yes >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171or P0174. Refer to EC-631.
No >> GO TO 3.
M
N

P0137, P0157 HO2S2
BBIA0540E

4. Check harness continuity between HO2S2 terminal 4 and ECM terminal 78.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
Terminals
DTC Bank
ECM Sensor
P0137 74 1 1
P0157 55 1 2

Terminals
DTC Bank
ECM Sensor
P0137 74 1 1
P0157 55 1 2

P0137, P0157 HO2S2
OK or NG A
OK >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 EC

OK or NG C
OK >> GO TO 6.
6.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT D
E
>> INSPECTION END
F
With CONSULT-III
G
load.
5. Let engine idle for 1 minute. I
6. Select “FUEL INJECTION” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode, and select “HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” as the monitor item
with CONSULT-III.
7. Check “HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” at idle speed when adjusting “FUEL INJECTION” to ±25%. J
PBIB3458E M
“HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” should be above 0.68V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is +25%.
“HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” should be below 0.18V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is −25%.
CAUTION: N
Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant. O
Without CONSULT-III
1. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. P
load.
ground.

P0137, P0157 HO2S2
at least 10 times.
essary.
position with “OD” OFF(A/T), 5th gear position (M/T).
CAUTION:
Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.

P0138, P0158 HO2S2
P0138, P0158 HO2S2
A

tions. D
SEF327R E
The heated oxygen sensor 2 has a much longer switching time between rich and lean than the air fuel ratio (A/ F
F) sensor 1. The oxygen storage capacity of the three way catalyst (manifold) causes the longer switching
time.
MALFUNCTION A G
whether the voltage is unusually high during the various driving con-
dition such as fuel-cut. H
J
PBIB1848E
MALFUNCTION B
K
whether the minimum voltage of sensor is sufficiently low during the
various driving condition such as fuel-cut.
L
N
PBIB2376E
P0138 • Harness or connectors P
An excessively high voltage from the
0138 A) (The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
sensor is sent to ECM.
(Bank 1) • Heated oxygen sensor 2
Heated oxygen sensor 2 cir- • Harness or connectors
P0158 cuit high voltage (The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
The minimum voltage from the sensor
0158 B) • Heated oxygen sensor 2
is not reached to the specified voltage.
(Bank 2) • Fuel pressure
• Fuel injector

P0138, P0158 HO2S2

If DTC cannot be confirmed, perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B.
NOTE:
ing the next step.
With CONSULT-III
load.
With GST
With CONSULT-III
TESTING CONDISION:
load.
10. Select “HO2S2 (B1) P1146” (for DTC P138) or “HO2S2 (B2) P1166” (for DTC P0158) of “HO2S2” in “DTC
WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-III.
11. Follow the instruction of CONSULT-III.
NOTE:

P0138, P0158 HO2S2
A
trip DTC might not be confirmed. EC
With GST
1. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. C
load.
6. Let engine idle for 1 minute. E
ground.
8. Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load F
at least 10 times.
The voltage should be below 0.18V at least once during this G
procedure.
essary.
9. Keep vehicle at idling for 10 minutes, then check the voltage. Or H
The voltage should be below 0.18V at least once during this PBIB1607E I
procedure.
J

K
2. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-545, "Ground Inspection". L
BBIA0539E O
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. P

P0138, P0158 HO2S2
BBIA0540E


OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
Terminals
DTC Bank
ECM Sensor
P0138 74 1 1
P0158 55 1 2

Terminals
DTC Bank
ECM Sensor
P0138 74 1 1
P0158 55 1 2

P0138, P0158 HO2S2
OK or NG A
OK >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK HO2S2 CONNECTOR FOR WATER EC
Check connectors for water.

C
Water should not exist.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. D
E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
F
Refer to GI-49, "Intermittent Incident". G
>> INSPECTION END

H
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. I
L
BBIA0539E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. M
2.CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA N
With CONSULT-III
O
Is it difficult to start engine? P
Without CONSULT-III

P0138, P0158 HO2S2
nector.
BBIA0541E
Yes or No
Yes >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0172, P0175. Refer to EC-637, "On Board Diagnosis Logic".
No >> GO TO 3.
BBIA0540E


OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.

P0138, P0158 HO2S2
Terminals A
DTC Bank
ECM Sensor
P0138 74 1 1
EC
P0158 55 1 2
Continuity should exist. C

D
Terminals
DTC Bank
ECM Sensor
E
P0138 74 1 1
P0158 55 1 2
F
OK or NG G
OK >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 H

OK or NG I
OK >> GO TO 6.
6.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT J
K
>> INSPECTION END
L
With CONSULT-III
M
load.
5. Let engine idle for 1 minute. O
with CONSULT-III.
P

P0138, P0158 HO2S2
7. Check “HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” at idle speed when adjusting “FUEL INJECTION” to ±25%.
PBIB3458E
CAUTION:
Without CONSULT-III
load.
ground.
at least 10 times.
The voltage should be above 0.68V at least once during this
procedure.
If the voltage is above 0.68V at step 6, step 7 is not neces-
sary.
The voltage should be below 0.18V at least once during this PBIB1607E
procedure.
CAUTION:

P0139, P0159 HO2S2
P0139, P0159 HO2S2
A

tions. D
SEF327R E
The heated oxygen sensor 2 has a much longer switching time F

between rich and lean than the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1. The oxy-
gen storage capacity before the three way catalyst (manifold)
causes the longer switching time. To judge the malfunctions of
G
heated oxygen sensor 2, ECM monitors whether the switching
response of the sensor's voltage is faster than specified during vari-
ous driving conditions such as fuel-cut.
H
SEF302U I
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause J
(Bank 1) Heated oxygen sensor 2 It takes more time for the sensor to respond be- • Heated oxygen sensor 2 K
P0159 circuit slow response tween rich and lean than the specified time. • Fuel pressure
0159 • Fuel injector
(Bank 2) • Intake air leaks
L
NOTE: M
ing the next step.
O
WITH CONSULT-III
TESTING CONDITION:
P

P0139, P0159 HO2S2
load.
9. Select “HO2S2 (B1) P0139” or “HO2S2 (B2) P0159” of “HO2S2” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with
CONSULT-III.
10. Start engine and follow the instruction of CONSULT-III display.
NOTE:
If will take at most 10 minutes until “COMPLETED” is displayed.
WITH GST
load.
ground.
at least 10 times.
A change of voltage should be more than 0.24V for 1 sec-
essary.
A change of voltage should be more than 0.24V for 1 sec- PBIB1607E


P0139, P0159 HO2S2
A
EC
BBIA0539E
OK or NG D
OK >> GO TO 2.
2.CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA E
With CONSULT-III
F
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171, P0172, P0174 or P0175 detected? G
3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector, and restart I
nector.
5. Check DTC P0102 is displayed. J
7. Check DTC P0000 is displayed. K
BBIA0541E L
Yes or No
Yes >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171, P0174 or P0172, P0175. Refer to EC-631, "On Board
Diagnosis Logic" or EC-637, "On Board Diagnosis Logic".
No >> GO TO 3. M


P0139, P0159 HO2S2
BBIA0540E


OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
Terminals
DTC Bank
ECM Sensor
P0139 74 1 1
P0159 55 1 2

Terminals
DTC Bank
ECM Sensor
P0139 74 1 1
P0159 55 1 2

P0139, P0159 HO2S2
OK or NG A
OK >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 EC

OK or NG C
OK >> GO TO 6.
E
>> INSPECTION END
F
With CONSULT-III
G
load.
5. Let engine idle for 1 minute. I
with CONSULT-III.
7. Check “HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” at idle speed when adjusting “FUEL INJECTION” to ±25%. J
PBIB3458E M
CAUTION: N
Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant. O
Without CONSULT-III
1. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. P
load.
ground.

P0139, P0159 HO2S2
at least 10 times.
The voltage should be above 0.68V at least once during this
procedure.
If the voltage is above 0.68V at step 6, step 7 is not neces-
sary.
The voltage should be below 0.18V at least once during this PBIB1607E
procedure.
CAUTION:

P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
A
theoretical mixture ratio based on the mixture ratio feedback signal from the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1. The
ECM calculates the necessary compensation to correct the offset between the actual and the theoretical
ratios.
In case the amount of the compensation value is extremely large (the actual mixture ratio is too lean), the C
ECM judges the condition as the fuel injection system malfunction and illuminates the MIL (2 trip detection
logic).
D
Density of oxygen in exhaust gas Fuel injection
A/F sensor 1 Fuel injector
(Mixture ratio feedback signal) control E
Trouble diagnosis
name F
P0171 • Intake air leaks
0171 • Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
(Bank 1) • Fuel injector
• Fuel injection system does not operate properly. G
Fuel injection system • Exhaust gas leaks
• The amount of mixture ratio compensation is too
P0174 too lean • Incorrect fuel pressure
large. (The mixture ratio is too lean.)
0174 • Lack of fuel
(Bank 2) • Mass air flow sensor H
I
NOTE:
ing the next step. J
WITH CONSULT-III
L
SULT-III.
6. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”. N
The 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0174 should be detected at this stage, if a malfunction exists. If so, go to EC- O
NOTE:
P
b. Start engine.
c. Maintain the following conditions for at least 10 consecutive minutes. Hold the accelerator pedal as steady
as possible.
VHCL SPEED SE 50 - 120 km/h (31 - 75 mph)

CAUTION:
9. If it is difficult to start engine at step 6, the fuel injection system has a malfunction, too.
10. Crank engine while depressing accelerator pedal. If engine starts, go to EC-632, "Diagnosis Procedure". If
engine does not start, check exhaust and intake air leak visually.
WITH GST
nector.
8. Select Service $03 with GST. Check DTC P0102 is detected.
11. Select Service $07 with GST. The 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0174
should be detected at this stage, if a malfunction exists. If so, go
to EC-632, "Diagnosis Procedure". BBIA0541E
NOTE:
b. Start engine.
as possible.

CAUTION:
13. Crank engine while depressing accelerator pedal. If engine starts, go to EC-632, "Diagnosis Procedure".
If engine does not start, check exhaust and intake air leak visually.
NOTE:
When depressing accelerator pedal three-fourths (3/4) or more, the control system does not start the
engine.Do not depress accelerator pedal too mach.

PBIB1216E
OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Repair or replace. A
EC
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
C
3.CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. D
2. Disconnect corresponding A/F sensor 1 harness connector.
G
BBIA0544E

H

I
1 35
Bank 1
2 56
1 16 J
Bank 2
2 75

L
Bank 1 Bank 2
A/F sensor 1 terminal ECM terminal A/F sensor 1 terminal ECM terminal M
1 35 1 16
2 56 2 75
N
O
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
P
2. Install fuel pressure gauge and check fuel pressure. Refer to EC-943, "Fuel Pressure Check".
At idling: 350 kPa (3.57 kg/cm2, 51 psi)

OK or NG

NG >> GO TO 5.
• Fuel pump and circuit (Refer to EC-858, "Description".)
• Fuel lines

With CONSULT-III
2.0 - 6.0 g·m/sec: at idling

7.0 - 20.0 g·m/sec: at 2,500 rpm
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
ground. Refer to EC-561, "Component Description".
With GST

7.0 - 20.0 g·m/sec: at 2,500 rpm
OK or NG
OK (P0171)>>GO TO 9.
OK (P0174)>>GO TO 11.
With CONSULT-III
1. Start engine.
3. Check that each circuit produces a momentary engine speed drop.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.
NG >> Perform trouble diagnosis for FUEL INJECTOR, refer to EC-854, "Component Description".
9.CHECK FUNCTION OF FUEL INJECTOR-I
Without CONSULT-III
1. Stop engine.

2. Disconnect harness connector F44 (3), F201 (1)
A
2 : Vacuum tank
: Front
3. Turn ignition switch ON. EC
AWBIA0686ZZ
D
4. Check voltage between harness connector F44 terminal 3 and
E
7. Check harness continuity between harness connector F44 and
ECM as follows.
PBIB2633E
Harness connector F44
Cylinder ECM terminal
terminal
H
1 2 23
3 1 22
5 4 21 I

J
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10. K
10.CHECK FUNCTION OF FUEL INJECTOR-II
Provide battery voltage between harness connector F201 as follows L
and then interrupt it. Listen to each fuel injector operating sound.
Harness connector F201 terminal M

Cylinder
(+) (–)
1 3 2
N
3 3 1
5 3 4
PBIB2634E
O
Operating sound should exist.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12. P

1. Start engine.
2. Listen to fuel injectors No.2, No.4, No.6 operating sound.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.
NG >> Perform trouble diagnosis for FUEL INJECTOR, refer to
EC-854, "Component Description".
PBIB1986E

3. Disconnect all injector harness connectors.
4. Remove fuel tube assembly. Refer to EM-158, "Removal and Installation".
Keep fuel hose and all fuel injectors connected to fuel tube.
5. For DTC P0171, reconnect fuel injector harness connectors on bank 1.
For DTC P0174, reconnect fuel injector harness connectors on bank 2.
For DTC P0171, check that fuel sprays out from fuel injectors on
bank 1.
For DTC P0174, check that fuel sprays out from fuel injectors on
bank 2.
Fuel should be sprayed evenly for each fuel injector.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13.
NG >> Replace fuel injectors from which fuel does not spray
PBIB1726E
out. Always replace O-ring with new ones.
>> INSPECTION END

A
theoretical mixture ratio based on the mixture ratio feedback signal from the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1. The
ECM calculates the necessary compensation to correct the offset between the actual and the theoretical
ratios.
In case the amount of the compensation value is extremely large (the actual mixture ratio is too rich), the ECM C
judges the condition as the fuel injection system malfunction and illluminates the MIL (2 trip detection logic).
Sensor Input signal to ECM ECM function Actuator D

Density of oxygen in exhaust gas Fuel injection
A/F sensor 1 Fuel injector
(Mixture ratio feedback signal) control
E
Trouble diagnosis
name
P0172 F
0172 • Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
(Bank 1) • Fuel injection system does not operate properly. • Fuel injector
Fuel injection system
• The amount of mixture ratio compensation is too • Exhaust gas leaks
P0175 too rich G
large. (The mixture ratio is too rich.) • Incorrect fuel pressure
0175 • Mass air flow sensor
(Bank 2)
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conduct- I
ing the next step.
2. Turn ignition switch ON. J
WITH CONSULT-III
K
SULT-III. M
8. Check 1st trip DTC. N
The 1st trip DTC P0172, P0175 should be detected at this stage, if a malfunction exists. If so, go to EC-
NOTE:
O
b. Start engine. P
as possible.

CAUTION:

9. If it is difficult to start engine at step 6, the fuel injection system has a malfunction, too.
If engine starts, go to EC-638, "Diagnosis Procedure". If engine does not start, remove ignition plugs and
WITH GST
5. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. Then
restart and run engine for at least 5 seconds at idle speed.
nector.
7. Select Service $03 with GST. Check DTC P0102 is detected.
10. Select Service $07 with GST. The 1st trip DTC P0172 or P0175
should be detected at this stage, if a malfunction exists. If so, go
to EC-638, "Diagnosis Procedure". BBIA0541E
NOTE:
b. Start engine.
as possible.

CAUTION:
If engine starts, go to EC-638, "Diagnosis Procedure". If engine does not start, remove ignition plugs and

PBIB1216E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
OK or NG A
OK >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT EC

2. Disconnect corresponding A/F sensor 1 harness connector.
C
BBIA0544E

G
Bank 1 1 35
H
2 56
1 16
Bank 2
2 75 I

5. Check harness continuity between the following terminals and ground. J
Bank 1 Bank 2 K
1 35 1 16
L
2 56 2 75
Continuity should not exist. M

OK or NG
N
OK >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK FUEL PRESSURE O
P
At idling: 350 kPa (3.57 kg/cm2, 51 psi)
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 5.
• Fuel pump and circuit (Refer to, EC-858, "Description".)

With CONSULT-III

7.0 - 20.0 g·m/sec: at 2,500 rpm
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
With GST

7.0 - 20.0 g·m/sec: at 2,500 rpm
OK or NG
OK (P0172)>>GO TO 9.
OK (P0175)>>GO TO 11.
With CONSULT-III
1. Start engine.
3. Check that each circuit produces a momentary engine speed drop.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.
Without CONSULT-III
1. Stop engine.
2 : Vacuum tank
: Front
AWBIA0686ZZ

ground with CONSULT-III or tester. A

5. Turn ignition switch OFF. EC
ECM as follows. C
PBIB2633E
Harness connector F44 D
terminal
1 2 23
3 1 22 E
5 4 21
Continuity should exist. F

OK or NG
G
OK >> GO TO 10.
10.CHECK FUNCTION OF FUEL INJECTOR-II H
Provide battery voltage between harness connector F201 as follows
I
Harness connector F201 terminal
Cylinder
(+) (–)
J
1 3 2
3 3 1
5 3 4 K
PBIB2634E
OK or NG L
OK >> GO TO 12.
11.CHECK FUNCTION OF FUEL INJECTOR M
1. Start engine.
2. Listen to fuel injectors No.2, No.4, No.6 operating sound.
N
OK or NG O
OK >> GO TO 12.
EC-854, "Component Description".
P
PBIB1986E

1. Remove fuel injector assembly. Refer to EM-158, "Removal and Installation".

3. Disconnect all fuel injector harness connectors.
Make that sure fuel does not drip from fuel injector.
OK or NG
NG (Drips.)>>Replace the fuel injectors from which fuel is dripping. Always replace O-ring with new one.
Refer to GI-45, "Work Flow".
>> INSPECTION END

P0181 FTT SENSOR
P0181 FTT SENSOR
A
The fuel tank temperature sensor is used to detect the fuel tempera- EC
change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor C
BBIA0545E E
<Reference data>
F
°C (°F) V kΩ
20 (68) 3.5 2.3 - 2.7 G
50 (122) 2.2 0.79 - 0.90
*: This data is reference value and is measured between ECM terminal 107 (fuel tank
temperature sensor) and ground. H
CAUTION:

Rationally incorrect voltage from the sensor is K
Fuel tank temperature • Harness or connectors
P0181 sent to ECM, compared with the voltage signals
sensor circuit range/per- (The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
0181 from engine coolant temperature sensor and in-
formance • Fuel tank temperature sensor
take air temperature sensor.
L
NOTE: M
ing the next step.
O
WITH CONSULT-III
2. Check 1st trip DTC. P
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-644, "Diagnosis Procedure".
If 1st trip DTC is not detected, go to following step.
4. Check “COOLAN TEMP/S” value.
If “COOLAN TEMP/S” is less than 60°C (140°F), the result will be OK.
If “COOLAN TEMP/S” is above 60°C (140°F), go to the following step.
5. Cool engine down until “COOLAN TEMP/S” is less than 60°C (140°F).
P0181 FTT SENSOR
WITH GST

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Go to MWI-32, "Component Function Check".
2.CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
nector.
BBIA0545E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.
PBIB0932E



OK or NG

P0181 FTT SENSOR
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5. A
EC
C
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connector.
6.CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR D
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7. E
F
>> INSPECTION END G

FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR H

terminals 2 and 4 by heating with hot water or heat gun as I
J
20 (68) 2.3 - 2.7
50 (122) 0.79 - 0.90 K
PBIB2663E
L

The fuel tank temperature sensor is used to detect the fuel tempera-
change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor
BBIA0545E
<Reference data>

°C (°F) V kΩ
20 (68) 3.5 2.3 - 2.7
50 (122) 2.2 0.79 - 0.90
*: This data is reference value and is measured between ECM terminal 107 (fuel tank
CAUTION:

P0182 Fuel tank temperature An excessively low voltage from the sensor is
P0183 Fuel tank temperature An excessively high voltage from the sensor is • Fuel tank temperature sensor

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT A

EC
nector.
BBIA0545E
E
F
OK or NG G
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.
H
PBIB0932E
3.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART I

• Harness for open or short between ECM and “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” J

K
2. Disconnect combination meter harness connector. L
Continuity should exist. M

OK or NG N
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.
• Harness connectors E152, M31 P
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connector.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
>> INSPECTION END



20 (68) 2.3 - 2.7
50 (122) 0.79 - 0.90
PBIB2663E

A

a kind of potentiometers which transform the throttle valve position C
throttle valve and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM D
tion.
PBIB0145E E
F
G
P0222 Throttle position sensor An excessively low voltage from the TP sensor • Harness or connectors
0222 1 circuit low input 1 is sent to ECM. (The TP sensor 1 circuit is open or short-
ed.)
(The APP sensor 2 circuit is shorted.) H
P0223 Throttle position sensor An excessively high voltage from the TP sensor • Electric throttle control actuator
0223 1 circuit high input 1 is sent to ECM. (TP sensor 1)
• Accelerator pedal position sensor.
(APP sensor 2) I
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL illluminates. J

The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in order for the idle position to be within +10 K
degrees.
L
NOTE: M
ing the next step.
5. Check DTC. P


BBIA0539E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
BBIA0543E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 3.
PBIB2604E


OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.

EC-893

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. A
5.CHECK APP SENSOR
EC
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11. C
NG >> GO TO 6.
>> INSPECTION END


3. Check harness continuity between electric throttle control actuator terminal 4 and ECM terminal 66. G

OK or NG
I
OK >> GO TO 8.
K
OK or NG L
OK >> GO TO 9.
M
OK or NG N
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> GO TO 10.
>> INSPECTION END


>> INSPECTION END

4. Set selector lever to D position (A/T), 1st position (M/T).
5. Check voltage between ECM terminals 50 (TP sensor 1 signal), 69 (TP sensor 2 signal) and ground under
the following conditions.


step.
7. Perform EC-475, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". PBIB1170E

P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304, P0305, P0306, P0307, P0308 MISFIRE
P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304, P0305, P0306, P0307, P0308 MIS-
A
FIRE
EC
When a misfire occurs, engine speed will fluctuate. If the engine speed fluctuates enough to cause the crank-
shaft position (CKP) sensor (POS) signal to vary, ECM can determine that a misfire is occurring.
C
Sensor Input Signal to ECM ECM function
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Engine speed On board diagnosis of misfire
The misfire detection logic consists of the following two conditions. D
1. One Trip Detection Logic (Three Way Catalyst Damage)
On the first trip, when a misfire condition occurs that can damage the three way catalyst (TWC) due to
overheating, the MIL will blink. E
When a misfire condition occurs, the ECM monitors the CKP sensor signal every 200 engine revolutions
for a change.
When the misfire condition decreases to a level that will not damage the TWC, the MIL will turn off. F
If another misfire condition occurs that can damage the TWC on a second trip, the MIL will blink.
When the misfire condition decreases to a level that will not damage the TWC, the MIL will remain on.
If another misfire condition occurs that can damage the TWC, the MIL will begin to blink again.
2. Two Trip Detection Logic (Exhaust quality deterioration) G
For misfire conditions that will not damage the TWC (but will affect vehicle emissions), the MIL will only
light when the misfire is detected on a second trip. During this condition, the ECM monitors the CKP sen-
sor signal every 1,000 engine revolutions. H
A misfire malfunction can be detected in any one cylinder or in multiple cylinders.
P0300 Multiple cylinder mis-
Multiple cylinder misfire.
0300 fires detected
P0301 No.1 cylinder misfire de- • Improper spark plug J
No. 1 cylinder misfires.
0301 tected • Insufficient compression
P0302 No. 2 cylinder misfire
No. 2 cylinder misfires. • The fuel injector is open or shorted
0302 detected K
• Fuel injector
P0303 No. 3 cylinder misfire • Intake air leak
0303 detected • The ignition signal circuit is open or short-
ed L
No. 4 cylinder misfires. • Lack of fuel
0304 detected
• Signal plate
P0305 No. 5 cylinder misfire • Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
0305 detected • Incorrect PCV hose connection M
0306 detected
N
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle in safe manner according to traffic conditions and obey all traffic laws when driv- O
ing.
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following procedure P
before conducting the next step.
WITH CONSULT-III
1. Turn ignition switch ON, and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III.
6. Restart engine and let it idle for about 15 minutes.
NOTE:
d. Start engine and drive the vehicle under similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data for a certain
Similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data mean that the following conditions should be satisfied at
the same time.
Basic fuel schedule Basic fuel schedule in freeze frame data × (1± 0.1)
Driving time varies according to the engine speed in the freeze frame data.
Engine speed Time

More than 3,000 rpm Approximately 3.5 minutes
WITH GST
1.CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK AND PCV HOSE

1. Start engine and run it at idle speed.
2. Listen for the sound of the intake air leak.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK FOR EXHAUST SYSTEM CLOGGING
Stop engine and visually check exhaust tube, three way catalyst and muffler for dents.
OK or NG
NG >> Repair or replace it.
With CONSULT-III
1. Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode. A
2. Is there any cylinder which does not produce a momentary engine speed drop?
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 4. EC
No >> GO TO 10.
C
Stop engine.
2 : Vacuum tank D
: Front
F
AWBIA0686ZZ
G
Voltage: Battery voltage H

6. Check harness continuity between harness connector F44 and I
ECM as follows.
J
PBIB2633E
Harness connector F44
terminal
1 2 23 K
3 1 22
5 4 21
L

7. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Perform trouble diagnosis for FUEL INJECTOR, refer to EC-854, "Diagnosis Procedure". N
5.CHECK FUNCTION OF FUEL INJECTOR-II
O

Cylinder P
(+) (–)
1 3 2
3 3 1
5 3 4
PBIB2634E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Perform trouble diagnosis for FUEL INJECTOR, refer to EC-854, "Diagnosis Procedure".
6.CHECK FUNCTION OF FUEL INJECTOR-III
1. Reconnect all harness connector disconnected.
2. Start engine.
3. Listen to fuel injectors No. 2, No. 4, No.6 operating sound.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
PBIB1986E

CAUTION:
Perform the following procedure in a place with no combustible objects and good ventilation.
2. Remove fuel pump fuse (No.48) in IPDM E/R to release fuel
pressure.
NOTE:
3. Start engine.
pressure.
BBIA0534E
checked.
8. Crank engine for five seconds or more to remove combustion gas in the cylinder.
10. Fix ignition coil using a rope etc. with gap of 13 - 17 mm (0.52 -
0.66 in) between the edge of the spark plug and grounded metal
portion as shown in the figure.
portion.

CAUTION:
• Never place to the spark plug and the ignition coil within
50cm (19.7 in) each other. Be careful not to get an electri- JMBIA0066GB
cal shock while checking, because the electrical dis-

charge voltage becomes 20 kV or more.
• It might cause to damage the ignition coil if the gap of more than 17 mm (0.66 in) is made.
NOTE:
When the gap is less than 13 mm (0.52 in), the spark might be generated even if the coil is mal-
functioning.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> GO TO 8.

8.CHECK FUNCTION OF IGNITION COIL-II A

3. Crank engine for about three seconds, and recheck whether spark is generated between the spark plug
EC
and the grounded metal portion.

C
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Check ignition coil, power transistor and their circuits. Refer to EC-862, "Diagnosis Procedure".
D
9.CHECK SPARK PLUG
OK or NG E
OK >> Replace spark plug(s) with standard type one(s). For
spark plug type, refer to EM-129, "Removal and Installa-
tion". F
2. GO TO 10.
G
SEF156I
H
2. Crank engine for about three seconds, and recheck whether spark is generated between the spark plug I
and the grounded portion.

J
OK or NG
NG >> Replace spark plug(s) with standard type one(s). For spark plug type, refer to EM-129, "Removal K
and Installation".
11.CHECK COMPRESSION PRESSURE
Check compression pressure. Refer to EM-135, "Compression Pressure". L
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.
NG >> Check pistons, piston rings, valves, valve seats and cylinder head gaskets. M
1. Install all removed parts. N
O
At idle: Approx. 350 kPa (3.57 kg/cm2, 51 psi)
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 14. P
NG >> GO TO 13.
• Fuel pump and circuit (Refer to EC-858, "Description".)
• Fuel lines


Target idle speed 625 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position)
Ignition timing 15 ± 5° BTDC (in P or N position)
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 15.
15.CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL
BBIA0544E


1 35
Bank 1
2 56
1 16
Bank 2
2 75

Bank 1 Bank 2
1 35 1 16
2 56 2 75

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors between ECM
and A/F sensor 1.

16.CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER A

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 18. EC
NG >> GO TO 17.
C
CAUTION:
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. D
E
>> INSPECTION END
F
With CONSULT-III
Check mass air flow sensor signal in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III.
2.0 - 6.0 g·m/sec: at idling G
7.0 - 20.0 g·m/sec: at 2,500 rpm

With GST H
Check mass air flow sensor signal in Service $01 with GST.
2.0 - 6.0 g·m/sec: at idling I

7.0 - 20.0 g·m/sec: at 2,500 rpm
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 19. J
ground. Refer to EC-565, "Component Inspection".
19.CHECK SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART K
Check items on the rough idle symptom in EC-932, "Symptom Matrix Chart".
OK or NG L
OK >> GO TO 20.
20.ERASE THE 1ST TRIP DTC M
Some tests may cause a 1st trip DTC to be set.
Erase the 1st trip DTC from the ECM memory after performing the tests. Refer to EC-918, "Emission-related
Diagnostic Information". N
>> GO TO 21.
O
Refer to GI-45, "Work Flow".
P
>> INSPECTION END

P0327, P0328, P0332, P0333 KS
P0327, P0328, P0332, P0333 KS
The knock sensor is attached to the cylinder block. It senses engine

knocking using a piezoelectric element. A knocking vibration from
the cylinder block is sensed as vibrational pressure. This pressure is
converted into a voltage signal and sent to the ECM.
BBIA0547E
The MIL will not illluminate for these diagnoses.
P0327
0327
(Bank 1) Knock sensor circuit low in- An excessively low voltage from the sensor
P0332 put is sent to ECM.
0332
(Bank 2) • Harness or connectors
P0328 • Knock sensor
0328
(Bank 1) Knock sensor circuit high in- An excessively high voltage from the sensor
P0333 put is sent to ECM.
0333
(Bank 2)
NOTE:
ing the next step.
TESTING CONDITION:
4. Start engine and run it for at least 5 seconds at idle speed.
1.CHECK KNOCK SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-I
3. Check resistance between ECM terminals 15, 36 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
NOTE:
It is necessary to use an ohmmeter which can measure more than 10 MΩ.
Resistance: Approximately 532 - 588 kΩ [at 20°C (68°F)]

P0327, P0328, P0332, P0333 KS
OK or NG A
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK KNOCK SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-II EC

2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 15 and knock
C
sensor (bank1) terminal 1, ECM terminal 36 and knock sensor
(bank 2) terminal 1.
D
E
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 3.
F
• Harness connectors F67, F250 G
• Harness for open or short between ECM and knock sensor
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. H
4.CHECK KNOCK SENSOR
I
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Replace malfunctioning knock sensor. J
2. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. K
N
BBIA0539E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6. O
6.CHECK KNOCK SENSOR SHIELD CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
P
2. Check harness continuity between knock sensor terminal 2 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 7.

P0327, P0328, P0332, P0333 KS

• Harness for open or short between knock sensor and ground
>> Repair open circuit or short power in harness or connectors.

>> INSPECTION END

KNOCK SENSOR
Check resistance between knock sensor terminal 1 and ground.
NOTE:
It is necessary to use an ohmmeter which can measure more
than 10 MΩ.
Resistance: Approximately 532 - 588 kΩ [at 20°C (68°F)]

CAUTION:
Never use any knock sensors that have been dropped or physi-
cally damaged. Use only new ones.
SEF111Y

A
The crankshaft position sensor (POS) is located on the oil pan facing EC
the gear teeth (cogs) of the signal plate. It detects the fluctuation of
When the engine is running, the high and low parts of the teeth C
cause the gap with the sensor to change.
change. D
Due to the changing magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor
changes.
The ECM receives the voltage signal and detects the fluctuation of
PBIB0562E E
H
PBIB2744E

I
J
is not detected by the ECM during the first
few seconds of engine cranking.
• Harness or connectors K
• The proper pulse signal from the crankshaft
P0335 Crankshaft position sen- (The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
position sensor (POS) is not sent to ECM
0335 sor (POS) circuit • Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
while the engine is running.
• Signal plate
is not in the normal pattern during engine run- L
ning.
NOTE:
ing the next step. N
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. O
TESTING CONDITION:
tion switch ON.
P

BBIA0539E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR (POS) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect crankshaft position (CKP) sensor (POS) harness
connector.
BBIA0548E
3. Check voltage between CKP sensor (POS) terminal 1 and


OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.
PBIB0664E

• Harness for open or short between crankshaft position sensor (POS) and ECM
• Harness for open or short between crankshaft position sensor (POS) and IPDM E/R
4.CHECK CKP SENSOR (POS) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
2. Check harness continuity between CKP sensor (POS) terminal 3 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.

• Harness for open or short between crankshaft position sensor (POS) and ground
EC

6.CHECK CKP SENSOR (POS) INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT C
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 13 and CKP sensor (POS) terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram. D

3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. F
Refer to EC-665, "Component Inspection". G
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Replace crankshaft position sensor (POS). H
8.CHECK GEAR TOOTH
Visually check for chipping signal plate gear tooth.
I
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Replace the signal plate. J
K
>> INSPECTION END
CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS)

1. Loosen the fixing bolt of the sensor. M
2. Disconnect crankshaft position sensor (POS) harness connector.
4. Visually check the sensor for chipping. N
PBIB0563E


1 (+) - 2 (-)
1 (+) - 3 (-) Except 0 or ∞
2 (+) - 3 (-)
PBIB0564E

P0340, P0345 CMP SENSOR (PHASE)
A
The camshaft position sensor (PHASE) senses the retraction of EC

intake valve camshaft to identify a particular cylinder. The camshaft
position sensor (PHASE) senses the piston position.
When the crankshaft position sensor (POS) system becomes inoper-
ative, the camshaft position sensor (PHASE) provides various con- C
trols of engine parts instead, utilizing timing of cylinder identification
signals.
The sensor consists of a permanent magnet and Hall IC. D
When engine is running, the high and low parts of the teeth cause
the gap with the sensor to change.
change.
PBIB0562E E
Due to the changing magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor changes.
F
PBIB2744E
I
J
• The cylinder No. signal is not sent to ECM for
the first few seconds during engine cranking. K
(Bank 1) • Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
Camshaft position sen- • The cylinder No. signal is not sent to ECM
• Camshaft (Intake)
P0345 sor (PHASE) circuit during engine running.
• Starter motor
0345 • The cylinder No. signal is not in the normal
• Starting system circuit
(Bank 2) pattern during engine running. L
M
NOTE:
ing the next step.
N
tion switch ON.
1. Crank engine for at least 2 seconds and run it for at least 5 seconds at idle speed. P


Turn ignition switch to START position.
Does the engine turn over?

Does the starter motor operate?
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 2.
No >> Check starting system. (Refer to STR-5, "Work Flow".)
BBIA0539E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR (PHASE) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect camshaft position (CMP) sensor (PHASE) harness
connector.
BBIA0549E
3. Check voltage between CMP sensor (PHASE) terminal 3 and


OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.
SEF481Y

• Harness for open or short between camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and ECM

• Harness for open or short between camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and IPDM E/R
A
5.CHECK CMP SENSOR (PHASE) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT EC
2. Check harness continuity between CMP sensor (PHASE) terminal 1 and ground.
C
OK or NG D
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.

• Harness for open or short between CMP sensor (PHASE) and ground F

G
7.CHECK CMP SENSOR (PHASE) INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 33 (bank 1) or 14 (bank 2) and CMP sensor (PHASE) H
terminal 2.
I
OK or NG J
OK >> GO TO 8.
8.CHECK CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE) K
OK or NG L
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Replace malfunctioning camshaft position sensor (PHASE).
9.CHECK CAMSHAFT (INTAKE) M
• Accumulation of debris to the signal plate of camshaft rear end
• Chipping signal plate of camshaft rear end N
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> Remove debris and clean the signal plate of camshaft O
rear end or replace malfunctioning camshaft.
SEC905C


>> INSPECTION END
CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE)

2. Disconnect camshaft position sensor (PHASE) harness connector.
PBIB0563E

1 (+) - 2 (-)
1 (+) - 3 (-) Except 0 or ∞
2 (+) - 3 (-)
PBIB0564E

P0420, P0430 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION
A
The ECM monitors the switching frequency ratio of air fuel ratio (A/F) EC
sensor 1 and heated oxygen sensor 2.
A three way catalyst (manifold) with high oxygen storage capacity
will indicate a low switching frequency of heated oxygen sensor 2.
As oxygen storage capacity decreases, the heated oxygen sensor 2 C
switching frequency will increase.
When the frequency ratio of air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 and heated
oxygen sensor 2 approaches a specified limit value, the three way D
catalyst (manifold) malfunction is diagnosed.
PBIB2377E E
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause F
P0420 • Three way catalyst (manifold)
0420 • Exhaust tube
• Three way catalyst (manifold) does not oper-
(Bank 1) • Intake air leaks G
Catalyst system efficien- ate properly.
• Fuel injector
P0430 cy below threshold • Three way catalyst (manifold) does not have
• Fuel injector leaks
0430 enough oxygen storage capacity.
• Spark plug
(Bank 2) • Improper ignition timing H
NOTE: I
ing the next step.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. J
WITH CONSULT-III K
TESTING CONDITION:
Do not maintain engine speed for more than the specified minutes below.
1. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III. L
4. Turn ignition switch ON. M
N
load.
O
10. Select “DTC & SRT CONFIRMATION” then “SRT WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-III. P
11. Rev engine between 2,000 and 3,000 rpm and hold it for 3 consecutive minutes then release the acceler-
ator pedal completely.
If “INCMP” of “CATALYST” changed to “CMPLT”, go to step 12.
12. Wait 5 seconds at idle.
13. Rev engine between 2,000 and 3,000 rpm and maintain it until “INCMP” of “CATALYST” changes to
“CMPLT” (It will take approximately 5 minutes).
If not “CMPLT”, stop engine and cool it down to less than 70°C (158°F) and then retest from step 1.

15. Confirm that the 1st trip DTC is not detected.
If the 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-672, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the three way catalyst (manifold). During this check, a 1st
WITH GST
load.
8. Set voltmeter probe between ECM terminals 74 [HO2S2 (bank
1) signal], 55 [HO2S2 (bank 2) signal] and ground.
9. Keep engine speed at 2,500 rpm constant under no load.
10. Check that the voltage does not vary for more than 5 seconds.
If the voltage fluctuation cycle takes less than 5 seconds, go to
• 1 cycle: 0.6 - 1.0 → 0 - 0.3 → 0.6 - 1.0
PBIB1108E
1.CHECK EXHAUST SYSTEM

Visually check exhaust tubes and muffler for dents.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
2. Listen for an exhaust gas leak before the three way catalyst (manifold).
PBIB1216E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. A
EC
Items Specifications C
Target idle speed
A/T: 625 ±
M/T: 15 ± 5° BTDC (in Neutral position) D
Ignition timing
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. E
F
1. Stop engine and then turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check voltage between ECM terminals 21, 22, 23, 40, 41, 42
Refer to Wiring Diagram for FUEL INJECTOR, EC-893, "Wiring G
Diagram - ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM -".
Battery voltage should exist. H

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Perform EC-854, "Diagnosis Procedure". I
PBIB1172E
6.CHECK FUNCTION OF IGNITION COIL-I J

CAUTION:
perform the following procedure in a place with no combustible objects and good ventilation.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. K
pressure.
NOTE:
Do not use CONSULT-III to release fuel pressure, or fuel pres- L
3. Start engine.
4. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel M
pressure.
cal discharge from the ignition coils. N
BBIA0534E
checked.
8. Crank engine for five seconds or more to remove combustion gas in the cylinder. O

portion.

CAUTION:
50 cm (19.7 in)each other. Be careful not to get an electri- JMBIA0066GB
cal shock while checking, because the electrical dis-

NOTE:
functioning.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 7.
3. Crank engine for approximately 3 seconds, and recheck whether spark is generated between the spark
plug and the grounded metal portion.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Check that ignition coil, power transistor and their circuits. Refer to EC-862.
8.CHECK SPARK PLUG
OK or NG
OK >> Replace spark plug(s) with standard type one(s). For
spark plug type, refer to EM-129, "Removal and Installa-
tion".
2. GO TO 9.
SEF156I

2. Crank engine for about three seconds, and recheck whether spark is generated between the spark plug
and the grounded portion.

OK or NG
NG >> Replace spark plug(s) with standard type one(s). For spark plug type, refer to EM-129, "Removal
and Installation".
2. Remove fuel injector assembly.
Refer to EM-158, "Removal and Installation". A
3. Reconnect all fuel injector harness connectors.
EC
Check fuel does not drip from fuel injector.
OK or NG
C
NG (Drips.)>>Replace the fuel injector(s) from which fuel is dripping.
Trouble is fixed.>>INSPECTION END E

Trouble is not fixed.>>Replace three way catalyst (manifold).

NOTE:
If DTC P0441 is displayed with other DTC such as P2122, P2123, P2127, P2128 or P2138, first perform
trouble diagnosis for other DTC.
PBIB3640E
In this evaporative emission (EVAP) control system, purge flow occurs during non-closed throttle conditions.
Purge volume is related to air intake volume. Under normal purge conditions (non-closed throttle), the EVAP
canister purge volume control solenoid valve is open to admit purge flow. Purge flow exposes the EVAP con-
trol system pressure sensor to intake manifold vacuum.
Under normal conditions (non-closed throttle), sensor output voltage indicates if pressure drop and purge flow
are adequate. If not, a malfunction is determined.
lenoid valve stuck closed
and the circuit
• Loose, disconnected or improper con-
EVAP control system does not operate proper- nection of rubber tube
P0441 EVAP control system in- ly, EVAP control system has a leak between in- • Blocked rubber tube
0441 correct purge flow take manifold and EVAP control system • Cracked EVAP canister
pressure sensor. • EVAP canister purge volume control so-
lenoid valve circuit
• Blocked purge port
• Drain filter
CAUTION:
NOTE:
ing the next step.

TESTING CONDITION: A
WITH CONSULT-III
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. EC
4. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. C
6. Select “PURG FLOW P0441” of “EVAPORATIVE SYSTEM” in “DTC CONFIRMATION” mode with CON-
SULT-III.
7. Touch “START”. D
If “COMPLETED” is displayed, go to step 7.
8. When the following conditions are met, “TESTING” will be displayed on the CONSULT-III screen. Main-
tain the conditions continuously until “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”. (It will take at least 35 sec- E
onds.)
Selector lever Suitable position F

ENG SPEED 500 - 3,000 rpm
G
COOLAN TEMP/S 70 - 100°C (158 - 212°F)

If “TESTING” does not change for a long time, retry from step 2. H
9. Check that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. If “NG” is displayed, refer to EC-678,
Overall Function Check INFOID:0000000004053880 I
Use this procedure to check the overall monitoring function of the EVAP control system purge flow monitoring.
During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed. J
WITH GST
2. Start engine (TCS switch or VDC switch OFF) and warm it up to normal operating temperature. K
3. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds.
L
7. Set voltmeter probes to ECM terminals 32 (EVAP control sys-
tem pressure sensor signal) and ground.
8. Check EVAP control system pressure sensor value at idle M
speed and note it.
9. Establish and maintain the following conditions for at least 1
minute.
N
Air conditioner switch ON

Headlamp switch ON O
Rear window defogger switch ON PBIB1109E
Engine speed Approx. 3,000 rpm

Gear position Any position other than P, N or R
P
10. Verify that EVAP control system pressure sensor value stays 0.1V less than the value at idle speed (mea-
sured at step 6) for at least 1 second.


2. Check EVAP canister for cracks.
OK or NG
NG >> Replace EVAP canister.
2.CHECK PURGE FLOW
With CONSULT-III
1. Disconnect vacuum hose connected to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP ser-
vice port and install vacuum gauge. For the location of EVAP service port, refer to EC-495, "Description".
3. Select “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-III.
4. Rev engine up to 2,000 rpm.
5. Touch “Qd” and “Qu” on CONSULT-III screen to adjust “PURG VOL CONT/V” opening and check vacuum
existence.
PURG VOL CONT/V Vacuum

100% Should exist.
0% Should not exist.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 4.
3.CHECK PURGE FLOW
Without CONSULT-III
2. Stop engine.
3. Disconnect vacuum hose connected to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP ser-
vice port and install vacuum gauge. For the location of EVAP service port, refer to EC-495, "Description".
5. Check vacuum gauge indication before 60 seconds pass after starting engine.
Vacuum should not exist.

6. Rev engine up to 2,000 rpm after 100 seconds pass after starting engine.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 4.
2. Check EVAP purge line for improper connection or disconnection.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair it.
5.CHECK EVAP PURGE HOSE AND PURGE PORT

1. Disconnect purge hoses connected to EVAP service port (A)
and EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve (B). A
2. Blow air into each hose and EVAP purge port (C).
EC
SEF367U
D
3. Check that air flows freely.
OK or NG
E
NG >> Repair or clean hoses and/or purge port.
F
G
SEF368U
6.CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE H

With CONSULT-III
1. Start engine.
2. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-III. Check that engine speed var- I
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8. J
NG >> GO TO 7.
Refer to EC-695, "Component Inspection". K
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve. L

1. Disconnect EVAP control system pressure sensor harness connector. M
2. Check connectors for water.

N
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor. O
9.CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR FUNCTION
Refer to EC-708, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" for DTC P0452, EC-712, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" for
P0453. P
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
11.CHECK DRAIN FILTER
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> Replace drain filter.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13.
Inspect EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube). Check for evidence of leaks.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 14.
NG >> Replace it.
>> GO TO 15.
>> INSPECTION END

DRAIN FILTER
1. Check visually for insect nests in the drain filter air inlet.
2. Check visually for cracks or flaws in the appearance.
3. Check visually for cracks or flaws in the hose.
4. Blow air into port A and check that it flows freely out of port B.
5. Block port B.
6. Blow air into port A and check that there is no leakage.
7. If NG, replace drain filter.
PBIB3641E

A
This diagnosis detects leaks in the EVAP purge line using engine intake manifold vacuum. EC
If pressure does not increase, the ECM will check for leaks in the line between the fuel tank and EVAP canis-
ter purge volume control solenoid valve, under the following Vacuum test conditions.
The EVAP canister vent control valve is closed to shut the EVAP purge line off. The EVAP canister purge vol-
ume control solenoid valve will then be opened to depressurize the EVAP purge line using intake manifold C
vacuum. After this occurs, the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve will be closed.
PBIB3640E
I
canister purge volume control solenoid valve. K
• Foreign matter caught in EVAP canister vent con-
trol valve.
L
EVAP control system EVAP control system has a leak, EVAP
P0442 • Loose or disconnected rubber tube
small leak detected control system does not operate prop-
0442 • EVAP canister vent control valve and the circuit
(negative pressure) erly. M
• EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid
• O-ring of EVAP canister vent control valve is N
missing or damaged
• Drain filter
• EVAP control system pressure sensor O
P
CAUTION:
MIL may illuminate.

NOTE:
ing the next step.
TESTING CONDITION:
• Always perform test at a temperature of 0 to 30°C (32 to 86°F).
WITH CONSULT-III
4. Check that the following conditions are met.
COOLAN TEMP/S: 0 - 70°C (32 - 158°F)
INT/A TEMP SE: 0 - 30°C (32 - 86°F)
5. Select “EVP SML LEAK P0442/P1442” of “EVAPORATIVE SYSTEM” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode
with CONSULT-III.
NOTE:
6. Check that “OK” is displayed.
NOTE:
Check that EVAP hoses are connected to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
properly.
WITH GST
NOTE:
Be sure to read the explanation of Driving Pattern ON EC-918 before driving vehicle.
1. Start engine.
2. Drive vehicle according to Driving Pattern, EC-918.
3. Stop vehicle.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
SEF915U

2.CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP INSTALLATION A

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3. EC
3.CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP FUNCTION C
OK or NG
D
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. F
G
EVAP service port, refer to EC-495, "Description".
H
J
BBIA0550E
SEF916U N
NOTE:
Improper installation of the EVAP service port adapter to the EVAP service port may cause leaking.
O
6.CHECK FOR EVAP LEAK P
With CONSULT-III
the bar graph.
CAUTION:

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
SEF200U

Without CONSULT-III
- Drain filter (3)
- EVAP ccanister (4)
- : Vehicle front
kPa (10 to 20 mmHg, 0.39 to 0.79 inHg), then remove pump and
EVAP service port adapter.
CAUTION:

in the system.
to EC-495, "Description".
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
SEF200U

Refer to .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
10.CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER IS SATURATED WITH WATER A
attached.
EC
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 11.
C
No (Without CONSULT-III)>>GO TO 14.
E
BBIA0558E

Weigh the EVAP canister with the EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor F
attached.
OK or NG G
NG >> GO TO 12. H
• EVAP canister for damage I
• EVAP hose between EVAP canister and drain filter for clogging or poor connection
>> Repair hose or replace EVAP canister. J

With CONSULT-III K
2. Start engine.
L
OK or NG
M
OK >> GO TO 17.
NG >> GO TO 15.
14.CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION N
Without CONSULT-III
2. Stop engine. O
P
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16.
NG >> GO TO 15.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 17.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 18.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 19.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 20.
>> GO TO 21.
connection. For location, refer to EC-867, "System Description".
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 22.
Check recirculation line between filler neck tube and fuel tank for clogging, kinks, cracks, looseness and
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 23.
NG >> Repair or replace hose, tube or filler neck tube.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 24.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 25. A
EC
>> INSPECTION END C

FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE (BUILT INTO FUEL FILLER CAP) D
E
SEF445Y
2. Check valve opening pressure and vacuum. H
Pressure: 15.3 - 20.0 kPa (0.156 - 0.204 kg/cm2, 2.22 -

I
2.90 psi)
Vacuum: −6.0 to −3.3 kPa (−0.061 to −0.034 kg/cm2,
−0.87 to −0.48 psi) J
CAUTION:
K
DRAIN FILTER
L
3. Check visually for cracks or flaws in the hose. M
5. Block port B.
6. Blow air into port A and check that there is no leakage. N
P
PBIB3641E

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION


EVAP canister EVAP canister purge vol-
purge flow control ume control solenoid valve
The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is used to
control the flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canister. The EVAP
canister purge volume control solenoid valve is moved by ON/OFF
pulses from the ECM. The longer the ON pulse, the greater the
amount of fuel vapor that will flow through the valve.
PBIB2057E
lenoid valve
The canister purge flow is detected during the (The valve is stuck open.)
EVAP canister purge
P0443 specified driving conditions, even when EVAP • EVAP canister vent control valve
volume control solenoid
0443 canister purge volume control solenoid valve is • Drain filter
valve
completely closed. • EVAP canister
• Hoses
(Hoses are connected incorrectly or
clogged.)

A
NOTE:
ing the next step. EC
TESTING CONDITION: C
WITH CONSULT-III
D
5. Select “PURG VOL CN/V P1444” (for DTC P0443) of “EVAPORATIVE SYSTEM” in “DTC WORK SUP-
PORT” mode with CONSULT-III. F
7. Start engine and let it idle until “TESTING” on CONSULT-III changes to “COMPLETED”. (It will take
approximately 10 seconds.) G
If “TESTING” is not displayed after 5 minutes, retry from step 2.
8. Check that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. If “NG” is displayed, refer to EC-689,
"Diagnosis Procedure". H
WITH GST I
J
5. Start engine and let it idle for at least 20 seconds. K
L
M
harness connector.
BBIA0550E

tester.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 2.
PBIB2605E


FOR OPEN AND SHORT

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
OK or NG
With CONSULT-III
3. Start engine.
OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 7. A
EC
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
C
2. Check the rubber tube for clogging. D
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Clean the rubber tube using an air blower. E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> Replace drain filter. G
H
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
I
attached. J
2. Check if water will drain from the EVAP canister.
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 12. K
No >> GO TO 14.
M
BBIA0558E

N
attached.
OK or NG O
OK >> GO TO 14.
NG >> GO TO 13.
13.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART P



>> INSPECTION END


With CONSULT-III

(PURG VOL CONT/V value) between (A) and (B)
100% Yes
0% No
PBIB2058E
Without CONSULT-III

Condition
between (A) and (B)
Yes
terminals 1 and 2
No supply No
PBIB2059E
DRAIN FILTER
5. Block port B.
PBIB3641E

VALVE
A
VALVE
EC
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Sensor Input signal to ECM ECM function Actuator C

D
Battery Battery voltage*1 E
EVAP canister EVAP canister purge vol-
purge flow control ume control solenoid valve
F
G
*2: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line. H
I
J
The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve uses a ON/
OFF duty to control the flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canis-
ter. The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is K
moved by ON/OFF pulses from the ECM. The longer the ON pulse,
the greater the amount of fuel vapor that will flow through the valve.
L
PBIB2057E
On Board Diagnosis Logic INFOID:0000000004053893 N
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause O
EVAP canister purge volume (The solenoid valve circuit is open or
P0444 An excessively low voltage signal is sent
control solenoid valve circuit shorted.)
0444 to ECM through the valve P
open • EVAP canister purge volume control so-
lenoid valve
P0445 An excessively high voltage signal is sent (The solenoid valve circuit is shorted.)
control solenoid valve circuit
0445 to ECM through the valve • EVAP canister purge volume control so-
shorted
lenoid valve

VALVE
NOTE:
ing the next step.
TESTING CONDITION:
harness connector.
BBIA0550E

tester.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 2.
PBIB2605E


FOR OPEN AND SHORT

VALVE
OK or NG A
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. EC
With CONSULT-III C
2. Start engine.
ies according to the valve opening. D
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5. E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve. G
H
>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection INFOID:0000000004053896 I

J
With CONSULT-III
K

(PURG VOL CONT/V value) between (A) and (B)
L
100% Yes
0% No
M
PBIB2058E
Without CONSULT-III N
O
Condition
between (A) and (B)
12V direct current supply between P
Yes
terminals 1 and 2
No supply No
PBIB2059E

The EVAP canister vent control valve (1) is located on the EVAP
canister (4) and is used to seal the canister vent.
opened.
PBIB3642E
Control System diagnosis.
• : Vehicle front
ALBIA0514ZZ
P0447 EVAP canister vent con- An improper voltage signal is sent to ECM (The valve circuit is open or shorted.)
0447 trol valve circuit open through EVAP canister vent control valve. • EVAP canister vent control valve
• Drain filter
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perfom the following before conduct-
ing the next step.
TESTING CONDITION:
1.INSPECTION START
Do you have CONSULT-III?
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 2.
No >> GO TO 3.
2.CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE CIRCUIT A

With CONSULT-III
2. Select “VENT CONTROL/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-III. EC
3. Touch “ON/OFF” on CONSULT-III screen.
4. Check for operating sound of the valve.
OK or NG C
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 3.
D
3.CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
2. Disconnect EVAP canister vent control valve (1) harness con- E
nector.
- Drain filter (3)
- EVAP canister (4) F
- : Vehicle front
G
ALBIA0514ZZ H
4. Check voltage between EVAP canister vent control valve termi-

nal 1 and ground with CONSULT-III or tester. I

OK or NG J
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.
K
PBIB0152E
4.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART L

• Harness for open or short between EVAP canister vent control valve and IPDM E/R M

N
5.CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. O
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 117 and EVAP canister vent control valve terminal 2.
P
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.
• Harness for open or short between EVAP canister vent control valve and ECM
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
>> INSPECTION END


With CONSULT-III
rusted.
If NG, go to next step.
Check new O-ring is installed properly.
Air passage continuity PBIB1033E

Condition VENT CONTROL/V
between (A) and (B)
ON No
OFF Yes
7. Clean the air passage (portion A to B) of EVAP canister vent control valve using an air blower.
9. If NG, replace EVAP canister vent control valve.

Without CONSULT-III
1. Remove EVAP canister vent control valve from EVAP canister. A
rusted.
EC
PBIB1033E
3. Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the E
Check that new O-ring is installed properly.
F
Condition
between (A) and (B)
12V direct current supply between G
No
terminals 1 and 2
OFF Yes
Operation takes less than 1 second. PBIB1034E
H
5. Perform step 3 again. I
DRAIN FILTER J
3. Check visually for cracks or flaws in the hose. K
5. Block port B.
L
M
N
PBIB3641E

The EVAP canister vent control valve (1) is located on the EVAP
canister (4) and is used to seal the canister vent.
opened.
PBIB3642E
Control System diagnosis.
• : Vehicle front
ALBIA0514ZZ
and the circuit
P0448 EVAP canister vent con- EVAP canister vent control valve remains
• Blocked rubber tube to EVAP canister
0448 trol valve close closed under specified driving conditions.
vent control valve
• Drain filter
NOTE:
ing the next step.
WITH CONSULT-III
4. Start engine and let it idle for at least 1 minute.
5. Repeat next procedures 3 times.
a. Increase the engine speed up to between 3,000 and 3,500 rpm and keep it for 2 minutes and 50 seconds
to 3 minutes.

Do not exceed 3 minutes.
b. Fully released accelerator pedal and keep engine idle for about 5 seconds. A
If 1st trip DTC is not detected, go to the next step. EC
8. Repeat next procedure 20 times.
a. Quickly increase the engine speed between 4,000 and 4,500 rpm or more and maintain that speed for 25
to 30 seconds. C
b. Fully released accelerator pedal and keep engine idle for at least 35 seconds.
F
JMBIA1516GB

G
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-III” above. H
1.CHECK RUBBER TUBE I

2. Disconnect rubber tube connected to EVAP canister vent control
valve (1). J
- Drain filter (3)
- EVAP canister (4) K
- : Vehicle front
OK or NG L
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Clean rubber tube using an air blower.
ALBIA0514ZZ
M
OK or NG N
OK >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE O

OK or NG P
OK >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED IS WITH WATER
attached.

Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 5.
No >> GO TO 7.
BBIA0558E

attached.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.


OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
>> INSPECTION END


With CONSULT-III

2. Check portionof B EVAP canister vent control valve for being
rusted. A
4. Turn ignition switch ON. EC
PBIB1033E
D
Check new O-ring is installed properly. E

Condition VENT CONTROL/V
between (A) and (B) F
ON No
OFF Yes
G
H
9. If NG, replace EVAP canister vent control valve. I
Without CONSULT-III
J
rusted.
M
PBIB1033E
following conditions. N
Check new O-ring is installed properly.
Condition
Air passage continuity O
between (A) and (B)
No
terminals 1 and 2 P
OFF Yes
Operation takes less than 1 second. PBIB1034E


DRAIN FILTER
5. Block port B.
PBIB3641E

A

pressure increases.
• : Vehicle front
D
ALBIA0514ZZ E
H
PBIB3370E

I
EC-752. J
EVAP control system K
P0451 ECM detects a sloshing signal from the EVAP • Harness or connectors
pressure sensor perfor-
0451 control system pressure sensor • EVAP control system pressure sensor
mance
L
ducting the next step. M
N
NOTE:
O
P


BBIA0539E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK EVPA CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR CONNECTOR FOR WATER
connector.
- Drain filter (3)
- EVAP canister (4)
- : Vehicle front
2. Check sensor harness connector for water.

OK or NG
ALBIA0514ZZ
OK >> GO TO 3.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
>> INSPECTION END


1. Remove EVAP control system pressure sensor with its harness connector connected from EVAP canis-
ter.
Do not reuse the O-ring, replace it with a new one.

terminal 32 and ground under the following conditions. A
Applied vacuum kPa

Voltage V
(kg/cm2, psi) EC
C
CAUTION:
PBIB1173E
D
E


pressure increases.
• : Vehicle front
ALBIA0514ZZ
PBIB3370E
EC-752.
EVAP control system • Harness or connectors
pressure sensor low in- (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
0452 sent to ECM.
put • EVAP control system pressure sensor
NOTE:
ing the next step.
TESTING CONDITION:
WITH CONSULT-III
6. Check that “FUEL T/TMP SE” is more than 0°C (32°F).
A
WITH GST
2. Check that voltage between ECM terminal 107 (Fuel tank tem- EC
7. Select Service $07 with GST. D
PBIB1110E E
F
2. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-545, "Ground Inspection". G
BBIA0539E J
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. K
2.CHECK CONNECTOR
L
connector.
- Drain filter (3)
- EVAP canister (4) M
- : Vehicle front
2. Check sensor harness connector for water.
N
OK or NG
ALBIA0514ZZ
OK >> GO TO 3. O
P

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.
PBIB0138E

67.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.
SHORT
2.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> GO TO 8.

A
9.CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR EC
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10. C
D
>> INSPECTION END E

EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR F

ter.
Do not reuse the O-ring, replace it with a new one. G
terminal 32 and ground under the following conditions. H
Applied vacuum kPa

Voltage V I
(kg/cm2, psi)
J
CAUTION:
PBIB1173E
K
L


pressure increases.
• : Vehicle front
ALBIA0514ZZ
PBIB3370E
EC-752.
EVAP control system
P0453 An excessively high voltage from the sensor is • EVAP canister vent control valve
pressure sensor high in-
0453 sent to ECM. • EVAP canister
put
• drain filter
• Rubber hose from EVAP canister vent
control valve to vehicle frame
NOTE:
ing the next step.
TESTING CONDITION:
With CONSULT-III

6. Check that “FUEL T/TMP SE” is more than 0°C (32°F). A
EC
With GST
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. C
E
F
PBIB1110E

G

K
BBIA0539E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. L
2.CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Disconnect EVAP control system pressure sensor (2) harness M
connector.
- Drain filter (3) N
- EVAP canister (4)
- : Vehicle front
2. Check sensor harness connector for water. O
OK or NG P
ALBIA0514ZZ
OK >> GO TO 3.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.
PBIB0138E

67.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.
SHORT
2.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> GO TO 8.

A
9.CHECK RUBBER TUBE EC
2. Check the rubber tube for clogging, vent and kinked.
OK or NG C
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> Clean the rubber tube using an air blower, repair or replace rubber tube.
10.CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE D
OK or NG
E
OK >> GO TO 11.
11.CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12. G
12.CHECK DRAIN FILTER H
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13. I
1. Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor J
attached.
Yes or No K
Yes >> GO TO 14.
No >> GO TO 16.
L
BBIA0558E
14.CHECK EVAP CANISTER N
attached.
O
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16. P
NG >> GO TO 15.

>> INSPECTION END


ter.
terminal 32 and ground under the following conditions.
Applied vacuum kPa

Voltage V
(kg/cm2, psi)
CAUTION:
PBIB1173E

DRAIN FILTER
5. Block port B.
PBIB3641E

A
This diagnosis detects a very large leak (fuel filler cap fell off etc.) in EVAP system between the fuel tank and EC
EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve.
G
PBIB3640E
H
• Fuel filler cap remains open or fails to
close.
• Incorrect fuel tank vacuum relief valve I
• Leak is in line between intake manifold
J
and EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve.
• Foreign matter caught in EVAP canister
vent control valve. K
EVAP control system has a very large leak such • EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube)
P0455 EVAP control system
as fuel filler cap fell off, EVAP control system leaks
0455 gross leak detected
does not operate properly. • EVAP purge line rubber tube bent. L
• Loose or disconnected rubber tube
• EVAP canister vent control valve and the
circuit
• EVAP canister purge volume control so- M
lenoid valve and the circuit
• O-ring of EVAP canister vent control
valve is missing or damaged. N
O
CAUTION:
MIL may illuminate. P
CAUTION:
Never remove fuel filler cap during the DTC Confirmation Procedure.
NOTE:

• Check that EVAP hoses are connected to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve prop-
erly.
TESTING CONDITION:
• Perform “DTC WORK SUPPORT” when the fuel level is between 1/4 and 3/4 full and vehicle is placed
• Open engine hood before conducting the following procedures.
WITH CONSULT-III
1. Tighten fuel filler cap securely until ratcheting sound is heard.
COOLAN TEMP/S: 0 - 70°C (32 - 158°F)
INT/A TEMP SE: 0 - 60°C (32 - 140°F)
6. Select “EVP SML LEAK P0442/P1442” of “EVAPORATIVE SYSTEM” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode
with CONSULT-III.
NOTE:
If “NG” is displayed, select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode and check that “EVAP GROSS LEAK [P0455]”
is displayed. If it is displayed, refer to EC-718, "Diagnosis Procedure".
If P0442 is displayed, perform Diagnostic Procedure for DTC P0442 EC-682, "Diagnosis Procedure".
WITH GST
NOTE:
Be sure to read the explanation of EC-918, "Emission-related Diagnostic Information" before driving vehicle.
1. Start engine.
2. Drive vehicle according to EC-918, "Emission-related Diagnostic Information".
3. Stop vehicle.
• If P0442 is displayed on the screen, go to Diagnostic Procedure, for DTC P0442, EC-682.
• If P0441 is displayed on the screen, go to Diagnostic Procedure for DTC P0441, EC-678.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
SEF915U

2.CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP INSTALLATION A

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3. EC
3.CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP FUNCTION C
OK or NG
D
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. F
G
Check EVAP purge line (pipe, rubber tube, fuel tank and EVAP canister) for cracks, improper connection or
disconnection.
H
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
I
J
>> GO TO 7.
7.CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE K
L
OK or NG
M
OK >> GO TO 8.
8.INSTALL THE PRESSURE PUMP N
pressure pump to EVAP service port securely.
NOTE: O
BBIA0550E

SEF916U
With CONSULT-III
the bar graph.
CAUTION:
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
SEF200U

Without CONSULT-III
- Drain filter (3)
- EVAP canister (4)
- : Vehicle front
kPa (0.014 to 0.028 kg/cm2, 0.2 to 0.4 psi), then remove pump
and EVAP service port adapter.
CAUTION:

in the system.

detector, refer to the instruction manual for more details. Refer A
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12. EC
SEF200U
11.CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION D
With CONSULT-III
1. Disconnect vacuum hose to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port. E
2. Start engine.
5. Check vacuum hose for vacuum when revving engine up to 2,000 rpm. F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 14.
NG >> GO TO 13. G
2. Stop engine.
3. Disconnect vacuum hose to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port.
I
Vacuum should exist. J

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 15.
K
NG >> GO TO 13.
Check vacuum hoses for clogging or disconnection. Refer to EC-495, "Description". L
OK or NG
OK (Without CONSULT-III)>>GO TO 15. M
N
With CONSULT-III
1. Start engine.
ies according to the valve opening. O
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16.
NG >> GO TO 15. P

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16.


OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 17.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 18.
Check EVAP/ORVR line between EVAP canister and fuel tank for clogging, kink, looseness and improper
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 19.
Check recirculation line between filler neck tube and fuel tank for clogging, kink, cracks, looseness and
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 20.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 21.
>> INSPECTION END

SEF445Y

A
Pressure: 2
15.3 - 20.0 kPa (0.156 - 0.204 kg/cm , 2.22 -
2.90 psi)
EC
−0.87 to −0.48 psi)
3. If out of specification, replace fuel filler cap as an assembly. C
CAUTION:
rect fuel filler cap is used, the MIL may illuminate. D

This diagnosis detects very small leaks in the EVAP line between fuel tank and EVAP canister purge volume
control solenoid valve, using the negativie pressure.
If ECM judges a leak which corresponds to a very small leak, the very small leak P0456 will be detected.
If ECM judges a leak equivalent to a small leak, EVAP small leak P0442 will be detected.
If ECM judges that there are no leaks, the diagnosis will be OK.
PBIB3640E
canister purge volume control solenoid valve.
• Foreign matter caught in EVAP canister vent con-
trol valve.
Evaporative emission
• EVAP system has a very small leak. • Loose or disconnected rubber tube
P0456 control system very
• EVAP system does not operate prop- • EVAP canister vent control valve and the circuit
0456 small leak (negative
erly. • EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid
pressure check)
• O-ring of EVAP canister vent control valve is miss-
ing or damaged
• Foreign matter caught in EVAP canister purge vol-
ume control solenoid valve
CAUTION:
MIL may illuminate.

A
NOTE:
• If DTC P0456 is displayed with P0442, first perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0456.
• After repair, check that the hoses and clips are installed properly. EC
TESTING CONDITION:
• Open engine hood before conducting the following procedure. D
• If any of following conditions are met just before the DTC confirmation procedure, leave the vehicle
for more than 1 hour.
- Fuel filler cap is removed.
- Fuel is refilled or drained. E
- EVAP component part/parts is/are removed.
WITH CONSULT-III F
FUEL LEVEL SE: 0.25 - 1.4V G
COOLAN TEMP/S: 0 - 32°C (32 - 90°F)
FUEL T/TMP SE: 0 - 35°C (32 - 95°F)
INT A/TEMP SE: More than 0°C (32°F) H
If NG, turn ignition switch OFF and leave the vehicle in a cool place (soak the vehicle), or refill/drain fuel
until the output voltage of the “FUEL LEVEL SE” meets within the range above and leave the vehicle for
more than 1 hour. Then start from step 1.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. I
5. Select “EVP V/S LEAK P0456/P1456” of “EVAPORATIVE SYSTEM” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode
with CONSULT-III. J
Follow the instruction displayed.
NOTE: K
• If the engine speed cannot be maintained within the range displayed on CONSULT-III screen, go
to EC-470, "Basic Inspection".
• Check that EVAP hoses are connected to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve L
properly.
M
WITH GST
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the EVAP very small leak function. During this check, a 1st
trip DTC might not be confirmed. N
CAUTION:
• Never use compressed air, doing so may damage the EVAP system.
• Never start engine. O
• Never exceeded 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2, 0.6 psi).

1. Attach the EVAP service port adapter securely to the EVAP ser-
vice port.
BBIA0550E
2. Set the pressure pump and a hose.

3. Also set a vacuum gauge via 3-way connector and a hose.
5. Connect GST and select Service $08.
6. Using Service $08 control the EVAP canister vent control valve
(close).
7. Apply pressure and check the following conditions are satisfied.
Pressure to be applied: 2.7 kPa (0.028 kg/cm2, 0.39 psi)
Time to be waited after the pressure drawn in to the EVAP
system and the pressure to be dropped: 60 seconds and
the pressure should not be dropped more than 0.4 kPa SEF462UI
(0.004 kg/cm2, 0.06 psi).

8. Disconnect GST.
13. Restart engine and let it idle for 90 seconds.
14. Keep engine speed at 2,000 rpm for 30 seconds.
NOTE:
For more information, refer to GST instruction manual.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
SEF915U

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP FUNCTION A

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. EC
NG >> GO TO 4.
C
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. D
To locate the EVAP leak, install EVAP service port adapter and E
EVAP service port, refer to EC-495, "Description".
NOTE: F
BBIA0550E
H
SEF916U
L
6.CHECK FOR EVAP LEAK M
With CONSULT-III
2. Select “EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE” of “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-III. N
the bar graph.
CAUTION: O
P

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
SEF200U

Without CONSULT-III
- Drain filter (3)
- EVAP canister (4)
- : Vehicle front
kPa (0.014 to 0.028 kg/cm2, 0.2 to 0.4 psi), then remove pump
and EVAP service port adapter.
CAUTION:

in the system.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
SEF200U

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
attached.

Yes or No A
Yes >> GO TO 10.
No (Without CONSULT-III)>>GO TO 13. EC
BBIA0558E
10.CHECK EVAP CANISTER D
attached.
E
OK or NG
F
NG >> GO TO 11.
• EVAP hose between EVAP canister and vehicle frame for clogging or poor connection H

12.CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION I
With CONSULT-III
1. Disconnect vacuum hose connected to EVAP service purge volume control solenoid valve from EVAP
canister purge volume control solenoid valve. J
2. Start engine.
4. Touch “Qu” on CONSULT-III screen to increase “PURG VOL CONT/V” opening to 100%. K
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16. L
NG >> GO TO 14.
M
Without CONSULT-III
2. Stop engine.
3. Disconnect vacuum hose connected to EVAP service purge volume control solenoid valve from EVAP N
canister purge volume control solenoid valve.
5. Check vacuum hose for vacuum when revving engine up to 2,000 rpm. O

OK or NG P
OK >> GO TO 15.
NG >> GO TO 14.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 15.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 17.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 18.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 19.
>> GO TO 20.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 21.
Check recirculation line between filler neck tube and fuel tank for clogging, kinks, cracks, looseness and
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 22.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 23.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 24.


C
D
SEF445Y
2. Check valve opening pressure and vacuum. G
Pressure: 15.3 - 20.0 kPa (0.156 - 0.204 kg/cm2, 2.22 - H

2.90 psi)
−0.87 to −0.48 psi) I
CAUTION:
Use only a genuine fuel filler cap as a replacement. If an incor- J
SEF943S
rect fuel filler cap is used, the MIL may come on.

The fuel level sensor is mounted in the fuel level sensor unit. The
It consists of two parts, one is mechanical float and the other is vari-
BBIA0529E
NOTE:
When the vehicle is parked, the fuel level in the fuel tank is naturally stable. It means that output signal of the
fuel level sensor does not change. If ECM senses sloshing signal from the sensor, fuel level sensor malfunc-
tion is detected.
Even though the vehicle is parked, a signal be- shorted)
P0460 Fuel level sensor circuit
ing varied is sent from the fuel level sensor to • Harness or connectors
0460 noise
ECM. (The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
2. Start engine and wait maximum of 2 consecutive minutes.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.

>> INSPECTION END
A
EC

sensor signal to the ECM through CAN communication line.
BBIA0529E
NOTE:
Driving long distances naturally affect fuel gauge level.
This diagnosis detects the fuel gauge malfunction of the gauge not moving even after a long distance has
been driven.
The output signal of the fuel level sensor does
shorted)
P0461 Fuel level sensor circuit not change within the specified range even
0461 range/performance though the vehicle has been driven a long dis-
tance.
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the fuel level sensor. During this check, a 1st trip DTC
WARNING:
When performing the following procedure, always observe the handling of the fuel. Refer to FL-6,
"Removal and Installation".
TESTING CONDITION:
Before starting overall function check, preparation of draining fuel and refilling fuel is required.
WITH CONSULT-III
NOTE:
Start from step 10, if it is possible to confirm that the fuel cannot be drained by 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/
8 Imp gal) in advance.
2. Release fuel pressure from fuel line, refer to EC-943, "Fuel Pressure Check".
5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds then turn ON.
6. Select “FUEL LEVEL SE” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III.
8. Select “FUEL PUMP” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-III.
9. Touch ON and drain fuel approximately 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/8 Imp gal) and stop it.
13. Confirm whether the voltage changes more than 0.03V during step 7 to 10 and 10 to 12.
If NG, go to EC-735, "Diagnosis Procedure". A
WITH GST
NOTE:
Start from step 8, if it is possible to confirm that the fuel cannot be drained by 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/8 EC
Imp gal) in advance.
2. Release fuel pressure from fuel line. Refer to EC-943, "Fuel Pressure Check". C
6. Drain fuel by 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/8 Imp gal) from the fuel tank using proper equipment. D
9. Confirm that the fuel gauge indication varies. E
F
G
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Go to MWI-32, "Component Function Check". H
I
>> INSPECTION END
J

sensor signal to the ECM through CAN communication line.
BBIA0529E
NOTE:
• If DTC P0462 or P0463 is displayed with DTC UXXXX, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC
UXXXX.
• If DTC P0462 or P0463 is displayed with DTC P0607, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC
P0607. Refer to EC-751, "Description".
P0462 Fuel level sensor circuit An excessively low voltage from the sensor is • Harness or connectors
0462 low input sent to ECM. (The CAN communication line is open or
shorted)
P0463 Fuel level sensor circuit An excessively high voltage from the sensor is (The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
0463 high input sent to ECM. • Combination meter
NOTE:
ing the next step.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at ignition
switch ON.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.

>> INSPECTION END
A
EC

P0500 VSS
P0500 VSS
NOTE:
to EC-751, "Description"
The vehicle speed signal is sent to the combination meter from the “ABS actuator and electric unit (control
unit)” by CAN communication line. The combination meter then sends a signal to the ECM by CAN communi-
cation line.
(The CAN communication line is open or short-
ed)
The almost 0 km/h (0 MPH) signal from • Harness or connectors
P0500
Vehicle speed sensor vehicle speed sensor is sent to ECM even (The vehicle speed signal circuit is open or
0500
when vehicle is being driven. shorted)
• Wheel sensor
• ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, ECM enters fail-safe mode.
Detected item Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode

When the fail-safe system for vehicle speed sensor is activated, the cooling fan operates
Vehicle speed sensor
(High) while engine is running.
CAUTION:
NOTE:
ing the next step.
TESTING CONDITION:
WITH CONSULT-III
1. Start engine (VDC switch OFF).
2. Read “VHCL SPEED SE” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III. The vehicle speed on CON-
SULT-III should exceed 10 km/h (6 MPH) when rotating wheels with suitable gear position.
4. Warm engine up to normal operating temperature.
1,550 - 6,000 rpm (M/T)

ENG SPEED
1,700 - 6,000 rpm (A/T)

P0500 VSS
5.5 - 31.8 msec (M/T)
B/FUEL SCHDL
6.3 - 31.8 msec (A/T) A
Selector lever Neutral position (M/T)
Except P or N position (A/T)
PW/ST SIGNAL OFF EC
C
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the vehicle speed sensor circuit. During this check, a 1st
trip DTC might not be confirmed. D
WITH GST
1. Lift up drive wheels. E
2. Start engine.
3. Read vehicle speed sensor signal in Service $01 with GST.
The vehicle speed sensor on GST should be able to exceed 10 km/h (6 MPH) when rotating wheels with
suitable gear position. F
G
Refer to BRC-9, "Work Flow" or BRC-155, "Work Flow". H
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Repair or replace. I
J
>> INSPECTION END

K

P0506 ISC SYSTEM
P0506 ISC SYSTEM
NOTE:
varied to allow for optimum control of the engine idling speed. The crankshaft position sensor (POS) detects
memorized in the ECM. The target engine speed is the lowest speed at which the engine can operate steadily.
operation, etc.).
Idle speed control sys-
P0506 The idle speed is less than the target idle speed • Electric throttle control actuator
tem RPM lower than ex-
0506 by 100 rpm or more. • Intake air leak
pected
NOTE:
• If the target idle speed is out of the specified value, perform, EC-475, "Idle Air Volume Learning",
TESTING CONDITION:
• Before performing the following procedure,confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle.
• Always perform the test at a temperature above −10°C(14°F).

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
2.REPLACE ECM
1. Stop engine.
2. Replace ECM.
P0506 ISC SYSTEM
6. Perform EC-475, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". A

P0507 ISC SYSTEM
P0507 ISC SYSTEM
NOTE:
varied to allow for optimum control of the engine idling speed. The crankshaft position sensor (POS) detects
memorized in the ECM. The target engine speed is the lowest speed at which the engine can operate steadily.
operation, etc.).
Idle speed control sys- • Electric throttle control actuator
P0507 The idle speed is more than the target idle
tem RPM higher than • Intake air leak
0507 speed by 200 rpm or more.
expected • PCV system
NOTE:
• If the target idle speed is out of the specified value, perform, EC-475, "Idle Air Volume Learning",
TESTING CONDITION:
• Always perform the test at a temperature above −10°C(14°F).
1.CHECK PCV HOSE CONNECTION

Confirm that PCV hose is connected correctly.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.

P0507 ISC SYSTEM
3.REPLACE ECM A
1. Stop engine.
2. Replace ECM.
EC
>> INSPECTION END D

P0550 PSP SENSOR
P0550 PSP SENSOR
Power steering pressure (PSP) sensor is installed to the power

steering high-pressure tube and detects a power steering load. This
sensor is a potentiometer which transforms the power steering load
into output voltage, and emits the voltage signal to the ECM. The
ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator and adjusts the
throttle valve opening angle to increase the engine speed and
adjusts the idle speed for the increased load.
BBIA0552E

NOTE:
EC-752.
P0550 Power steering pressure An excessively low or high voltage from the
0550 sensor circuit sensor is sent to ECM.

BBIA0539E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.

P0550 PSP SENSOR
2.CHECK PSP SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT A

1. Disconnect power steering pressure (PSP) sensor harness con-
nector.
EC
D
BBIA0552E
3. Check voltage between PSP sensor terminal 3 and ground with E

F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power G
PBIB1872E H
3.CHECK PSP SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
I
3. Check harness continuity between PSP sensor terminal 1 and ECM terminal 67.
J
K
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
L
4.CHECK PSP SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 12 and PSP sensor terminal 2.
M
OK or NG N
OK >> GO TO 5.
O
5.CHECK PSP SENSOR
OK or NG P
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Replace PSP sensor.
>> INSPECTION END

P0550 PSP SENSOR
POWER STEERING PRESSURE SENSOR

Condition Voltage
Steering wheel: being turned 0.5 - 4.5V
Steering wheel: not being turned 0.4 - 0.8V
MBIB0126E

A
Battery voltage is supplied to the ECM even when the ignition switch EC
is turned OFF for the ECM memory function of the DTC memory, the
air-fuel ratio feedback compensation value memory, the idle air vol-
ume learning value memory, etc.
C
PBIB1164E E
F
P0603 ECM power supply cir- ECM back up RAM system does not function [ECM power supply (back up) circuit is G
0603 cuit properly. open or shorted.]
• ECM
H
ducting the next step. I
J
3. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds, and then turn it ON. K
1.CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY M

2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. N
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
P
NG >> GO TO 2.
MBIB0026E


• 20A fuse (No.53)
• Harness for open or short between ECM and battery
>> Repair open circuit in harness or connectors.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
With CONSULT-III
With GST
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 5.
5.REPLACE ECM
1. Replace ECM.
>> INSPECTION END

P0605 ECM
P0605 ECM
A
The ECM consists of a microcomputer and connectors for signal EC

input and output and for power supply. The ECM controls the
engine.
C
PBIB1164E E
This self-diagnosis has one or two trip detection logic. F
A) ECM calculation function is malfunctioning. G
P0605
Engine control module B) ECM EEP-ROM system is malfunctioning. • ECM
0605
C) ECM self shut-off function is malfunctioning.
H
FAIL-SAFE MODE
ECM enters fail-safe mode when the malfunction A is detected.
I
Detected items Engine operation condition in fail-safe mode
• ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5
Malfunction A degrees) by the return spring. J
• ECM deactivates ASCD operation.

K
Perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A first. If the 1st trip DTC cannot be confirmed, perform
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B. If there is no malfunction on PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION
B, perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C. L
NOTE:
ing the next step.
M
N
3. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-750, "Diagnosis Procedure". O

With CONSULT-III P
With CONSULT-III
P0605 ECM
2. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds, and then turn ON.
3. Repeat step 2 for 32 times.
1.INSPECTION START
With CONSULT-III
With GST
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 2.
2.REPLACE ECM
1. Replace ECM.
>> INSPECTION END

P0607 ECM
P0607 ECM
A
D
E
P0607 When detecting error during the initial diagno-
CAN communication bus • ECM
0607 sis of CAN controller of ECM.
F
1. Turn ignition switch ON. G

2. Check DTC.
H
1.INSPECTION START I
With CONSULT-III
2. Select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-III. J
5. Is the DTC P0607 displayed again? K
With GST
2. Select “Service $04” with GST. L
M
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 2.
No >> INSPECTION END N
2.REPLACE ECM
1. Replace ECM.
2. Perform initialization of NVIS (NATS) system and registration of all NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to O
4. Perform EC-475, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". P
>> INSPECTION END

Trouble diagnosis
name
(PSP sensor circuit is shorted.)
(Refrigerant pressure sensor circuit is short-
ed.)
(Battery current sensor circuit is shorted.)
P0643 Sensor power supply ECM detects that the voltage of power (EVAP control system pressure sensor circuit
0643 circuit short source for sensor is excessively low or high. is shorted.)
(APP sensor 1)
• Refrigerant pressure sensor
• Battery current sensor
FAIL-SAFE MODE

spring.
NOTE:
ing the next step.
TESTING CONDITION:

2. Loosen and retighten three ground three screws on the body. Refer to EC-545, "Ground Inspection".
BBIA0539E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. A
2.CHECK ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
EC
1. Disconnect accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor harness connector.
E
BBIA0556E

CONSULT-III or tester. F
OK or NG G
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 3.
H
PBIB2608E
I
3.CHECK SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUITS
J
48 EVAP control system pressure sensor terminal 3
Refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 3
K
49
Battery current sensor terminal 1 EC-893
68 PSP sensor terminal 3 L
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. M
4.CHECK COMPONENTS N
• EVAP control system pressure sensor (Refer to EC-706, "Component Inspection".)
• Refrigerant pressure sensor (Refer to EC-874, "Component Description".)
• Battery current sensor (Refer to EC-774, "Component Inspection".) O
• Power steering pressure sensor (Refer to EC-746, "Component Inspection".)
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. P
5.CHECK APP SENSOR
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.

NG >> GO TO 6.
>> INSPECTION END

>> INSPECTION END

P0850 PNP SWITCH
P0850 PNP SWITCH
A
When the selector lever position is P or N (A/T), Neutral (M/T), park/neutral position (PNP) switch is ON. EC
ECM detects the position because the continuity of the line (the ON signal) exists.
• Harness or connectors D
[The park/neutral position (PNP) switch
The signal of the park/neutral position (PNP)
P0850 Park/neutral position circuit is open or shorted.]
signal not change during driving after the en-
0850 switch • Park/neutral position (PNP) switch
gine in started. E
DTC Confirmation Procedure INFOID:0000000004053974 F
CAUTION:
NOTE: G
ing the next step.
WITH CONSULT-III I
2. Select “P/N POSI SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III. Then check the “P/N POSI SW”
signal under the following conditions. J
Position (Selector lever) Known-good signal

P or N position (A/T) K
ON
Except above position OFF
L
4. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. M
ENG SPEED 1,400 - 6,375 rpm N

O
6. Check 1st trip DTC. P
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the park/neutral position (PNP) switch circuit. During this
check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed.
WITH GST

P0850 PNP SWITCH
2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 102 (PNP switch signal)
and ground under the following conditions.
Condition (Gear position) Voltage V (Known-good data)

Approx. 0
BATTERY VOLTAGE
Except above position
(11 - 14V)
MBIB0043E
A/T MODELS
Refer to TM-230, "DTC No. Index".
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
Turn ignition switch OFF, then turn it to START.
Does starter motor operate?
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 3.
No >> Refer to STR-5, "Work Flow".
3.CHECK PNP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-I
2. Disconnect A/T assembly harness connector.
4. Check harness continuity between A/T assembly terminal 9 and combination meter terminal 17.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.
• Harness for open or short between A/T assembly and combination meter.
5.CHECK PNP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-II
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 102 and combination meter terminal 7.

P0850 PNP SWITCH
OK or NG A
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.

C
• Harness for open or short between ECM and combination meter
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. D
7.CHECK PNP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-III
1. Check harness continuity between A/T assembly terminal 9 and TCM terminal 8.
Refer to Wiring Diagram. E

2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. G

Refer to GI-49, "Intermittent Incident". H
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Repair or replace. I
9.REPLACE COMBINATION METER
Refer to MWI-4, "METER SYSTEM : System Diagram". J
>> INSPECTION END

M/T MODELS K
1.CHECK PNP SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. L
2. Disconnect park/neutral position (PNP) switch harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between PNP switch terminal 2 and ground.
M
4. Also check harness for short to power. N
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3
NG >> GO TO 2. O
• Harness connectors F14, E5 P
• Harness for open or short between PNP switch and ground

3.CHECK PNP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 102 and PNP switch terminal 1.
P0850 PNP SWITCH

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.
• Harness for open or short between PNP switch and ECM
5.CHECK PNP SWITCH
Refer to TM-233, "In "P" Position, Vehicle Moves When Pushed".
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Replace PNP switch.
>> INSPECTION END

P1148, P1168 CLOSED LOOP CONTROL
P1148, P1168 CLOSED LOOP CONTROL
A
These self-diagnoses have the one trip detection logic. EC
P1148 The closed loop control function for bank 1 does C
1148 not operate even when vehicle is being driven • Harness or connectors
(Bank 1) in the specified condition. [The air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 circuit is
Closed loop control
open or shorted.]
P1168 function The closed loop control function for bank 2 does • Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 D
1168 not operate even when vehicle is being driven • Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater
(Bank 2) in the specified condition.
DTC P1148 or P1168 is displayed with another DTC for air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1. E
Perform the trouble diagnosis for the corresponding DTC.

P1211 TCS CONTROL UNIT
P1211 TCS CONTROL UNIT
The malfunction information related to TCS is transferred through the CAN communication line from “ABS
actuator and electric unit (control unit)” to ECM.
Be sure to erase the malfunction information such as DTC not only for “ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit)” but also for ECM after TCS related repair.
Freeze frame data is not stored in the ECM for this self-diagnosis. The MIL will not illuminate for this
self-diagnosis.
• ABS actuator and electric unit (control
P1211 ECM receives malfunction information from
TCS control unit unit)
1211 “ABS actuator and electric unit (Control unit)”.
• TCS related parts
TESTING CONDITION:
Go to BRC-9, "Work Flow" or BRC-155, "Work Flow".

P1212 TCS COMMUNICATION LINE
P1212 TCS COMMUNICATION LINE
A
NOTE: EC
to EC-751, "On Board Diagnosis Logic".
This CAN communication line is used to control the smooth engine operation during the TCS operation. Pulse C
signals are exchanged between ECM and “ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)”.
Be sure to erase the malfunction information such as DTC not only for “ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit)” but also for ECM after TCS related repair. D
Freeze frame data is not stored in the ECM for this self-diagnosis. The MIL will not illuminate for this E
self-diagnosis.
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause F
ECM cannot receive the information from (The CAN communication line is open or short-
P1212
TCS communication line “ABS actuator and electric unit (control ed.) G
1212
unit)”. • ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10.5V at idle. I
3. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-761, "Diagnosis Procedure". J
Go to BRC-9, "Work Flow" or BRC-155, "Work Flow". K

NOTE:
to EC-751, "On Board Diagnosis Logic".
If the cooling fan or another component in the cooling system malfunctions, engine coolant temperature will
rise.
When the engine coolant temperature reaches an abnormally high temperature condition, a malfunction is
indicated.
(The cooling fan circuit is open or short-
ed.)
• IPDM E/R
• Cooling fan does not operate properly (Over-
• Cooling fan
heat).
• Cooling fan (Crankshaft driven)
• Cooling fan system does not operate proper-
• Radiator hose
P1217 Engine over tempera- ly (Overheat).
• Radiator
1217 ture (Overheat) • Engine coolant level was not added to the
• Radiator cap
system using the proper filling method.
• Reservoir tank
• Engine coolant is not within the specified
• Reservoir tank cap
range.
• Water pump
• Thermostat
For more information, refer to EC-764,
"Main 12 Causes of Overheating".
CAUTION:
When a malfunction is indicated, always replace the coolant. Refer to CO-40, "Changing Engine Cool-
ant". Also, replace the engine oil. Refer to LU-22, "Changing Engine Oil".
1. Fill radiator with coolant up to specified level with a filling speed of 2 liters per minute. Always use
coolant with the proper mixture ratio. Refer to MA-14, "Engine Oil Recommendation".
2. After refilling coolant, run engine to ensure that no water-flow noise is emitted.
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the cooling fan. During this check, a DTC might not be con-
firmed.
WARNING:
Never remove the radiator cap and/or reservoir tank cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could
be caused by high pressure fluid escaping from the radiator and/or reservoir tank.
Wrap a thick cloth around cap. Carefully remove the cap by turning it a quarter turn to allow built-up
pressure to escape. Then turn the cap all the way off.
WITH CONSULT-III
the proper range, skip the following steps and go to EC-763,
filled the coolant, skip the following steps and go to EC-763,
4. Perform “COOLING FAN” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CON-
SULT-III. SEF621W
5. If the results are NG, go to EC-763, "Diagnosis Procedure".

WITH GST
1. Check the coolant level in the reservoir tank and radiator. A
the proper range, skip the following steps and go to EC-763, EC
filled the coolant, skip the following steps and go to EC-763, C
3. Perform IPDM E/R auto active test and check cooling fan motor
operation, refer to PCS-13, "Diagnosis Description". D
4. If NG, go to EC-763, "Diagnosis Procedure". SEF621W
E
1.CHECK COOLING FAN (CRANKSHAFT DRIVEN) OPERATION
2. Make sure that cooling fan (crankshaft driven) operates normally. F
OK or NG
OK (Without CONSULT-III)>>GO TO 3. G
NG >> Check cooling fan (crankshaft driven). Refer to CO-47, "Removal and Installation (Crankshaft
driven type)"
2.CHECK COOLING FAN OPERATION H
With CONSULT-III
1. Start engine and let it idle. I
2. Select “COOLING FAN” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-III.
3. Make sure that cooling fan operates at each speed (LOW/HI).
OK or NG J
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Check cooling fan control circuit. (Go to "PROCEDURE A".)
3.CHECK COOLING FAN OPERATION K
Without CONSULT-III
1. Perform IPDM E/R auto active test and check cooling fan motors operation, refer to PCS-13, "Diagnosis
Description". L
2. Make sure that cooling fan operates at each speed (Low/High).
OK or NG
M
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Check cooling fan control circuit. (Go to "PROCEDURE A".)
4.CHECK COOLING SYSTEM FOR LEAK N
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. O
NG >> Check the following for leak. Refer to CO-39, "System Inspection".
• Hose
• Radiator
P
• Radiator cap
• Reservoir tank
• Water pump
5.CHECK RESERVOIR TANK CAP
OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Replace reservoir tank cap.
6.CHECK COMPONENT PARTS
Check the following
• Thermostat. Refer to CO-55, "Removal and Installation".
• Engine coolant temperature sensor. Refer to EC-580, "Component Inspection".
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
7.CHECK MAIN 12 CAUSES
If the cause cannot be isolated, go to EC-764, "Main 12 Causes of Overheating".
>> INSPECTION END

Main 12 Causes of Overheating INFOID:0000000004053989
Engine Step Inspection item Equipment Standard Reference page

OFF 1 • Blocked radiator • Visual No blocking —
• Blocked condenser
• Blocked radiator grille
• Blocked bumper
2 • Coolant mixture • Coolant tester CO-40, "Changing Engine Coolant"
3 • Coolant level • Visual Coolant up to MAX level in CO-40, "Changing Engine
reservoir tank and radiator Coolant"
filler neck
4 • Reservoir tank cap • Pressure tester 59 - 98 kPa CO-39, "System Inspec-
(0.6 - 1.0 kg/cm2, 9 - 14 tion"
psi) (Limit)
ON*2 5 • Coolant leaks • Visual No leaks CO-39, "System Inspec-

tion"
ON*2 6 • Thermostat • Touch the upper and Both hoses should be hot CO-55, "Removal and In-
lower radiator hoses stallation"
ON*1 7 • Cooling fan • CONSULT-III Operating See trouble diagnosis for

DTC P1217 (EC-763, "Di-
agnosis Procedure").
See CO-47, "Removal
• Cooling fan (Crankshaft
ON*2 7
driven)
• Visual Operating and Installation (Crank-
shaft driven type)".
OFF 8 • Combustion gas leak • Color checker chemical Negative —
tester 4 Gas analyzer
ON*3 9 • Coolant temperature • Visual Gauge less than 3/4 when —

gauge driving
• Coolant overflow to res- • Visual No overflow during driving CO-40, "Changing Engine
ervoir tank and idling Coolant"
OFF*4 10 • Coolant return from res- • Visual Should be initial level in CO-40, "Changing Engine
ervoir tank to radiator reservoir tank Coolant"
OFF 11 • Cylinder head • Straight gauge feeler 0.1 mm (0.004 in) Maxi- EM-211, "Inspection After
gauge mum distortion (warping) Disassembly"
12 • Cylinder block and pis- • Visual No scuffing on cylinder EM-211, "Inspection After
tons walls or piston Disassembly"
*1: Turn the ignition switch ON.
*2: Engine running at 3,000 rpm for 10 minutes.
*3: Drive at 90 km/h (55 MPH) for 30 minutes and then let idle for 10 minutes.

*4: After 60 minutes of cool down time.
For more information, refer to CO-37, "Troubleshooting Chart". A
EC

P1225 TP SENSOR
P1225 TP SENSOR

PBIB0145E
tion.
P1225 Closed throttle position Closed throttle position learning value is exces- • Electric throttle control actuator
1225 learning performance sively low. (TP sensor 1 and 2)
NOTE:
ing the next step.
TESTING CONDITION:

the housing.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
BBIA0554E

P1225 TP SENSOR
2. Perform EC-475, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". A

P1226 TP SENSOR
P1226 TP SENSOR

PBIB0145E
tion.
P1226 Closed throttle position Closed throttle position learning is not per- • Electric throttle control actuator
1226 learning performance formed successfully, repeatedly. (TP sensor 1 and 2)
NOTE:
ing the next step.
TESTING CONDITION:

the housing.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
BBIA0554E

P1226 TP SENSOR
2.REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR A

EC
>> INSPECTION END

C

ECM controls ignition timing and engine idle speed when engine is started with prewarming up condition.
This control promotes the activation of three way catalyst by heating the catalyst and reduces emissions.
NOTE:
If DTC P1421 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for other DTC.
ECM does not control ignition timing and engine • Lack of intake air volume
P1421 Cold start emission reduction
idle speed properly when engine is started with • Fuel injection system
1421 strategy monitoring
prewarming up condition. • ECM
NOTE:
ing the next step.
TESTING CONDITION:
WITH CONSULT-III
4. Check that the “COOLAN TEMP/S” indication is between 4°C (39°F) and 36°C (97°F).
If “COOLAN TEMP/S” indication is within the specified value, go to the following step.
If “COOLAN TEMP/S” indication is out of the specified value, cool engine down or warm engine up and go
to step 1.
7. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to "DTC Confirmation Procedure".
WITH GST

Perform EC-475, "Idle Air Volume Learning".
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 2.
No >> Follow the instruction of Idle Air Volume Learning.
Check for the cause of intake air volume lacking. Refer to the following.
• Crushed intake air passage
• Intake air passage clogging
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.

NG >> Repair or replace malfunctioning part
3.CHECK FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION A
Perform EC-631, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" in DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNC-
TION.
EC
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Go to EC-632, "Diagnosis Procedure".
C
4. PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
With CONSULT-III
4. Perform DTC Confirmation Procedure. E
With GST
See EC-770, "DTC Confirmation Procedure". G
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 5. H
5.REPLACE ECM
I
1. Replace ECM.
2. Perform initialization of NVIS (NATS) system and registration of all NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs.
Refer to SEC-6, "ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT : Special Repair
Requirement". J
5. Perform EC-475, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". K
>> INSPECTION END L

The power generation voltage variable control enables fuel con-

The sensor measures the charging/discharging current of the bat-
forming the power generation voltage variable control, ECM calcu-
BBIA0582E
Description".
CAUTION:
Never connect the electrical component or the ground wire directly to the battery terminal.The con-
nection causes the malfunction of the power generation voltage variable control, and then battery dis-
charge may occur.

NOTE:
EC-752.
P1550 Battery current sensor circuit
sensor remains within the specified (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
1550 range/performance
range while engine is running. • Battery current sensor
NOTE:
ing the next step.
TESTING CONDITION:


A
EC
BBIA0539E
OK or NG D
OK >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT E

F
BBIA0582E
I
J
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. K
NG >> GO TO 3.
L
PBIB2609E

M
N
4.CHECK BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT O
P
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.



OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 7.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
>> INSPECTION END


ground.
BBIA0588E

signal) and ground. A

6. If NG, replace battery negative cable assembly. EC
PBIB2617E


BBIA0582E
Description".
CAUTION:
Never connect the electrical component or the ground wire directly to the battery terminal. The con-

NOTE:
Refer to EC-752.
P1551 Battery current sensor circuit An excessively low voltage from the sen-
1551 low input sor is sent to ECM. • Harness or connectors
P1552 Battery current sensor circuit An excessively high voltage from the • Battery current sensor
1552 high input sensor is sent to ECM.
NOTE:
ing the next step.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 8V with ignition
switch ON


A
EC
BBIA0539E
OK or NG D
OK >> GO TO 2.

F
BBIA0582E
I
J
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. K
NG >> GO TO 3.
L
PBIB2609E

M
N
>> Repair circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
P
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.




OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 7.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
>> INSPECTION END


ground.
BBIA0588E


PBIB2617E


BBIA0582E
Description".
CAUTION:

NOTE:
EC-752.
The signal voltage transmitted from the • Harness or connectors
P1553 Battery current sensor perfor-
sensor to ECM is higher than the amount (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
1553 mance
of the maximum power generation. • Battery current sensor
NOTE:
ing the next step.
TESTING CONDITION:


A
EC
BBIA0539E
OK or NG D
OK >> GO TO 2.

F
BBIA0582E
I
J
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. K
NG >> GO TO 3.
L
PBIB2609E

M
N
P
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.



OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 7.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
>> INSPECTION END


ground.
BBIA0588E


PBIB2617E


BBIA0582E
Description".
CAUTION:

NOTE:
EC-752.
P1554 Battery current sensor perfor-
sensor is lower than the specified value (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
1554 mance
while the battery voltage is high enough. • Battery current sensor
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the battery current sensor circuit. During this check, a 1st
TESTING CONDITION:
• Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 12.8V at idle.
• Before performing the following procedure, confirm that all load switches and A/C switch are turned
OFF.
WITH CONSULT-III
2. Select “BAT CUR SEN” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III.
3. Check “BAT CUR SEN” indication for 10 seconds.
“BAT CUR SEN” should be above 2,300mV at least once.
WITH GST

signal) and ground for 10 seconds. A
The voltage should be above 2.3V at least once.
EC
PBIB2616E
D

F
BBIA0539E
I
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
J
BBIA0582E
N
O
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. P
NG >> GO TO 3.
PBIB2609E


OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 7.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
>> INSPECTION END


ground. A
EC
BBIA0588E
D
signal) and ground.
E
F
G
PBIB2617E

ASCD steering switch has variant values of electrical resistance for each button. ECM reads voltage variation
of switch, and determines which button is operated.
PBIB2645E
Refer to EC-491, "System Description" for the ASCD function.


NOTE:
EC-749.
Trouble Diagnosis
Name
• An excessively high voltage signal from the ASCD
steering switch is sent to ECM. • Harness or connectors
P1564 • ECM detects that input signal from the ASCD steer- (The switch circuit is open or shorted.)
ASCD steering switch
1564 ing switch is out of the specified range. • ASCD steering switch
• ECM detects that the ASCD steering switch is stuck • ECM
ON.
NOTE:
ing the next step.
WITH CONSULT-III
2. Press MAIN switch for at least 10 seconds, then release it and wait at least 10 seconds.
3. Press CANCEL switch for at least 10 seconds, then release it and wait at least 10 seconds.
4. Press RESUME/ACCELERATE switch for at least 10 seconds, then release it and wait at least 10 sec-
onds.
5. Press SET/COAST switch for at least 10 seconds, then release it and wait at least 10 seconds.
6. Check DTC.


A
EC
BBIA0539E
OK or NG D
OK >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK ASCD STEERING SWITCH CIRCUIT E
With CONSULT-III
F
2. Select “MAIN SW”, “CANCEL SW”, “RESUME/ACC SW” and “SET SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with
CONSULT-III.
3. Check each item indication under the following conditions.
G
Switch Monitor item Condition Indication
Pressed ON
MAIN switch MAIN SW H
Released OFF
Pressed ON
CANCEL switch CANCEL SW
Released OFF I
RESUME/ACCELER- Pressed ON
RESUME/ACC SW
ATE switch Released OFF
J
Pressed ON
SET/COAST switch SET SW
Released OFF
K
Without CONSULT-III
L
pressing each button.
Switch Condition Voltage [V]

M
Pressed Approx. 0
MAIN switch
Released Approx. 4
Pressed Approx. 1 N
CANCEL switch
Released Approx. 4
RESUME/ACCELERATE Pressed Approx. 3 PBIB0311E

switch
O
Released Approx. 4
Pressed Approx. 2
SET/COAST switch
Released Approx. 4 P
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK ASCD STEERING SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
2. Disconnect combination switch harness connector.
4. Check harness continuity between combination switch terminal 15 and ECM terminal 67. Refer to Wiring
Diagram.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.
5.CHECK ASCD STEERING SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 99 and combination switch terminal 14.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.
7.CHECK ASCD STEERING SWITCH
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Replace steering switch.
>> INSPECTION END


1. Disconnect combination switch (spiral cable).

2. Check continuity between combination switch (spiral cable) ter-
minals 14 and 15 with pushing each switch. A
Switch Condition Resistance [Ω]

Pressed Approx. 0 EC
MAIN switch
Pressed Approx. 250
CANCEL switch C
RESUME/ACCELERATE Pressed Approx. 1,480 JMBIA1066GB

switch Released Approx. 4,000 D
Pressed Approx. 660
SET/COAST switch
E

When the brake pedal is depressed, ASCD brake switch is turned

the brake pedal by those two types of input (ON/OFF signal).
BBIA0560E

NOTE:
• If DTC P 1572 is displayed with DTC P0605, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0605. Refer
to EC-749.
• This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. When malfunction A is detected, DTC is not
stored in ECM memory. And in that case, 1st trip DTC and 1st trip freeze frame data are displayed.
1st trip DTC is erased when ignition switch is turn OFF. And even when malfunction A is detected in
two consecutive trips, DTC is not stored in ECM memory.
Trouble Diagnosis
Name
When the vehicle speed is above 30km/h (19 • Harness or connectors
MPH), ON signals from the stop lamp switch (The stop lamp switch circuit is shorted.)
A)
and the ASCD brake switch are sent to ECM • Harness or connectors
at the same time. (The ASCD brake switch circuit is shorted.)
(The ASCD clutch switch circuit is shorted)
P1572 (M/T models)
ASCD brake switch
1572 • Stop lamp switch
ASCD brake switch signal is not sent to ECM • ASCD brake switch
B) for extremely long time while the vehicle is • ASCD clutch switch
being driven • Incorrect stop lamp switch installation
• Incorrect ASCD brake switch installation
• Incorrect ASCD clutch switch installation
• ECM
CAUTION:
NOTE:
• The procedure for malfunction B is not described. It takes an extremely long time to complete the procedure
for malfunction B. By performing the procedure for malfunction A, the condition that causes malfunction B
can be detected.
TESTING CONDITION:

WITH CONSULT-III
1. Start engine (VDC switch OFF). A
3. Press MAIN switch and make sure that CRUISE indicator illuminates.
EC

If DTC is detected, go to EC-793, "Diagnosis Procedure". D
If DTC is not detected, go to the following step.
E
F
Depress the brake pedal for more than
Driving location five seconds so as not to come off from
the above-mentioned vehicle speed.
7. Check 1st trip DTC. G
WITH GST H
I
A/T MODELS
1.CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-I J
With CONSULT-III
2. Select “BRAKE SW1” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III. K
CONDITION INDICATION L
M
Without CONSULT-III
following conditions. N
CONDITION VOLTAGE
O
OK or NG P
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> GO TO 3.
MBIB0061E

With CONSULT-III

Without CONSULT-III
CONDITION VOLTAGE
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> GO TO 7.
MBIB0060E

2. Disconnect ASCD brake switch (1) harness connector.
- Stop lamp switch (2)
MBIB1214E


OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.
PBIB0857E

• Fuse block (J/B) connector F160
• 10A fuse



OK or NG
EC
OK >> GO TO 6.
6.CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH C
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11. D
E
2. Disconnect stop lamp switch (2) harness connector.
- ASCD brake switch (1)
F
MBIB1214E
I
Voltage: Battery voltage J
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9. K
NG >> GO TO 8.
L
PBIB1184E

Check the following. M
• 10 A fuse (No.20)
• Harness for open or short between stop lamp switch and battery N
9.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT O

Refer to Wiring Diagram. P

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
>> INSPECTION END

M/T MODELS
With CONSULT-III
Clutch pedal and/or brake pedal: Slightly depressed OFF
Clutch pedal and brake pedal: Fully released ON
Without CONSULT-III
CONDITION VOLTAGE
Clutch pedal and/or brake pedal: Slightly depressed Approximately 0V
Clutch pedal and brake pedal: Fully released Battery voltage
MBIB0061E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> GO TO 3.
With CONSULT-III
Without CONSULT-III

CONDITION VOLTAGE A
EC
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 14.
NG >> GO TO 10. C
MBIB0060E
3.CHECK ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT D

E
BBIA0624E
H

I
tester.
CONDITION VOLTAGE
J
OK or NG K
OK >> GO TO 8.
PBIB0799E
NG >> GO TO 4.
L
2. Disconnect ASCD brake switch harness connector. M
BBIA0560E
P


OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.
PBIB0857E

• 10 A fuse (No.12)


OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 14.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 14.

A
EC
BBIA0560E
D
E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12. F
NG >> GO TO 11.
G
MBIB1407E

• 10 A fuse (No.20)
I
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. J
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 101 and stop lamp switch terminal 2. K
Continuity should exist. L

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13. M
13.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH N
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 14. O
P
>> INSPECTION END

ASCD BRAKE SWITCH

3. Check harness continuity between ASCD brake switch terminals
1 and 2 under the following conditions.
When brake pedal: Fully released. Should exist.
When brake pedal: Slightly depressed. Should not exist.
If NG, adjust ASCD brake switch installation, refer to BR-18,
"Inspection and Adjustment", and perform step 3 again.
SEC023D
ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH

3. Check harness continuity between ASCD clutch switch termi-
nals 1 and 2 under the following conditions.
SEC024D
STOP LAMP SWITCH

3. Check harness continuity between stop lamp switch terminals 1
When brake pedal: Fully released. Should not exist.
When brake pedal: Slightly depressed. Should exist.
If NG, adjust stop lamp switch installation, refer to BR-18,
PBIB1185E

A
The ECM receives two vehicle speed sensor signals via CAN communication line. One is sent from combina- EC
tion meter, and the other is from TCM (Transmission control module). The ECM uses these signals for ASCD
control. Refer to EC-491, "System Description" for ASCD functions.
On Board Diagnosis Logic INFOID:0000000004054033 C

NOTE: D
to EC-751, "On Board Diagnosis Logic". E
F
to EC-749, "Component Description".
Trouble Diagnosis
Name G
shorted.) H
P1574 ASCD vehicle speed The difference between the two vehicle speed • Combination meter
1574 sensor signals is out of the specified range. • ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
• Wheel sensor
• TCM (A/T models) I
• ECM

J
CAUTION:
NOTE: K
ing the next step.
TESTING CONDITION:
Step 3 may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted in the shop or by driving the vehicle. If a road test M
is expected to be easier, it is unnecessary to lift the vehicle.
1. Start engine.
2. Drive the vehicle at more than 40 km/h (25 MPH). N
3. Check DTC.
O
1.CHECK DTC WITH TCM P

Check DTC with TCM. Refer to TM-148, "OBD-II Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)".
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
Refer to BRC-9, "Work Flow" or BRC-155, "Work Flow".

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
>> INSPECTION END

A
ECM receives turbine revolution sensor signal from TCM through CAN communication line. ECM uses this EC
signal for engine control.
C
NOTE:
• If DTC P1715 is displayed with DTC UXXXX first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC UXXXX.
to EC-751, "On Board Diagnosis Logic". D
• If DTC P1715 is displayed with DTC P0340, P0345 first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0340, E
P0345. Refer to EC-667, "Component Description".
F
The MIL will not illuminates for this diagnosis.
G
(The CAN communication line is open or short-
Input speed sensor Turbine revolution sensor signal is differ-
ed)
P1715 (Turbine revolution sen- ent from the theoretical value calculated H
1715 sor) by ECM from revolution sensor signal and
(Turbine revolution sensor circuit is open or
(TCM output) engine rpm signal.
shorted)
• TCM
I
1.CHECK DTC WITH TCM J

Check DTC with TCM. Refer to TM-148, "OBD-II Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)".
OK or NG
K
OK >> GO TO 2.
2.REPLACE TCM L
Replace TCM.
>> INSPECTION END M

P1800 VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE 1
The VIAS control solenoid valve cuts the intake manifold vacuum
signal for power valve control. It responds to ON/OFF signals from
the ECM. When the solenoid is off, the vacuum signal from the
intake manifold is cut. When the ECM sends an ON signal the coil
pulls the plunger downward and sends the vacuum signal to the
power valve actuator.
BBIA0569E
The MIL will not illuminate for this self-diagnosis.
P1800 VIAS control solenoid valve cir- An excessively low or high voltage signal (The solenoid valve circuit is open or
1800 cuit is sent to ECM through the valve shorted.)
• VIAS control solenoid valve
NOTE:
ing the next step.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is between 11V at idle.
1.CHECK VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

2. Disconnect VIAS control solenoid valve harness connector.
BBIA0569E

4. Check voltage between terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-
III or tester. A

OK or NG EC
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 2.
C
PBIB0173E

E
• Harness for open or short between VIAS control solenoid valve and IPDM E/R
• Harness for open or short between VIAS control solenoid valve and ECM
F
3.CHECK VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 29 and VIAS control solenoid valve terminal 2.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. J
4.CHECK VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
K
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Replace VIAS control solenoid valve. L
M
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection INFOID:0000000004054043 N
VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

With CONSULT-III O

P
3. Perform “VIAS SOL VALVE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.

Condition Air passage continuity Air passage continuity

VIAS SOL VALVE between (A) and (B) between (A) and (C)
ON Yes No
OFF No Yes
JMBIA0180ZZ
With GST
Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the fol-
lowing conditions.
Air passage continuity Air passage continuity

Condition
between (A) and (B) between (A) and (C)
12V direct current supply
Yes No
between terminals 1 and 2
No supply No Yes
PBIB2532E

P1805 BRAKE SWITCH
P1805 BRAKE SWITCH
A
Brake switch signal is applied to the ECM through the stop lamp switch when the brake pedal is depressed. EC
This signal is used mainly to decrease the engine speed when the vehicle is being driven.
C
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause D
A brake switch signal is not sent to ECM for ex-
P1805 (Stop lamp switch circuit is open or short-
Brake switch tremely long time while the vehicle is being driv-
1805 ed.)
en. E
• Stop lamp switch
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode. F

ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator by regulating the throttle opening to a small range. G
Therefore, acceleration will be poor.
Vehicle condition Driving condition
When engine is idling Normal H
When accelerating Poor acceleration
NOTE:
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. J
2. Fully depress the brake pedal for at least 5 seconds.
K
3. Erase the DTC with CONSULT-III.
1.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH CIRCUIT M

2. Check the stop lamp when depressing and releasing the brake pedal.
N
Brake pedal Stop lamp
Fully released Not illuminated
O
Slightly depressed Illuminated
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. P
NG >> GO TO 2.

P1805 BRAKE SWITCH
BBIA0560E


OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.
PBIB1184E

• 10 A fuse (No.20)
• Harness for open and short between stop lamp switch and battery
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 101 and stop
lamp switch terminal 2.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power BBIA0560E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
>> INSPECTION END

P1805 BRAKE SWITCH
A
STOP LAMP SWITCH
EC
BBIA0560E
E
2. Check continuity between stop lamp switch terminals 1 and 2 under the following conditions.
H
PBIB2285E
Conditions Continuity I
Brake pedal: Fully released Should not exist.
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed Should exist.
J
3. If NG, adjust stop lamp switch installation, refer to BR-18, "Inspection and Adjustment", and perform step
2 again.
K

Power supply for the throttle control motor is provided to the ECM via throttle control motor relay. The throttle
control motor relay is controlled ON/OFF by the ECM. When the ignition switch is turned ON, the ECM sends
an ON signal to throttle control motor relay and battery voltage is provided to the ECM. When the ignition
switch is turned OFF, the ECM sends an OFF signal to throttle control motor relay and battery voltage is not
provided to the ECM.
P2100 Throttle control motor ECM detects that the voltage of power source (Throttle control motor relay circuit is
2100 relay circuit open for throttle control motor is excessively low. open)
P2103 Throttle control motor ECM detects that the throttle control motor relay (Throttle control motor relay circuit is
2103 relay circuit short is stuck ON. shorted)
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MlL illuminates.

spring.
NOTE:
ing the next step.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 8V.
2. Check DTC.



OK or NG EC
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 2.
C
PBIB1171E
2.CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II D

E

OK or NG
G
OK >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK FUSE H
2. Check if 20 A fuse is blown.
OK or NG I
OK >> GO TO 7.
4.CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT-I J

following conditions with CONSULT-III or tester.
K

OFF Approximately 0V L
Battery voltage
ON
(11 - 14V)
OK or NG M
OK >> GO TO 7.
5.CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT-II N

3. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E119. O
P
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.


OK or NG
OK >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PCS-34, "Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R".

A
NOTE: EC
If DTC P2101 is displayed with DTC P2100 or P2119, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P2100
or P2119. Refer to EC-810or EC-819.
Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor, throttle position sensor, etc.
The throttle control motor is operated by the ECM and it opens and closes the throttle valve. C
The current opening angle of the throttle valve is detected by the throttle position sensor.The throttle position
sensor provides feedback to the ECM, when opens/closes the throttle valve in response to driving conditions
via the throttle control motor. D
This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. E
• Harness or connectors F
P2101 Electric throttle control Electric throttle control function does not oper- (Throttle control motor circuit is open or
2101 performance ate properly. shorted)
G
FAIL-SAFE MODE
H
spring. I
NOTE: J
ing the next step.
TESTING CONDITION:
L
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V when the
engine is running.
M
3. Check DTC.
4. If DTC is detected, go to EC-813, "Diagnosis Procedure". N

1. Turn ignition switch OFF

BBIA0539E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.

Battery voltage
ON
(11 - 14V)
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.


OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 4.
PBIB1171E


OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK FUSE
1. Disconnect 20 A fuse (No.52).
2. Check 20 A fuse for blown.
OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Replace 20A fuse. A
EC
Refer to Wiring Diagram. C

5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. D
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 7. E
Check the following. F
G
OK or NG
OK >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PCS-34, "Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R".
I
K

ECM terminal Continuity L
actuator terminal
5 Should not exist
5
4 Should exist M
6
4 Should not exist
5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. N
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
O
1. Remove the intake air duct. P

the housing.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
BBIA0554E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.
NG >> GO TO 13.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13.
>> INSPECTION END



step.
PBIB2606E

A
The throttle control motor is operated by the ECM and it opens and closes the throttle valve. EC
The current opening angle of the throttle valve is detected by the throttle position sensor.The throttle position
sensor provides feedback to the ECM, when opens/closes the throttle valve in response to driving conditions
via the throttle control motor.
C

D
• Harness or connectors E
P2118 Throttle control motor ECM detects short in both circuits between (Throttle control motor circuit is shorted.)
2118 circuit short ECM and throttle control motor. • Electric throttle control actuator
(Throttle control motor)
F
FAIL-SAFE MODE
G
spring.
H
1. If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before con- I
b. Turn ignition switch ON. J
K
4. Check DTC.
5. If DTC is detected, go to EC-817, "Diagnosis Procedure". L
1.CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS M

N
BBIA0539E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.

actuator terminal
5 Should not exist
5
4 Should exist
6
4 Should not exist
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 5.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
>> INSPECTION END



step.
PBIB2606E

A
Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor, throttle position sensor, etc. EC
The throttle control motor is operated by the ECM and it opens and closes the throttle valve.
The throttle position sensor detects the throttle valve position, and the opening and closing speed of the throt-
tle valve and sends the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the throttle
valve from these signals and opens/closes the throttle valve in response to driving conditions via the throttle C
control motor.
D
E
Electric throttle control actuator does not func-
A) tion properly due to the return spring malfunc-
tion. F
P2119 Electric throttle control
Throttle valve opening angle in fail-safe mode is • Electric throttle control actuator
2119 actuator B)
not in specified range.
ECM detects that the throttle valve is stuck G
C)
open.
FAIL-SAFE MODE
H

I
The ECM controls the electric throttle actuator by regulating the throttle opening around the idle position.
Malfunction A
The engine speed will not rise more than 2,000 rpm.
Malfunction B ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator by regulating the throttle opening to 20 degrees or less. J
While the vehicle is driving, it slows down gradually by fuel cut. After the vehicle stops, the engine stalls.
Malfunction C
The engine can restart in N or P position, and engine speed will not exceed 1,000 rpm or more.

K
NOTE:
• Perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A AND B first. If the DTC cannot be confirmed, perform L
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C.
N
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A AND B
2. Shift selector lever to D position (A/T) or 1st position (M/T), and wait at least 3 seconds. O
3. Shift selector lever to P position (A/T) or neutral position (M/T).
5. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 1 second. P
6. Shift selector lever to D position (A/T) or 1st position (M/T), and wait at least 3 seconds.
7. Shift selector lever to P position (A/T) or neutral position (M/T).
8. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds, and then turn ON.
9. Check DTC.

With CONSULT-III
2. Shift selector lever to D position (A/T) or 1st position (M/T), and wait at least 3 seconds.
3. Shift selector lever to P or N position (A/T) or neutral position (M/T).
5. Check DTC.

2. Check if a foreign matter is caught between the throttle valve
and the housing.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
BBIA0554E

>> INSPECTION END

A
The accelerator pedal position sensor is installed on the upper end EC

are a kind of potentiometer which transform the accelerator pedal C
the accelerator pedal and sends voltage signals to the ECM. The D
signals.
PBIB1741E E
receiving the signal from the accelerator pedal position sensor. The ECM uses this signal for engine opera-
tions such as fuel cut.
F

NOTE: G
Refer to EC-752.
H
Accelerator pedal posi-
P2122 An excessively low voltage from the APP sen- • Harness or connectors
tion sensor 1 circuit low I
2122 sor 1 is sent to ECM. (The APP sensor 1 circuit is open or
input
shorted.)
Accelerator pedal posi- • Accelerator pedal position sensor
P2123 An excessively high voltage from the APP sen-
tion sensor 1 circuit high (APP sensor 1)
2123 sor 1 is sent to ECM. J
input
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL illuminates. K

L
degrees.
So, the acceleration will be poor. M
NOTE: N
ing the next step.
O
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle. P
2. Check DTC.


BBIA0539E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
BBIA0556E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
PBIB2608E


OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
A
OK or NG EC
OK >> GO TO 5.
C
5.CHECK APP SENSOR
OK or NG D
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.
6.REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY E

3. Perform EC-475, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". F
>> INSPECTION END G

>> INSPECTION END

I
ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR J

3. Check voltage between ECM terminals 106 (APP sensor 1 sig- K
conditions.
L
(Accelerator pedal position M
sensor 1) Fully depressed More than 4.3V

sensor 2) Fully depressed More than 2.0V MBIB0023E N
4. If NG, replace accelerator pedal assembly and go to next step.

5. Perform EC-475, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". O
P


signals.
PBIB1741E
Accelerator pedal posi- • Harness or connectors
P2127 An excessively low voltage from the APP sen-
tion sensor 2 circuit low (The APP sensor 2 circuit is open or
2127 sor 2 is sent to ECM.
input shorted.)
(The TP sensor circuit shorted.)
Accelerator pedal posi- • Accelerator pedal position sensor
P2128 An excessively high voltage from the APP sen- (APP sensor 2)
tion sensor 2 circuit high
2128 sor 2 is sent to ECM. • Electric throttle control actuator
input
(TP sensor 1 and 2)
FAIL-SAFE MODE

degrees.
NOTE:
ing the next step.
TESTING CONDITION:
2. Check DTC.

2. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body, Refer to EC-545, "Ground Inspection".
A
EC
BBIA0539E
OK or NG D
OK >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK APP SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I E

F
BBIA0556E

3. Check voltage between APP sensor terminal 1 and ground with I
Voltage: Approximately 5V J
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 3. K
PBIB2611E
L

1. Turn ignition switch OFF. M
Refer to wiring diagram.
N
OK or NG
O
OK >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III P


OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> GO TO 6.
1. Replace electric throttle control actuator.
>> INSPECTION END


OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
9.CHECK APP SENSOR
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> GO TO 10.
>> INSPECTION END


>> INSPECTION END
A

EC
3. Check voltage between ECM terminals 106 (APP sensor 1 sig- C
conditions.
D
(Accelerator pedal position E

sensor 2) Fully depressed More than 2.0V MBIB0023E F

5. Perform EC-475, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". G
H

P2135 TP SENSOR
P2135 TP SENSOR

PBIB0145E
tion.
(The TP sensor 1 or 2 circuit is open or
shorted.)
Throttle position sensor Rationally incorrect voltage is sent to ECM
P2135 (The APP sensor 2 circuit is shorted).
circuit range/perfor- compared with the signals from TP sensor 1
2135 • Electric throttle control actuator
mance and TP sensor 2.
(TP sensor 1 or 2)
(APP sensor 2)
FAIL-SAFE MODE

degrees.
NOTE:
ing the next step.
TESTING CONDITION:
2. Check DTC.


P2135 TP SENSOR
A
EC
BBIA0539E
OK or NG D
OK >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-1 E

F
BBIA0543E
I
J
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7. K
NG >> GO TO 3.
L
PBIB2604E
3.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II

M

OK or NG O
OK >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III P


P2135 TP SENSOR
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK APP SENSOR
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> GO TO 6.
>> INSPECTION END

7.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
8.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 50 and electric throttle control actuator terminal 1, ECM
terminal 69 and electric throttle control actuator terminal 3.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> GO TO 10.
>> INSPECTION END


P2135 TP SENSOR
>> INSPECTION END A
EC
4. Set selector lever to D (A/T), 1st (M/T).
5. Check voltage between ECM terminals 50 (TP sensor 1 signal), D
tions.
E

F

PBIB1170E
G
step.
7. Perform EC-475, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". H

P2138 APP SENSOR
P2138 APP SENSOR

signals.
PBIB1741E

NOTE:
EC-752.
(The APP sensor 1 and 2 circuit is open
or shorted.)
Accelerator pedal posi- Rationally incorrect voltage is sent to ECM
P2138 (The TP sensor circuit is shorted.)
tion sensor circuit range/ compared with the signals from APP sensor 1
2138 • Accelerator pedal position sensor
performance and APP sensor 2.
(APP sensor 1 and 2)
(TP sensor 1 and 2)
FAIL-SAFE MODE

degrees.
NOTE:
ing the next step.
TESTING CONDITION:
2. Check DTC.

P2138 APP SENSOR
A
2. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-545, "Ground Inspection". EC
BBIA0539E
E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
1. Disconnect accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor harness connector. G
BBIA0556E
J
3. Check voltage between APP sensor terminals 2 and ground with
K
OK or NG
L
OK >> GO TO 3.
M
PBIB2608E
3.CHECK APP SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I N

Check voltage between APP sensor terminal 1 and ground with
1. O
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8. P
NG >> GO TO 4.
PBIB2611E

P2138 APP SENSOR
Refer to wiring diagram.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.
NG >> GO TO 7.
1. Replace electric throttle control actuator.
>> INSPECTION END

8.CHECK APP SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
3. Check harness continuity between APP sensor terminals 4 and ECM terminal 82, APP sensor terminal 5
and ECM terminal 83.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 106 and APP sensor terminal 3, ECM terminal 98 and
APP sensor terminal 6.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.

P2138 APP SENSOR
10.CHECK APP SENSOR A

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12. EC
NG >> GO TO 11.
C
4. Perform EC-475, "Idle Air Volume Learning". D
>> INSPECTION END

E
F
>> INSPECTION END
G
1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. H
nal), 98 (APP sensor 2 signal) and ground under the following I
conditions.
Terminal Accelerator pedal Voltage J

K
sensor 2) Fully depressed More than 2.0V MBIB0023E
L
6. Perform EC-475, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". M

P2A00, P2A03 A/F SENSOR 1
(1,472°F).
PBIB3354E
To judge the malfunction, the A/F signal computed by ECM from the A/F sensor 1 signal is monitored so it will
shift to LEAN side or RICH side.
P2A00 • The output voltage computed by ECM from the
2A00 • A/F sensor 1
A/F sensor 1 signal shift to the lean side for a
(Bank 1) • A/F sensor 1 heater
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 specified period.
• Fuel pressure
P2A03 circuit range/performance • The A/F signal computed by ECM from the A/F
• Fuel injector
2A03 sensor 1 signal shift to the rich side for a speci-
(Bank 2) fied period.
NOTE:
ing the next step.
TESTING CONDITION:
WITH CONSULT-III
SULT-III.
6. Clear the self-learning coefficient by touching “CLEAR”.

8. Turn ignition switch ON. A
10. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute under no load.
EC
12. Keep engine speed between 2,500 and 3,000 rpm for 20 minutes.
C
WITH GST
6. Start engine and let it idle for at least 5 seconds. E
nector.
8. Select Service $03 with GST and make sure that DTC P0102 is F
detected.
10. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and
4,000 rpm for 1 minute under no load. G
12. Keep engine speed between 2,500 and 3,000 rpm for 20 min-
BBIA0541E
utes. H
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004054090 I

M
BBIA0539E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. N
O
Loosen and retighten the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1.
P
>> GO TO 3.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.

4.CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA.
With CONSULT-III
Without CONSULT-III
nector.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171, P0172 or P0174, P0175 detected?
BBIA0541E
Yes or No
Yes >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171, P0174 or P0172, P0175. Refer to EC-631 or EC-637.
No >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR
BBIA0544E
3. Check harness connector for water.
Water should not exit.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
6.CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT


OK or NG EC
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 7.
C
PBIB3308E

E
• 15 A fuse (No.54)
F
8.CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT G
3. Check harness continuity between A/F sensor 1 terminal and ECM terminal as follows. H
A/F sensor 1 terminal ECM terminal I

1 35
Bank1
2 56
1 16 J
Bank 2
2 75
K
Refer to Wiring Diagram. L
Bank 1 Bank 2
A/F sensor 1 terminal ECM terminal A/F sensor 1 terminal ECM terminal M
1 35 1 16
2 56 2 75
N
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. P
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 11.


OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
CAUTION:
>> GO TO 12.
2. Select “A/F ADJ-B1” and “A/F ADJ-B2” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III.
3. Make sure that “0” is displayed on CONSULT-III screen.
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 13.
13.CREAR A/F ADJUSTMENT DATA
With CONSULT-III
Without CONSULT-III
nector.
>> GO TO 14.
BBIA0541E

2. Select “A/F ADJ-B1” and “A/F ADJ-B2” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III.
3. Make sure that “0” is displayed on CONSULT-III screen.
OK or NG

ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
A
When the brake pedal is depressed, ASCD brake switch is turned EC

the brake pedal by two types of input (ON/OFF signal).
C
BBIA0560E E
A/T MODELS F

With CONSULT-III G
3. Check “BRAKE SW1” indication under the following conditions. H
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed OFF I
Without CONSULT-III
J
K
CONDITION VOLTAGE
L
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. M
NG >> GO TO 3.
MBIB0061E
2.CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-II N

With CONSULT-III
O
P
Without CONSULT-III

ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
lowing conditions.
CONDITION VOLTAGE
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 7.
MBIB0060E

2. Disconnect ASCD brake switch (1) harness connector.
- Stop lamp switch (2)
MBIB1214E


OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.
PBIB0857E

• 10 A fuse (No.12)


OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.

ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
6.CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH A

Refer to EC-847, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11. EC
C
2. Disconnect stop lamp switch (2) harness connector.
- ASCD brake switch (1)
D
F
MBIB1214E
G
with CONSULT -II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage H
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
I
NG >> GO TO 8.
J
PBIB1184E

Check the following. K
• 10 A fuse (No.20)
• Harness for open or short between stop lamp switch and battery L
9.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT M

O
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
P
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.

ASCD BRAKE SWITCH

>> INSPECTION END

M/T MODELS
With CONSULT-III
Clutch pedal and/or brake pedal: Slightly depressed OFF
Clutch pedal and brake pedal: Fully released ON
Without CONSULT-III
CONDITION VOLTAGE
Clutch pedal and/or brake pedal: Slightly depressed Approximately 0V
Clutch pedal and brake pedal: Fully released Battery voltage
MBIB0061E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> GO TO 3.
With CONSULT-III
Without CONSULT-III
CONDITION VOLTAGE
MBIB0060E

ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END A
NG >> GO TO 10.
3.CHECK ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
EC
C
BBIA0624E
F
tester.
G
CONDITION VOLTAGE
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed Approximately 0V H
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8. I
PBIB0799E
NG >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT J
K
BBIA0560E
N
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6. P
NG >> GO TO 5.
PBIB0857E


ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
• 10 A fuse (No.12)


OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 14.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 14.
BBIA0560E

ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
with CONSULT -II or tester. A

OK or NG EC
OK >> GO TO 12.
NG >> GO TO 11.
C
MBIB1407E

E
• 10 A fuse (No.20)
F
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector. G
H
OK or NG I
OK >> GO TO 13.
13.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH J

OK or NG K
OK >> GO TO 14.
M
>> INSPECTION END
N
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
2. Disconnect ASCD brake switch harness connector. O

ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
3. Check harness continuity between ASCD brake switch terminals
1 and 2 under the following conditions.
When brake pedal: Fully released. Should exist.
When brake pedal: Slightly depressed. Should not exist.
If NG, adjust ASCD brake switch installation, refer to BR-18,
SEC023D
ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH

3. Check harness continuity between ASCD clutch switch termi-
nals 1 and 2 under the following conditions.
SEC024D
STOP LAMP SWITCH

3. Check harness continuity between stop lamp switch terminals 1
When brake pedal: Fully released. Should not exist.
When brake pedal: Slightly depressed. Should exist.
If NG, adjust stop lamp switch installation, refer to BR-18,
PBIB1185E

ASCD INDICATOR
ASCD INDICATOR
A
ASCD indicator lamp illuminates to indicate ASCD operation status. Lamp has two indicators, CRUISE and EC
SET, and is integrated in combination meter.
CRUISE indicator illuminates when MAIN switch on ASCD steering switch is turned ON to indicated that
ASCD system is ready for operation.
SET indicator illuminates when the following conditions are met. C
• CRUISE indicator is illuminated.
• SET/COAST switch on ASCD steering switch is turned ON while vehicle speed is within the range of the
ASCD setting. D
SET indicator remains lit during ASCD control.
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004054095 E

Check ASCD indicator under the following conditions. F
ASCD INDICATOR CONDITION SPECIFICATION

MAIN switch: pressed at the 1st time G
→ at the 2nd time
• When vehicle speed is be- H
SET LAMP
tween 40 km/h (25 MPH) and ASCD: Not operating OFF
144 km/h (89 MPH)
OK or NG I
NG >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC J
Check that DTC UXXXX is not displayed.
OK or NG
K
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Perform trouble diagnoses for DTC UXXXX.
3.CHECK COMBINATION METER FUNCTION L
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. M
NG >> Go to MWI-4, "METER SYSTEM : System Diagram".
4.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT N
>> INSPECTION END O

COOLING FAN
COOLING FAN
Cooling Fan Motor
The cooling fan operates at each speed when the current flows in the cooling fan motor as follows.
Cooling fan motor terminals

Cooling fan speed
(+) (−)
1 3 and 4
Low (LOW)
2 3 and 4
High (HI) 1 and 2 3 and 4
1.CHECK IPDM E/R GROUND CIRCUIT

2. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connectors E122, E124.
3. Check harness continuity between IPDM E/R terminals 38, 59 and ground.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK COOLING FAN MOTOR CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect cooling fan motor harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between the following;
cooling fan motor terminal 1 and IPDM E/R terminal 20,
cooling fan motor terminal 2 and IPDM E/R terminal 24.

OK or NG
3.CHECK COOLING FAN MOTER GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN OR SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between the following;
cooling fan motor terminal 3 and ground,
cooling fan motor terminal 4 and ground.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.

COOLING FAN
4.CHECK COOLING FAN MOTOR A

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. EC
NG >> Replace cooling fan motor.
C
OK or NG
OK >> INSPETION END D
NG >> Repair or replace harness or connector.
E
COOLING FAN MOTOR
1. Disconnect cooling fan motor harness connectors.
2. Supply cooling fan motor terminals with battery voltage and F
check operation.
Cooling fan motor terminals G

Cooling fan speed
(+) (−)
1 3 and 4 H
Low
2 3 and 4
High 1 and 2 3 and 4 SEF734W
Cooling fan motor should operate. I

If NG, replace cooling fan motor.

The electrical load signal (Headlamp switch signal, etc.) is transferred through the CAN communication line
from BCM to ECM via IPDM E/R.
1.CHECK LOAD SIGNAL CIRCUIT OVERALL FUNCTION-I

3. Select “LOAD SIGNAL” and check indication under the following conditions.
Condition Indication
Rear window defogger switch: ON ON
Rear window defogger switch: OFF OFF
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> GO TO 4.
2.CHECK LOAD SIGNAL CIRCUIT OVERALL FUNCTION-II
Check “LOAD SIGNAL” indication under the following conditions.
Lighting switch: ON at 2nd position ON
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 5.
3.CHECK HEATER FAN SIGNAL CIRCUIT OVERALL FUNCTION
Select “HEATER FAN SW” and check indication under the following conditions.
Heater fan control switch: ON ON
Heater fan control switch: OFF OFF
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 6.
4.CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SYSTEM
Refer to DEF-3, "Repair Work Flow".
>> INSPECTION END

5.CHECK HEADLAMP SYSTEM
Refer to EXL-4, "Work Flow".
>> INSPECTION END

6.CHECK HEATER FAN CONTROL SYSTEM
Refer to HAC-60, "Symptom Matrix Chart" (Type 1) or HAC-128, "Symptom Matrix Chart" (Type 2).

>> INSPECTION END
A
EC

FUEL INJECTOR
FUEL INJECTOR
The fuel injector is a small, precise solenoid valve. When the ECM
supplies a ground to the fuel injector, the coil in the fuel injector is
energized. The energized coil pulls the ball valve back and allows
fuel to flow through the fuel injector into the intake manifold. The
amount of fuel injected depends upon the injection pulse duration.
Pulse duration is the length of time the fuel injector remains open.
The ECM controls the injection pulse duration based on engine fuel
needs.
SEF375Z
1.INSPECTION START
Turn ignition switch to START.
Are any cylinders ignited?
Yes or No
No >> GO TO 7.
With CONSULT-III
1. Start engine.
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 7.
Without CONSULT-III
1. Stop engine.
2 : Vacuum tank
: Front
AWBIA0686ZZ

FUEL INJECTOR
ground with CONSULT-III or tester. A

5. Turn ignition switch OFF. EC
ECM as follows. C
PBIB2633E
Harness connector F44 D
terminal
1 2 23
3 1 22 E
5 4 21

OK or NG
G
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.
• IPDM E/R harness connector E119 I
• 15 A fuse (No.55)
• Harness for open or short between harness connector F44 and fuse
• Harness for open or short between harness connector F201 and fuel injector
J
5.CHECK FUNCTION OF FUEL INJECTOR-II K
L
Cylinder
(+) (–)
M
1 3 2
3 3 1
5 3 4 N
PBIB2634E
OK or NG O
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 7.
P
6.CHECK FUNCTION OF FUEL INJECTOR-III
1. Reconnect all harness connector disconnected.
2. Start engine.

FUEL INJECTOR
3. Listen to fuel injectors No. 2, No. 4, No.6 operating sound.

OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 7.
PBIB1986E
7.CHECK FUEL INJECTOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

BBIA0546E

4. Check voltage between fuel injector terminal 1 and ground with

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> GO TO 8.
PBIB0582E

• 15 A fuse (No.55)
• Harness for open or short between fuel injector and fuse

9.CHECK FUEL INJECTOR OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
3. Check harness continuity between fuel injector terminal 2 and ECM terminals 21, 22, 23, 40, 41, 42.

OK or NG

FUEL INJECTOR
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> GO TO 10. A
EC
• Harness for open or short between fuel injector and ECM
C
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.
NG >> Replace fuel injector. E
Refer to GI-49, "Intermittent Incident". F
>> INSPECTION END

G
FUEL INJECTOR
H
1. Disconnect injector harness connector.
2. Check resistance between terminals as shown in the figure.
I
Resistance: 11.1 - 14.5Ω [at 10 - 60°C (50 - 140°F)]
PBIB1727E

FUEL PUMP
FUEL PUMP
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Sensor Input Signal to ECM ECM Function Actuator

Engine speed*
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Fuel pump control Fuel pump relay
*: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage.
The ECM activates the fuel pump for several seconds after the ignition switch is turned ON to improve engine
start ability. If the ECM receives a engine speed signal from the camshaft position sensor (PHASE), it knows
that the engine is rotating, and causes the pump to operate. If the engine speed signal is not received when
the ignition switch is ON, the engine stalls. The ECM stops pump operation and prevents battery discharging,
thereby improving safety. The ECM does not directly drive the fuel pump. It controls the ON/OFF fuel pump
relay, which in turn controls the fuel pump.
Condition Fuel pump operation

Ignition switch is turned to ON. Operates for 1 second.
Engine running and cranking Operates.
When engine is stopped Stops in 1.5 seconds.
Except as shown above Stops.
A turbine type design fuel pump is used in the fuel tank.
PBIB1569E

2. Pinch fuel feed hose with two fingers.
Fuel pressure pulsation should be felt on the fuel feed hose
for 1 second after ignition switch is turned ON.
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 2.
BBIA0563E
2.CHECK FUEL PUMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I

FUEL PUMP

OK or NG EC
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 3.
C
PBIB1187E
3.CHECK FUEL PUMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II D
Check voltage between IPDM E/R terminal 46 and ground with

E
OK or NG F
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 12.
G
PBIB2656E

Check harness for open or short between IPDM E/R and ECM
I
5.CHECK FUEL PUMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III
nector. K
BBIA0545E
N
O
Voltage: Battery voltage should exist for 1 sec-
ond after ignition switch is turned ON.
6. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. P
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> GO TO 6.
PBIB0795E
6.CHECK 15A FUSE

FUEL PUMP
2. Disconnect 15A fuse.
3. Check 15 A fuse (No.48).
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
7.CHECK FUEL PUMP POWER SUPPLY CURCUIT-IV
2. Check harness continuity between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” terminal 1 and IPDM E/R termi-
nal 13.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.
NG >> GO TO 8.
• Harness for open or short between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” and IPDM E/R
9.CHECK FUEL PUMP GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” terminal 3 and ground.

2. Also check harness for short to ground.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> GO TO 10.
• Harness for open or short between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” and ground

11.CHECK FUEL PUMP
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.
NG >> Replace fuel pump.
OK or NG

FUEL PUMP
A
FUEL PUMP
1. Disconnect “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” harness connector.
EC
terminals 1 and 3.
C
Resistance: Approximately 0.2 - 5.0Ω [at 25°C (77°F)]
E
SEC918C

IGNITION SIGNAL
IGNITION SIGNAL
IGNITION COIL & POWER TRANSISTOR

The ignition signal from the ECM is sent to and amplified by the power transistor. The power transistor turns
ON and OFF the ignition coil primary circuit. This ON/OFF operation induces the proper high voltage in the coil
secondary circuit.
BBIA0561E
1.CHECK ENGINE START

Turn ignition switch OFF, and restart engine.
Is engine running?
Yes or No
No >> GO TO 4.
With CONSULT-III
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 10.
Without CONSULT-III
1. Let engine idle.
2. Read the voltage signal between ECM terminals 60, 61, 62, 79,
80, 81 and ground with an oscilloscope.
3. Verify that the oscilloscope screen shows the signal wave as
shown below.
NOTE:
The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at idle.
PBIB1186E
SEC986C
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 10.
4.CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
IGNITION SIGNAL
2. Check voltage between ECM terminals 119, 120 and ground A
Voltage: Battery voltage EC

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Go to EC-542, "Diagnosis Procedure". C
MBIB0034E D
5.CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II
E
H
BBIA0562E
4. Check voltage between condenser-1 terminal 1 and ground with

I

J
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 6.
K
PBIB0624E
L
6.CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III
2. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E119. M
3. Check harness continuity between IPDM E/R terminal 3 and condenser-1 terminal 1.
N
OK or NG O
OK >> GO TO 17.
NG >> GO TO 7.
7.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART P

• Harness for open or short between condenser-1 and IPDM E/R

IGNITION SIGNAL
8.CHECK CONDENSER-1 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

2. Check harness continuity between condenser-1 terminal 2 and ground.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
9.CHECK CONDENSER-1
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> Replace condenser-1.
10.CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-V
BBIA0561E

5. Check voltage between ignition coil terminal 3 and ground with

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.
NG >> GO TO 11.
PBIB0138E

• Harness for open or short between ignition coil and harness connector F32

12.CHECK IGNITION COIL GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
2. Check harness continuity between ignition coil terminal 2 and ground.

IGNITION SIGNAL
OK or NG A
OK >> GO TO 14.
NG >> GO TO 13.

C
• Harness for open or short between ignition coil and ground

14.CHECK IGNITION COIL OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 60, 61, 62, 79, 80, 81 and ignition coil terminal 1. E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16. G
NG >> GO TO 15.
• Harness for open or short between ignition coil and ECM
I
16.CHECK IGNITION COIL WITH POWER TRANSISTOR J
OK or NG
K
OK >> GO TO 17.
NG >> Replace malfunctioning ignition coil with power transistor.
>> INSPECTION END M
N
IGNITION COIL WITH POWER TRANSISTOR
CAUTION:
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. O

IGNITION SIGNAL
3. Check resistance between ignition coil terminals as follows.

1 and 2 Except 0 or ∞
1 and 3
Except 0
2 and 3
PBIB0847E
pressure.
NOTE:
8. Start engine.
pressure.
11. Remove ignition coil harness connectors to avoid the electrical
discharge from the ignition coils.
BBIA0534E
checked.
13. Crank engine for five seconds or more to remove combustion gas in the cylinder.
is generated between the spark plug and the grounded part.

CAUTION:
50cm (19.7 in) each other. Be careful not to get an electri-
cal shock while checking, because the electrical dis- JMBIA0066GB

NOTE:
functioning.
CONDENSER-1
3. Check resistance between condenser-1 terminals 1 and 2.
Resistance Above 1 MΩ at 25°C (77°F)
PBIB0794E

A
EC
PBIB1068E
From the beginning of refueling, the air and vapor inside the fuel tank go through refueling EVAP vapor cut
valve and EVAP/ORVR line to the EVAP canister. The vapor is absorbed by the EVAP canister and the air is H
released to the atmosphere.
When the refueling has reached the full level of the fuel tank, the refueling EVAP vapor cut valve is closed and
refueling is stopped because of auto shut-off. The vapor which was absorbed by the EVAP canister is purged
during driving. I
WARNING:
When conducting inspections below, always observe the following:
• Put a “CAUTION: FLAMMABLE” sign in workshop. J
• Never smoke while servicing fuel system. Keep open flames and sparks away from work area.
• Always furnish the workshop with a CO2 fire extinguisher.
CAUTION:
K
• Before removing fuel line parts, carry out the following procedures:
- Put drained fuel in an explosion-proof container and put lid on securely.
- Release fuel pressure from fuel line. Refer to EC-943, "Fuel Pressure Check".
- Disconnect battery negative cable. L
• Always replace O-ring when the fuel gauge retainer is removed.
• Never kink or twist hose and tube when they are installed.
• Never tighten hose and clamps excessively to avoid damaging hoses. M
• After installation, run engine and check for fuel leaks at connection.
• Never attempt to top off the fuel tank after the fuel pump nozzle shuts off automatically.
Continued refueling may cause fuel overflow, resulting in fuel spray and possibly a fire.
N
SYMPTOM: FUEL ODOR FROM EVAP CANISTER IS STRONG. O

attached. P
sor attached.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> GO TO 3.


Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 3.
No >> GO TO 6.
BBIA0558E
3.REPLACE EVAP CANISTER

>> GO TO 4.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.

OK or NG
SYMPTOM: CANNOT REFUEL/FUEL ODOR FROM THE FUEL FILLER OPENING IS STRONG
WHILE REFUELING.
attached.
sor attached.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> GO TO 3.

Yes or No A
Yes >> GO TO 3.
No >> GO TO 6.
EC
BBIA0558E
3.REPLACE EVAP CANISTER D

E
>> GO TO 4.
F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. G
Check the EVAP hose between EVAP canister and vehicle frame for clogging or poor connection. H

I
6.CHECK VENT HOSES AND VENT TUBES
Check hoses and tubes between EVAP canister and refueling control valve for clogging, kinks, looseness and
improper connection. J
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Repair or replace hoses and tubes. K
7.CHECK FILLER NECK TUBE
Check recirculation line for clogging, dents and cracks.
L
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Replace filler neck tube.
M
OK or NG N
OK >> GO TO 9.
9.CHECK FUEL FILLER TUBE O
Check filler neck tube and hose connected to the fuel tank for clogging, dents and cracks.
OK or NG P
OK >> GO TO 10.
10.CHECK ONE-WAY FUEL VALVE-I
Check one-way valve for clogging.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> Repair or replace one-way fuel valve with fuel tank.
11.CHECK ONE-WAY FUEL VALVE-II
1. Make sure that fuel is drained from the tank.
2. Remove fuel filler tube and hose.
3. Check one-way fuel valve for operation as follows.
When a stick is inserted, the valve should open, when removing
stick it should close.
Do not drop any material into the tank.
OK or NG
NG >> Replace fuel filler tube or replace one-way fuel valve
with fuel tank.
SEF665U
REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE

With CONSULT-III
2. Drain fuel from the tank as follows:
a. Remove fuel feed hose located on the fuel gauge retainer.
b. Connect a spare fuel hose, one side to fuel gauge retainer where the hose was removed and the other
side to a fuel container.
c. Drain fuel using “FUEL PUMP RELAY” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-III.
c. Turn fuel tank upside down.
BBIA0568E
Without CONSULT-III

2. Drain fuel from the tank as follows: A
a. Remove fuel gauge retainer.
b. Drain fuel from the tank using a handy pump into a fuel container.
EC
4. Check refueling EVAP vapor cut valve for being stuck to open as follows. C
Always replace O-ring with new one. D
c. Turn fuel tank upside down.
E
J
BBIA0568E
DRAIN FILTER K
3. Check visually for cracks or flaws in the hose. L
5. Block port B.
6. Blow air into port A and check that there is no leakage. M
O
PBIB3641E

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
SEC921C
This system returns blow-by gas to the intake manifold.

The positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) valve is provided to conduct crankcase blow-by gas to the intake
manifold. During partial throttle operation of the engine, the intake manifold sucks the blow-by gas through the
PCV valve. Normally, the capacity of the valve is sufficient to handle any blow-by and a small amount of venti-
lating air. The ventilating air is then drawn from the air inlet tubes into the crankcase. In this process the air
passes through the hose connecting air inlet tubes to rocker cover. Under full-throttle condition, the manifold
vacuum is insufficient to draw the blow-by flow through the valve. The flow goes through the hose connection
in the reverse direction.
On vehicles with an excessively high blow-by, the valve does not
meetthe requirement. This is because some of the flow will go
through the hoseconnection to the air inlet tubes under all condi-
tions.
PBIB1588E
PCV (POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION) VALVE

With engine running at idle, remove PCV valve from rocker cover. A
properly working valve makes a hissing noise as air passes through
it. A strong vacuum should be felt immediately when a finger is
placed over valve inlet.
PBIB1589E

PCV VALVE VENTILATION HOSE
1. Check hoses and hose connections for leaks. A
2. Disconnect all hoses and clean with compressed air. If any
hosecannot be freed of obstructions, replace.
EC
D
S-ET277

The refrigerant pressure sensor is installed at the condenser of the

air conditioner system. The sensor uses an electrostatic volume
pressure transducer to convert refrigerant pressure to voltage. The
voltage signal is sent to ECM, and ECM controls cooling fan system.
BBIA0564E
PBIB2657E
1.CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR OVERALL FUNCTION

2. Turn A/C switch and blower switch ON.
3. Check voltage between ECM terminal 70 and ground with CON-
SULT-III or tester.
Voltage: 1.0 - 4.0V

OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 2.
PBIB1188E

1. Turn A/C switch and blower switch OFF.
BBIA0539E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3. A
3.CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
EC
1. Disconnect refrigerant pressure sensor harness connector.
C
E
BBIA0564E
3. Check voltage between refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 3 F

G
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4. H
PBIB1872E I
• Harness connectors E5, F14 J
>> Repair harness or connectors. K
5.CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. L
3. Check harness continuity between refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 1 and ECM terminal 67.
M
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. N
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6. O
• Harness connectors E5, F14 P
7.CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 70 and refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 2.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> GO TO 8.
OK or NG
OK >> Replace refrigerant pressure sensor.

VIAS
VIAS
A
1.CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION EC

With CONSULT-III
2. Perform “VIAS SOL VALVE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-III. C
3. Turn VIAS control solenoid valve “ON” and “OFF”, and make
sure that power valve actuator rod moves.
D
F
BBIA0570E
Without CONSULT-III G
2. Rev engine up to between 2,200 and 3,300 rpm and make sure
that power valve actuator rod moves. H
OK or NG
NG (With CONSULT-III) >>GO TO 2. I
NG (Without CONSULT-III) >>GO TO 3.
BBIA0570E
2.CHECK VACUUM EXISTENCE K
With CONSULT-III
1. Stop engine and disconnect vacuum hose connected to power valve actuator. L
3. Perform “VIAS SOL VALVE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-III.
4. Turn VIAS control solenoid valve “ON” and “OFF”, and check vacuum existence under the following con-
ditions. M
VIAS SOL VALVE Vacuum

ON Should exist.
N
OFF Should not exist.
O
OK or NG
OK >> Repair or replace power valve actuator.
NG >> GO TO 4.
P
3.CHECK VACUUM EXISTENCE
Without CONSULT-III
1. Stop engine and disconnect vacuum hose connected to power valve actuator.

VIAS
4. Apply 12V of direct current between VIAS control solenoid valve
terminals 1 and 2.
5. Check vacuum existence under the following conditions.
Condition Vacuum
12V direct current supply Should exist.
No supply Should not exist.
OK or NG
OK >> Repair or replace power valve actuator.
PBIB0845E
NG >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK VACUUM HOSE
1. Stop engine.
2. Check hoses and tubes between intake manifold and power
valve actuator for cracks, clogging, improper connection or dis-
connection. Refer to EC-501, "Vacuum Hose Drawing".
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair hoses or tubes.
SEF109L
5.CHECK VACUUM TANK

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Replace vacuum tank.
6.CHECK VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
BBIA0569E
4. Check voltage between terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-

III or tester.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 7.
PBIB0173E

VIAS

• Harness for open or short between VIAS control solenoid valve and IPDM E/R
EC
• Harness for open or short between VIAS control solenoid valve and ECM

C
8.CHECK VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. D
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 29 and VIAS control solenoid valve terminal 2.
E
OK or NG F
OK >> GO TO 9.
9.CHECK VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE G

OK or NG H
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> Replace VIAS control solenoid valve.
10.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT I
J
>> INSPECTION END
K
VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
With CONSULT-III
L
3. Perform “VIAS SOL VALVE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode. M
N
Condition Air passage continuity Air passage continuity
VIAS SOL VALVE between (A) and (B) between (A) and (C)
ON Yes No O
OFF No Yes
P
JMBIA0180ZZ
Without CONSULT-III

VIAS
Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the fol-
lowing conditions.
Air passage continuity Air passage continuity

Condition
between (A) and (B) between (A) and (C)
12V direct current supply
Yes No
between terminals 1 and 2
No supply No Yes
PBIB2532E
VACUUM TANK
1. Disconnect vacuum hose connected to vacuum tank.
2. Connect a vacuum pump to the port (A) of vacuum tank.
3. Apply vacuum and make sure that vacuum exists at the port (B).
PBIB0846E

ECM
< ECU DIAGNOSIS > [VQ40DE]
ECU DIAGNOSIS A
ECM
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode INFOID:0000000004054119
EC
Remarks:
z Specification data are reference values.
z Specification data are output/input values which are detected or supplied by the ECM at the connector. C
* Specification data may not be directly related to their components signals/values/operations.
i.e. Adjust ignition timing with a timing light before monitoring IGN TIMING, because the monitor may show the specification data in spite of the
ignition timing not being adjusted to the specification data. This IGN TIMING monitors the data calculated by the ECM according to the signals
input from the camshaft position sensor and other ignition timing related sensors. D
• Run engine and compare CONSULT-III value with the tachometer indica- Almost the same speed as the
ENG SPEED
tion. tachometer indication.
E
MAS A/F SE-B1 See EC-534.
B/FUEL SCHDL See EC-534.
A/F ALPHA-B1 F
See EC-534.
A/F ALPHA-B2
COOLAN TEMP/S • Engine: After warming up More than 70°C (158°F)
A/F SEN1 (B1) G
• Engine: After warming up Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 rpm Fluctuates around 2.2 V
A/F SEN1 (B2)
• Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly after the following conditions
are met H
HO2S2 (B1) 0 - 0.3V ←→ Approx. 0.6 - 1.0
HO2S2 (B2) V
- Keeping engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at
idle for 1 minute under no load.
I
• Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly after the following conditions
are met
HO2S2 MNTR (B1)
- Engine: After warming up LEAN ←→ RICH
HO2S2 MNTR (B2)
- Keeping engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at J
idle for 1 minute under no load.
• Turn drive wheels and compare CONSULT-III value with the speedometer Almost the same speed as the
VHCL SPEED SE
indication. speedometer indication
K
BATTERY VOLT • Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) 11 - 14 V
• Ignition switch: ON Accelerator pedal: Fully released 0.65 - 0.87 V

ACCEL SEN 1
(Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed More than 4.3 V L
• Ignition switch: ON Accelerator pedal: Fully released 0.56 - 0.96V

ACCEL SEN 2*1 (Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed More than 4.0 V
M
TP SEN 1-B1 • Ignition switch: ON Accelerator pedal: Fully released More than 0.36 V
(Engine stopped)
TP SEN 2-B1*1 • Shift lever: D (A/T), 1st (M/T) Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed Less than 4.75 V
N
EVAP SYS PRES • Ignition switch: ON Approx. 1.8 - 4.8 V
START SIGNAL • Ignition switch: ON → START → ON OFF → ON → OFF
• Ignition switch: ON Accelerator pedal: Fully released ON O

CLSD THL POS
(Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Slightly depressed OFF
AIR COND SIG Air conditioner switch: ON P
engine ON
(Compressor operates.)
Shift lever: P or N (A/T), Neutral (M/T) ON
P/N POSI SW • Ignition switch: ON
Shift lever: Except above OFF
• Engine: After warming up, idle the Steering wheel: Not being turned OFF
PW/ST SIGNAL
engine Steering wheel: Being turned. ON

ECM
Rear window defogger switch is ON
ON
and/or lighting switch is in 2nd
LOAD SIGNAL • Ignition switch: ON
Rear window defogger switch is OFF
OFF
and lighting switch is OFF
IGNITION SW • Ignition switch: ON → OFF → ON ON → OFF → ON
• Engine: After warming up, idle the Heater fan: Operating. ON

HEATER FAN SW
engine Heater fan: Not operating OFF
BRAKE SW • Ignition switch: ON
• Engine: After warming up Idle 2.0 - 3.0 msec
• Shift lever: P or N (A/T), Neutral
INJ PULSE-B1
(M/T)
INJ PULSE-B2 2,000 rpm 1.9 - 2.9 msec
• No load
• Engine: After warming up Idle 13° - 18° BTDC
IGN TIMING (M/T)
• Air conditioner switch: OFF 2,000 rpm 25° - 45° BTDC
• No load
• Engine: After warming up Idle 5% - 35%
CAL/LD VALUE (M/T)
• Air conditioner switch: OFF 2,500 rpm 5% - 35%
• No load
• Engine: After warming up Idle 2.0 - 6.0 g·m/s
MASS AIRFLOW (M/T)
• Air conditioner switch: OFF 2,500 rpm 7.0 - 20.0 g·m/s
• No load
• Engine: After warming up Idle
• Shift lever: P or N (A/T), Neutral (Accelerator pedal is not depressed 0%
PURG VOL C/V (M/T) even slightly, after engine starting)
• No load 2,000 rpm —
• Engine: After warming up Idle −5° - 5°CA

INT/V TIM (B1)
(M/T)
INT/V TIM (B2) 2,000 rpm Approx. 0° - 30°CA
• No load
• Engine: After warming up Idle 0% - 2%
INT/V SOL (B1)
(M/T)
INT/V SOL (B2) 2,000 rpm Approx. 0% - 50%
• No load
2,200 - 3,300 rpm ON
VIAS S/V-1 • Engine: After warming up
Except above conditions OFF
AIR COND RLY Air conditioner switch: ON
engine ON
• For 1 second after turning ignition switch ON
ON
FUEL PUMP RLY • Engine running or cranking
• Except above conditions OFF
VENT CONT/V • Ignition switch: ON OFF
THRTL RELAY • Ignition switch: ON ON

ECM
A
Engine coolant temperature: 97°C
OFF
(207°F) or less
Engine coolant temperature: Between
COOLING FAN engine LOW EC
98°C (208°F) and 104°C (219°F)
Engine coolant temperature: 105°C
HI
(221°F) or more
• Engine speed: Below 3,600 rpm after the following conditions are met. C
HO2S2 HTR (B1) ON
- Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and
HO2S2 HTR (B2) at idle for 1 minute under no load D
• Engine speed: Above 3,600 rpm OFF
Almost the same speed as the
I/P PULLY SPD • Vehicle speed: More than 20 km/h (12 MPH)
speedometer indication E
• Turn drive wheels and compare the CONSULT-III value with speedometer Almost the same speed as the
VEHICLE SPEED
indication. speedometer indication
Vehicle has traveled after MIL has 0 - 65,535 km F
TRVL AFTER MIL • Ignition switch: ON
turned ON. (0 - 40,723 mile)
A/F S1 HTR (B1)
• Engine: After warming up, idle the engine 4 - 100%
A/F S1 HTR (B2)
G
• Engine: Idle
1.0 - 4.0 V
AC PRESS SEN • Both A/C switch blower fan switch: ON (Compressor operates)
• Turn drive wheels and compare speedometer indication with the CON- Almost the same speed as the H
VHCL SPEED SE
SULT-III value. CONSULT-III value
The preset vehicle speed is dis-
SET VHCL SPD • Engine: Running ASCD: Operating.
played.
I
MAIN switch: Pressed ON
MAIN SW • Ignition switch: ON
MAIN switch: Released OFF
CANCEL switch: Pressed ON J
CANCEL SW • Ignition switch: ON
CANCEL switch: Released OFF
RESUME/ACCELERATE switch:
ON K
Pressed
RESUME/ACC SW • Ignition switch: ON
RESUME/ACCELERATE switch: Re-
OFF
leased
L
SET/COAST switch: Pressed ON
SET SW • Ignition switch: ON
SET/COAST switch: Released OFF
Brake pedal: Fully released ON M
BRAKE SW1 • Ignition switch: ON
BRAKE SW2 • Ignition switch: ON
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed ON N
MAIN switch: pressed at the 1st time →
at the 2nd time
O
• When vehicle speed is between
SET LAMP
40km/h (25MPH) and 144km/h ASCD: Not operating OFF
(89MPH) P
ALT DUTY • Engine: Idle 0 - 80%
• Battery: Fully charged*2
BAT CUR SEN • Shift lever: P or N (A/T), Neutral (M/T) Approx. 2,600 - 3,500 mV
• No load

ECM
• Power generation voltage variable control: Operating ON
ALT DUTY SIG
• Power generation voltage variable control: Not operating OFF
*1: Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 signal and throttle position sensor 2 signal are converted by ECM internally. Thus, they differ
from ECM terminals voltage signal.
*2: Before measuring the terminal voltage, confirm that the battery is fully charged. Refer to PG-4, "How to Handle Battery".
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout INFOID:0000000004054120
MBIB0045E
ECM Terminal and Reference Value INFOID:0000000004054121
PREPARATION
ECM located in the engine room passenger side behind reservoir
tank.
BBIA0537E
ECM INSPECTION TABLE

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-III.
CAUTION:
age to the ECMs transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TER-
MI- WIRE
ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
NAL COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
1 BR ECM ground Body ground
• Idle speed
Approximately 2.9 - 8.8V
[Engine is running]
2 G A/F sensor 1 heater (Bank 1) • Idle speed
(More than 140 seconds after starting en-
gine)
PBIA8148J
Throttle control motor relay BATTERY VOLTAGE

3 V [Ignition switch: ON]
power supply (11 - 14V)

ECM
TER-
MI- WIRE A
NAL COLOR
NO.
0 - 14V EC

• Engine: Stopped
4 L/W Throttle control motor (Close) C
• Shift lever: D (A/T), 1st (M/T)
PBIB1104E D
0 - 14V
[Ignition switch: ON] E

• Engine: Stopped
5 L/B Throttle control motor (Open)
F
PBIB1105E
[Engine is running]
• Engine speed is below 3,600 rpm after the
G
following conditions are met
- Engine: After warming up 0 - 1.0V
- Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 H
6 R
heater (Bank 2) minute under no load
• Engine: Stopped BATTERY VOLTAGE I
[Engine is running] J
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
• Idle speed
7 - 12V K
10 W
solenoid valve (Bank 2) [Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition L
PBIB1790E M
[Engine is running]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
• Idle speed N
7 - 12V
11 LG
solenoid valve (Bank 1) [Engine is running] O
P
PBIB1790E
[Engine is running]
0.5 - 4.5V
Power steering pressure sen- • Steering wheel: Being turned
12 P
sor [Engine is running]
0.4 - 0.8V
• Steering wheel: Not being turned

ECM
TER-
MI- WIRE
NAL COLOR
NO.
Approximately 10V
[Engine is running]
• Idle speed
NOTE:
The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm
at idle
Crankshaft position sensor PBIB1041E

13 G
(POS)
Approximately 10V
[Engine is running]
PBIB1042E
1.0 - 4.0V
[Engine is running]
• Idle speed
NOTE:
at idle

14 Y
(PHASE) (Bank 2)
1.0 - 4.0V
[Engine is running]
PBIB1040E
Knock sensor [Engine is running]

15 W Approximately 2.5V
(Bank 1) • Idle speed
[Engine is running] Approximately 1.8V
16 BR A/F sensor 1 (Bank 2) • Warm-up condition Output voltage varies with air fuel
• Engine speed: 2,000 rpm ratio.

ECM
TER-
MI- WIRE A
NAL COLOR
NO.
BATTERY VOLTAGE EC
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
• Idle speed C
NOTE:
at idle
D
21 W Fuel injector No. 5 SEC984C
22 LG Fuel injector No. 3
23 SB Fuel injector No. 1 BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V) E
[Engine is running]
• Engine speed: 2,000 rpm F
SEC985C G
Approximately 2.9 - 8.8V
[Engine is running] H
24 G
A/F sensor 1 heater (Bank 2) • Idle speed
43 G
(More than 140 seconds after starting en-
gine) I
PBIA8148J
[Engine is running]
• Engine speed: Below 3,600 rpm after the
J
following conditions are met
- Engine: After warming up 0 - 1.0V
- Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 K
25 P
heater (Bank 1) minute under no load
• Engine: Stopped BATTERY VOLTAGE L
[Engine is running] BATTERY VOLTAGE M
• Idle speed (11 - 14V)
29 G VIAS control solenoid valve [Engine is running]
• Engine speed: Between 2,200 and 3,300 0 - 1.0V N
rpm
EVAP control system pres-
32 W [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 1.8 - 4.8V
sure sensor
O

ECM
TER-
MI- WIRE
NAL COLOR
NO.
1.0 - 4.0V
[Engine is running]
• Idle speed
NOTE:
at idle

33 L
(PHASE) (Bank 1)
1.0 - 4.0V
[Engine is running]
PBIB1040E
34 BR Intake air temperature sensor [Engine is running] Output voltage varies with intake
air temperature.
[Engine is running] Approximately 1.8V
35 O A/F sensor 1 (Bank 1) • Warm-up condition Output voltage varies with air fuel
• Engine speed: 2,000 rpm ratio.
Knock sensor [Engine is running]
36 W Approximately 2.5V
(Bank 2) • Idle speed
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
• Idle speed
NOTE:
at idle
40 V Fuel injector No. 6 SEC984C

41 R Fuel injector No. 4
42 O Fuel injector No. 2 BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
SEC985C

ECM
TER-
MI- WIRE A
NAL COLOR
NO.
BATTERY VOLTAGE EC
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
• Idle speed C
• Accelerator pedal is not depressed even
slightly, after engine starting
D
EVAP canister purge volume SEC990C
45 R
control solenoid valve BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V) E
[Engine is running]
• Engine speed: About 2,000 rpm (More than
100 seconds after starting engine) F
SEC991C G
Sensor power supply (Throt-
tle position sensor)
Sensor power supply H
48 SB (EVAP control system pres- [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V
sure sensor)
Sensor power supply I
49 P (Refrigerant pressure sensor/ [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V
Battery current sensor)
J
• Engine: Stopped
More than 0.36V
50 W Throttle position sensor 1
[Ignition switch: ON] K
• Engine: Stopped
Less than 4.75V
L
[Engine is running]
• Idle speed
51 P Mass air flow sensor M
[Engine is running]
[Engine is running] N
• Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm
Heated oxygen sensor 2 met
55 G
(Bank 2) - Engine: After warming up
0 - Approximately 1.0V O
minute under no load P
56 LG A/F sensor 1 (Bank 1) [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 2.2V

ECM
TER-
MI- WIRE
NAL COLOR
NO.
0 - 0.2V
[Engine is running]
• Idle speed
NOTE:
at idle
60 SB Ignition signal No. 5 SEC986C
61 L Ignition signal No. 3
62 Y Ignition signal No. 1 0.1 - 0.4V
[Engine is running]
SEC987C
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
• Idle speed
[Engine is running]
67 B Sensor ground • Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
• Idle speed
Sensor power supply
68 G (Power steering pressure [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V
sensor)
• Engine: Stopped
Less than 4.75V
69 R Throttle position sensor 2
• Engine: Stopped
More than 0.36V
[Engine is running]
70 BR Refrigerant pressure sensor 1.0 - 4.0V
• Both A/C switch and blower switch: ON
[Engine is running]
71 R Battery current sensor • Battery: Fully charged* Approximately 2.6 - 3.5V
• Idle speed
73 Y [Engine is running] Output voltage varies with engine
sensor
coolant temperature.
[Engine is running]
• Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm
Heated oxygen sensor 2 met
74 W 0 - Approximately 1.0V
(Bank 1) - Engine: After warming up
minute under no load
75 P A/F sensor 1 (Bank 2) [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 2.2V
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
78 GR • Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
(Heated oxygen sensor 2)
• Idle speed

ECM
TER-
MI- WIRE A
NAL COLOR
NO.
0 - 0.2V EC
[Engine is running]
• Idle speed
NOTE: C
at idle
79 P Ignition signal No. 6 SEC986C D
80 GR Ignition signal No. 4
81 G Ignition signal No. 2 0.1 - 0.4V
E
[Engine is running]
F
SEC987C
[Engine is running]
82 B
Sensor ground
• Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
G
(APP sensor 1)
• Idle speed
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground H
(APP sensor 2)
• Idle speed
[Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V - Battery volt-
85 W Data link connector
• CONSULT-III or GST: disconnected age (11 - 14V) I
86 P CAN communication line — —
Sensor power supply
(APP sensor 1) J
Sensor power supply
91 G [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V
(APP sensor 2)
94 L CAN communication line — — K
Accelerator pedal position • Accelerator pedal: Fully released L
98 GR
• Engine: Stopped More than 2.0
M
Approximately 4V
• ASCD steering switch: OFF
[Ignition switch: ON] N
Approximately 0V
• MAIN switch: Pressed
99 SB ASCD steering switch Approximately 1V
• CANCEL switch: Pressed
O
Approximately 3V
• RESUME/ACCELERATE switch: Pressed
Approximately 2V P
• SET/COAST switch: Pressed
Approximately 0V
• Brake pedal: Fully released
101 LG Stop lamp switch
[Ignition switch: OFF] BATTERY VOLTAGE
• Brake pedal: Slightly depressed (11 - 14V)

ECM
TER-
MI- WIRE
NAL COLOR
NO.
Approximately 0V
102 O PNP switch
• Except above position (11 - 14V)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
104 O Throttle control motor relay (11 - 14V)
[Ignition switch: ON] 0 - 1.0V
106 R
• Engine: Stopped More than 4.3V
107 Y Fuel tank temperature sensor [Engine is running] Output voltage varies with fuel
tank temperature.
Approximately 0V
• Brake pedal: Slightly depressed
108 LG ASCD brake switch
• Brake pedal: Fully released (11 - 14V)
[Ignition switch: OFF] 0V
109 W/R Ignition switch BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
0 - 1.5V
• For a few seconds after turning ignition
ECM relay switch OFF
111 BR
(Self shut-off)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
• More than a few seconds after turning igni-
(11 - 14V)
tion switch OFF
• For 1 second after turning ignition switch
0 - 1.5V
ON
113 V Fuel pump relay [Engine is running]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
• More than 1 second after turning ignition
(11 - 14V)
switch ON
115 B [Engine is running]
ECM ground Body ground
116 GR • Idle speed
EVAP canister vent control BATTERY VOLTAGE
117 G [Ignition switch: ON]
valve (11 - 14V)
119 R BATTERY VOLTAGE
Power supply for ECM [Ignition switch: ON]
120 P (11 - 14V)
Power supply for ECM (Back- BATTERY VOLTAGE
121 R/B [Ignition switch: OFF]
up) (11 - 14V)
: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
*: Before measuring the terminal voltage, confirm that the battery is fully charged. Refer to PG-4, "How to Handle Battery".

ECM
Wiring Diagram - ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM - INFOID:0000000004054122
EC
ABBWA0039GB
P

ECM
ABBWA0040GB

ECM
EC
ABBWA0041GB

ECM
ABBWA0042GB

ECM
EC
ABBWA0043GB

ECM
ABBIA0105GB

ECM
EC
ABBIA0106GB

ECM
ABBIA0107GB

ECM
EC
ABBIA0108GB

ECM
ABBIA0109GB

ECM
EC
ABBIA0110GB

ECM
ABBIA0111GB

ECM
EC
ABBIA0112GB

ECM
ABBIA0113GB

ECM
EC
ABBIA0114GB

ECM
ABBIA0115GB

ECM
EC
ABBIA0116GB

ECM
ABBIA0117GB

ECM
EC
ABBIA0118GB

ECM
ABBIA0119GB
Fail-Safe Chart INFOID:0000000004054123
When the DTC listed below is detected, the ECM enters the fail-safe mode and the MIL illuminates.

ECM
DTC No. Detected items Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode A

P0102 Mass air flow sensor circuit Engine speed will not rise more than 2,400 rpm due to the fuel cut.
P0103
P0117 Engine coolant tempera- Engine coolant temperature will be determined by ECM based on the following condition. EC
P0118 ture sensor circuit CONSULT-III displays the engine coolant temperature decided by ECM.
Engine coolant temperature decided
Condition
(CONSULT-III display) C
Just as ignition switch is turned ON
40°C (104°F)
or START
Approx. 4 minutes after engine D
80°C (176°F)
starting
40 - 80°C (104 - 176°F)
E
When the fail-safe system for engine coolant temperature sensor is activated, the cooling
fan operates while engine is running.
P0122 Throttle position sensor The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in F
P0123 order for the idle position to be within +10 degrees.
P0223 condition.
P2135 Therefore, the acceleration will be poor. G
P0643 Sensor power supply ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a
P2100 Throttle control motor relay ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a H
P2103 fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring.
P2101 Electric throttle control ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a
function fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring. I
P2118 Throttle control motor ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a
P2119 Electric throttle control ac- (When electric throttle control actuator does not function properly due to the return spring J
tuator malfunction:)
ECM controls the electric throttle actuator becouse of regulating the throttle opening
around the idle position. The engine speed will not rise more than 2,000 rpm.
K
(When throttle valve opening angle in fail-safe mode is not in specified range:)
ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator by regulating the throttle opening to 20
degrees or less.
(When ECM detects the throttle valve is stuck open:) L
While the vehicle is being drven, it slows down gradually by fuel cut. After the vehicle
stops, the engine stalls.
The engine can restart in N or P position (A/T), Neutral position (M/T), and engine speed
M
will not exceed 1,000 rpm or more.
P2122 Accelerator pedal position The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in
P2123 sensor order for the idle position to be within +10 degrees.
P2127 The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal N
P2128 condition.
• When there is an open circuit on MIL circuit, the ECM cannot warn the driver by lighting up MIL when there O
is malfunction on engine control system.
Therefore, when electrical controlled throttle and part of ECM related diagnoses are continuously detected
as NG for 5 trips, ECM warns the driver that engine control system malfunctions and MIL circuit is open by
P
means of operating fail-safe function.

ECM
DTC Inspection Priority Chart INFOID:0000000004054124
If some DTCs are displayed at the same time, perform inspections one by one based on the following priority
chart.
NOTE:
• If DTC UXXXX is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1XXXX.
• If DTC P0607 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0607.Refer to
EC-751, "Description"
Priority Detected items (DTC)

1 • U0101 U1001 CAN communication line
• P0101 P0102 P0103 Mass air flow sensor
• P0112 P0113 P0127 Intake air temperature sensor
• P0116 P0117 P0118 P0125 Engine coolant temperature sensor
• P0122 P0123 P0222 P0223 P1225 P1226 P2135 Throttle position sensor
• P0128 Thermostat function
• P0181 P0182 P0183 Fuel tank temperature sensor
• P0327 P0328 P0332 P0333 Knock sensor
• P0335 Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
• P0340 P0345 Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
• P0460 P0461 P0462 P0463 Fuel level sensor
• P0500 Vehicle speed sensor
• P0605 P0607 ECM
• P0643 Sensor power supply
• P0700 TCM
• P0705 P0850 Park/Neutral position (PNP) switch
• P1550 P1551 P1552 P1553 P1554 Battery current sensor
• P1610 - P1615 NATS
• P2122 P2123 P2127 P2128 P2138 Accelerator pedal position sensor
2 • P0031 P0032 P0051 P0052 Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater
• P0037 P0038 P0057 P0058 Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater
• P0075 P0081 Intake valve timing control solenoid valve
• P0130 P0131 P0132 P0133 P0150 P0151 P0152 P0153 P2A00 P2A03 Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
• P0137 P0138 P0139 P0157 P0158 P0159 Heated oxygen sensor 2
• P0441 EVAP control system purge flow monitoring
• P0443 P0444 P0445 EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
• P0447 P0448 EVAP canister vent control valve
• P0451 P0452 P0453 EVAP control system pressure sensor
• P0550 Power steering pressure sensor
• P0603 ECM power supply
• P0710 P0717 P0720 P0731 P0732 P0733 P0734 P0735 P0740 P0744 P0745 P1730 P1752 P1757 P1762 P1767
P1772 P1774 A/T related sensors, solenoid valves and switches
• P1217 Engine over temperature (OVERHEAT)
• P1800 VIAS control solenoid valve
• P1805 Brake switch
• P2100 P2103 P2118 Electric throttle control actuator
• P2101 Electric throttle control function
3 • P0011 P0021 Intake valve timing control
• P0171 P0172 P0174 P0175 Fuel injection system function
• P0300 - P0306 Misfire
• P0420 P0430 Three way catalyst function
• P0442 P0455 P0456 EVAP control system
• P0506 P0507 Idle speed control system
• P1148 P1168 Closed loop control
• P1211 TCS control unit
• P1212 TCS communication line
• P1421 Cold start control
• P1564 ASCD steering switch
• P1572 ASCD brake switch
• P1574 ASCD vehicle speed sensor
• P1715 Turbine revolution sensor
• P2119 Electric throttle control actuator

ECM
DTC Index INFOID:0000000004054125
A
EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION ITEMS
DTC*1
EC
Items Reference
CONSULT-III SRT code Trip MIL
(CONSULT-III screen terms) page
ECM*3
GST*2
C
LOST COMM (TCM) U0101 0101*5 — 1 × EC-546
CAN COMM CIRCUIT U1001 1001*5 — 2 — EC-547

NO DTC IS DETECTED.
D
FURTHER TESTING P0000 0000 — — Blinking*7 EC-515
MAY BE REQUIRED.
INT/V TIM CONT-B1 P0011 0011 — 2 × EC-548 E
INT/V TIM CONT-B2 P0021 0021 — 2 × EC-548
A/F SEN1 HTR (B1) P0031 0031 — 2 × EC-551
F
A/F SEN1 HTR (B1) P0032 0032 — 2 × EC-551
HO2S2 HTR (B1) P0037 0037 — 2 × EC-554
HO2S2 HTR (B1) P0038 0038 — 2 × EC-554 G
A/F SEN1 HTR (B2) P0051 0051 — 2 × EC-551
A/F SEN1 HTR (B2) P0052 0052 — 2 × EC-551
H
HO2S2 HTR (B2) P0057 0057 — 2 × EC-554
HO2S2 HTR (B2) P0058 0058 — 2 × EC-554
INT/V TIM V/CIR-B1 P0075 0075 — 2 × EC-558 I
INT/V TIM V/CIR-B2 P0081 0081 — 2 × EC-558
MAF SEN/CIRCUIT-B1 P0101 0101 — 2 × EC-561
J
IAT SEN/CIRCUIT-B1 P0112 0112 — 2 × EC-572
K
IAT SEN/CIRCUIT-B1 P0113 0113 — 2 × EC-572
ECT SEN/CIRC P0116 0116 — 2 × EC-575
ECT SEN/CIRC P0117 0117 — 1 × EC-578 L
ECT SEN/CIRC P0118 0118 — 1 × EC-578
TP SEN 2/CIRC-B1 P0122 0122 — 1 × EC-582
M
TP SEN 2/CIRC-B1 P0123 0123 — 1 × EC-582
ECT SENSOR P0125 0125 — 2 × EC-586
IAT SENSOR-B1 P0127 0127 — 2 × EC-589 N
THERMSTAT FNCTN P0128 0128 — 2 × EC-592
A/F SENSOR1 (B1) P0130 0130 — 2 × EC-594
O
A/F SENSOR1 (B1) P0131 0131 — 2 × EC-598
A/F SENSOR1 (B1) P0132 0132 — 2 × EC-602
A/F SENSOR1 (B1) P0133 0133 × 2 × EC-606 P
HO2S2 (B1) P0137 0137 × 2 × EC-611
HO2S2 (B1) P0138 0138 × 2 × EC-617
HO2S2 (B1) P0139 0139 × 2 × EC-625
A/F SENSOR1 (B2) P0150 0150 — 2 × EC-594
A/F SENSOR1 (B2) P0151 0151 — 2 × EC-598

ECM
DTC*1
Items Reference
ECM*3
GST*2
A/F SENSOR1 (B2) P0152 0152 — 2 × EC-602
A/F SENSOR1 (B2) P0153 0153 × 2 × EC-606
HO2S2 (B2) P0157 0157 × 2 × EC-611
HO2S2 (B2) P0158 0158 × 2 × EC-617
HO2S2 (B2) P0159 0159 × 2 × EC-625
FUEL SYS-LEAN-B1 P0171 0171 — 2 × EC-631
FUEL SYS-RICH-B1 P0172 0172 — 2 × EC-637
FUEL SYS-LEAN-B2 P0174 0174 — 2 × EC-631
FUEL SYS-RICH-B2 P0175 0175 — 2 × EC-637
FTT SENSOR P0181 0181 — 2 × EC-643
FTT SEN/CIRCUIT P0182 0182 — 2 × EC-646
FTT SEN/CIRCUIT P0183 0183 — 2 × EC-646
TP SEN 1/CIRC-B1 P0222 0222 — 1 × EC-649
TP SEN 1/CIRC-B1 P0223 0223 — 1 × EC-649
MULTI CYL MISFIRE P0300 0300 — 2 × EC-653
CYL 1 MISFIRE P0301 0301 — 2 × EC-653
CYL 2 MISFIRE P0302 0302 — 2 × EC-653
CYL 3 MISFIRE P0303 0303 — 2 × EC-653
CYL 4 MISFIRE P0304 0304 — 2 × EC-653
CYL 5 MISFIRE P0305 0305 — 2 × EC-653
CYL 6 MISFIRE P0306 0306 — 2 × EC-653
KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 P0327 0327 — 2 — EC-660
CKP SEN/CIRCUIT P0335 0335 — 2 × EC-663
CMP SEN/CIRC-B1 P0340 0340 — 2 × EC-667
CMP SEN/CIRC-B2 P0345 0345 — 2 × EC-667
TW CATALYST SYS-B1 P0420 0420 × 2 × EC-671
TW CATALYST SYS-B2 P0430 0430 × 2 × EC-671
EVAP PURG FLOW/MON P0441 0441 × 2 × EC-676
EVAP SMALL LEAK P0442 0442 × 2 × EC-681
PURG VOLUME CONT/V P0443 0443 — 2 × EC-688
VENT CONTROL VALVE P0447 0447 — 2 × EC-696
VENT CONTROL VALVE P0448 0448 — 2 × EC-700
EVAP SYS PRES SEN P0451 0451 — 2 × EC-705
EVAP GROSS LEAK P0455 0455 — 2 × EC-717
EVAP VERY SML LEAK P0456 0456 ×*4 2 × EC-724

ECM
DTC*1
Items Reference A
ECM*3
GST*2
FUEL LEV SEN SLOSH P0460 0460 — 2 × EC-732 EC
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR P0461 0461 — 2 × EC-734
FUEL LEVL SEN/CIRC P0462 0462 — 2 × EC-736
FUEL LEVEL SEN/CIRC P0463 0463 — 2 × EC-736 C
VEH SPEED SEN/CIRC P0500 0500 — 2 × EC-738
ISC SYSTEM P0506 0506 — 2 × EC-740
D
ISC SYSTEM P0507 0507 — 2 × EC-742
PW ST P SEN/CIRC P0550 0550 — 2 — EC-744
ECM BACK UP/CIRCUIT P0603 0603 — 2 × EC-747 E
ECM P0605 0605 — 1 or 2 × or — EC-749
1(A/T) ×(A/T)
ECM P0607 0607 — EC-751 F
2(M/T) —(M/T)
SENSOR POWER/CIRCUIT P0643 0643 — 1 × EC-752
TCM P0700 0700 — 1 × TM-162
G
PNP SW/CIRC P0705 0705 — 2 × TM-163
ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC*7 P0710 0710 — 2 × TM-190

TURBINE SENSOR P0717 0717 — 2 × TM-165 H
VEH SPD SEN/CIR AT P0720 0720 — 2 × TM-167
A/T 1ST GR FNCTN* 7 P0731 0731 — 2 × TM-172

I
A/T 2ND GR FNCTN* 7 P0732 0732 — 2 × TM-174
A/T 3RD GR FNCTN*7 P0733 0733 — 2 × TM-176

J
A/T 4TH GR FNCTN*7 P0734 0734 — 2 × TM-178
A/T 5TH GR FNCTN*7 P0735 0735 — 2 × TM-180

TCC SOLENOID/CIRC P0740 0740 — 2 × TM-182 K
A/T TCC S/V FNCTN P0744 0744 — 2 × TM-184
L/PRESS SOL/CIRC P0745 0745 — 2 × TM-186
L
P-N POS SW/CIRCUIT P0850 0850 — 2 × EC-755
CLOSED LOOP-B1 P1148 1148 — 1 × EC-759
CLOSED LOOP-B2 P1168 1168 — 1 × EC-759 M
TCS C/U FUNCTN P1211 1211 — 2 — EC-760
TCS/CIRC P1212 1212 — 2 — EC-761
N
ENG OVER TEMP P1217 1217 — 1 × EC-762
CTP LEARNING-B1 P1225 1225 — 2 — EC-766
CTP LEARNING-B1 P1226 1226 — 2 — EC-768 O
COLD START CONTROL P1421 1421 — 2 × EC-770
BAT CURRENT SENSOR P1550 1550 — 2 — EC-772
P
ASCD SW P1564 1564 — 1 — EC-788
ASCD BRAKE SW P1572 1572 — 1 — EC-792

ECM
DTC*1
Items Reference
ECM*3
GST*2
ASCD VHL SPD SEN P1574 1574 — 1 — EC-801
LOCK MODE P1610 1610 — 2 — SEC-25
ID DISCARD IMM-ECM P1611 1611 — 2 — SEC-22
CHAIN OF ECM-IMMU P1612 1612 — 2 — SEC-24
CHAIN OF IMMU-KEY P1614 1614 — 2 — SEC-18
DIFFERENCE OF KEY P1615 1615 — 2 — SEC-21
IN PLUY SPEED P1715 1715 — 2 — EC-803
A/T INTERLOCK P1730 1730 — 1 × TM-194
I/C SOLENOID/CIRC P1752 1752 — 1 × TM-198
FR/B SOLENOID/CIRC P1757 1757 — 1 × TM-200
D/C SOLENOID/CIRC P1762 1762 — 1 × TM-202
HLR/C SOL/CIRC P1767 1767 — 1 × TM-204
LC/B SOLENOID/CIRC P1772 1772 — 1 × TM-206
LC/B SOLENOID FNCT P1774 1774 — 1 × TM-208
VIAS S/V-1 P1800 1800 — 2 — EC-804
BRAKE SW/CIRCUIT P1805 1805 — 2 — EC-807
ETC MOT PWR-B1 P2100 2100 — 1 × EC-810
ETC FUNCTION/CIRC-B1 P2101 2101 — 1 × EC-813
ETC MOT PWR P2103 2103 — 1 × EC-810
ETC MOT-B1 P2118 2118 — 1 × EC-817
ETC ACTR-B1 P2119 2119 — 1 × EC-819
APP SEN 1/CIRC P2122 2122 — 1 × EC-821
APP SEN 1/CIRC P2123 2123 — 1 × EC-821
APP SEN 2/CIRC P2127 2127 — 1 × EC-824
APP SEN 2/CIRC P2128 2128 — 1 × EC-824
TP SENSOR-B1 P2135 2135 — 1 × EC-828
APP SENSOR P2138 2138 — 1 × EC-832
A/F SENSOR1 (B1) P2A00 2A00 — 2 × EC-836
A/F SENSOR1 (B2) P2A03 2A03 — 2 × EC-836
*1: 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No.
*2: This number is prescribed by SAE J2012.
*3: In Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results), this number is controlled by NISSAN.
*4: SRT code will not be set if the self-diagnostic result is NG.
*5: The troubleshooting for this DTC need CONSULT-III.
*6: When the ECM is in the mode of displays SRT status, MIL may blink. For the details, refer to "How to Display SRT Status".
*7: When erasing this DTC, always use CONSULT-III or GST.
Emission-related Diagnostic Information INFOID:0000000004054126

The 1st trip DTC (whose number is the same as the DTC number) is displayed for the latest self-diagnostic
If a malfunction is detected during the 1st trip, the 1st trip DTC is stored in the ECM memory. The MIL will not
illuminate (two trip detection logic). If the same malfunction is not detected in the 2nd trip (meeting the required

ECM
2nd trip, both the 1st trip DTC and DTC are stored in the ECM memory and the MIL illuminates. In other
words, the DTC is stored in the ECM memory and the MIL illuminates when the same malfunction occurs in A
two consecutive trips. If a 1st trip DTC is stored and a non-diagnostic operation is performed between the 1st
and 2nd trips, only the 1st trip DTC will continue to be stored. For malfunctions that blink or illuminate the MIL
during the 1st trip, the DTC and 1st trip DTC are stored in the ECM memory.
EC
MATION ITEMS". These items are required by legal regulations to continuously monitor the system/compo- C
and therefore does not warn the driver of a malfunction. However, 1st trip DTC detection will not prevent the D
form DTC Confirmation Procedure or Overall Function Check to try to duplicate the malfunction. If the mal- E
DTC and 1st trip DTC can be read by the following methods. F
With CONSULT-III
With GST
CONSULT-III or GST (Generic Scan Tool) Examples: P0340, P0850, P1148, etc. G
No Tools H
Example: 0340, 0850, 1148, etc.
• 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No. I
mal. CONSULT-III can identify malfunction status as shown below. Therefore, using CONSULT-III (if J
If the DTC is being detected currently, the time data will be [0]. K
FREEZE FRAME DATA AND 1ST TRIP FREEZE FRAME DATA L
Data which are stored in the ECM memory, along with the 1st trip DTC, are called 1st trip freeze frame data. M
details, see EC-523, "CONSULT-III Function (ENGINE)". N
freeze frame data (2nd trip detection/MIL on) is stored in the ECM memory, 1st trip freeze frame data is no O
P
Priority Items
Freeze frame data Misfire — DTC: P0300 - P0306
1
Fuel Injection System Function — DTC: P0171, P0172, P0174, P0175

ECM
For example, the EGR malfunction (Priority: 2) was detected and the freeze frame data was stored in the 2nd
ECM memory.
ory is erased. Procedures for clearing the ECM memory are described in "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-
RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION".
NOTE:
NOTE:
SRT Item
SRT item Perfor-

(CONSULT-III indica- mance Pri- Required self-diagnostic items to set the SRT to “CMPLT” Corresponding DTC No.
tion) ority*1
CATALYST 2 Three way catalyst function P0420, P0430
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 P0133, P0153
HO2S 1
*1: If completion of several SRTs is required, perform driving patterns (DTC confirmation procedure), one by one based on the priority
for models with CONSULT-III.
SRT Set Timing

is shown in the table below.

ECM
Example A
Diagnosis
All OK Case 1 P0400 OK (1) — (1) OK (2) — (2) EC
P0402 OK (1) — (1) — (1) OK (2)
P1402 OK (1) OK (2) — (2) — (2)
C
Case 2 P0400 OK (1) — (1) — (1) — (1)
P0402 — (0) — (0) OK (1) — (1) D
P1402 OK (1) OK (2) — (2) — (2)
E
P0402 — — — —
NG
F
NG)
(1st trip) DTC
1st trip DTC — 1st trip DTC G
DTC (= MIL ON)
H
When all SRT related self-diagnoses showed OK results in a single cycle (Ignition OFF-ON-OFF), the SRT will
indicate “CMPLT”. → Case 1 above I
When all SRT related self-diagnoses showed OK results through several different cycles, the SRT will indicate
If one or more SRT related self-diagnoses showed NG results in 2 consecutive cycles, the SRT will also indi- J
cate “CMPLT”. → Case 3 above
The table above shows that the minimum number of cycles for setting SRT as “INCMP” is one (1) for each
self-diagnosis (Case 1 & 2) or two (2) for one of self-diagnoses (Case 3). However, in preparation for the state
K
emissions inspection, it is unnecessary for each self-diagnosis to be executed twice (Case 3) for the following
reasons:
• The emissions inspection requires “CMPLT” of the SRT only with OK self-diagnosis results. L
• When, during SRT driving pattern, 1st trip DTC (NG) is detected prior to “CMPLT” of SRT, the self-diagnosis
memory must be erased from ECM after repair.
• If the 1st trip DTC is erased, all the SRT will indicate “INCMP”. M
NOTE:
N
O

ECM
PBIB2320E

WITH CONSULT-III
For items whose SRT codes are set, a “CMPLT” is displayed on the CONSULT-III screen; for items whose
SRT codes are not set, “INCMP” is displayed.
NOTE:
WITH GST
NO TOOLS
A SRT code itself can no be displayed while only SRT status can be.
• When all SRT codes are set, MIL illuminates continuously.

ECM
• When any SRT codes are not set, MIL will flash periodically for 10 seconds.
A
EC
PBIB2317E F
How to Set SRT Code
diagnosis may require a long period of actual driving under various conditions. G
WITH CONSULT-III
on "SRT Item". H
WITHOUT CONSULT-III
The most efficient driving pattern in which SRT codes can be properly set is explained below. The driving pat-
tern should be performed one or more times to set all SRT codes.
I

ECM
Driving Pattern
PBIB3622E
habits, etc.
est.
zone A.

ECM
• Sea level
• Flat road A
EC
Pattern 1:
Pattern 2:
Pattern 3:
• Replace the accelerator pedal during decelerating vehicle speed F
from 90km/h (56MPH) to 0km/h (0MPH).
Pattern 4:
state driving. G
over again.
PBIB2244E

Suggested Upshift Speeds for M/T Models

L
[less than 1,219 m (4,000 ft)]:
[over 1,219 m (4,000 ft)]:
Gear change ACCEL shift point km/h (MPH) CRUISE shift point km/h (MPH) km/h (MPH)
M
1st to 2nd 21 (13) 13 (8) 24 (15)
2nd to 3rd 37 (23) 26 (16) 40 (25)
3rd to 4th 48 (30) 40 (25) 64 (40) N
4th to 5th 60 (37) 48 (30) 72 (45)
6th 68 (42) 53 (33) 80 (50)
Suggested Maximum Speed in Each Gear O
Do not exceed the maximum suggested speed (shown below) in any gear. For level road driving, use the high-
est gear suggested for that speed. Always observe posted speed limits and drive according to the road condi- P
tions to ensure sage operation. Do not over-rev the engine when shifting to a lower gear as it may cause
Gear km/h (MPH)

1st 56 (35)
2nd 96 (60)

ECM
Gear km/h (MPH)
3rd 136 (85)
4th —
5th —
6th —
TEST VALUE AND TEST LIMIT

ECM. (e.g., if bank 2 is not applied on this vehicle, only the items of bank 1 are displayed)
Test value and

Test limit
OBD- (GST display)
MID Unit and
TID Scaling
ID
P0131 83H 0BH
for test cycle
P0131 84H 0BH
for test cycle
P0130 85H 0BH
for test cycle
P0130 86H 0BH
for test cycle

01H P0133 87H 04H
P0133 88H 04H
(Rich to Lean)
P0130 8BH 0BH
age
HO2S
Response gain at the limited fre-
P0133 8CH 83H
quency
P0138 07H 0CH
for test cycle
02H for test cycle
(Bank 1)
P0139 81H 0CH
age
P0143 07H 0CH
for test cycle
03H for test cycle
(Bank 1)
P0145 81H 0CH
age

ECM
Test value and
Test limit A
OBD- (GST display)
MID Unit and
TID Scaling EC
ID
P0151 83H 0BH
for test cycle
C
P0151 84H 0BH
for test cycle
Minimum sensor output voltage D
P0150 85H 0BH
for test cycle
P0150 86H 0BH
for test cycle
E
05H P0153 87H 04H
P0153 88H 04H
(Rich to Lean)
F
G
P0150 8BH 0BH
age
HO2S
Response gain at the limited fre- H
P0153 8CH 83H
quency
P0158 07H 0CH
for test cycle
I
06H for test cycle
(Bank 2)
P0158 80H 0CH Sensor output voltage J
P0159 81H 0CH
age
Minimum sensor output voltage K
P0163 07H 0CH
for test cycle
07H for test cycle
(Bank2) L
P0165 81H 0CH
age M
Switching time lag engine exhaust
P0420 82H 01H
index value N
(Bank1) P2423 83H 0CH
put voltage
P2423 84H 84H

O2 storage index in HC trap cata- O
CATA- lyst
Switching time lag engine exhaust P
P0430 82H 01H
index value
(Bank2) P2424 83H 0CH
put voltage
O2 storage index in HC trap cata-
P2424 84H 84H
lyst

ECM
Test value and
Test limit
OBD- (GST display)
MID Unit and
TID Scaling
ID
P0400 80H 96H
change rate (short term)
P0400 81H 96H
change rate (long term)
EGR Low Flow Faults: Difference be-
31H EGR function
SYSTEM P0400 82H 96H tween max EGR temp and EGR
temp under idling condition
High Flow Faults: EGR temp in-
P1402 84H 96H
crease rate
EVAP control system leak
39H P0455 80H 0CH put voltage before and after pull
(Cap Off)
down
EVAP control system leak Leak area index (for more than
3BH P0442 80H 05H
(Small leak) 0.04inch)
EVAP Leak area index (for more than
P0456 80H 05H
SYSTEM EVAP control system leak 0.02inch)
3CH
(Very small leak) Maximum internal pressure of
P0456 81H FDH
EVAP system during monitoring
3DH Purge flow system P0441 83H 0CH put voltage before and after vent
control value close
A/F sensor 1 heater Low Input:P0031 Converted value of Heater electric
41H 81H 0BH
42H 80H 0CH
O2 SEN- 43H P0043 80H 0CH
SOR
HEATER A/F sensor 1 heater Low Input:P0051 Converted value of Heater electric
45H 81H 0BH
46H 80H 0CH
47H P0063 80H 0CH
P0411 80H 01H
Incorrect Flow Detected
81H 01H
Bank2: P0492 Insufficient Flow
P2445 82H 01H
Pump Stuck Off
SEC-
High Airflow
ARY AIR
84H 01H
Bank2: P2442 Switching Valve Stuck Open
P2440 85H 01H
Switching Valve Stuck Open
P2444 86H 01H
Pump Stuck On

ECM
Test value and
Test limit A
OBD- (GST display)
MID Unit and
TID Scaling EC
ID
P0171 or P0172 80H 2FH Long term fuel trim
81H The number of lambda control C
(Bank 1) P0171 or P0172 81H 24H
FUEL clamped
82H The number of lambda control D
(Bank 2) P0174 or P0175 81H 24H
clamped
P0301 80H 24H
tion of the first cylinder E
Misfiring counter at
P0302 81H 24H 1000revolution of the second cyl-
inder
F
P0303 82H 24H
tion of the third cylinder
P0304 83H 24H G
tion of the fourth cylinder
P0305 84H 24H
tion of the fifth cylinder
H
P0306 85H 24H
tion of the sixth cylinder
P0307 86H 24H
tion of the seventh cylinder
I

P0308 87H 24H
tion of the eighth cylinder
J
P0300 88H 24H
tion of the multiple cylinders
P0301 89H 24H K
MISFIRE A1H Multiple Cylinder Misfire of the first cylinder
P0302 8AH 24H
of the second cylinder
L
P0303 8BH 24H
of the third cylinder
P0304 8CH 24H M
of the fourth cylinder
P0305 8DH 24H
of the fifth cylinder
Misfiring counter at 200 revolution N
P0306 8EH 24H
of the sixth cylinder
P0307 8FH 24H
of the seventh cylinder O
P0308 90H 24H
of the eighth cylinder
Misfiring counter at 1000 revolu- P
P0300 91H 24H
tion of the single cylinder
P0300 92H 24H
of the single cylinder
P0300 93H 24H
of the multiple cylinders

ECM
Test value and
Test limit
OBD- (GST display)
MID Unit and
TID Scaling
ID
P0301 0CH 24H
ing cycles
P0302 0CH 24H
ing cycles
P0303 0CH 24H
ing cycles
P0304 0CH 24H
ing cycles
MISFIRE
P0305 0CH 24H
ing cycles
P0306 0CH 24H
ing cycles
P0307 0CH 24H
ing cycles
P0308 0CH 24H
ing cycles

How to Erase DTC and 1st Trip DTC
With CONSULT-III
NOTE:
• If the ignition switch stays ON after rpair work, always turn ignition OFF once. Wait at least 10 seconds and
then turn it ON (engine stopped) again.

ECM
4. Touch “ERASE”. (DTC in ECM will be erased.) A
With GST
NOTE:
• If the ignition switch stays ON after repair work, always turn ignition switch OFF once. Wait at least EC
1. Erase DTC in TCM. Refer to TM-148, "OBD-II Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)". (The DTC in TCM will be C
erased)
No Tools
NOTE: D
• If the ignition switch stays ON after repair work, always turn ignition switch OFF once.
Wait at least 10 seconds and then turn it ON (engine stopped) again.
• If the DTC is not for A/T related items (see EC-915, "DTC Index"), skip step 1. E
1. Erase DTC in ECM. Refer to HOW TO ERASE DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE II (SELF-DIAGNOSTIC
RESULTS).
2. Change the diagnostic test mode from Mode II to Mode I by depressing the accelerator pedal.
• If the battery is disconnected, the emission-related diagnostic information will be lost within 24 F
hours.
- Diagnostic trouble codes G
- Freeze frame data
- 1st trip freeze frame data H
- Test values
Actual work procedures are explained using a DTC as an example. Be careful so that not only the DTC, but all
of the data listed above, are cleared from the ECM memory during work procedures. I

< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [VQ40DE]
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
Symptom Matrix Chart INFOID:0000000004054127
SYSTEM — BASIC ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
SYMPTOM




Reference
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
page
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
IDLING VIBRATION
ENGINE STALL

Fuel Fuel pump circuit 1 1 2 3 2 2 2 3 2 EC-858
Fuel pressure regulator system 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 EC-943
Fuel injector circuit 1 1 2 3 2 2 2 2 EC-854
Evaporative emission system 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 EC-495
Air Positive crankcase ventilation sys-
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 1 EC-872
tem 3 3
Incorrect idle speed adjustment 1 1 1 1 1 EC-470
EC-813,
Electric throttle control actuator 1 1 2 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2
EC-819
Ignition Incorrect ignition timing adjustment 3 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 EC-470
Ignition circuit 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 EC-862
Power supply and ground circuit 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 EC-542
EC-561,
Mass air flow sensor circuit 2
EC-567
1
EC-578,
Engine coolant temperature sensor circuit 3 3
EC-586
EC-594
3 EC-598
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 EC-602
EC-606
EC-836
EC-582,
EC-649,
Throttle position sensor circuit EC-766,
EC-768,
2 2 EC-828
EC-542,
EC-821,
Accelerator pedal position sensor circuit 3 2 1
EC-824,
EC-832

SYMPTOM
A

EC



C
Reference
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
page
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
IDLING VIBRATION
D
ENGINE STALL
E

F
Knock sensor circuit 2 3 EC-660
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) circuit 2 2 EC-663
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) circuit 3 2 EC-667 G
Vehicle speed signal circuit 2 3 3 3 EC-738
Power steering pressure sensor circuit 2 3 3 EC-744
EC-747,
H
ECM 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
EC-749
Intake valve timing control solenoid valve cir-
3 2 1 3 2 2 3 3 EC-558 I
cuit
PNP switch circuit 3 3 3 3 3 EC-755
VIAS control solenoid valve circuit 1 EC-804
J
Refrigerant pressure sensor circuit 2 3 3 4 EC-874
Electrical load signal circuit 3 EC-852
Air conditioner circuit 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2

HAC-60, K
HAC-128
BRC-9,
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) 4
BRC-155 L
(continued on next page)
SYSTEM — ENGINE MECHANICAL & OTHER M

SYMPTOM




Reference
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
page
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
IDLING VIBRATION
ENGINE STALL
Fuel Fuel tank FL-6
5
Fuel piping 5 5 5 5 5 5 FL-5
Vapor lock —
5
Valve deposit —
Poor fuel (Heavy weight gasoline, 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
—
Low octane)
Air Air duct EM-138
Air cleaner EM-138
Air leakage from air duct
(Mass air flow sensor — electric EM-138
5 5 5 5 5 5
throttle control actuator)
5 5 5 5
Electric throttle control actuator EM-139
Air leakage from intake manifold/ EM-139,
Collector/Gasket EM-142
Cranking Battery PG-4
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Generator circuit CHG-4
Starter circuit 3 1 STR-5
Signal plate 6 EM-231
PNP switch 4 TM-163
Engine Cylinder head
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 EM-211
Cylinder head gasket 4 3
Cylinder block
Piston 4
Piston ring
6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 EM-231
Connecting rod
Bearing
Crankshaft
Valve Timing chain EM-174
mecha-
Camshaft EM-194
nism
Intake valve timing control 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 EM-205
Intake valve
3 EM-211
Exhaust valve

SYMPTOM
A

EC



C
Reference
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
page
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
IDLING VIBRATION
D
ENGINE STALL
E

F
Exhaust Exhaust manifold/Tube/Muffler/
Gasket EM-144,
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
EX-4
Three way catalyst
G
Lubrica- EM-148,
Oil pan/Oil strainer/Oil pump/Oil
tion LU-25, LU-
filter/Oil gallery/Oil cooler 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 27,
H
Oil level (Low)/Filthy oil LU-21
Cooling Radiator/Hose/Radiator filler cap CO-39
Thermostat 5 CO-55 I
Water pump CO-50
Water gallery 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 4 5 CO-57
Cooling fan 5 CO-47 J
Coolant level (Low)/Contaminat-
5 CO-39
ed coolant
NVIS (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System —
K
1 1 SEC-3
NATS)
L

Fuel Cut Control (at No Load and High Engine Speed) INFOID:0000000004054128

Park/neutral position (PNP) switch Neutral position
Fuel cut control Fuel injector
Engine speed
Wheel sensor Vehicle speed*
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
If the engine speed is above 1,800 rpm under no load (for example, the shift position is neutral and engine
speed is over 1,800 rpm) fuel will be cut off after some time. The exact time when the fuel is cut off varies
based on engine speed.
Fuel cut will be operated until the engine speed reaches 1,500 rpm, then fuel cut will be cancelled.
NOTE:
This function is different from deceleration control listed under EC-486, "System Description".

PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [VQ40DE]
PRECAUTION A
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT EC
PRE-TENSIONER" INFOID:0000000004054129
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along C
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. D
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Man-
ual.
WARNING: E
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
F
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see the SRS section.
• Never use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Ser- G
vice Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness
connectors.
Precaution for Procedure without Cowl Top Cover INFOID:0000000004054130
H
When performing the procedure after removing cowl top cover,

cover the lower end of windshield with urethane, etc. I
PIIB3706J
L
On Board Diagnosis (OBD) System of Engine and A/T INFOID:0000000004054131
The ECM has an on board diagnostic system. It will illuminate the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) to warn the
driver of a malfunction causing emission deterioration. M
CAUTION:
• Always turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the negative battery cable before any repair or
inspection work. The open/short circuit of related switches, sensors, solenoid valves, etc. will cause N
the MIL to illuminate.
• Always connect and lock the connectors securely after work. A loose (unlocked) connector will
cause the MIL to illuminate due to the open circuit. (Be sure the connector is free from water, grease,
dirt, bent terminals, etc.) O
• Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-lock-
ing type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to PG-71, "Description".
• Always route and secure the harnesses properly after work. The interference of the harness with a P
bracket, etc. may cause the MIL to illuminate due to the short circuit.
• Always connect rubber tubes properly after work. A misconnected or disconnected rubber tube may
cause the MIL to illuminate due to the malfunction of the EVAP system or fuel injection system, etc.
• Always erase the unnecessary malfunction information (repairs completed) from the ECM and TCM
(Transmission control module) before returning the vehicle to the customer.

PRECAUTIONS
Precaution INFOID:0000000004054132
• Always use a 12 volt battery as power source.

• Never attempt to disconnect battery cables while engine is
running.
• Before connecting or disconnecting the ECM harness con-
nector, turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect negative bat-
tery cable. Failure to do so may damage the ECM because
battery voltage is applied to ECM even if ignition switch is
turned OFF.
• Before removing parts, turn ignition switch OFF and then dis-
connect negative battery cable.
SEF289H
• Never disassemble ECM.

• If a battery cable is disconnected, the memory will return to the ECM value.
The ECM will now start to self-control at its initial value. Engine operation can vary slightly when the
terminal is disconnected. However, this is not an indication of a malfunction. Never replace parts
because of a slight variation.
• If the battery is disconnected, the following emission-related diagnostic information will be lost
within 24 hours.
- Freeze frame data
- Test values
- <Frexible Fuel Vehicle>
Presumed ethanol mixture ratio
• When connecting ECM harness connector, fasten it securely
with levers as far as they will go as shown in the figure.
PBIB1512E
• When connecting or disconnecting pin connectors into or

from ECM, take care not to damage pin terminals (bend or
break).
Check that there are not any bends or breaks on ECM pin ter-
minal, when connecting pin connectors.
• Securely connect ECM harness connectors.
A poor connection can cause an extremely high (surge) volt-
age to develop in coil and condenser, thus resulting in dam-
age to ICs.
• Keep engine control system harness at least 10 cm (4 in) away
from adjacent harness, to prevent engine control system mal-
PBIB0090E
functions due to receiving external noise, degraded operation
of ICs, etc.
• Keep engine control system parts and harness dry.

PRECAUTIONS
• Before replacing ECM, perform “ECM Terminals and Refer-
ence Value” inspection and check ECM functions properly. A
Refer to EC-884, "ECM Terminal and Reference Value".
• Handle mass air flow sensor carefully to avoid damage.
• Never clean mass air flow sensor with any type of detergent.
EC
• Never disassemble electric throttle control actuator.
• Even a slight leak in the air intake system can cause serious
incidents.
• Never shock or jar the camshaft position sensor (PHASE), C
crankshaft position sensor (POS).
MEF040D
• After performing each TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS, perform DTC D
Confirmation Procedure or Overall Function Check.
The DTC should not be displayed in the DTC Confirmation
Procedure if the repair is completed. The Overall Function
E
Check should be a good result if the repair is completed.
SEF217U G
• When measuring ECM signals with a circuit tester, never

allow the two tester probes to contact. H
Accidental contact of probes will cause a short circuit and
damage the ECM power transistor.
• Never use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/out-
I
put voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's tran-
sistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the
ground.
J
N
SEF348N
• B1 indicates the bank 1, B2 indicates the bank 2 as shown in O

the figure.
SEC893C

PRECAUTIONS
• Never operate fuel pump when there is no fuel in lines.
• Tighten fuel hose clamps to the specified torque.
BBIA0529E
• Never depress accelerator pedal when starting.

• Immediately after starting, never rev up engine unnecessarily.
• Never rev up engine just prior to shutdown.
SEF709Y
• When installing C.B. ham radio or a mobile phone, always

observe the following as it may adversely affect electronic
control systems depending on installation location.
- Keep the antenna as far as possible from the electronic con-
trol units.
- Keep the antenna feeder line more than 20 cm (8 in) away
from the harness of electronic controls.
Never let them run parallel for a long distance.
- Adjust the antenna and feeder line so that the standing-wave
radio can be kept smaller.
SEF708Y
- Always ground the radio to vehicle body.
PBIB1512E

PREPARATION
< PREPARATION > [VQ40DE]
PREPARATION A
PREPARATION
Special Service Tool INFOID:0000000004054133
EC
The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.) Description C
Tool name
EG17650301 Adapts radiator cap tester to radiator cap and radi-
(J-33984-A) ator filler neck D
Radiator cap tester a: 28 (1.10) dia.
adapter b: 31.4 (1.236) dia.
c: 41.3 (1.626) dia.
Unit: mm (in) E
S-NT564
(J-44321) Checks fuel pressure F

Fuel pressure gauge
kit
G
LEC642
H
(J-44321-6) Connects fuel pressure gauge to quick connector

Fuel pressure adapter type fuel lines.
I
LBIA0376E
(J-45488) Removes fuel tube quick connectors in engine

K
Quick connector re- room
lease
PBIC0198E
M

PREPARATION
< PREPARATION > [VQ40DE]
Commercial Service Tool INFOID:0000000004054134
Tool name
Description
(Kent-Moore No.)
Leak detector Locats the EVAP leak
i.e.: (J-41416)
S-NT703
EVAP service port Applys positive pressure through EVAP service

adapter port
i.e.: (J-41413-OBD)
S-NT704
Fuel filler cap adapter Checks fuel tank vacuum relief valve opening
i.e.: (MLR-8382) pressure
S-NT815
Socket wrench Removes and installs engine coolant temperature

sensor
S-NT705
Oxygen sensor thread Reconditions the exhaust system threads before

cleaner installing a new oxygen sensor. Use with anti-
i.e.: (J-43897-18) seize lubricant shown below.
(J-43897-12) a: 18 mm diameter with pitch 1.5 mm for Zirco-
nia Oxygen Sensor
b: 12 mm diameter with pitch 1.25 mm for Tita-
nia Oxygen Sensor
AEM488
Anti-seize lubricant Lubricates oxygen sensor thread cleaning tool

i.e.: (PermatexTM when reconditioning exhaust system threads.
133AR or equivalent
meeting MIL specifica-
tion MIL-A-907)
S-NT779

FUEL PRESSURE
< ON-VEHICLE MAINTENANCE > [VQ40DE]
ON-VEHICLE MAINTENANCE A
FUEL PRESSURE
Fuel Pressure Check INFOID:0000000004054135
EC
FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE

With CONSULT-III C
2. Perform “FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-III.
D
3. Start engine.
4. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel pressure.
5. Turn ignition switch OFF. E
Without CONSULT-III
1. Remove fuel pump fuse (No.48) located in IPDM E/R.
F
2. Start engine.
pressure.
G
5. Reinstall fuel pump fuse after servicing fuel system.
H
BBIA0534E
I
FUEL PRESSURE CHECK
CAUTION:
Be careful not to scratch or get the fuel hose connection area dirty when servicing, so that the quick J
connector o-ring maintains sealability.
NOTE:
• Prepare pans or saucers under the disconnected fuel line because the fuel may spill out. The fuel
pressure cannot be completely released because D40 models do not have fuel return system. K
• Use Fuel Pressure Gauge Kit J-44321 and Fuel Pressure Adapter J-44321-6 to check fuel pressure.
2. Remove fuel hose using Quick Connector Release J-45488. L
• Keep fuel hose connections clean. M
3. Install Fuel Pressure Adapter J-44321-6 and Fuel Pressure
Gauge (from kit J-44321) as shown in figure.
• Never distort or bend fuel rail tube when installing fuel pres- N
sure gauge adapter.
damage and abnormality.
4. Turn ignition switch ON (reactivate fuel pump), and check for O
fuel leakage.
P
6. Read the indication of fuel pressure gauge.
• During fuel pressure check, check for fuel leakage from fuel BBIA0535E
connection every 3 minutes.


FUEL PRESSURE
• Fuel hoses and fuel tubes for clogging
• Fuel pump
9. Before disconnecting Fuel Pressure Gauge and Fuel Pressure Adapter J-44321-6, release fuel pressure
to zero. Refer to "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE".

EVAP LEAK CHECK
EVAP LEAK CHECK
A
How to Detect Fuel Vapor Leakage INFOID:0000000004054136
CAUTION: EC
• Never exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2, 0.6 psi) of pressure in EVAP system.
NOTE:
C
• Never start engine.
• Improper installation of EVAP service port adapter to the EVAP service port may cause a leak.
WITH CONSULT-III D
1. Attach the EVAP service port adapter securely to the EVAP service port.
2. Also attach the pressure pump and hose to the EVAP service port adapter.
4. Select the “EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE” of “WORK SUPPORT MODE” with CONSULT-III. E
5. Touch “START”. A bar graph (Pressure indicating display) will appear on the screen.
6. Apply positive pressure to the EVAP system until the pressure indicator reaches the middle of the bar
graph. F
7. Remove EVAP service port adapter and hose with pressure pump.
8. Locate the leak using a leak detector. Refer to EC-495,
"Description".
G
SEF200U
WITHOUT CONSULT-III J
1. Attach the EVAP service port adapter securely to the EVAP ser-
vice port.
2. Also attach the pressure pump with pressure gauge to the EVAP K
service port adapter.
M
SEF462UA
3. Apply battery voltage between the terminals of EVAP canister N

vent control valve (3) to make a closed EVAP system.
- Fuel filler pipe (top of frame view) (1)
- EVAP control system pressure sensor (2) O
- EVAP ccanister (4)
- Drain filter (5)
- : Vehicle front
P
4. To locate the leak, deliver positive pressure to the EVAP system
until pressure gauge points reach 1.38 to 2.76 kPa (0.014 to
0.028 kg/cm2, 0.2 to 0.4 psi).
5. Remove EVAP service port adapter and hose with pressure AWBIA0134ZZ
pump.
6. Locate the leak using a leak detector. Refer to EC-495, "Description".

EVAP CANISTER
< ON-VEHICLE REPAIR > [VQ40DE]
ON-VEHICLE REPAIR
EVAP CANISTER
EVAP CANISTER
Check EVAP canister as follows:
1. Block port B.
2. Blow air into port A and check that it flows freely out of port C.
3. Release blocked port B.
4. Apply vacuum pressure to port B and check that vacuum pres-
sure exists at the ports A and C.
5. Block port A and B.
6. Apply pressure to port C and check that there is no leakage.
PBIB2568E
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000004054138
EVAP CANISTER
Tighten EVAP canister as shown in the figure.
BBIA0566E

1. Turn EVAP canister vent control valve counterclockwise.
2. Remove the EVAP canister vent control valve.
BBIA0567E

< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [VQ40DE]
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) A

Fuel Pressure INFOID:0000000004054139
EC
Fuel pressure at idling kPa (kg/cm2, psi) Approximately 350 (3.57, 51)
C
Idle Speed and Ignition Timing INFOID:0000000004054140
D
No load* [in P or N position (A/T),
Target idle speed 625 ± 50 rpm
Neutral position (M/T)]
In P or N position (A/T), Neutral posi- E
Air conditioner: ON 625 rpm or more
tion (M/T)
In P or N position (A/T), Neutral posi-
Ignition timing 15 ± 5° BTDC
tion (M/T)
F
*: Under the following conditions:
• Electric load: OFF (Lights, heater fan & rear window defogger)
G
• Steering wheel: Kept in straight-ahead position
Calculated Load Value INFOID:0000000004054141
Condition Calculated load value% (Using CONSULT-III or GST)

At idle 5 - 35 I
At 2,500 rpm 5 - 35
Mass Air Flow Sensor INFOID:0000000004054142

J
Supply voltage Battery voltage (11 - 14V)

K
Output voltage at idle 0.9 - 1.2*V
2.0 - 6.0 g·m/sec at idle*
Mass air flow (Using CONSULT-III or GST)
7.0 - 20.0 g·m/sec at 2,500 rpm*
L
*: Engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature and running under no load.
Intake Air Temperature Sensor INFOID:0000000004054143

M

25 (77) 1.800 - 2.200 N
Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor INFOID:0000000004054144
O
20 (68) 2.1 - 2.9
P
50 (122) 0.68 - 1.00
90 (194) 0.236 - 0.260
Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor 1 Heater INFOID:0000000004054145

< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [VQ40DE]
Heated Oxygen sensor 2 Heater INFOID:0000000004054146
Crankshaft Position Sensor (POS) INFOID:0000000004054147

Camshaft Position Sensor (PHASE) INFOID:0000000004054148

Throttle Control Motor INFOID:0000000004054149
Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)] Approximately 1 - 15Ω
Fuel Injector INFOID:0000000004054150
Resistance [at 10 - 60°C (50 - 140°F)] 11.1 - 14.5Ω
Fuel Pump INFOID:0000000004054151

Engine Control System: Section

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Engine Control System: Section

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Engine Control System: Section

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ENGINE

ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM

AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE U0140 CAN COMM CIRCUIT ........................... 93 O

Revision: October 2008 EC-1 2009 Frontier

Revision: October 2008 EC-2 2009 Frontier

Revision: October 2008 EC-4 2009 Frontier

P1226 TP SENSOR .......................................... 301 P1715 INPUT SPEED SENSOR (TURBINE

P2A00 A/F SENSOR 1 .................................... 366 SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ........................... 445

FUEL INJECTOR ............................................. 378 PREPARATION ......................................... 454

Revision: October 2008 EC-6 2009 Frontier

Revision: October 2008 EC-7 2009 Frontier

Revision: October 2008 EC-9 2009 Frontier

P1226 TP SENSOR .......................................... 768 P1715 INPUT SPEED SENSOR (TURBINE C

ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL ......................... 852 PRECAUTIONS ................................................ 937

FUEL PUMP ..................................................... 858 PREPARATION ......................................... 941

Revision: October 2008 EC-12 2009 Frontier

Revision: October 2008 EC-13 2009 Frontier

It is much more difficult to diagnose an incident that occurs intermit-

Revision: October 2008 EC-14 2009 Frontier

Revision: October 2008 EC-15 2009 Frontier

Revision: October 2008 EC-16 2009 Frontier

7.PERFORM DATA MONITOR (SPEC) MODE A

Inspect according to Diagnostic Procedure of the system.

Revision: October 2008 EC-17 2009 Frontier

Revision: October 2008 EC-18 2009 Frontier

5. Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no J

Revision: October 2008 EC-19 2009 Frontier

M/T: 625 ± 50 rpm (in Neutral position)

M/T: 625 ± 50 rpm (in Neutral position)

Revision: October 2008 EC-20 2009 Frontier

M/T: 625 ± 50 rpm (in Neutral position) A

M/T: 625 ± 50 rpm (in Neutral position) C

M/T: 15 ± 5° BTDC (in Neutral position)

M/T: 625 ± 50 rpm (in Neutral position)

M/T: 625 ± 50 rpm (in Neutral position)

M/T: 15 ± 5° BTDC (in Neutral position)

16.CHECK TIMING CHAIN INSTALLATION

Did you replace ECM, referring this Basic Inspection procedure?

Procedure After Replacing ECM INFOID:0000000004053268

Revision: October 2008 EC-23 2009 Frontier

Revision: October 2008 EC-24 2009 Frontier

Revision: October 2008 EC-25 2009 Frontier

Revision: October 2008 EC-26 2009 Frontier

Revision: October 2008 EC-27 2009 Frontier

Revision: October 2008 EC-28 2009 Frontier

Revision: October 2008 EC-29 2009 Frontier

Revision: October 2008 EC-30 2009 Frontier

Revision: October 2008 EC-31 2009 Frontier

EVAP canister vent control valve EVAP control system pressure

Revision: October 2008 EC-32 2009 Frontier

Revision: October 2008 EC-33 2009 Frontier

INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART

Sensor Input Signal to ECM ECM function Actuator

Heated oxygen sensor 2*1 Density of oxygen in exhaust gas

Combination meter Vehicle speed*2

Revision: October 2008 EC-34 2009 Frontier

Revision: October 2008 EC-35 2009 Frontier

Two types of systems are used.

Revision: October 2008 EC-36 2009 Frontier